Patent Publication Number: US-2009228282-A1

Title: Gaming Machine and Gaming System with Interactive Feature, Playing Method of Gaming Machine, and Control Method of Gaming System

Description:
CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS 
     This application claims priority to co-pending U.S. provisional patent application Ser. Nos. 61/034,733, 61/034,749, 61/034,759 and 61/034,769, filed on Mar. 7, 2008, and which are incorporated by reference herein for all purposes. 
    
    
     BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 
     1. Field of the Invention 
     The present invention relates to a gaming machine and a gaming system including an engine for interactively advancing a game by a conversation with a player using sounds and texts as media, a playing method of the gaming machine, and a control method of the gaming system. 
     2. Description of Related Art 
     US Patent Application Publication No. 2007/0094004, US Patent Application Publication No. 2007/0094005, US Patent Application Publication No. 2007/0094007, and US Patent Application Publication No. 2007/0094008 disclose conversation controllers. The conversation controllers disclosed in these specifications are configured to recognize contents of topics of a speaker which are inputted to a microphone or the like, and to output, from the speaker or the like, response voices corresponding to the recognized contents of the topics. 
     Meanwhile, U.S. Pat. No. 5,820,459, U.S. Pat. No. 6,695,697, US Patent Application Publication No. 2003/0069073, European Patent Application Publication No. 1192975, U.S. Pat. No. 6,254,483, U.S. Pat. No. 5,611,730, U.S. Pat. No. 5,639,088, U.S. Pat. No. 6,257,981, U.S. Pat. No. 6,234,896, U.S. Pat. No. 6,001,016, U.S. Pat. No. 6,273,820, U.S. Pat. No. 6,224,482, U.S. Pat. No. 4,669,731, U.S. Pat. No. 6,244,957, U.S. Pat. No. 5,910,048, U.S. Pat. No. 5,695,402, U.S. Pat. No. 6,003,013, U.S. Pat. No. 4,283,709, European Patent Application Publication No. 0631798, German Patent Application Publication No. 4137010, GB No. 2326830A, German Patent Application Publication No. 3712841, U.S. Pat. No. 4,964,638, U.S. Pat. No. 6,089,980, U.S. Pat. No. 5,280,909, U.S. Pat. No. 5,702,303, U.S. Pat. No. 6,270,409, U.S. Pat. No. 5,770,533 U.S. Pat. No. 5,836,817, U.S. Pat. No. 6,932,704, U.S. Pat. No. 6,932,707, U.S. Pat. No. 4,837,728, European Patent Application Publication No. 1302914, U.S. Pat. No. 4,624,459, U.S. Pat. No. 5,564,700, International Patent Application WO 03/083795, German Patent Application Publication No. 3242890, European Patent Application Publication No. 0840264, German Patent Application Publication No. 10049444, International Patent Application WO 04/095383, European Patent Application Publication No. 1544811, U.S. Pat. No. 5,890,963, European Patent Application Publication No. 1477947, and European Patent Application Publication No. 1351180 disclose slot machines which are a type of gaming machines. The gaming machines such as the slot machines disclosed in these specifications are configured to allow players to make bets by use of coins, credits or the like in order to play games offered by those gaming machines. Accordingly, in terms of these gaming machines, it is essential to exchange information between players and the gaming machines. 
     United States patent application publication 2005/0059474, 2005/0282618 or 2005/0218590 discloses a gaming machine in which a player can participate in a game displayed on a communal display by operating a gaming terminal connected to the communal display via a network. 
     In such a gaming machine, the player operating the gaming terminal is accepted to participate in a game in synchronized timing with game procedures displayed on the communal display. 
     SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION 
     An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a playing method thereof, which are capable of offering an advanced service to a player. 
     Another object of the present invention is to provide a gaming system and a control method thereof, which can provide a new entertaining feature by making it easier for players using various languages to participate in a game. 
     A first aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine comprising: an output unit configured to output a conversation sentence to a player; an input unit configured to enable the player to input a response sentence to the conversation sentence outputted from the output unit; a conversation engine configured to create data on the conversation sentence to be outputted from the output unit and to analyze data on the response sentence inputted to the input unit; a display configured to display a menu screen showing a menu of an item orderable by the player through the gaming machine; a memory configured to store menu data indicating a content of the menu in each of a plurality of language types usable for play on the gaming machine; and a controller configured to (a) cause the conversation engine to create data on the conversation sentence to inquire a language type to be used for play on the gaming machine, (b) judge whether or not the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine is designated in the response sentence of the data analyzed by the conversation engine, (c) upon the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine being designated in the response sentence of the data analyzed by the conversation engine, then judge whether or not the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine includes a request to display the menu on the display, (d) upon the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine including the request to display the menu on the display, then display the menu screen showing the menu of the designated language type on the display by using the menu data of the designated language type, and (e) output order data to a server at an order destination connected through a communication line, the order data representing, in a predetermined language type, a content of an order of the item expressed in the designated language type, the order having been placed by the player while the menu screen in the designated language type is displayed on the display. 
     A second aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine comprising: an output unit configured to output a conversation sentence to a player; an input unit configured to enable the player to input a response sentence to the conversation sentence outputted from the output unit; a conversation engine configured to create data on the conversation sentence to be outputted from the output unit and to analyze data on the response sentence inputted to the input unit; a display configured to display a menu screen showing a menu of an item orderable by the player through the gaming machine; a memory configured to store menu data indicating a content of the menu in each of a plurality of language types usable for play on the gaming machine; and a controller configured to (a) cause the conversation engine to create data on the conversation sentence to inquire a language type to be used for play on the gaming machine; (b) judge whether or not the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine is designated in the response sentence of the data analyzed by the conversation engine, (c) upon the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine being designated in the response sentence of the data analyzed by the conversation engine, then judge whether or not the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine includes a request to display the menu on the display, (d) upon the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine including the request to display the menu on the display, then display the menu screen showing the menu of the designated language type on the display by using the menu data of the designated language type, and (e) output order data to a server at an order destination connected through a communication line, the order data representing, in a predetermined language type, a content of an order of the item expressed in the designated language type, the order having been placed by the player through an operation of the menu screen in the designated language type. 
     A third aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine comprising: an output unit configured to output a conversation sentence to a player; an input unit configured to enable the player to input a response sentence to the conversation sentence outputted from the output unit; a conversation engine configured to create data on the conversation sentence to be outputted from the output unit and to analyze data on the response sentence inputted to the input unit; a first display configured to display a menu screen showing a menu of an item orderable by the player through the gaming machine; a memory configured to store menu data indicating a content of the menu in each of a plurality of language types usable for play on the gaming machine; and a controller configured to (a) cause the conversation engine to create data on the conversation sentence to inquire a language type to be used for play on the gaming machine, (b) judge whether or not the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine is designated in the response sentence of the data analyzed by the conversation engine, (c) upon the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine being designated in the response sentence of the data analyzed by the conversation engine, then judge whether or not the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine includes a request to display the menu on the first display, (d) upon the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine including the request to display the menu on the first display, then display the menu screen showing the menu of the designated language type on the first display by using the menu data of the designated language type, and (e) display a content of an order of the item expressed in the designated language type on a second display at an order destination connected through a communication line by using a predetermined language type, the order having been placed by the player through an operation of the menu screen in the designated language type. 
     A fourth aspect of the present invention is a method of playing a gaming machine comprising: (a) causing a conversation engine to create data on a conversation sentence to inquire a language type to be used for play on the gaming machine; (b) outputting the conversation sentence to inquire the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine from an output unit by using the data created by the conversation engine; (c) enabling a player to input, to an input unit, a response sentence to designate the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine; (d) causing the conversation engine to analyze data on the response sentence having been inputted to the input unit by the player and outputted from the output unit to respond the conversation sentence; (e) judging whether or not the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine is designated in the response sentence of the data analyzed by the conversation engine; (f) upon the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine being designated in the response sentence of the data analyzed by the conversation engine, then judging whether or not the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine includes a request to display a menu of an item orderable by the player through the gaming machine on the display; (g) upon the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine including the request to display the menu on the display, then displaying a menu screen showing the menu of the designated language type on the display by using menu data indicating a content of the menu stored in a memory in each of a plurality of language types usable for play on the gaming machine; (h) enabling the player to order the item in the designated language while the menu screen in the designated language type is displayed on the display, and (i) outputting order data to a server at an order destination connected through a communication line, the order data representing, in a predetermined language type, a content of an order of the item expressed in the designated language type, the order having been placed by the player while the menu screen in the designated language type is displayed on the display. 
     A fifth aspect of the present invention is a method of playing a gaming machine comprising: (a) causing a conversation engine to create data on a conversation sentence to inquire about a language type to be used for play on the gaming machine; (b) outputting the conversation sentence to inquire the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine from an output unit by using the data created by the conversation engine; (c) enabling a player to input to an input unit a response sentence to designate the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine; (d) causing the conversation engine to analyze data on the response sentence having been inputted to the input unit by the player and outputted from the output unit to respond the conversation sentence; (e) judging whether or not the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine is designated in the response sentence of the data analyzed by the conversation engine; (c) upon the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine being designated in the response sentence of the data analyzed by the conversation engine, then judging whether or not the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine includes a request to display, on a first display, a menu of an item orderable by the player through the gaming machine; (g) upon the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine including the request to display the menu on a first display, then displaying a menu screen showing the menu of the designated language type on the first display by using menu data indicating a content of the menu stored in a memory in each of a plurality language types usable for play on the gaming machine; (h) enabling the player to order the item in the designated language through an operation on the menu screen in the designated language type, and (i) displaying a content of an order of the item expressed in the designated language type on a second display at an order destination connected through a communication line by using a predetermined language type, the order having been placed by the player through an operation of the menu screen in the designated language type. 
     A sixth aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine comprising: an output unit configured to output a conversation sentence to a player; an input unit configured to enable the player to input a response sentence to the conversation sentence outputted from the output unit; a conversation engine configured to create data on the conversation sentence to be outputted from the output unit and to analyze data on the response sentence inputted to the input unit; a memory configured to store menu data indicating a plurality of items orderable by the player through the gaming machine and classifications of the items in a hierarchical structure in each of a plurality of language types usable for play on the gaming machine; and a controller configured to: (a) cause the conversation engine to create data on a conversation sentence inquiring a language type to be used for play on the gaming machine; (b) upon the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine being designated in the response sentence having the data analyzed by the conversation engine, then judge whether or not the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine includes a request to order the item; (c) upon the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine including the request to order the item, specify the classification designated by the requested order of the item; (d) cause the conversation engine to create data on a conversation sentence presenting one or more classifications or items at a lower rank than the first specified classification by using the designated language type, by using the menu data of the designated language type; (e) upon the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine designating any of the classifications at the lower rank than the first specified classification, cause the conversation engine to create data on the conversation sentence presenting one or more classifications or items at a lower rank than the second specified classification by using the designated language type; and (f) upon the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine designating the item, output order data representing the designated item of the designated language type in a predetermined language type, to a server at an order destination connected through a communication line. 
     A seventh aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine comprising: an output unit configured to output a conversation sentence to a player; an input unit configured to enable the player to input a response sentence to the conversation sentence outputted from the output unit; a conversation engine configured to create data on the conversation sentence to be outputted from the output unit and to analyze data on the response sentence inputted to the input unit; a display configured to display a menu screen presenting a plurality of items orderable by the player through the gaming machine or one or more classifications of the items in a hierarchical structure and to accept an operation by the player; a memory configured to store menu data indicating the items and the classifications of the items in the hierarchical structure in each of a plurality of language types usable for play on the gaming machine; and a controller configured to: (a) cause the conversation engine to create data on a conversation sentence inquiring a language type to be used for play on the gaming machine; (b) upon the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine being designated in the response sentence having the data analyzed by the conversation engine, then judge whether or not the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine includes a request to order the item; (c) upon the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine including the request to order the item, specify the classification designated by the requested order of the item; (d) cause the display to display the menu screen presenting one or more classifications or items at a lower rank than the first specified classification by using the designated language type, by using the menu data of the designated language type; (e) upon any of the classifications at the lower rank than the first specified classification being designated by an operation on the menu screen in the designated language type by the player, cause the display to display the menu screen presenting one or more classifications or items at a lower rank than the second specified classification, by using the menu data of the designated language type; and (f) upon any of the items being designated by an operation on the menu screen in the designated language type by the player, output order data representing the designated item of the designated language type in a predetermined language type, to a server at an order destination connected through a communication line. 
     An eighth aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine comprising: an output unit configured to output a conversation sentence to a player; an input unit configured to enable the player to input a response sentence to the conversation sentence outputted from the output unit; a conversation engine configured to create data on the conversation sentence to be outputted from the output unit and to analyze data on the response sentence inputted to the input unit; a first display configured to display a menu screen presenting a plurality of items orderable by the player through the gaming machine or at least one classification of the items in a hierarchical structure and to accept an operation by the player; a memory configured to store menu data indicating the items and the classifications of the items in the hierarchical structure in each of a plurality of language types usable for play on the gaming machine; and a controller configured to: (a) cause the conversation engine to create data on a conversation sentence inquiring a language type to be used for play on the gaming machine; (b) upon the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine being designated in the response sentence having the data analyzed by the conversation engine, then judge whether or not the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine includes a request to order the item; (c) upon the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine including the request to order the item, specify the classification designated by the requested order of the item; (d) cause the first display to display the menu screen presenting one or more classifications or items at a lower rank than the first specified classification by using the designated language type, by using the menu data of the designated language type; (e) upon any of the classifications at the lower rank than the first specified classification being designated by an operation on the menu screen in the designated language type by the player, cause the first display to display the menu screen presenting one or more classifications or items at a lower rank than the second specified classification, by using the menu data of the designated language type; (f) upon any of the items being designated by an operation on the menu screen in the designated language by the player, cause a second display at an order destination connected through a communication line to display the designated item of the designated language type in a predetermined language type. 
     A ninth aspect of the present invention is a method of playing a gaming machine comprising: (a) causing a conversation engine to create data on a conversation sentence inquiring a language type to be used for play on the gaming machine; (b) outputting the conversation sentence inquiring the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine from an output unit by using the data created by the conversation engine; (c) enabling a player to input a response sentence designating a language type to be used for play on the gaming machine to an input unit; (d) causing the conversation engine to analyze data on the response sentence designating the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine, the response sentence being inputted to the input unit by the player; (e) judging whether or not the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine is designated in the response sentence having the data analyzed by the conversation engine; (f) upon the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine being designated in the response sentence having the data analyzed by the conversation engine, then judging whether or not the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine includes a request for an order of any of the items; (g) upon the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine including the request for the order of the item, specifying the classification designated by the requested order of the item; (h) causing the conversation engine to create data on a conversation sentence presenting one or more classifications or items at a lower rank than the first specified classification by using the designated language type, by using menu data indicating a content of a menu stored in a memory in each of a plurality of language types usable for play on the gaming machine; and (i) outputting the conversation sentence presenting the one or more classifications or items at the lower rank than the first specified classification by using the designated language type, from the output unit by using the data created by the conversation engine; (j) enabling the player to input to the input unit a response sentence designating any of the classifications or item at the lower rank than the first specified classification by using the designated language type; (k) causing the conversation engine to analyze data on the response sentence using the designated language type and being inputted to the input unit by the player; (l) upon any of the classifications at the lower rank than the first specified classification being specified in the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine, causing the conversation engine to create data on a conversation sentence presenting one or more classifications or items at a rank lower than the second specified classification by using the designated language type; (m) outputting the conversation sentence presenting the one or more classifications or items at the rank lower than the second specified classification by using the designated language type, from the output unit by using the data created by the conversation engine; and (n) upon any of the items being designated in the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine, outputting order data representing the designated item of the designated language type in a predetermined language type, to a server at an order destination connected through a communication line. 
     A tenth aspect of the present invention is a method of playing a gaming machine comprising: (a) causing a conversation engine to create data on a conversation sentence inquiring a language type to be used for play on the gaming machine; (b) outputting the conversation sentence inquiring the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine from an output unit by using the data created by the conversation engine; (c) enabling a player to input a response sentence designating a language type to be used for play on the gaming machine to an input unit; (d) causing the conversation engine to analyze data on the response sentence designating the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine inputted to the input unit by the player; (e) judging whether or not the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine is designated in the response sentence having the data analyzed by the conversation engine; (f) upon the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine being designated in the response sentence having the data analyzed by the conversation engine, then judging whether or not the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine includes a request for an order of any of the items; (g) upon the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine including the request for the order of the item, specifying the classification designated by the requested order of the item; (h) displaying on a display a menu screen presenting one or more classifications or items at a lower rank than the first specified classification by using the designated language type, by using menu data indicating the items and classifications of the items in a hierarchical structure, the menu data being stored in a memory in each of a plurality of language types usable for play on the gaming machine; (i) enabling the player to designate any of the classifications and the items at the lower rank than the first specified classification by an operation on the menu screen in the designated language type; (j) upon any of the classifications at the lower rank than the first specified classification being designated by the operation on the menu screen in the designated language type by the player, displaying on the display, by using the menu data, a menu screen presenting one or more classifications or items at a lower rank than the first specified classification by using the designated language type; and (k) upon any of the items being designated by the operation on the menu screen in the designated language type by the player, outputting order data representing the designated item of the designated language type in a predetermined language type, to a server at an order destination connected through a communication line. 
     An eleventh aspect of the present invention is a method of playing a gaming machine comprising: (a) causing a conversation engine to create data on a conversation sentence inquiring a language type to be used for play on the gaming machine; (b) outputting the conversation sentence inquiring the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine from an output unit by using the data created by the conversation engine; (c) enabling a player to input a response sentence designating a language type to be used for play on the gaming machine to an input unit; (d) causing the conversation engine to analyze data on the response sentence designating the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine inputted to the input unit by the player; (e) judging whether or not the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine is designated in the response sentence having the data analyzed by the conversation engine; (f) upon the language type to be used for play on the gaming machine being designated in the response sentence having the data analyzed by the conversation engine, then judging whether or not the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine includes a request for an order of any of the items; (g) upon the response sentence using the designated language type and having the data analyzed by the conversation engine including the request for the order of the item, specifying the classification designated by the requested order of the item; (h) displaying on a first display a menu screen presenting one or more classifications or items at a lower rank than the first specified classification by using the designated language type, by using menu data indicating the items and classifications of the items in a hierarchical structure, the menu data being stored in a memory in each of a plurality of language types usable for play on the gaming machine; (i) enabling the player to designate any of the classifications and the items at the lower rank than the first specified classification by an operation on the menu screen in the designated language type; (j) upon any of the classifications at the lower rank than the first specified classification being designated by the operation on the menu screen in the designated language type by the player, displaying on the first display, by using the menu data, a menu screen to present one or more classifications or items at a lower rank than the first specified classification in the designated language type; and (k) upon any of the item being designated by the operation on the menu screen in the designated language type by the player, displaying the designated item of the designated language type on a second display at an order destination connected through a communication line in a predetermined language type. 
     A twelfth aspect of the present invention provides a gaming system that includes a host server and plural gaming terminals connected to the host server via a network. The host server is provided with a conversation database of plural languages, plural translating programs between each of the plural language and a reference language, and a server controller operable to determine the gaming terminals to which the message is to be sent based on an input message and player&#39;s history information. Each of the gaming terminals includes a display for displaying information on a game executed repeatedly, a microphone for being input an utterance by a player, a conversation engine for generating a reply to the input utterance by analyzing the utterance input into the microphone, a speaker for outputting the reply generated by the conversation engine, a history information readout unit for reading out the player&#39;s history information, and a terminal controller. The terminal controller is operable to (A) get the conversation engine to specify a player&#39;s language based on a manual operation by the player or the input utterance, (B) execute a game according to a conversation with the player using the conversation engine corresponding to the player&#39;s language, (C) send the player&#39;s history information to the host server, and (D) translate the message sent form the host server into the player&#39;s language to notify the translated message to the player. 
     A thirteenth aspect of the present invention provides a gaming system that includes a host server and plural gaming terminals connected to the host server via a network. The host server is provided with a conversation database of plural languages, plural translating programs between each of the plural language and a reference language, and a server controller operable to determine the gaming terminals to which the message is to be sent based on an input message and player&#39;s history information. Each of the gaming terminals includes a display for displaying information on a game executed repeatedly, a storing unit for storing conversation data stored in the conversation database and the translating programs, a microphone for being input an utterance by a player, a conversation engine for generating a reply to the input utterance by analyzing the utterance input into the microphone, a speaker for outputting the reply generated by the conversation engine, a history information readout unit for reading out the player&#39;s history information, and a terminal controller. The terminal controller is operable to (A) get the conversation engine to specify a player&#39;s language based on a manual operation by the player or the input utterance, (B) read out conversation data and a translating program corresponding to the player&#39;s language from the host server and store the conversation data and the translating program in the storing unit, (C) execute a game according to a conversation with the player using the conversation engine, (D) send the player&#39;s history information to the host server, and (E) translate the message sent form the host server into the player&#39;s language to notify the translated message to the player. 
     A fourteenth aspect of the present invention provides a control method of a gaming system that includes: specifying a player&#39;s language based on a manual operation or an input of an utterance into a microphone by a player; getting player&#39;s history information; translating a message relating to the player&#39;s history information into the player&#39;s language among messages had been input; and specifying the translated message to the player. 
     A fifteenth aspect of the present invention provides a gaming system that includes a host server and plural gaming terminals connected to the host server via a network. Each of the gaming terminals includes a display for displaying information on a game executed repeatedly, a microphone for being input an utterance by a player, a conversation engine for generating a reply to the input utterance by analyzing the utterance input into the microphone, a speaker for outputting the reply generated by the conversation engine, and a controller. The controller is operable to (A) get the conversation engine to specify a language used by the player based on a manual operation by the player or the utterance, (B) display a character image corresponding to the language on the display, and (C) execute a game according to a conversation with the player using the conversation engine corresponding to the language. 
     A sixteenth aspect of the present invention provides a gaming system that includes a host server and plural gaming terminals connected to the host server via a network. The host server is provided with a conversation database of plural languages and storing unit for storing each playing history of the gaming terminals. Each of the gaming terminals includes a display for displaying information on a game executed repeatedly, a microphone for being input an utterance by a player, a conversation engine for generating a reply to the input utterance by analyzing the utterance input into the microphone with reference to the conversation database and the playing history, a speaker for outputting the reply generated by the conversation engine, and a controller. The controller is operable to (A) get the conversation engine to specify a language used by the player based on a manual operation by the player or the utterance, (B) display a character image corresponding to the language on the display, and (C) execute a game according to a conversation with the player using the conversation engine corresponding to the language. 
     A seventeenth aspect of the present invention provides a gaming system that includes a host server and plural gaming terminals connected to the host server via a network. The host server is provided with a conversation database of plural languages and storing unit for storing each playing history of the gaming terminals. Each of the gaming terminals includes a display for displaying information on a game executed repeatedly, a microphone for being input an utterance by a player, a conversation engine for generating a reply to the input utterance by analyzing the utterance input into the microphone with reference to the conversation database and the playing history, a speaker for outputting the reply generated by the conversation engine, and a controller. The controller is operable to (A) get the conversation engine to specify a language used by the player based on a manual operation by the player or the utterance, (B) display a character image corresponding to the language on the display, (C) execute a game according to a conversation with the player using the conversation engine corresponding to the language, (D) convert a reply to the player into a text string, and (E) display the converted reply on the display together with the character image. 
     A eighteenth aspect of the present invention provides a control method of a gaming system that includes: analyzing an utterance by a player to generate a replay to the utterance and advancing a game with a sound output of the reply; specifying a language used by a player based on a manual operation by the player or the utterance; and displaying a character image corresponding to the language on a display. 
    
    
     
       BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS 
         FIG. 1  is a schematic flow chart showing a playing method of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 2  is a diagram showing a perspective view of a gaming terminal according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 3  is a diagram showing a perspective view of an outward appearance of a schematic configuration of a roulette game machine according to a first embodiment of the present embodiment. 
         FIG. 4  is a diagram showing a plan view of a roulette device according to a first embodiment of the present embodiment. 
         FIG. 5  is a diagram showing one example of an image to be displayed on a display of the gaming terminal shown in  FIG. 2 . 
         FIG. 6  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a roulette game machine according to a first embodiment of the present embodiment. 
         FIG. 7  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a roulette device according to a first embodiment of the present embodiment. 
         FIG. 8  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a gaming terminal according to a first embodiment of the present embodiment. 
         FIG. 9  is a block diagram of a conversation controller available as a conversation engine installed in a gaming terminal according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 10  is a block diagram of a speech recognition unit according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 11  is a timing chart of a process of a word hypothesis refinement unit according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 12  is a flow chart of an operation of the speech recognition unit according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 13  is a partly enlarged block diagram of the conversation controller according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 14  is a diagram illustrating a relation between a character string and morphemes extracted from the character string according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 15  is a diagram illustrating types of uttered sentences, plural two letters in the alphabet which represent the types of the uttered sentences, and examples of the uttered sentences according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 16  is a diagram illustrating details of dictionaries stored in an utterance type database according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 17  is a diagram illustrating details of a hierarchical structure built in a conversation database according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 18  is a diagram illustrating a refinement of topic identification information in the hierarchical structure built in the conversation database according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 19  is a diagram illustrating contents of topic titles formed in the conversation database according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 20  is a diagram illustrating types of reply sentences associated with the topic titles formed in the conversation database according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 21  is a diagram illustrating contents of the topic titles, the reply sentences and next plan designation information associated with the topic identification information according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 22  is a diagram illustrating a plan space according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 23  is a diagram illustrating one example a plan transition according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 24  is a diagram illustrating another example of the plan transition according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 25  is a diagram illustrating details of a plan conversation control process according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 26  is a flow chart of a main process in a conversation control unit according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 27  is a flow chart of a part of a plan conversation control process according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 28  is a flow chart of the rest of the plan conversation control process according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 29  is a transition diagram of a basic control state according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 30  is a flow chart of a discourse space conversation control process according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 31  is a flow chart showing gaming processings of a server and a roulette device of a roulette game machine according to a first embodiment of the present embodiment. 
         FIG. 32  is a flow chart showing gaming processings of the server and the roulette device of the roulette game machine according to a first embodiment of the present embodiment. 
         FIG. 33  is a flow chart showing gaming processings of a gaming terminal of the roulette game machine according to a first embodiment of the present embodiment. 
         FIG. 34  is a flow chart showing a used language confirmation processing shown in  FIG. 33 . 
         FIG. 35  is a flow chart showing a betting period confirmation processing shown in  FIG. 33 . 
         FIG. 36  is a flow chart showing a bet accepting processing shown in  FIG. 33 . 
         FIG. 37  is a flowchart showing order processing in  FIG. 33 . 
         FIG. 38  is a view showing an example of a menu screen to be displayed on a display. 
         FIG. 39  is a view showing another example of the menu screen to be displayed on the display. 
         FIG. 40  is a view showing still another example of the menu screen to be displayed on the display. 
         FIG. 41  is a view showing an example of an image to be displayed on the display. 
         FIG. 42  is a view showing an example of another image to be displayed on the display 
         FIGS. 43A and 43B  are flowcharts showing another example of the order processing in  FIG. 33 . 
         FIG. 44  is a view showing another example of the menu screen to be displayed on the display. 
         FIG. 45  is a view showing still another example of the menu screen to be displayed on the display. 
         FIG. 46  is a schematic flow chart showing a playing method of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 47  is a diagram showing a perspective view of a gaming terminal according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 48  is a diagram showing a perspective view of an outward appearance of a schematic configuration of a roulette game machine according to a second embodiment of the present embodiment. 
         FIG. 49  is a diagram showing a plan view of a roulette device according to a second embodiment of the present embodiment. 
         FIG. 50  is a diagram showing one example of an image to be displayed on a display of the gaming terminal shown in  FIG. 47 . 
         FIG. 51  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a roulette game machine according to a second embodiment of the present embodiment. 
         FIG. 52  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a roulette device according to a second embodiment of the present embodiment. 
         FIG. 53  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a gaming terminal according to a second embodiment of the present embodiment. 
         FIG. 54  is a block diagram of a conversation controller available as a conversation engine installed in a gaming terminal according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 55  is a block diagram of a speech recognition unit according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 56  is a timing chart of a process of a word hypothesis refinement unit according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 57  is a flow chart of an operation of the speech recognition unit according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 58  is a partly enlarged block diagram of the conversation controller according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 59  is a diagram illustrating a relation between a character string and morphemes extracted from the character string according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 60  is a diagram illustrating types of uttered sentences, plural two letters in the alphabet which represent the types of the uttered sentences, and examples of the uttered sentences according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 61  is a diagram illustrating details of dictionaries stored in an utterance type database according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 62  is a diagram illustrating details of a hierarchical structure built in a conversation database according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 63  is a diagram illustrating a refinement of topic identification information in the hierarchical structure built in the conversation database according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 64  is a diagram illustrating contents of topic titles formed in the conversation database according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 65  is a diagram illustrating types of reply sentences associated with the topic titles formed in the conversation database according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 66  is a diagram illustrating contents of the topic titles, the reply sentences and next plan designation information associated with the topic identification information according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 67  is a diagram illustrating a plan space according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 68  is a diagram illustrating one example a plan transition according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 69  is a diagram illustrating another example of the plan transition according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 70  is a diagram illustrating details of a plan conversation control process according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 71  is a flow chart of a main process in a conversation control unit according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 72  is a flow chart of a part of a plan conversation control process according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 73  is a flow chart of the rest of the plan conversation control process according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 74  is a transition diagram of a basic control state according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 75  is a flow chart of a discourse space conversation control process according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 76  is a flow chart showing gaming processings of a server and a roulette device of a roulette game machine according to a second embodiment of the present embodiment. 
         FIG. 77  is a flow chart showing gaming processings of the server and the roulette device of the roulette game machine according to a second embodiment of the present embodiment. 
         FIG. 78  is a flow chart showing gaming processings of a gaming terminal of the roulette game machine according to a second embodiment of the present embodiment. 
         FIG. 79  is a flow chart showing a used language confirmation processing shown in  FIG. 78 . 
         FIG. 80  is a flow chart showing a betting period confirmation processing shown in  FIG. 78 . 
         FIG. 81  is a flow chart showing a bet accepting processing shown in  FIG. 78 . 
         FIGS. 82A and 82B  are flowcharts showing order processing in  FIG. 78 . 
         FIGS. 83A and 83B  are flowcharts showing other examples of the order processing in  FIG. 78 . 
         FIG. 84  is a view showing an example of a menu screen to be displayed on a display. 
         FIG. 85  is a view showing another example of the menu screen to be displayed on the display. 
         FIG. 86  is a view showing another example of the menu screen to be displayed on the display. 
         FIG. 87  is a view showing another example of the menu screen to be displayed on the display. 
         FIG. 88  is a view showing another example of the menu screen to be displayed on the display. 
         FIG. 89  is a view showing another example of the menu screen to be displayed on the display. 
         FIG. 90  is a view showing another example of the menu screen to be displayed on the display. 
         FIG. 91  is a view showing another example of the menu screen to be displayed on the display. 
         FIG. 92  is a view showing another example of the menu screen to be displayed on the display. 
         FIG. 93  is a view showing an example of an image to be displayed on the display. 
         FIG. 94  is a view showing an example of another image to be displayed on the display. 
         FIGS. 95A ,  95 B, and  95 C are flowcharts showing another example of the order processing in  FIG. 78 . 
         FIGS. 96A ,  96 B, and  96 C are flowcharts showing another example of the order processing in  FIG. 78 . 
         FIG. 97  is an example of the menu screen to be displayed on the display. 
         FIG. 98  is a view showing another example of the menu screen to be displayed on the display. 
         FIG. 99  is a view showing an example of an image to be displayed on the display. 
         FIG. 100  is a view showing an example of another image to be displayed on the display. 
         FIG. 101  is a flow chart showing a general process flow of game execution processing in a gaming system according to third and fourth embodiments of the present invention. 
         FIG. 102  is a perspective view showing a gaming terminal according to third and fourth embodiments of the present invention. 
         FIG. 103  is an apparent perspective view showing a general configuration of a roulette game machine according to third and fourth embodiments of the present invention. 
         FIG. 104  is a plan view of a roulette unit according to third and fourth embodiments of the present invention. 
         FIG. 105  is a screen image example displayed on a display of the gaming terminal shown in  FIG. 102 . 
         FIG. 106  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the roulette game machine according to third and fourth embodiments of the present invention. 
         FIG. 107  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the roulette unit according to third and fourth embodiments of the present invention. 
         FIG. 108  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the gaming terminal according to third and fourth embodiments of the present invention. 
         FIG. 109  is a functional block diagram showing a conversation controller according to third and fourth embodiments of the present invention. 
         FIG. 110  is a functional block diagram showing a speech recognition unit. 
         FIG. 111  is a timing chart showing processes of a word hypothesis refinement portion. 
         FIG. 112  is a flow chart showing process operations of the speech recognition unit. 
         FIG. 113  is a partly enlarged block diagram of the conversation controller. 
         FIG. 114  is a diagram showing a relation between a character string and morphemes extracted from the character string. 
         FIG. 115  is a table showing uttered sentence types, two-alphabet codes representing the uttered sentence types, and uttered sentence examples corresponding to the uttered sentence types. 
         FIG. 116  is a diagram showing details of dictionaries stored in an utterance type database. 
         FIG. 117  is a diagram showing details of a hierarchical structure built in a conversation database. 
         FIG. 118  is a diagram showing a refinement of topic identification information in the hierarchical structure built in the conversation database. 
         FIG. 119  is a diagram showing data configuration examples of topic titles (also referred as “second morpheme information”). 
         FIG. 120  is a diagram showing types of reply sentences associated with the topic titles formed in the conversation database. 
         FIG. 121  is a diagram showing contents of the topic titles, the reply sentences and next plan designation information associated with the topic identification information. 
         FIG. 122  is a diagram showing a plan space. 
         FIG. 123  is a diagram showing one example a plan transition. 
         FIG. 124  is a diagram showing another example of the plan transition. 
         FIG. 125  is a diagram showing details of a plan conversation control process. 
         FIG. 126  is a flow chart showing an example of a main process by a conversation control unit. 
         FIG. 127  is a flow chart showing a plan conversation control process. 
         FIG. 128  is a flow chart, continued from  FIG. 127 , showing the rest of the plan conversation control process. 
         FIG. 129  is a transition diagram of a basic control state. 
         FIG. 130  is a flow chart showing a discourse space conversation control process. 
         FIG. 131  is a flow chart showing gaming processings of a sever and the roulette unit in the roulette game machine of a third embodiment according to the present invention. 
         FIG. 132  is a flow chart showing gaming processings of a sever and the roulette unit in the roulette game machine of the third embodiment according to the present invention. 
         FIG. 133  is a flow chart showing game execution processing of the gaming terminal in the roulette game machine of the third embodiment according to the present invention. 
         FIG. 134  is a flow chart showing language confirmation processing shown in  FIG. 133 . 
         FIG. 135  is a flow chart showing betting period confirmation processing shown in  FIG. 133 . 
         FIG. 136  is a flow chart showing bet accepting processing shown in  FIG. 133 . 
         FIG. 137  is a screen image example displayed on the display of the gaming terminal. 
         FIG. 138  is a screen image example displayed on the display of the gaming terminal. 
         FIG. 139  is a screen image example displayed on the display of the gaming terminal. 
         FIG. 140  is a flow chart showing conversation database setting processing shown in  FIG. 133 . 
         FIG. 141  is a flow chart showing conversation translating program setting processing shown in  FIG. 133 . 
         FIG. 142  is a flow chart showing history storing processing for storing history information in a smart card. 
         FIG. 143  is a flow chart showing message sending processing in message output processing shown in  FIG. 133 . 
         FIG. 144  is a flow chart showing message notifying processing in the message output processing shown in  FIG. 133 . 
         FIG. 145  is a flow chart showing a modified example of the message notifying processing in the message output processing shown in  FIG. 133 . 
         FIG. 146  is an explanatory diagram showing message classifications and destination gaming terminals. 
         FIG. 147  is a screen image example shown on an LCD of the server. 
         FIG. 148  is another screen image example shown on the LCD of the server. 
         FIG. 149  is a screen image example shown on the display of the gaming terminal. 
         FIG. 150  is another screen image example shown on the display of the gaming terminal. 
         FIG. 151  is yet another screen image example shown on the display of the gaming terminal. 
         FIG. 152  is a flow chart showing game execution processing of a gaming terminal in the roulette game machine of a fourth embodiment according to the present invention. 
         FIG. 153  is a flow chart showing conversation data download processing shown in  FIG. 152 . 
         FIG. 154  is a flow chart showing translating program download processing shown in  FIG. 152 . 
         FIG. 155  is a flow chart showing a general process flow of game execution processing in a gaming system according to fifth and sixth embodiments of the present invention. 
         FIG. 156  is a perspective view showing a gaming terminal according to fifth and sixth embodiments of the present invention. 
         FIG. 157  is an apparent perspective view showing a general configuration of a roulette game machine according to fifth and sixth embodiments of the present invention. 
         FIG. 158  is a plan view of a roulette unit according to fifth and sixth embodiments of the present invention. 
         FIG. 159  is a screen image example displayed on a display of the gaming terminal. 
         FIG. 160  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the roulette game machine according to fifth and sixth embodiments of the present invention. 
         FIG. 161  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the roulette unit according to fifth and sixth embodiments of the present invention. 
         FIG. 162  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the gaming terminal according to fifth and sixth embodiments of the present invention. 
         FIG. 163  is a functional block diagram showing a conversation controller according to fifth and sixth embodiments of the present invention. 
         FIG. 164  is a functional block diagram showing a speech recognition unit. 
         FIG. 165  is a timing chart showing processes of a word hypothesis refinement portion. 
         FIG. 166  is a flow chart showing process operations of the speech recognition unit. 
         FIG. 167  is a partly enlarged block diagram of the conversation controller. 
         FIG. 168  is a diagram showing a relation between a character string and morphemes extracted from the character string. 
         FIG. 169  is a table showing uttered sentence types, two-alphabet codes representing the uttered sentence types, and uttered sentence examples corresponding to the uttered sentence types. 
         FIG. 170  is a diagram showing details of dictionaries stored in an utterance type database. 
         FIG. 171  is a diagram showing details of a hierarchical structure built in a conversation database. 
         FIG. 172  is a diagram showing a refinement of topic identification information in the hierarchical structure built in the conversation database. 
         FIG. 173  is a diagram showing data configuration examples of topic titles (also referred as “second morpheme information”). 
         FIG. 174  is a diagram showing types of reply sentences associated with the topic titles formed in the conversation database. 
         FIG. 175  is a diagram showing contents of the topic titles, the reply sentences and next plan designation information associated with the topic identification information. 
         FIG. 176  is a diagram showing a plan space. 
         FIG. 177  is a diagram showing one example a plan transition. 
         FIG. 178  is a diagram showing another example of the plan transition. 
         FIG. 179  is a diagram showing details of a plan conversation control process. 
         FIG. 180  is a flow chart showing an example of a main process by a conversation control unit. 
         FIG. 181  is a flow chart showing a plan conversation control process. 
         FIG. 182  is a flow chart, continued from  FIG. 181 , showing the rest of the plan conversation control process. 
         FIG. 183  is a transition diagram of a basic control state. 
         FIG. 184  is a flow chart showing a discourse space conversation control process. 
         FIG. 185  is a flow chart showing gaming processings of a sever and the roulette unit in the roulette game machine according to fifth and sixth embodiments of the present invention. 
         FIG. 186  is a flow chart showing gaming processings of a sever and the roulette unit in the roulette game machine according to fifth and sixth embodiments of the present invention. 
         FIG. 187  is a flow chart showing game execution processing of the gaming terminal in the roulette game machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 188  is a flow chart showing language confirmation processing shown in  FIG. 187 . 
         FIG. 189  is a flow chart showing betting period confirmation processing shown in  FIG. 187 . 
         FIG. 190  is a flow chart showing bet accepting processing shown in  FIG. 187 . 
         FIG. 191  is a screen image example displayed on the display. 
         FIG. 192  is a screen image example displayed on the display. 
         FIG. 193  is a screen image example displayed on the display. 
         FIG. 194  is a flow chart showing conversation database setting processing shown in  FIG. 187 . 
         FIG. 195  is a flow chart showing conversation translating program setting processing shown in  FIG. 187 . 
         FIG. 196  is a flow chart showing conversation processing shown in  FIG. 187 . 
         FIG. 197  is a flow chart showing game execution processing of a gaming terminal in the roulette game machine according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 198  is a flow chart showing conversation data download processing shown in  FIG. 197 . 
         FIG. 199  is a flow chart showing translating program download processing shown in  FIG. 197 . 
         FIG. 200  is a screen image example shown on a display. 
         FIG. 201  is a screen image example shown on the display. 
         FIG. 202  is a screen image example shown on the display. 
         FIG. 203  is a screen image example shown on the display. 
         FIG. 204  is a screen image example shown on the display. 
         FIG. 205  is a screen image example shown on the display. 
     
    
    
     DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE EMBODIMENT 
     First Embodiment 
     Now, operations of a gaming terminal representing an example of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention and outlines of a playing method thereof will be described below with reference to a flow chart shown in  FIG. 1 , a perspective view of a gaming machine shown in  FIG. 2 , and an outward perspective view of a roulette game machine shown in  FIG. 3 . 
     First, in a gaming terminal  4  according to the first embodiment of the present invention shown in  FIG. 2 , a player can participate in a roulette game executed in a roulette device  2  by betting credits through a BET screen displayed on a display  8 . 
     Then, data on a conversation sentence to inquire of a player about a language type to be used for playing a roulette game are created by use of a conversation engine of the gaming terminal  4  shown in  FIG. 2  (step S 11 ). Next, the conversation sentence to inquire the language type to be used for playing the roulette game is outputted from an output unit of the gaming terminal  4  by using the data created by the conversation engine (step S 12 ). 
     Subsequently, the player inputs a response sentence to designate the language type to be used for playing the roulette game to an input unit of the gaming terminal  4  in response to the conversation sentence outputted from the output unit (step S 13 ). Then, data on the response sentence inputted to the input unit by the player are analyzed by the conversation engine of the gaming terminal  4  (step S 14 ). 
     Next, a judgment is made as to whether or not the language type to be used for playing the roulette game is designated in the data on the conversation sentence analyzed by the conversation engine of the gaming terminal  4  (step S 15 ). Then, when the language type to be used for playing the roulette game is designated (YES in step S 15 ), a judgment is made as to whether or not a response sentence (such as a phrase meaning “I would like something to eat or drink”) to request for displaying a menu of items orderable through the gaming terminal  4  onto the display  8  is inputted to the input unit by the player (step S 16 ). 
     Thereafter, if the response sentence to request for displaying the menu is inputted (YES in step S 16 ), the menu in the language type designated in step S 15  is displayed on the display  8  (step S 17 ). 
     The menu in the language type designated in step S 15  can be displayed on the display  8  by use of menu data stored in an external memory  100  of the gaming terminal  4  (see  FIG. 8 ; a memory). Here, the menu data indicate contents of the menu in multiple language types usable for playing the roulette game. 
     Subsequently, the player orders an item in the menu displayed on the display  8  by using the designated language type (step S 18 ), and order data on the content of the ordered item expressed after conversion from the designated language type into a predetermined language type are outputted to a shop server  86  (see  FIG. 6 ; a server) which is an order destination connected through a communication line (step S 19 ). 
     According to the gaming terminal  4  and the playing method of the same of the embodiment of the present invention, once the player inputs the response sentence to designate the language type to be used for playing the roulette game with the gaming terminal into the input unit in response to the conversation sentence outputted from the output unit of the gaming terminal  4 , the menu in the designated language type is displayed thereafter on the display  8  upon the request for the display of the menu from the player. Then, when the player places an order for the item in the menu by using the designated language type, the content of the item ordered by the player is transmitted to the order destination by using the predetermined language type, here, the order destination has the server configured to output the order data indicating the content of the ordered item, by using the predetermined language type. 
     As a result, it is possible to allow the player to place the order of the item in the designated language type through the gaming terminal  4  by designating the language type to be used in the game through interactive communication between the player and the gaming terminal  4 . In this way, it is possible to offer advanced service to the player. 
     Next, the gaming terminal according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described together with a roulette game device having the gaming terminal with reference to  FIG. 2  to  FIG. 42 . 
       FIG. 2  is a perspective view of the gaming terminal according to the embodiment of the present invention.  FIG. 3  is an external perspective view of the roulette game device according to the embodiment of the present invention, which includes the gaming terminal shown in  FIG. 2 .  FIG. 4  is a plan view of a roulette device  2  provided on the roulette game device shown in  FIG. 3 .  FIG. 5  is a view showing an example of an image to be displayed on a display provided on the gaming terminal shown in  FIG. 2 .  FIG. 6  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the roulette game device. 
     A roulette game device  1  shown in  FIG. 3  includes multiple gaming terminals  4  (a gaming machine) according to the embodiment of the present invention shown in  FIG. 2 . Besides, the roulette game device  1  includes a roulette device  2  and a server  13 . For example, the roulette game device  1  is disposed in a casino area in a casino hotel as appropriate. Each of the gaming terminals  4  and the roulette device  2  can be connected to the server  13  through a local area network (communication lines) or the like. 
     Moreover, a shop server  86  (see  FIG. 6 ; a server) is connected to this local area network. This shop server  86  is located in a shop area which is away from the casino area in the casino hotel. This shop server  86  is configured to manage orders of items placed by players through the respective gaming terminals  4 . The shop server  86  includes a shop display  86   a  (a second display) for displaying the ordered items. 
     At the roulette device  2 , the roulette game will be executed under the control of the server  13 , and the game will be displayed to the players. The players use a plurality of gaming terminals  4  that are arranged around the roulette device  2 , in order to participate in the roulette game displayed by the roulette device  2 . In the present embodiment, the roulette game machine  1  has nine gaming terminals  4 . Consequently, at most nine players can participate in the communal roulette game simultaneously. 
     The roulette games to be displayed on the roulette device  2  are repeatedly executed at a cycle of a predetermined time period under control by the server  13 . Accordingly, each of the players can make bets on a current roulette game by use of one of the gaming terminals  4 . To make bets on the current roulette game, each of the gaming terminals  4  is provided with a display  8  (a display, a first display). A BET screen  61  (see  FIG. 5 ) corresponding to the roulette game is displayed on this display  8 . Display contents of this BET screen  61  will be described later in detail. 
       FIG. 4  is a plan view of a roulette device provided in a roulette game machine of  FIG. 3 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 4 , the roulette device  2  has a frame  21 , and a roulette wheel  22  which is accommodated and supported rotatably inside the frame  21 . On an upper surface of the roulette wheel  22 , a plurality (38 in total in the present embodiment) of number pockets  23  is formed. In addition, on an upper surface of the roulette wheel  22  on an outer side of the number pockets  23 , number plates  25  are provided for displaying numbers “0”, “00”, “1” to “36” in correspondence to the respective number pockets  23 . 
     A ball launching hole  36  is opened on the inner periphery of the frame  21 . The ball launching hole  36  is connected to a ball launching device  104  (see  FIG. 7 ). In conjunction with the activation of the ball launching device  104 , a ball  27  will be entered onto the roulette wheel  22  from the ball launching hole  36 . Also, a hemispherical transparent acrylic cover  28  covers over the roulette device  2  (see  FIG. 3 ). 
     A wheel driving motor  106  (see  FIG. 7 ) is provided on a lower side of the roulette wheel  22 . In conjunction with the activation of the wheel driving motor  106 , the roulette wheel  22  will be rotated. Metal plates (not shown) are attached at prescribed intervals on a lower surface of the roulette wheel  22 . As a proximity sensor of a pocket position detection circuit  107  (see  FIG. 7 ) detects these metal plates, a position of the number pocket  23  is detected. 
     The frame  21  is gently inclined toward an inner side, and a guide wall  29  is formed on its middle section. The entered ball  27  is rolled by being guided by the guide wall  29  due to its centrifugal force. The ball  27  rolls down the slope of the frame  21  toward the inner side as the rotational speed decreases and the centrifugal force becomes weaker, and reaches to the rotating roulette wheel  22 . Then, the ball  27  that reached to the roulette wheel  22  further falls into one of the number pockets  23  by passing over the number plates  25  on an outer side of the rotating roulette wheel  22 . As a result, the number on the number plate  25  of the number pocket  23  into which the ball fell is judged by a ball sensor  105 , and this number will become a winning number. 
     Next, the configuration of the gaming terminal  4  will be described. 
     As shown in  FIG. 2 , the gaming terminal  4  has a medal insertion slot  7  for inserting game media (currency value: such as cash, a chip, a medal, etc.) and a above-mentioned display  8  for displaying images related to the game on its upper face. The gaming terminal  4  accepts the betting operation by the player by using the medal insertion slot  7  and the display  8 . The player can play the game by operating the touch panel  50  (see  FIG. 7 ) or the like that is provided on a front face of the display  8  while watching the images displayed on the display  8 . Note that, in the following description, the game media may be referred as their representative “medals”. 
     Also, besides the medal insertion slot  7  and the display  8  described above, a payout button  5 , a ticket printer  6 , a bill insertion slot  9 , a speaker  10 , a microphone  15 , and a card reader  16  are provided on an upper face of the gaming terminal  4 . A medal payout opening  12  and a medal tray  14  are provided in a front face of the gaming terminal  4 . 
     The payout button  5  is a button for inputting a command for paying out credited medals from the medal payout opening  12  to the medal tray  14 . The ticket printer  6  prints out as the bar code ticket including the data such as the credits, the date, and the identification number of the gaming terminal  4 . The player can use the bar code ticket at another gaming terminal  4  and the player can bet to the game at that gaming terminal  4 . Or the player can exchange the bar code ticket to bills or the like at a prescribed location (a cashier in the casino, for example) in the gaming facility. 
     The bill insertion slot  9  is configured to validate the appropriateness of bills and to accept authentic bills. Here, the bill insertion slot  9  may also be configured to be capable of reading a bar-coded ticket  39 . The speaker  10  is used to output music, sound effects, speech messages (conversation sentences) to the player, and the like. The microphone  15  is used to input a speech message (a response sentence) uttered by the player. 
     The card reader  16 , in which a smart card  17  (a portable memory) can be inserted, reads data out of the inserted smart card  17  and writes data into the smart card  17 . The smart card, owned by the player, includes member card unique to the player, a credit card. 
     The data concerning the gaming history executed by the player (game history information) are stored in the smart card  17  together with data for identifying the player. The gaming history information includes game type information concerning games ever played by the player, points awarded in the games played in the past, and a language type used by the player in the course of the games. The smart card  17  may further store data corresponding to coins, bills or credits. Concerning a method of writing and reading the data in and out of this smart card  17 , any of a contact method and a non-contact method (a radio-frequency identification or RFID method) is applicable. Alternatively, a magnetic stripe card is also applicable, instead of the smart card  17 . 
     On an upper side of the display  8  of each gaming terminal  4 , a WIN lamp  11  is provided respectively. In the case where the number (“0”, “00” and “1” to “36” in the present embodiment) bet at the gaming terminal  4  in the game becomes the winning number, the WIN lamp  11  of the winning gaming terminal  4  will be turned on. Also, in the jackpot (referred hereafter also as JP) bonus game for obtaining JP, the WIN lamp  11  of the gaming terminal  4  that obtained JP will be turned on similarly. Note that this WIN lamp  11  provided at a position that is visible from all of the arranged gaming terminals  4  (9 sets in the present embodiment), such that the other players who are playing at the same roulette game machine  1  can always check which WIN lamp  11  is turned on. 
     Inside the medal insertion slot  7 , a medal sensor (not shown) is provided, and it identifies the currency values such as medals that are inserted at the medal insertion slot  7 , and counts the inserted medals. Also, a hopper (not shown) is provided inside the medal payout opening  12  and it pays a prescribed number of medals from the medal payout opening  12 . 
       FIG. 5  is the diagram showing one example of an image to be displayed on the display. 
     The BET screen  61  as shown in  FIG. 5  is displayed on the display  8  of each of the gaming terminals  4 . The BET screen  61  includes a table-type betting board  60 . The player can make bets on a roulette game by using his or her chips credited in the gaming terminal  4  in the form of electronic information and by operating a touch panel  50  (see  FIG. 7 ) provided on a front face of the display  8 . 
     To be more precise, the player indicates with a cursor  70  a BET area  72  (on a number and a grid of a mark of the number or on a line forming the grid) which is a target for making bets of chips. Then, the player indicates with unit BET buttons  66  the number of chips to be bet and confirms the number of bet chips with a BET confirmation button  65 . The above described operations can be executed with the player directly pressing, with fingers, the sections where the BET area  72 , the unit BET buttons  66 , and the BET confirmation button  65  are displayed on the display  8 . 
     Here, four types of the unit BET buttons  66 , namely, a 1 BET button  66 A, a 5 BET button  66 B, a 10 BET button  66 C, and a 100 BET button  66 D are provided corresponding to the number of chips that can be bet in one operation. 
     The number of chips bet in the previous game by the player and the number of payout credits are displayed on a payout result display unit  67  of the display  8 . Meanwhile, the number of credits currently owned by the player is displayed on a credit number display unit  68  of the display  8 . Moreover, remaining time for which the player can make bets is displayed on a BET time display unit  69  of the display  8 . 
     Note that when the ball  27  entered on the roulette wheel  22  is housed in any of the number pockets  23 , the winning number is confirmed and the current roulette game is finished, the next roulette game is started. 
     A MEGA counter  73  displaying the number of credits accumulated for a “MEGA” JP, a MAJOR counter  74  displaying the number of credits accumulated for a “MAJOR” JP, and a MINI counter  75  displaying the number of credits accumulated for a “MINI” JP are provided at the right side of the bet time display unit  69 . In the case where any one of the JPs is won in the JP bonus game, a JP payout is provided according to the winning credits of the one of the JPs displayed on the respective counters  73  to  75 . An initial value (200 credits for “MINI,” 5000 credits for “Major” and 50000 credits for “MEGA”) is displayed on the one of the counters  73  to  75  after the JP payout. 
     An order button  76  is displayed on the left of the BET confirmation button  65  on the BET screen  61 . The player can display the menu of orderable items such as beverages or snacks on the display  8  by touching the order button  76  through an operation of the touch panel  50 . 
       FIG. 6  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the roulette game machine according to the present embodiment. 
     As shown in  FIG. 6 , the roulette game machine  1  has the server  13 , the roulette device  2  and a plurality (9 sets in the present embodiment) of the gaming terminals  4 . The roulette device  2  and the gaming terminals  4  are connected to the server  13 . Note that an internal configuration of the roulette device  2  and an internal configuration of the gaming terminal  4  will be described below in detail. 
     The server  13  has a server CPU  81  for executing the overall control of the server  13 , a ROM  82 , a RAM  83 , a timer  84 , a LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)  32  connected through a LCD driving circuit  85 , and a keyboard  33 . 
     The server CPU  81  carries out various processings according to input signals supplied from each gaming terminals  4 , and data &amp; programs stored in the ROM  82  &amp; the RAM  83 . Also, the server CPU  81  transmits command signals to the gaming terminals  4  according to the processing results, to control each gaming terminal  4  by its initiative. Also, the server CPU  81  transmits control signals to the roulette device  2 , to control the shooting of the ball  27  and the rotation of the roulette wheel  22 . 
     The ROM  82  is formed by a semiconductor memory or the like and stores programs that implement basic functions of the roulette game machine  1 , programs that execute the notification of the maintenance time and the setting &amp; management of the notification condition, the payout rate data for the roulette game (the payout credits with respect to the win per one chip), programs for controlling each gaming terminal  4  initiatively, etc. 
     On the other hand, the RAM  83  temporarily stores the betting information supplied from each gaming terminal  4 , the winning number of the roulette device  2  detected by the sensors, the accumulated JP credits, the data regarding the result of the processing executed by the server CPU  81 , etc. 
     In addition, the timer  84  is connected to the server CPU  81 . The time information of the timer  84  is transmitted to the server CPU  81 . The server CPU  81  executes the control of the rotation of the roulette wheel  22  and the shooting of the ball  27  based on the time information of the timer  84 . 
       FIG. 7  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the roulette device according to the present embodiment. 
     As shown in  FIG. 7 , the roulette device  2  has a controller  109 , the pocket position detection circuit  107 , the ball launching device  104 , the ball sensor  105 , the wheel driving motor  106 , and a ball collecting device  108 . The controller  109  corresponds to the controller of the present invention. 
     The controller  109  has a CPU  101 , a ROM  102 , and a RAM  103 . The CPU  101  controls the shooting of the ball  27  and the rotation of the roulette wheel  22  according to the control signals supplied from the server  13 , and data &amp; programs stored in the ROM  102  &amp; the RAM  103 . 
     The pocket position detection circuit  107  has a proximity sensor. It detects the rotation position of the roulette wheel  22  by detecting metal plates attached to the roulette wheel  22 . 
     The ball launching device  104  is for launching the ball  27  onto the roulette wheel  22  from the ball launching hole  36  (see  FIG. 4 ). The ball launching device  104  shoots the ball  27  at an initial speed and at a timing set in the control data. 
     The ball sensor  105  is a device for detecting the number pocket  23  into which the ball  27  fell. The wheel driving motor  106  is for rotating the roulette wheel  22 . The wheel driving motor  106  stops the activation after the motor driving time that is set in the control data has elapsed since the start of the activation. The ball collecting device  108  is for collecting the ball  27  on the roulette wheel  22  after the game is over. 
       FIG. 8  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the gaming terminal according to the present embodiment. Note that 9 sets of the gaming terminals  4  have basically the same configuration, and an example of one gaming terminal  4  will be described in the following. 
     As shown in  FIG. 8 , the gaming terminal  4  has a terminal controller  90  formed by a terminal CPU  91 , a ROM  92  and a RAM  93 . The ROM  92  is formed by a semiconductor memory or the like and stores programs that implement basic functions of the gaming terminal  4 , and various programs, data table, etc., that are necessary for controlling the gaming terminal  4 . Also, the RAM  93  is a memory for temporarily storing various data calculated by the terminal CPU  91 , the owned credits by the player (deposited at the gaming terminal  4 ), the state of betting by the player, a flag F for indicating that it is under the betting period or not, etc. 
     To the terminal CPU  91 , a payout button  5  is connected. 
     The payout button  5  is a button to be pressed by the player usually when the game is over. When the payout button  5  is pressed by the player, the medals according to the credits acquired in the game by the player will be paid from the medal payout opening  12  (usually one medal for one credit). 
     The terminal CPU  91  executes various corresponding operations according to the operation signals outputted by the payout button  5  as a result of pressing of the payout button  5 . More specifically, the terminal CPU  91  executes various processings when signals associated with the pressing of the bet confirmation button  65  is inputted, according to the input signals and data &amp; programs stored in the ROM  92  &amp; the RAM  93 . The terminal CPU  91  transmits their processing results to the server CPU  81 . 
     Also, the terminal CPU  91  receives command signals from the sever CPU  81  and controls peripheral devices constituting the gaming terminal  4 , so as to proceed with the game. Also, the terminal CPU  91  executes various processings according to the above described input signals and data &amp; programs stored in the ROM  92  &amp; the RAM  93 , depending on the processing contents. The terminal CPU  91  controls the peripheral devices constituting the gaming terminal  4  according to the processing results, so as to proceed with the game. 
     Also, a hopper  94  is connected to the terminal CPU  91 . The hopper  94  pays a prescribed number of medals from the medal payout opening  12  (see  FIG. 2 ) according to a command signal from the terminal CPU  91 . 
     In addition, the display  8  is connected to the terminal CPU  91  through a LCD driving circuit  95 . The LCD driving circuit  95  has a program ROM, an image ROM, an image control CPU, a work RAM, VDP (Video Display Processor), and a video RAM. The program ROM stores an image controlling program and various selection tables regarding the display at the display  8 . The image ROM stores dot data for forming an image to be displayed at the display  8 , for example. The image control CPU makes the determination of an image to be displayed at the display  8  from the dot data in the image ROM, according to the image control program in the program ROM, based on parameters set up by the terminal CPU  91 . The work RAM is provided as a temporary memory device at a time of executing the image control program at the image control CPU. The VDP forms a display image determined by the image control CPU and outputs it to the display  8 . Note that the video RAM is provided as a temporary memory device at a time of forming an image by the VDP. 
     Also, the touch panel  50  is attached on the front surface of the display  8 . The operation information of the touch panel  50  is transmitted to the terminal CPU  91 . At the touch panel  50 , the betting operation by the player is carried out on the bet screen  61 . More specifically, the operation of the touch panel  50  is carried out for the selection of the bet area  72  and the input via the bet buttons  66  and the bet confirmation button  65 , etc. When the touch panel  50  is operated, its operation information is transmitted to the terminal CPU  91 . Then, according to that information, the betting information (the bet area and the number of bets specified on the bet screen  61 ) is stored into the RAM  93 . In addition, this betting information is transmitted to the server CPU  81 , and stored in the betting information memory area of the RAM  83 . 
     Moreover, a round output circuit  96  and the speaker  10  are connected to the terminal CPU  91 . The speaker  10  generates, based on output signals from the sound output circuit  96 , various sound effects for executing various effects and dialog message sounds to the player for interactive gaming. 
     Meanwhile, a sound input circuit  98  and the microphone  15  are connected to the terminal CPU  91 . The microphone  15  is used to input through the sound input circuit  98 , into the terminal CPU  91 , response message sounds in the player&#39;s voice to the dialog message sounds outputted from the speaker  10 . 
     Also, a medal sensor  97  is connected to the terminal CPU  91 . The medal sensor  97  detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot  7  (see  FIG. 2 ). At the same time, the medal sensor  97  counts the inserted medals, and transmits its result to the terminal CPU  91 . The terminal CPU  91  increases the amount of credits of the player that is stored in the RAM  93  according to the transmitted signal. 
     Also, a WIN lamp  11  is connected to the terminal CPU  91 . The terminal CPU  91  turns on the WIN lamp  11  in a prescribed color, when the bet on the bet screen  61  won or when the JP is won. 
     Moreover, external memories  99  and  100  are connected to the terminal CPU  91 . Each of the external memories  99  and  100  is formed of a hard disk device. The terminal CPU  91  writes and reads data in and out of the external memories  99  and  100  if necessary. Of these external memories  99  and  100 , menu data indicating contents of a menu orderable through this gaming terminal are stored in the external memory  100  (the memory) in each multiple language type usable for playing the roulette game. 
     Moreover, the gaming terminal  4  provided with the above-described terminal controller  90  includes a conversation engine. By using this conversation engine, at least part of the roulette games on the gaming terminal  4  are interactively executed in a dialog style with the player by using the display  8 , the speaker  10 , and the microphone  15  as interfaces. Accordingly, in a certain scene, as the roulette game proceeds, the message sound is outputted from the speaker  10  to the player through the sound output circuit  96  and the contents of the message sounds of the player inputted through the microphone  15  and the sound input circuit  98  are analyzed. 
     Such a conversation engine can be achieved by using any of the conversation controllers disclosed in US Patent Application Publication No. 2007/0094007, US Patent Application Publication No. 2007/0094008, US Patent Application Publication No. 2007/0094005, and US Patent Application Publication No. 2007/0094004, for example. As will be described later, such a conversation controller can be achieved by use of the display  8  and the speaker  10 , the microphone  15 , the terminal controller  90 , and the external memory  99  of the gaming terminal  4 . 
     Here, a configuration of the conversation controller disclosed in US Patent Application Publication No. 2007/0094007, which is available as the conversation engine to be installed on the gaming terminal  4  of this embodiment, will be described with reference to  FIG. 9  to  FIG. 30 .  FIG. 9  is a functional block diagram showing a configuration example of a conversation controller. 
     As shown in  FIG. 9 , a conversation controller  1000  includes an input unit  1100 , a speech recognition unit  1200 , a conversation control unit  1300 , a sentence analyzing unit  1400 , a conversation database  1500 , an output unit  1600 , and a speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 . 
     [Input Unit] 
     The input unit  1100  receives input information (user&#39;s utterance) input by a user. The input unit  1100  outputs a speech corresponding to contents of the received utterance as a voice signal to the speech recognition unit  1200 . Note that the input unit  1100  may be a character input unit such as a keyboard and a touchscreen (touch panel). In this case, the after-mentioned speech recognition unit  1200  doesn&#39;t need to be provided. 
     [Speech Recognition Unit] 
     The speech recognition unit  1200  specifies a character string corresponding to the uttered contents based on the uttered contents obtained via the input unit  1100 . Specifically, the speech recognition unit  1200  that has received the voice signal from the input unit  1100  compares the received voice signal with the conversation database  1500  and dictionaries stored in the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700  based on the voice signal to output a speech recognition result estimated based on the voice signal to the conversation control unit  1300 . In a configuration example shown in  FIG. 9 , the speech recognition unit  1200  requests acquisition of memory contents of the conversation database  1500  to the conversation control unit  1300  and then receives the memory contents of the conversation database  1500  which the conversation control unit  1300  retrieves according to the request from the speech recognition unit  1200 . However the speech recognition unit  1200  may directly retrieves the memory contents of the conversation database  1500  for comparing with the voice signal. 
     Configuration Example of Speech Recognition Unit 
       FIG. 10  is a functional block diagram showing a configuration example of the speech recognition unit  1200 . The speech recognition unit  1200  includes a feature extraction unit  1200 A, a buffer memory (BM)  1200 B, a word retrieving unit  1200 C, a buffer memory (BM)  1200 D, a candidate determination unit  1200 E and a word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F. The word retrieving unit  1200 C and the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F are connected to the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 . In addition, the candidate determination unit  1200 E is connected to the conversation database  1500  via the conversation control unit  1300 . 
     The speech recognition dictionary memory  1700  connected to the word retrieving unit  1200 C stores a phoneme hidden markov model (hereinafter, the hidden markov model is referred as the HMM). The phoneme HMM is described with various states and each of the states includes the following information. It is configured with (a) a state number, (b) an acceptable context class, (c) lists of a previous state and a subsequent state, (d) parameters of an output probability density distribution, and (e) a self-transition probability and a transition probability to a subsequent state. The phoneme HMM used in the present embodiment is generated by converting a prescribed Speaker-Mixture HMM in order to specify which speakers respective distributions are derived from. An output probability density function is a Mixture Gaussian distribution with a 34-dimensional diagonal covariance matrix. The speech recognition dictionary memory  1700  connected to the word retrieving unit  1200 C further stores a word dictionary. The word dictionary stores symbol strings each of which indicates a reading represented as a symbol per each word in the phoneme HMM. 
     A speaker&#39;s speech is input into a microphone or the like and then converted into a voice signal to be input to the feature extraction unit  1200 A. The feature extraction unit  1200 A converts the input voice signal from analog to digital and then extracts a feature parameter from the voice signal to output the feature parameter. There are various methods for extracting and outputting the feature parameter. For example, an LPC analysis is executed to extract a 34-dimensional feature parameter including a logarithm power, a 16-dimensional cepstrum coefficient, a Δ-logarithm power and a 16-dimensional Δ-cepstrum coefficient. The time series of the extracted feature parameters are input to the word retrieving unit  1200 C via the buffer memory (BM)  1200 B. 
     The word retrieving unit  1200 C retrieves word hypotheses with a one-pass Viterbi decoding method based on the feature parameters input from the feature extraction unit  1200 A via the buffer memory (BM)  1200 B by using the phoneme HMM and the word dictionary stored in the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 , and then calculates likelihoods. Here, the word retrieving unit  1200 C calculates a likelihood in a word and a likelihood from a speech start for each state of the phoneme HMM at each time. The likelihood is calculated each of an identification number of a calculating-object word, a speech start time of the word and a difference of a preceding word previously uttered before the word. The word retrieving unit  1200 C may reduce grid hypotheses of the lower likelihoods among all of the calculated likelihoods based on the phoneme HMM and the word dictionary in order to reduce a computing throughput. The word retrieving unit  1200 C outputs information on the retrieved word hypotheses and the likelihoods of the retrieved word hypotheses together with time information regarding an elapsed time from the speech start time (e.g. frame number) to the candidate determination unit  1200 E and the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F via the buffer memory (BM)  1200 D. 
     The candidate determination unit  1200 E compares the retrieved word hypotheses with topic specification information in a prescribed discourse space with reference to the conversation control unit  1300 , and then determines whether or not exists a coincident word hypothesis with the topic specification information in the prescribed discourse space among the retrieved word hypotheses. If the coincident word hypothesis exists, the candidate determination unit  1200 E outputs the coincident word hypothesis as a recognition result. On the other hand, if the coincident word hypothesis doesn&#39;t exist, the candidate determination unit  1200 E requires the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F to refine the retrieved word hypotheses. 
     An operation of the candidate determination unit  1200 E will be described. Here, it is assumed that the word retrieving unit  1200 C outputs plural word hypotheses (“KANTAKU (reclamation)”, “KATAKU (pretext)” and “KANTOKU (director)”) and plural likelihoods (recognition rates) for the respective word hypotheses; the prescribed discourse space relates to movies; the topic specification information of the prescribed discourse space includes “KANTOKU (director)” but neither “KANTAKU (reclamation)” nor “KATAKU (pretext)”; among the likelihoods (recognition rates) of “KANTAKU (reclamation)”, “KATAKU (pretext)” and “KANTOKU (director)”, “KANTAKU (reclamation)” is highest, “KANTOKU (director)” is lowest and “KATAKU (pretext)” is intermediate between the two. 
     The candidate determination unit  1200 E compares the retrieved word hypotheses with the topic specification information in the prescribed discourse space, and then specifies the coincident word hypothesis “KANTOKU (director)” with the topic specification information to output the word hypothesis “KANTOKU (director)” to the conversation control unit  1300  as the recognition result. Processed in this manner, the word hypothesis “KANTOKU (director)” relating to the current topic “movies” is selected ahead of the word hypotheses “KANTAKU (reclamation)” and “KATAKU (pretext)” with higher likelihoods. As a result, the recognition result appropriate with the discourse context can be output. 
     On the other hand, if no coincident word hypothesis exists, the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F operates to output the recognition result in response to the request from the candidate determination unit  1200 E to refine the retrieved word hypotheses. The word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F refines the retrieved word hypotheses for the same words having the same speech termination time and different speech start time per each initial phonetic environment of the same words with reference to a statistical language model stored in the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700  based on the plural retrieved word hypotheses output from the word retrieving unit  1200 C via the buffer memory (BM)  1200 D so that one word hypothesis with the highest likelihood may be selected as a representative among all of the likelihoods calculated between the speech start and the utterance termination of the word. And then, the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F outputs one word string of the one word hypothesis with the highest likelihood as the recognition result among all word strings of the refined word hypotheses. In the present embodiment, the initial phonetic environment of the same word to be processed is preferably defined with a three-phoneme series containing the last phoneme of the word hypothesis preceding the same word and two initial phonemes of the word hypothesis of the same word. 
     A word refinement process executed by the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F will be described with reference to  FIG. 11 . 
     For example, it is assumed that the (i)th word Wi, which consists of a phonemic string a 1 , a 2 , . . . and an, follows the (i−1)th word W(i−1) and six hypotheses Wa, Wb, Wc, Wd, We and Wf exist as a word hypothesis of the (i−1)th word W(i−1). It is further assumed that the last phoneme of the former three word hypotheses Wa, Wb and Wc is /x/, and the last phoneme of the latter three word hypotheses Wd, We and Wf is /y/. If three hypotheses each premised on three word hypotheses Wa, Wb and Wc and also one hypothesis premised on three word hypotheses Wd, We and Wf remain at the speech termination time te, the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F is selected one hypothesis with the highest likelihood among the former three hypotheses with the same initial phonetic environment, and other two hypotheses are excluded. 
     Note that, since the initial phonetic environment of the hypothesis premised on the word hypotheses Wd, We and Wf is different from those of the other three hypotheses, that is, the last phoneme of the preceded word hypothesis is not /x/ but /y/, the hypothesis premised on the word hypotheses Wd, We and Wf is not excluded. In other words, one hypothesis is kept for each of the last phonemes of the preceding word hypotheses. 
     In the present embodiment, the initial phonetic environment of the word is defined with a three-phoneme series containing the last phoneme of the word hypothesis preceding the word and two initial phonemes of the word hypothesis of the word. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The initial phonetic environment of the word may be defined with a phoneme series containing a phoneme string of the preceding word hypothesis including the last phoneme of the preceding word hypothesis and at least one serial phoneme with the last phoneme of the preceding word hypothesis and a phoneme string including the first phoneme of the word hypothesis of the word. 
     In the present embodiment, the feature extraction unit  1200 A, the word retrieving unit  1200 C, the candidate determination unit  1200 E and the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F are composed of a computer such as a microcomputer. The buffer memories (BMs)  200 B and  200 D and the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700  are composed of a memory unit such as a hard disk storage. 
     In the above-mentioned embodiment, the speech recognition is executed by using the word retrieving unit  1200 C and the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The speech recognition unit  1200  may be composed of a phoneme comparison unit for referring to the phoneme HMM and a speech recognition unit for executing the speech recognition of a ward with reference to a statistical language model by using, for example, a One Pass DP algorithm. 
     In addition, in the present embodiment, the speech recognition unit  1200  is explained as a part of the conversation controller  1000 . However, a independent speech recognition apparatus configured by the speech recognition unit  1200 , the conversation database  1500  and the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700  may be possibly employed. 
     Operating Example of Speech Recognition Unit 
     Next, operations of the speech recognition unit  1200  will be described with reference to  FIG. 12 .  FIG. 12  is a flow-chart showing process operations of the speech recognition unit  1200 . 
     The speech recognition unit  1200  executes a feature analysis of the input speech to generate feature parameters on receiving the voice signal from the input unit  1100  (step S 401 ). Next, the feature parameters is compared with the phoneme HMM and the language model stored in the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 , and then a certain number of word hypotheses and the likelihoods of the word hypotheses are obtained (step S 402 ). Next, the speech recognition unit  1200  compares the obtained certain number of word hypotheses, the retrieved word hypotheses and the topic specification information in the prescribed discourse space to determine whether or not the coincident word hypothesis with the topic specification information in the prescribed discourse space exists among the retrieved word hypotheses (steps S 403  and S 404 ). If the coincident word hypothesis exists, the speech recognition unit  1200  outputs the coincident word hypothesis as the recognition result (step S 405 ). On the other hand, if no coincident word hypothesis exists, the speech recognition unit  1200  outputs the word hypothesis with the highest likelihood as the recognition result according to the obtained likelihoods of the word hypotheses (step S 406 ). 
     [Speech Recognition Dictionary Memory] 
     The configuration example of the conversation controller  1000  is further described with referring back to  FIG. 9  again. 
     The speech recognition dictionary memory  1700  stores character strings corresponding to standard voice signals. The speech recognition unit  1200 , which has executed the comparison, specifies a word hypothesis for a character string corresponding to the received voice signal, and then outputs the specified word hypothesis as a character string signal to the conversation control unit  1300 . 
     [Sentence Analyzing Unit] 
     Next, a configuration example of the sentence analyzing unit  1400  will be described with reference to  FIG. 13 .  FIG. 13  is a partly enlarged block diagram of the conversation controller  1000  and also a block diagram showing a concrete configuration example of the conversation control unit  1300  and the sentence analyzing unit  1400 . Note that only the conversation control unit  1300 , the sentence analyzing unit  1400  and the conversation database  1500  are shown in  FIG. 13  and the other components are omitted to be shown. 
     The sentence analyzing unit  1400  analyses a character string specified at the input unit  1100  or the speech recognition unit  1200 . In the present embodiment as shown in  FIG. 13 , the sentence analyzing unit  1400  includes a character string specifying unit  1410 , a morpheme extracting unit  1420 , a morpheme database  1430 , an input type determining unit  1440  and an utterance type database  1450 . The character string specifying unit  1410  segments a series of character strings specified by the input unit  1100  or the speech recognition unit  1200  into segments. Each segment is a minimum segmented sentence which is segmented in the extent to keep a grammatical meaning. Specifically, if the series of the character strings have a time interval more than a certain interval, the character string specifying unit  1410  segments the character strings there. The character string specifying unit  1410  outputs the segmented character strings to the morpheme extracting unit  1420  and the input type determining unit  1440 . Note that a “character string” to be described below means one segmented character string. 
     [Morpheme Extracting Unit] 
     The morpheme extracting unit  1420  extracts morphemes constituting minimum units of the character string as first morpheme information from each of the segmented character strings based on each of the segmented character strings segmented by the character string specifying unit  1410 . In the present embodiment, a morpheme means a minimum unit of a word structure shown in a character string. For example, each minimum unit of a word structure may be a word class such as a noun, an adjective and a verb. 
     In the present embodiment as shown in  FIG. 14 , the morphemes are indicated as m 1 , m 2 , m 3 , . . . .  FIG. 14 . is a diagram showing a relation between a character string and morphemes extracted from the character string. The morpheme extracting unit  1420 , which has received the character strings from the character string specifying unit  1410 , compares the received character strings and morpheme groups previously stored in the morpheme database  1430  (each of the morpheme group is prepared as a morpheme dictionary in which a direction word, a reading, a word class and infected forms are described for each morpheme belonging to each word-class classification) as shown in  FIG. 14 . The morpheme extracting unit  1420 , which has executed the comparison, extracts coincident morphemes (m 1 , m 2 , . . . ) with any of the stored morpheme groups from the character strings. Other morphemes (n 1 , n 2 , n 3 , . . . ) than the extracted morphemes may be auxiliary verbs, for example. 
     The morpheme extracting unit  1420  outputs the extracted morphemes to a topic specification information retrieval unit  1350  as the first morpheme information. Note that the first morpheme information is not needed to be structurized. Here, “structurizing” means classifying and arranging morphemes included in a character string based on word classes. For example, it may be data conversion in which a character string as an uttered sentence is segmented into morphemes and then the morphemes are arranged in a prescribed order such as “Subject+Object+Predicate”. Needless to say, the structurized first morpheme information doesn&#39;t prevent the operations of the present embodiment. 
     [Input Type Determining Unit] 
     The input type determining unit  1440  determines an uttered contents type (utterance type) based on the character strings specified by the character string specifying unit  1410 . In the present embodiment, the utterance type is information for specifying the uttered contents type and, for example, corresponds to “uttered sentence type” shown in  FIG. 15 .  FIG. 15  is a table showing the “uttered sentence types”, two-alphabet codes representing the uttered sentence types, and uttered sentence examples corresponding to the uttered sentence types. 
     Here in the present embodiment as shown in  FIG. 15 , the “uttered sentence types” include declarative sentences (D: Declaration), time sentences (T: Time), locational sentences (L: Location), negational sentences (N: Negation) and so on. A sentence configured by each of these types is an affirmative sentence or an interrogative sentence. A “declarative sentence” means a sentence showing a user&#39;s opinion or notion. In the present embodiment, one example of the “declarative sentence” is the sentence “I like Sato” shown in  FIG. 15 . A “locational sentence” means a sentence involving a location concept. A “time sentence” means a sentence involving a time concept. A “negational sentence” means a sentence to deny a declarative sentence. Sentence examples of the “uttered sentence types” are shown in  FIG. 15 . 
     In the present embodiment as shown in  FIG. 16 , the input type determining unit  1440  uses a declarative expression dictionary for determination of a declarative sentence, a negational expression dictionary for determination of a negational sentence and so on in order to determine the “uttered sentence type”. Specifically, the input type determining unit  1440 , which has received the character strings from the character string specifying unit  1410 , compares the received character strings and the dictionaries stored in the utterance type database  1450  based on the received character string. The input type determining unit  1440 , which has executed the comparison, extracts elements relevant to the dictionaries among the character strings. 
     The input type determining unit  1440  determines the “uttered sentence type” based on the extracted elements. For example, if the character string includes elements declaring an event, the input type determining unit  1440  determines that the character string including the elements is a declarative sentence. The input type determining unit  1440  outputs the determined “uttered sentence type” to a reply retrieval unit  1380 . 
     [Conversation Database] 
     A configuration example of data structure stored in the conversation database  1500  will be described with reference to  FIG. 17 .  FIG. 17  is a conceptual diagram showing the configuration example of data stored in the conversation database  1500 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 17 , the conversation database  1500  stores a plurality of topic specification information  810  for specifying a conversation topic. In addition, topic specification information  810  can be associated with other topic specification information  810 . For example, if topic specification information C ( 810 ) is specified, three of topic specification information A ( 810 ), B ( 810 ) and D ( 810 ) associated with the topic specification information C ( 810 ) are also specified. 
     Specifically in the present embodiment, topic specification information  810  means “keywords” which are relevant to input contents expected to be input from users or relevant to reply sentences to users. 
     The topic specification information  810  is associated with one or more topic titles  820 . Each of the topic titles  820  is configured with a morpheme composed of one character, plural character strings or a combination thereof. A reply sentence  830  to be output to users is stored in association with each of the topic titles  820 . Response types indicate types of the reply sentences  830  and are associated with the reply sentences  830 , respectively. 
     Next, an association between the topic specification information  810  and the other topic specification information  810  will be described.  FIG. 18  is a diagram showing the association between certain topic specification information  810 A and the other topic specification information  810 B,  810 C 1 - 810 C 4  and  810 D 1 - 810 D 3  . . . . Note that a phrase “stored in association with” mentioned below indicates that, when certain information X is read out, information Y stored in association with the information X can be also read out. For example, a phrase “information Y is stored ‘in association with’ the information X” indicates a state where information for reading out the information Y (such as, a pointer indicating a storing address of the information Y, a physical memory address or a logical address in which the information Y is stored, and so on) is implemented in the information X. 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 18 , the topic specification information can be stored in association with the other topic specification information with respect to a superordinate concept, a subordinate concept, a synonym or an antonym (not shown in  FIG. 18 ). For example as shown in  FIG. 18 , the topic specification information  810 B (amusement) is stored in association with the topic specification information  810 A (movie) as a superordinate concept and stored in a higher level than the topic specification information  810 B (amusement). 
     In addition, subordinate concepts of the topic specification information  810 A (movie), the topic specification information  810 C 1  (director),  810 C 2  (starring actor[ress]),  810 C 3  (distributor),  810 C 4  (screen time),  810 D 1  (“Seven Samurai”),  810 D 2  (“Ran”),  810 D 3  (“Yojimbo”), . . . , are stored in association with the topic specification information  810 A. 
     In addition, synonyms  900  are associated with the topic specification information  810 A. In this example, “work”, “contents” and “cinema” are stored as synonyms of “movie” which is a keyword of the topic specification information  810 A. By defining these synonyms in this manner, the topic specification information  810 A can be treated as included in an uttered sentence even though the uttered sentence doesn&#39;t include the keyword “movie” but includes “work”, “contents” or “cinema”. 
     In the conversation controller  1000  according to the present embodiment, when certain topic specification information  810  has been specified with reference to contents stored in the conversation database  1500 , other topic specification information  810  and the topic titles  820  or the reply sentences  830  of the other topic specification information  810 , which are stored in association with the certain topic specification information  810 , can be retrieved and extracted rapidly. 
     Next, data configuration examples of topic titles  820  (also referred as “second morpheme information”) will be described with reference to  FIG. 19 .  FIG. 19  is a diagram showing the data configuration examples of the topic titles  820 . 
     The topic specification information  810 D 1 ,  810 D 2 ,  810 D 3 , . . . , include the topic titles  820   1 ,  820   2 , . . . , the topic titles  820   3 ,  820   4 , . . . , the topic titles  820   5 ,  820   6 , . . . , respectively. In the present embodiment as shown in  FIG. 19 , each of the topic titles  820  is information composed of first specification information  1001 , second specification information  1002  and third specification information  1003 . Here, the first specification information  1001  is a main morpheme constituting a topic. For example, the first specification information  1001  may be a Subject of a sentence. In addition, the second specification information  1002  is a morpheme closely relevant to the first specification information  1001 . For example, the second specification information  1002  may be an Object. Furthermore, the third specification information  1003  in the present embodiment is a morpheme showing a movement of a certain subject, a morpheme of a noun modifier and so on. For example, the third specification information  1003  may be a verb, an adverb or an adjective. Note that the first specification information  1001 , the second specification information  1002  and the third specification information  1003  are not limited to the above meanings. The present embodiment can be effected in case where contents of a sentence can be understood based on the first specification information  1001 , the second specification information  1002  and the third specification information  1003  even though they are give other meanings (other ward classes). 
     For example as shown in  FIG. 19 , if the Subject is “Seven Samurai” and the adjective is “interesting”, the topic title  820   2  (second morpheme information) consists of the morpheme “Seven Samurai” included in the first specification information  1001  and the morpheme “interesting” included in the third specification information  1003 . Note that the second specification information  1002  of this topic title  820   2  includes no morpheme and a symbol “*” is stored in the second specification information  1002  for indicating no morpheme included. 
     Note that this topic title  820   2  (Seven Samurai; *; interesting) has the meaning of “Seven Samurai is interesting.” Hereinafter, parenthetic contents for a topic title  820   2  indicate the specification information  1001 , the second specification information  1002  and the third specification information  1003  from the left. In addition, when no morpheme is included in any of the first to third specification information, “*” is indicated therein. 
     Note that the specification information constituting the topic titles  820  is not limited to three and other specification information (fourth specification information and more) may be included. 
     The reply sentences  830  will be described with reference to  FIG. 20 . In the present embodiment as shown in  FIG. 20 , the reply sentences  830  are classified into different types (response types) such as declaration (D: Declaration), time (T: Time), location (L: Location) and negation (N: Negation) for making a reply corresponding to the uttered sentence type of the user&#39;s utterance. Note that an affirmative sentence is classified with “A” and an interrogative sentence is classified with “Q”. 
     A configuration example of data structure of the topic specification information  810  will be described with reference to  FIG. 21 .  FIG. 21  shows a concrete example of the topic titles  820  and the reply sentences  830  associated with the topic specification information  810  “Sato”. 
     The topic specification information  810  “Sato” is associated with plural topic titles ( 820 )  1 - 1 ,  1 - 2 , . . . . Each of the topic titles ( 820 )  1 - 1 ,  1 - 2 , . . . is associated with reply sentences ( 830 )  1 - 1 ,  1 - 2 , . . . . The reply sentence  830  is prepared per each of the response types  840 . 
     For example, when the topic title ( 820 )  1 - 1  is (Sato; *; like) [these are extracted morphemes included in “I like Sato”], the reply sentences ( 830 )  1 - 1  associated with the topic title ( 820 )  1 - 1  include (DA: a declarative affirmative sentence “I like Sato, too.”) and (TA: a time affirmative sentence “I like Sato at bat.”). The after-mentioned reply retrieval unit  1380  retrieves one reply sentence  830  associated with the topic title  820  with reference to an output from the input type determining unit  1440 . 
     Next-plan designation information  840  is allocated to each of the reply sentences  830 . The next-plan designation information  840  is information for designating a reply sentence to be preferentially output against a user&#39;s utterance in association with the each of the reply sentences (referred as a “next-reply sentence”). The next-plan designation information  840  may be any information even if a next-reply sentence can be specified by the information. For example, the information may be a reply sentence ID, by which at least one reply sentence can be specified among all reply sentences stored in the conversation database  1500 . 
     In the present embodiment, the next-plan designation information  840  is described as information for specifying one next-reply sentence per one reply sentence (for example, a reply sentence ID). However, the next-plan designation information  840  may be information for specifying next-reply sentences per topic specification information  810  or per one topic title  820 . (In this case, since plural replay sentences are designated, they are referred as a “next-reply sentence group”. However, only one of the reply sentences included in the next-reply sentence group will be actually output as the reply sentence.) For example, the present embodiment can be effected in case where a topic title ID or a topic specification information ID is used as the next-plan designation information. 
     [Conversation Control Unit] 
     A configuration example of the conversation control unit  1300  is further described with referring back to  FIG. 13 . 
     The conversation control unit  1300  functions to control data transmitting between configuration components in the conversation controller  1000  (the speech recognition unit  1200 , the sentence analyzing unit  1400 , the conversation database  1500 , the output unit  1600  and the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 ), and determine and output a reply sentence in response to a user&#39;s utterance. 
     In the present embodiment shown in  FIG. 13 , the conversation control unit  1300  includes a managing unit  1310 , a plan conversation process unit  1320 , a discourse space conversation control process unit  1330  and a CA conversation process unit  1340 . Hereinafter, these configuration components will be described. 
     [Managing Unit] 
     The managing unit  1310  functions to store discourse histories and update, if needed, the discourse histories. The managing unit  1310  further functions to transmit some or entire of the stored discourse histories to a part or a whole of the discourse histories to a topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 , an elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 , a topic retrieval unit  1370  or a reply retrieval unit  1380  in response to a request therefrom. 
     [Plan Conversation Process Unit] 
     The plan conversation process unit  1320  functions to execute plans and establish conversations between a user and the conversation controller  1000  according to the plans. A “plan” means providing a predetermined reply to a user in a predetermined order. 
     The plan conversation process unit  1320  functions to output the predetermined reply in the predetermined order in response to a user&#39;s utterance. 
       FIG. 22  is a conceptual diagram to describe plans. As shown in  FIG. 22 , various plans  1402  such as plural plans  1 ,  2 ,  3  and  4  are prepared in a plan space  1401 . The plan space  1401  is a set of the plural plans  1402  stored in the conversation database  1500 . The conversation controller  1000  selects a preset plan  1402  for a start-up on an activation or a conversation start or arbitrarily selects one of the plans  1402  in the plan space  1401  in response to a user&#39;s utterance contents in order to output a reply sentence against the user&#39;s utterance by using the selected plan  1402 . 
       FIG. 23  shows a configuration example of plans  1402 . Each plan  1402  includes a reply sentence  1501  and next-plan designation information  1502  associated therewith. The next-plan designation information  1502  is information for specifying, in response to a certain reply sentence  1501  in a plan  1402 , another plan  1402  including a reply sentence to be output to a user (referred as a “next-reply candidate sentence”). In this example, the plan  1  includes a reply sentence A ( 1501 ) to be output at an execution of the plan  1  by the conversation controller  1000  and next-plan designation information  1502  associated with the reply sentence A ( 1501 ). The next-plan designation information  1502  is information [ID: 002] for specifying a plan  2  including a reply sentence B ( 1501 ) to be a next-reply candidate sentence to the reply sentence A ( 1501 ). Similarly, since the reply sentence B ( 1501 ) is also associated with next-plan designation information  1502 , another plan  1402  [ID: 043] including the next-reply candidate sentence will be designated when the reply sentence B ( 1501 ) has output. In this manner, plans  1402  are chained via next-plan designation information  1502  and plan conversations in which a series of successive contents can be output to a user. 
     In other words, since contents expected to be provided to a user (an explanatory sentence, an announcement sentence, a questionnaire and so on) are separated into plural reply sentences and the reply sentences are prepared as a plan with their order predetermined, it becomes possible to provide a series of the reply sentences to the user in response to the user&#39;s utterances. Note that a reply sentence  1501  included in a plan  1402  designated by next-plan designation information  1502  is not needed to be output to a user immediately after an output of the user&#39;s utterance in response to an output of a previous reply sentence. The reply sentence  1501  included in the plan  1402  designated by the next-plan designation information  1502  may be output after an intervening conversation on a different topic from a topic in the plan between the conversation controller  1000  and the user. 
     Note that the reply sentence  1501  shown in  FIG. 23  corresponds to a sentence string of one of the reply sentences  830  shown in  FIG. 21 . In addition, the next-plan designation information  1502  shown in  FIG. 23  corresponds to the next-plan designation information  840  shown in  FIG. 21 . 
     Note that linkages between the plans  1402  are not limited to form a one-dimensional geometry shown in  FIG. 23 .  FIG. 24  shows an example of plans  1402  with another linkage geometry. In the example shown in  FIG. 24 , a plan  1  ( 1402 ) includes two of next-plan designation information  1502  to designate two reply sentences as next replay candidate sentences, in other words, to designate two plans  1402 . The two of next-plan designation information  1502  are prepared in order that the plan  2  ( 1402 ) including a reply sentence B ( 1501 ) and the plan  3  ( 1402 ) including a reply sentence C ( 1501 ) are to be designated as plans each including a next-reply candidate sentence. Note that the reply sentences are selective and alternative, so that, when one has been output, another is not output and then the plan  1  ( 1501 ) is terminated. In this manner, the linkages between the plans  1402  is not limited to forming a one-dimensional geometry and may form a tree-diagram-like geometry or a cancellous geometry. 
     Note that it is not limited that how many next-reply candidate sentences each plan  1402  includes. In addition, no next-plan designation information  1502  may be included in a plan  1402  which terminates a conversation. 
       FIG. 25  shows an example of a certain series of plans  1402 . As shown in  FIG. 25 , this series of plans  1402   1  to  1402   4  are associated with reply sentences  1501   1  to  1501   4  which notify crisis management information to a user. The reply sentences  1501   1  to  1501   4  constitute one coherent topic as a whole. Each of the plans  1402   1  to  1402   4  includes ID data  1702   1  to  1702   4  for indicating itself such as “1000-01, 1000-02”, “1000-03” and “1000-04”, respectively. In addition, each of the plans  1402   1  to  1402   4  further includes ID data  1502   1  to  1502   4  as the next-plan designation information such as “1000-02, 1000-03”, “1000-04” and “1000-0F”, respectively. Note that each value after a hyphen in the ID data is information indicating an output order. Especially, “0F” is information indicating the final plan (the last in the order). 
     In this example, the plan conversation process unit  1320  starts to execute this series of plans when a user has uttered &#39;s utterance has been “Please tell me a crisis management applied when a large earthquake occurs.” Specifically, the plan conversation process unit  1320  searches in the plan space  1401  and checks whether or not a plan  1402  including a reply sentence  1501   1  associated with the user&#39;s utterance “Please tell me a crisis management applied when a large earthquake occurs,” when the plan conversation process unit  1320  has received the user&#39;s utterance “Please tell me a crisis management applied when a large earthquake occurs.” In this example, a user&#39;s utterance character string  1701   1  associated with the user&#39;s utterance “Please tell me a crisis management applied when a large earthquake occurs,” is associated with a plan  1402   1 . 
     The plan conversation process unit  1320  retrieves the reply sentence  1501   1  included in the plan  1402   1  on discovering the plan  1402   1  and outputs the reply sentence  1501   1  to the user as a reply sentence in response to the user&#39;s utterance. And then, the plan conversation process unit  1320  specifies the next-reply candidate sentence with reference to the next-plan designation information  1502   1 . 
     Next, the plan conversation process unit  1320  executes the plan  1402   2  on receiving another user&#39;s utterance via the input unit  1100 , a speech recognition unit  1200  or the like after an output of the reply sentence  1501   1 . Specifically, the plan conversation process unit  1320  judges whether or not to execute the plan  1402   2  designated by the next-plan designation information  1502   1 , in other words, whether or not to output the second reply sentence  1501   2 . More specifically, the plan conversation process unit  1320  compares a user&#39;s utterance character string (also referred as an illustrative sentence)  1701   2  associated with the reply sentence  1501   2  and the received user&#39;s utterance, or compares a topic title  820  (not shown in  FIG. 25 ) associated with the reply sentence  1501   2  and the received user&#39;s utterance. And then, the plan conversation process unit  1320  determines whether or not the two are related to each other. If the two are related to each other, the plan conversation process unit  1320  outputs the second reply sentence  1501   2 . In addition, since the plan  1402   2  including the second reply sentence  1501   2  also includes the next-plan designation information  1502   2 , the next-reply candidate sentence is specified. 
     Similarly, according to ongoing user&#39;s utterances, the plan conversation process unit  1320  transit into the plans  1402   3  and  1402   4  in turn and can output the third and fourth reply sentences  1501   3  and  1501   4 . Note that, since the fourth reply sentence  1501   4  is the final reply sentence, the plan conversation process unit  1320  terminates plan-executions when the fourth reply sentence  1501   4  has been output. 
     In this manner, the plan conversation process unit  1320  can provide previously prepared conversation contents to the user in a predetermined order by sequentially executing the plans  1402   1  to  1402   4 . 
     [Discourse Space Conversation Control Process Unit] 
     The configuration example of the conversation control unit  1300  is further described with referring back to  FIG. 13 . 
     The discourse space conversation control process unit  1330  includes the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 , the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 , the topic retrieval unit  1370  and the reply retrieval unit  1380 . The managing unit  1310  totally controls the conversation control unit  1300 . 
     A “discourse history” is information for specifying a conversation topic or theme between a user and the conversation controller  1000  and includes at least one of “focused topic specification information”, a “focused topic title”, “user input sentence topic specification information” and “reply sentence topic specification information”. The “focused topic specification information”, the “focused topic title” and the “reply sentence topic specification information” are not limited to be defined from a conversation done just before but may be defined from the previous “focused topic specification information”, the “focused topic title” and the “reply sentence topic specification information” during a predetermined past period or from an accumulated record thereof. 
     Hereinbelow, each of the units constituting the discourse space conversation control process unit  1330  will be described. 
     [Topic Specification Information Retrieval Unit] 
     The topic specification information retrieval unit  1350  compares the first morpheme information extracted by the morpheme extracting unit  1420  and the topic specification information, and then retrieves the topic specification information corresponding to a morpheme in the first morpheme information among the topic specification information. Specifically, when the first morpheme information received from the morpheme extracting unit  1420  is two morphemes “Sato” and “like”, the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350  compares the received first morpheme information and the topic specification information group. 
     If a focused topic title  820   focus  (indicated as  820   focus  to be differentiated from previously retrieved topic titles or other topic titles) includes a morpheme (for example, “Sato”) in the first morpheme information, the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350  outputs the focused topic title  820   focus  to the reply retrieval unit  1380 . On the other hand, if no focused topic title  820   focus  includes the morpheme in the first morpheme information, the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350  determines user input sentence topic specification information based on the received first morpheme information, and then outputs the first morpheme information and the user input sentence topic specification information to the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 . Note that the “user input sentence topic specification information” is topic specification information corresponding-to or probably-corresponding-to a morpheme relevant to topic contents talked by a user among morphemes included in the first morpheme information. 
     [Elliptical Sentence Complementation Unit] 
     The elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360  generates various complemented first morpheme information by complementing the first morpheme information with the previously retrieved topic specification information  810  (hereinafter referred as the “focused topic specification information”) and the topic specification information  810  included in the final reply sentence (hereinafter referred as the “reply sentence topic specification information”). For example, if a user&#39;s utterance is “like”, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360  generates the complemented first morpheme information “Sato, like” by including the focused topic specification information “Sato” into the first morpheme information “like”. 
     In other words, if it is assumed that the first morpheme information is defined as “W” and a set of the focused topic specification information and the reply sentence topic specification information is defined as “D”, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360  generates the complemented first morpheme information by including an element(s) in the set “D” into the first morpheme information “W”. 
     In this manner, in case where, for example, a sentence constituted with the first morpheme information is an elliptical sentence which is unclear as a language, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360  can include, by using the set “D”, an element(s) (for example, “Sato”) in the set “D” into the first morpheme information “W”. As a result, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360  can complement the first morpheme information “like” into the complemented first morpheme information “Sato, like”. Note that the complemented first morpheme information “Sato, like” corresponds to a user&#39;s utterance “I like Sato.” 
     That is, even when user&#39;s utterance contents are provided as an elliptical sentence, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360  can complement the elliptical sentence by using the set “D”. As a result, even when a sentence constituted with the first morpheme information is an elliptical sentence, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360  can complement the sentence into an appropriate sentence as a language. 
     In addition, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360  retrieves the topic title  820  related to the complemented first morpheme information based on the set “D”. If the topic title  820  related to the complemented first morpheme information has been found, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360  outputs the topic title  820  to the reply retrieval unit  1380 . The reply retrieval unit  1380  can output a reply sentence  830  best-suited for the user&#39;s utterance contents based on the appropriate topic title  820  found by the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 . 
     Note that the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360  is not limited to including an element(s) in the set “D” into the first morpheme information. The elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360  may include, based on a focused topic title, a morpheme(s) included in any of the first, second and third specification information in the topic title, into the extracted first morpheme information. 
     [Topic Retrieval Unit] 
     The topic retrieval unit  1370  compares the first morpheme information and topic titles  820  associated with the user input sentence topic specification information to retrieve a topic title  820  best-suited for the first morpheme information among the topic titles  820  when the topic title  820  has not been determined by the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 . 
     Specifically, the topic retrieval unit  1370 , which has received a retrieval command signal from the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 , retrieves the topic title  820  best-suited for the first morpheme information among the topic titles associated with the user input sentence topic specification information based on the user input sentence topic specification information and the first morpheme information which are included in the received retrieval command signal. The topic retrieval unit  1370  outputs the retrieved topic title  820  as a retrieval result signal to the reply retrieval unit  1380 . 
     Above-mentioned  FIG. 21  shows the concrete example of the topic titles  820  and the reply sentences  830  associated with the topic specification information  810  (=“Sato”). For example as shown in  FIG. 21 , since topic specification information  810  (=“Sato”) is included in the received first morpheme information “Sato, like”, the topic retrieval unit  1370  specifies the topic specification information  810  (=“Sato”) and then compares the topic titles ( 820 )  1 - 1 ,  1 - 2 , . . . associated with the topic specification information  810  (=“Sato”) and the received first morpheme information “Sato, like”. 
     The topic retrieval unit  1370  retrieves the topic title ( 820 )  1 - 1  (Sato; *; like) related to the received first morpheme information “Sato, like” among the topic titles ( 820 )  1 - 1 ,  1 - 2 , . . . based on the comparison result. The topic retrieval unit  1370  outputs the retrieved topic title ( 820 )  1 - 1  (Sato; *; like) as a retrieval result signal to the reply retrieval unit  1380 . 
     [Reply Retrieval Unit] 
     The reply retrieval unit  1380  retrieves, based on the topic title  820  retrieved by the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360  or the topic retrieval unit  1370 , a reply sentence associated with the topic title  820 . In addition, the reply retrieval unit  1380  compares, based on the topic title  820  retrieved by the topic retrieval unit  1370 , the response types associated with the topic title  820  and the utterance type determined by the input type determining unit  1440 . The reply retrieval unit  1380 , which has executed the comparison, retrieves one response type related to the determined utterance type among the response types. 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 21 , when the topic title retrieved by the topic retrieval unit  1370  is the topic title  1 - 1  (Sato; *; like), the reply retrieval unit  1380  specifies the response type (for example, DA) coincident with the “uttered sentence type” (DA) determined by the input type determining unit  1440  among the reply sentences  1 - 1  (DA, TA and so on) associated with the topic title  1 - 1 . The reply retrieval unit  1380 , which has specified the response type (DA), retrieves the reply sentence  1 - 1  (“I like Sato, too.”) associated with the response type (DA) based on the specified response type (DA). 
     Here, “A” in above-mentioned “DA”, “TA” and so on means an affirmative form. Therefore, when the utterance types and the response types include “A”, it indicates an affirmation on a certain matter. In addition, the utterance types and the response types can include the types of “DQ”, “TQ” and so on. “Q” in “DQ”, “TQ” and so on means a question about a certain matter. 
     If the response type takes an interrogative form (Q), a reply sentence associated with this response type takes an affirmative form (A). A reply sentence with an affirmative form (A) may be a sentence for replying to a question and so on. For example, when an uttered sentence is “Have you ever operated slot machines?”, the utterance type of the uttered sentence is an interrogative form (Q). A reply sentence associated with this interrogative form (Q) may be “I have operated slot machines before,” (affirmative form (A)), for example. 
     On the other hand, when the response type is an affirmative form (A), a reply sentence associated with this response type takes an interrogative form (Q). A reply sentence in an interrogative form (Q) may be an interrogative sentence for asking back against uttered contents, an interrogative sentence for getting out a certain matter. For example, when the uttered sentence is “Playing slot machines is my hobby,” the utterance type of this uttered sentence takes an affirmative form (A). A reply sentence associated with this affirmative form (A) may be “Playing pachinko is your hobby, isn&#39;t it?” (an interrogative sentence (Q) for getting out a certain matter), for example. 
     The reply retrieval unit  1380  outputs the retrieved reply sentence  830  as a reply sentence signal to the managing unit  1310 . The managing unit  1310 , which has received the reply sentence signal from the reply retrieval unit  1380 , outputs the received reply sentence signal to the output unit  1600 . 
     [CA Conversation Process Unit] 
     When a reply sentence in response to a user&#39;s utterance has not been determined by the plan conversation process unit  1320  or the discourse space conversation control process unit  1330 , the CA conversation process unit  1340  functions to output a reply sentence for continuing a conversation with a user according to contents of the user&#39;s utterance. 
     The configuration example of the conversation controller  1000  is further described with referring back to  FIG. 9 . 
     [Output Unit] 
     The output unit  1600  outputs the reply sentence retrieved by the reply retrieval unit  1380 . The output unit  1600  may be a speaker or a display, for example. Specifically, the output unit  1600 , which has received the reply sentence from the reply retrieval unit  1380 , outputs voice sounds of the received reply sentence (for example, “I like Sato, too,”) based on the received reply sentence. With that, describing the configuration example of the conversation controller  1000  has ended. 
     [Conversation Control Method] 
     The conversation controller  100  with the above-mentioned configuration puts a conversation control method in execution by operating as described hereinbelow. 
     Next, operations of the conversation controller  1000 , more specifically the conversation control unit  1300 , according to the present embodiment will be described. 
       FIG. 26  is a flow-chart showing an example of a main process executed by conversation control unit  1300 . This main process is a process executed each time when the conversation control unit  1300  receives a user&#39;s utterance. A reply sentence in response to the user&#39;s utterance is output due to an execution of this main process, so that a conversation (an interlocution) between a user and the conversation controller  100  is established. 
     Upon executing the main process, the conversation controller  100 , more specifically the plan conversation process unit  1320  firstly executes a plan conversation control process (S 1801 ). The plan conversation control process is a process for executing a plan(s). 
       FIGS. 27 and 28  are flow-charts showing an example of the plan conversation control process. Hereinbelow, the example of the plan conversation control process will be described with reference to  FIGS. 27 and 28 . 
     Upon executing the plan conversation control process, the plan conversation process unit  1320  firstly executes a basic control state information check (S 1901 ). The basic control state information is information on whether or not an execution(s) of a plan(s) has been completed and is stored in a predetermined memory area. 
     The basic control state information serves to indicate a basic control state of a plan. 
       FIG. 29  is a diagram showing four basic control states which are possibly established due to a so-called scenario-type plan. 
     (1) Cohesiveness 
     This basic control state corresponds to a case where a user&#39;s utterance is coincident with the currently executed plan  1402 , more specifically the topic title  820  or the example sentence  1701  associated with the plan  1402 . In this case, the plan conversation process unit  1320  terminates the plan  1402  and then transfers to another plan  1402  corresponding to the reply sentence  1501  designated by the next-plan designation information  1502 . 
     (2) Cancellation 
     This basic control state is a basic control state which is set in a case where it is determined that user&#39;s utterance contents require a completion of a plan  1402  or that a user&#39;s interest has changed to another matter than the currently executed plan. When the basic control state indicates the cancellation, the plan conversation process unit  1320  retrieves another plan  1402  associated with the user&#39;s utterance than the plan  1402  targeted as the cancellation. If the other plan  1402  exists, the plan conversation process unit  1320  start to execute the other plan  1402 . If the other plan  1402  does not exist, the plan conversation process unit  1320  terminates a execution(s) of a plan(s). 
     (3) Maintenance 
     This basic control state is a basic control state which is set in a case where a user&#39;s utterance is not coincident with the topic title  820  (see  FIG. 21 ) or the example sentence  1701  (see  FIG. 25 ) associated with the currently executed plan  1402  and also the user&#39;s utterance does not correspond to the basic control state “cancellation”. 
     In the case of this basic control state, the plan conversation process unit  1320  firstly determines whether or not to resume a pending or pausing plan  1402  on receiving the user&#39;s utterance. If the user&#39;s utterance is not adapted for resuming the plan  1402 , for example, in case where the user&#39;s utterance is not related to a topic title  820  or an example sentence  1701  associated with the plan  1402 , the plan conversation process unit  1320  starts to execute another plan  1402 , an after-mentioned discourse space conversation control process (S 1802 ) and so on. If the user&#39;s utterance is adapted for resuming the plan  1402 , the plan conversation process unit  1320  outputs a reply sentence  1501  based on the stored next-plan designation information  1502 . 
     In case where the basic control state is the “maintenance”, the plan conversation process unit  1320  retrieves other plans  1402  in order to enable outputting another reply sentence than the reply sentence  1501  associated with the currently executed plan  1402 , or executes the discourse space conversation control process. However, if the user&#39;s utterance is adapted for resuming the plan  1402 , the plan conversation process unit  1320  resumes the plan  1402 . 
     (4) Continuation 
     This state is a basic control state which is set in a case where a user&#39;s utterance is not related to reply sentences  1501  included in the currently executed plan  1402 , contents of the user&#39;s utterance do not correspond to the basic control sate “cancellation” and use&#39;s intention construed from the user&#39;s utterance is not clear. 
     In case where the basic control state is the “continuation”, the plan conversation process unit  1320  firstly determines whether or not to resume a pending or pausing plan  1402  on receiving the user&#39;s utterance. If the user&#39;s utterance is not adapted for resuming the plan  1402 , the plan conversation process unit  1320  executes an after-mentioned CA conversation control process in order to enable outputting a reply sentence for getting out a further user&#39;s utterance. 
     The plan conversation control process is further described with referring back to  FIG. 27 . 
     The plan conversation process unit  1320 , which has referred to the basic control state, determines whether or not the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is the “cohesiveness” (step S 1902 ). If it has been determined that the basic control state is the “cohesiveness” (YES in step S 1902 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320  determines whether or not the reply sentence  1501  is the final reply sentence in the currently executed plan  1402  (step S 1903 ). 
     If it has been determined that the final reply sentence  1501  has been output already (YES in step S 1903 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320  retrieves another plan  1402  related to the use&#39;s utterance in the plan space in order to determine whether or not to execute the other plan  1402  (step S 1904 ) because the plan conversation process unit  1320  has provided all contents to be replied to the user already. If the other plan  1402  related to the user&#39;s utterance has not been found due to this retrieval (NO in step S 1905 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320  terminates the plan conversation control process because no plan  1402  to be provided to the user exists. 
     On the other hand, if the other plan  1402  related to the user&#39;s utterance has been found due to this retrieval (YES in step S 1905 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320  transfers into the other plan  1402  (step S 1906 ). Since the other plan  1402  to be provided to the user still remains, an execution of the other plan  1402  (an output of the reply sentence  1501  included in the other plan  1402 ) is started. 
     Next, the plan conversation process unit  1320  outputs the reply sentence  1501  included in that plan  1402  (step S 1908 ). The reply sentence  1501  is output as a reply to the user&#39;s utterance, so that the plan conversation process unit  1320  provides information to be supplied to the user. 
     The plan conversation process unit  1320  terminates the plan conversation control process after the reply sentence output process (step S 1908 ). 
     On the other hand, if the previously output reply sentence  1501  is not determined as the final reply sentence in the determination whether or not the previously output reply sentence  1501  is the final reply sentence (step S 1903 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320  transfers into a plan  1402  associated with the reply sentence  1501  following the previously output reply sentence  1501 , i.e. the specified reply sentence  1501  by the next-plan designation information  1502  (step S 1907 ). 
     Subsequently, the plan conversation process unit  1320  outputs the reply sentence  1501  included in that plan  1402  to provide a reply to the user&#39;s utterance (step  1908 ). The reply sentence  1501  is output as the reply to the user&#39;s utterance, so that the plan conversation process unit  1320  provides information to be supplied to the user. The plan conversation process unit  1320  terminates the plan conversation control process after the reply sentence output process (step S 1908 ). 
     Here, if the basic control state is not the “cohesiveness” in the determination process in step S 1902  (NO in step S 1902 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320  determines whether or not the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is the “cancellation” (step S 1909 ). If it has been determined that the basic control state is the “cancellation” (YES in step S 1909 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320  retrieves another plan  1402  related to the use&#39;s utterance in the plan space  1401  in order to determine whether or not the other plan  1402  to be started newly exists (step S 1904 ) because a plan  1402  to be successively executed does not exist. Subsequently, the plan conversation process unit  1320  executes the processes of steps S 1905  to S 1908  as well as the processes in case of the above-mentioned step S 1903  (YES). 
     On the other hand, if the basic control state is not the “cancellation” in the determination process in step S 1902  (NO in step S 1902 ) in the determination whether or not the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is the “cancellation” (step S 1909 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320  further determines whether or not the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is the “maintenance” (step S 1910 ). 
     If the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is the “maintenance” (YES in step S 1910 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320  determined whether or not the user presents the interest on the pending or pausing plan  1402  again and then resumes the pending or pausing plan  1402  in case where the interest is presented (step S 2001  in  FIG. 28 ). In other words, the plan conversation process unit  1320  evaluates the pending or pausing plan  1402  (step S 2001  in  FIG. 28 ) and then determines whether or not the user&#39;s utterance is related to the pending or pausing plan  1402  (step S 2002 ). 
     If it has been determined that the user&#39;s utterance is related to that plan  1402  (YES in step S 2002 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320  transfers into the plan  1402  related to the user&#39;s utterance (step S 2003 ) and then executes the reply sentence output process (step S 1908  in  FIG. 27 ) to output the reply sentence  1501  included in the plan  1402 . Operating in this manner, the plan conversation process unit  1320  can resume the pending or pausing plan  1402  according to the user&#39;s utterance, so that all contents included in the previously prepared plan  1402  can be provided to the user. 
     On the other hand, if it has been determined that the user&#39;s utterance is not related to that plan  1402  (NO in step S 2002 ) in the above-mentioned S 2002  (see  FIG. 28 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320  retrieves another plan  1402  related to the use&#39;s utterance in the plan space  1401  in order to determine whether or not the other plan  1402  to be started newly exists (step S 1904  in  FIG. 27 ). Subsequently, the plan conversation process unit  1320  executes the processes of steps S 1905  to S 1908  as well as the processes in case of the above-mentioned step S 1903  (YES). 
     If it is determined that the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is not the “maintenance” (NO in step S 1910 ) in the determination in step S 1910 , it means that the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is the “continuation”. In this case, the plan conversation process unit  1320  terminates the plan conversation control process without outputting a reply sentence. With that, describing the plan control process has ended. 
     The main process is further described with referring back to  FIG. 26 . 
     The conversation control unit  1300  executes the discourse space conversation control process (step S 1802 ) after the plan conversation control process (step S 1801 ) has been completed. Note that, if the reply sentence has been output in the plan conversation control process (step S 1801 ), the conversation control unit  1300  executes a basic control information update process (step S 1804 ) without executing the discourse space conversation control process (step S 1802 ) and the after-mentioned CA conversation control process (step S 1803 ) and then terminates the main process. 
       FIG. 30  is a flow-chart showing an example of a discourse space conversation control process according to the present embodiment. 
     The input unit  1100  firstly executes a step for receiving a user&#39;s utterance (step S 2201 ). Specifically, the input unit  1100  receives voice sounds of the user&#39;s utterance. The input unit  1100  outputs the received voice sounds to the speech recognition unit  1200  as a voice signal. Note that the input unit  1100  may receive a character string input by a user (for example, text data input in a text format) instead of the voice sounds. In this case, the input unit  1100  may be a text input device such as a keyboard or a touchscreen. 
     Next, the speech recognition unit  1200  executes a step for specifying a character string corresponding to the uttered contents based on the uttered contents retrieved by the input unit  1100  (step S 2202 ). Specifically, the speech recognition unit  1200 , which has received the voice signal from the input unit  1100 , specifies a word hypothesis (candidate) corresponding to the voice signal based on the received voice signal. The speech recognition unit  1200  retrieves a character string corresponding to the specified word hypothesis and outputs the retrieved character string to the conversation control unit  1300 , more specifically the discourse space conversation control process unit  1330 , as a character string signal. 
     And then, the character string specifying unit  1410  segments a series of the character strings specified by the speech recognition unit  1200  into segments (step S 2203 ). Specifically, if the series of the character strings have a time interval more than a certain interval, the character string specifying unit  1410 , which has received the character string signal or a morpheme signal from the managing unit  1310 , segments the character strings there. The character string specifying unit  1410  outputs the segmented character strings to the morpheme extracting unit  1420  and the input type determining unit  1440 . Note that it is preferred that the character string specifying unit  1410  segments a character string at a punctuation, a space and so on in a case where the character string has been input from a keyboard. 
     Subsequently, the morpheme extracting unit  1420  executes a step for extracting morphemes constituting minimum units of the character string as first morpheme information based on the character string specified by the character string specifying unit  1410  (step S 2204 ). Specifically, the morpheme extracting unit  1420 , which has received the character strings from the character string specifying unit  1410 , compares the received character strings and morpheme groups previously stored in the morpheme database  1430 . Note that, in the present embodiment, each of the morpheme groups is prepared as a morpheme dictionary in which a direction word, a reading, a word class and an inflected forms are described for each morpheme belonging to each word-class classification. 
     The morpheme extracting unit  1420 , which has executed the comparison, extracts coincident morphemes (m 1 , m 2 , . . . ) with the morphemes included in the previously stored morpheme groups from the received character string. The morpheme extracting unit  1420  outputs the extracted morphemes to the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350  as the first morpheme information. 
     Next, the input type determining unit  1440  executes a step for determining the “uttered sentence type” based on the morphemes which constitute one sentence and are specified by the character string specifying unit  1410  (step S 2205 ). Specifically, the input type determining unit  1440 , which has received the character strings from the character string specifying unit  1410 , compares the received character strings and the dictionaries stored in the utterance type database  1450  based on the received character strings and extracts elements relevant to the dictionaries among the character strings. The input type determining unit  1440 , which has extracted the elements, determines to which “uttered sentence type” the extracted element(s) belongs based on the extracted element(s). The input type determining unit  1440  outputs the determined “uttered sentence type” (utterance type) to the reply retrieval unit  1380 . 
     And then, the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350  executes a step for comparing the first morpheme information extracted by the morpheme extracting unit  1420  and the focused topic title  820   focus  (step S 2206 ). 
     If a morpheme in the first morpheme information is related to the focused topic title  820   focus , the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350  outputs the focused topic title  820   focus  to the reply retrieval unit  1380 . On the other hand, if no morpheme in the first morpheme information is related to the focused topic title  820   focus , the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350  outputs the received first morpheme information and the user input sentence topic specification information to the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360  as the retrieval command signal. 
     Subsequently, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360  executes a step for including the focused topic specification information and the reply sentence topic specification information into the received first morpheme information based on the first morpheme information received from the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350  (step S 2207 ). Specifically, if it is assumed that the first morpheme information is defined as “W” and a set of the focused topic specification information and the reply sentence topic specification information is defined as “D”, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360  generates the complemented first morpheme information by including an element(s) in the set “D” into the first morpheme information “W” and compares the complemented first morpheme information and all the topic titles  820  to retrieve the topic title  820  related to the complemented first morpheme information. If the topic title  820  related to the complemented first morpheme information has been found, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360  outputs the topic title  820  to the reply retrieval unit  1380 . On the other hand, if no topic title  820  related to the complemented first morpheme information has been found, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360  outputs the first morpheme information and the user input sentence topic specification information to the topic retrieval unit  1370 . 
     Next, the topic retrieval unit  1370  executes a step for comparing the first morpheme information and the user input sentence topic specification information and retrieves the topic title  820  best-suited for the first morpheme information among the topic titles  820  (step S 2208 ). Specifically, the topic retrieval unit  1370 , which has received the retrieval command signal from the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 , retrieves the topic title  820  best-suited for the first morpheme information among topic titles  820  associated with the user input sentence topic specification information based on the user input sentence topic specification information and the first morpheme information included in the received retrieval command signal. The topic retrieval unit  1370  outputs the retrieved topic title  820  to the reply retrieval unit  1380  as the retrieval result signal. 
     Next, the reply retrieval unit  1380  compares, in order to select the reply sentence  830 , the user&#39;s utterance type determined by the sentence analyzing unit  1400  and the response type associated with the retrieved topic title  820  based on the retrieved topic title  820  by the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 , the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360  or the topic retrieval unit  1370  (step S 2209 ). 
     The reply sentence  830  is selected in particular as explained hereinbelow. Specifically, based on the “topic title” associated with the received retrieval result signal and the received “uttered sentence type”, the reply retrieval unit  1380 , which has received the retrieval result signal from the topic retrieval unit  1370  and the “uttered sentence type” from the input type determining unit  1440 , specifies one response type coincident with the “uttered sentence type” (for example, DA) among the response types associated with the “topic title”. 
     Consequently, the reply retrieval unit  1380  outputs the reply sentence  830  retrieved in step S 2209  to the output unit  1600  via the managing unit  1310  (S 2210 ). The output unit  1600 , which has received the reply sentence  830  from the managing unit  1310 , outputs the received reply sentence  830 . 
     With that, describing the discourse space conversation control process has ended and the main process is further described with referring back to  FIG. 26 . 
     The conversation control unit  1300  executes the CA conversation control process (step S 1803 ) after the discourse space conversation control process has been completed. Note that, if the reply sentence has been output in the plan conversation control process (step S 1801 ) or the discourse space conversation control (S 1802 ), the conversation control unit  1300  executes the basic control information update process (step S 1804 ) without executing the CA conversation control process (step S 1803 ) and then terminates the main process. 
     The CA conversation control process is a process in which it is determined whether a user&#39;s utterance is an utterance for “explaining something”, an utterance for “confirming something”, an utterance for “accusing or rebuking something” or an utterance for “other than these”, and then a reply sentence is output according to the user&#39;s utterance contents and the determination result. 
     By the CA conversation control process, a so-called “bridging” reply sentence for continuing the uninterrupted conversation with the user can be output even if a reply sentence suited for the user&#39;s utterance can not be output by the plan conversation control process nor the discourse space conversation control process. 
     Next, the conversation control unit  1300  executes the basic control information update process (step S 1804 ). In this process, the conversation control unit  1300 , more specifically the managing unit  1310 , sets the basic control information to the “cohesiveness” when the plan conversation process unit  1320  has output a reply sentence, sets the basic control information to the “cancellation” when the plan conversation process unit  1320  has cancelled an output of a reply sentence, sets the basic control information to the “maintenance” when the discourse space conversation control process unit  1330  has output a reply sentence, or sets the basic control information to the “continuation” when the CA conversation process unit  1340  has output a reply sentence. 
     The basic control information set in this basic control information update process is referred in the above-mentioned plan conversation control process (step S 1801 ) to be employed for continuation or resumption of a plan. 
     As described the above, the conversation controller  1000  can executes a previously prepared plan(s) or can adequately respond to a topic(s) which is not included in a plan(s) according to a user&#39;s utterance by executing the main process each time when receiving the user&#39;s utterance. 
     In the gaming terminal  4  of this embodiment, the above-described input unit  1100  of the conversation controller  1000  can be formed of the display  8  (the touch panel  50  fitted thereto) and the microphone  15 . Meanwhile, the output unit  1600  can be formed of the display  8  and the speaker  10 . Further, the speech recognition unit  1200 , the conversation control unit  1300 , and the character string specifying unit  1410 , the morpheme extracting unit  1420  and the input type determining unit  1440  each of which is in the sentence analyzing unit  1400  can be formed of the terminal controller  90 . Meanwhile, both of the morpheme database  1430  and the utterance type database  1450  in the sentence analyzing unit  1400 , the conversation database  1500 , and the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700  can be formed of the external memory  99 . 
     Moreover, in this embodiment, it is possible to determine the language used in the course of the roulette games through the dialog with the player by using the conversation engine, which utilize the conversation controller  1000  achieved in the gaming terminal  4  with the above-described configuration. 
     Accordingly, in order to recognize the type of the language used in the speech message of the player inputted from the microphone  15 , the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700  of the conversation controller  1000  formed of the external memory  99  includes word dictionaries in several languages. Meanwhile, the morpheme database  1430  of the conversation controller  1000  formed of the external memory  99  includes morpheme groups (morpheme dictionaries) in several languages. Further, the utterance type database  1450  of the conversation controller  1000  formed of the external memory  99  also includes dictionaries for the respective utterance types in several languages. 
     Meanwhile, in order to output the speech messages from the speaker  10  to the player in the language selected by the player and to display the messages on the display  8  in the language selected by the player, the conversation database  1500  formed by the terminal controller  90  also stores data of “sentences” in several languages. The “sentences” includes a message for requesting to input a specific word or a specific sentence (either orally or by means of an operation using the display  8 ) in the language desired to be used in the roulette games, a message for asking the player to confirm that the language used for inputting the specific work or the specific sentence is also used to execute the roulette games. 
     Here, instead of providing the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 , the morpheme database  1430 , and the utterance type database  1450  of the conversation controller  1000  with the word dictionaries in multiple languages or storing the “sentence” data in multiple languages in the conversation database  1500 , it is also possible to provide the single gaming terminal  4  with several conversation controllers  1000  depending on the respective language types that the gaming terminal  4  can deal with. 
     Operations of the above-mentioned conversation controller  1000  in the gaming terminal  4  of this embodiment will be described later. 
     Subsequently, contents of the gaming processes to be respectively executed by the server  13 , the roulette device  2 , and the gaming terminal  4  of the roulette game machine  1  according to this embodiment will be described below. 
     With reference to  FIGS. 31 and 32 , descriptions will be provided for a server gaming processing and a roulette gaming processing. Here, the server gaming processing is executed by the server CPU  81  of the server  13  in accordance with programs stored in the ROM  82 , and the roulette gaming processing is executed by the CPU  101  of the roulette device  2  in accordance with programs stored in the ROM  102 .  FIGS. 31 and 32  are flow charts showing the gaming processings of the server  13  and the roulette device  2  in the roulette game machine  1  according to the present embodiment. 
     Firstly, the gaming processing of the server  13  will be described referring to  FIGS. 31 and 32 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 31 , the server CPU  81  starts the measurement of the betting period first (step S 101 ). The betting period is a period when the bet can be placed. The player participating in the game can place a bet on the bet area  72  predicted by himself, by operating the touch panel  50  during the betting period. When the measurement of the betting period is started, the server CPU  81  transmits a betting period start signal to the terminal CPU  91  (step S 102 ). 
     Next, the server CPU  81  judges whether the remaining betting period has become 5 seconds or less (step S 103 ). The remaining betting period is displayed on the bet time display unit  69  of the display  8  at each of the gaming terminals  4  (see  FIG. 5 ). In the case where it is judged that it has not reached the last 5 seconds, the processing will be returned to the step S 103 . On the other hand, in the case where it is judged that it has reached the last 5 seconds, the processing will move to the step S 104 . 
     The server CPU  81  transmits the control signal for starting the operation of the roulette device  2  to the CPU  101  (step S 104 ). After that, the server CPU  81  judges whether the betting period of the roulette game has ended or not (step S 105 ). In the case where it is judged that the betting period has not ended, the server CPU  81  suspends the processing until the betting period ends. On the other hand, in the case where it is judged that the betting period of the roulette game has ended, the server CPU  81  transmits a betting period end signal to the terminal CPU  91  (step S 106 ). 
     Subsequently, the server CPU  81  receives the betting information (the specified bet area  72 , the number of bet chips, and the type of betting) at each gaming terminal  4  from the terminal CPU  91 , and stores it into the betting information memory area  83 A of the RAM  83  (step S 107 ). 
     After that, the server CPU  81  executes a JP accumulation processing (step S 108 ). In this JP accumulation processing, 0.30% of the total credits which have been bet at all the gaming terminals  4  that are received at the step S 107  are accumulatively added to the JP credits stored in the “MINI” JP accumulated memory area  83 C in the RAM  83 . Moreover, in the JP accumulation processing, 0.20% of the total credits are accumulatively added to the JP credits stored in the “MAJOR” JP credit memory area  83 D in the RAM  83 . In addition, in the JP accumulation processing, 0.15% of the total credits are accumulatively added to the JP credits stored in the “MEGA” JP credit memory area  83 E in the RAM  83 . Furthermore, in the JP accumulation processing, the displays on the JP amount display  15 , the MEGA counter  73 , the MAJOR counter  74  and the MINI counter  75  are updated according to the JP credits thus accumulatively added. 
     Next, as shown in  FIG. 32 , the server CPU  81  executes a JP bonus game determination processing (step S 109 ). In this processing, the server CPU  81  determines whether to execute the JP bonus game at each gaming terminal  4  or not, by using a random number value sampled by a sampling circuit or the like. In addition, the server CPU  81  determines which gaming terminal  4  is to win the JP (or all the gaming terminals  4  are to lose) in the case where it is determined to execute the JP bonus game. Also, the server CPU  81  determines which JP (“MEGA”, “MAJOR” or “MINI”) is to be won in the case of having the JP won. 
     Next, the server CPU  81  transmits the JP bonus game determination result to each gaming terminal  4 , according to the processing of the step S 109  (step S 110 ). After that, the server CPU  81  transmits a control signal to the CPU  101  of the roulette device  2 , and thereby causes the CPU  101  to judge into which number pocket  23  the ball  27  has fallen (step S 111 ). Then, the server CPU  81  receives a detection signal of the number pocket  23  into which the ball  27  has fallen from the CPU  101  (step S 112 ). 
     Thereafter, the server CPU  81  judges whether the bet placed at each gaming terminal  4  has won or not, based on the betting information of each gaming terminal  4  received at the step S 107  and the detection signal of the number pocket  23  received at the step S 112  (step S 113 ). 
     After that, the server CPU  81  executes the payout calculation processing (step S 114 ). In the payout calculation processing, the server CPU  81  firstly recognizes the number of winning bets on the winning number for each gaming terminal  4 . Then, the server CPU  81  calculates the total payout credits for each gaming terminal  4  by using the payout rate (credits to be paid per one bet) that is stored in the payout memory area  82 A of the ROM  82 . 
     Next, the server CPU  81  executes the transmission processing of the credit payout result according to the payout calculation processing of the step S 113  and the JP payout result according to the JP bonus game determination processing of the step S 109  (step S 115 ). More specifically, the server CPU  81  outputs the credit data corresponding to the payout credits for the game to the terminal CPU  91  of the winning gaming terminal  4 . Moreover, the server CPU  81  additionally outputs the credit data corresponding to the accumulated JP credits in the case where the JP has been won. After that, the server CPU  81  transmits a request signal for collecting the ball  27  on the roulette wheel  22  to the CPU  101  of the roulette device  2  (step S 116 ). The server CPU  81  finishes the subroutine after the step S 116 . 
     Hereinafter, the gaming processing of the roulette device  2  will be described with references to  FIGS. 31 and 32 . 
     Firstly, as shown in  FIG. 31 , the CPU  101  receives the control signal for starting the operation of the roulette device  2  from the server CPU  81  of the server  13  (step S 201 ). 
     Next, the CPU  101  drives the wheel driving motor  106  and rotates the roulette wheel  22  (step S 202 ). 
     Then, the CPU  101  detects the detection signal from the pocket position detection circuit  107  when a prescribed time (20 seconds, for example) elapses after the rotation of the roulette wheel  22  is started (step S 203 : YES). The CPU  101  enters the ball  27  (step S 204 ) when the delay time elapses after the detection signal is detected. 
     Then, as shown in  FIG. 32 , the CPU  101  receives the control signal for detecting the pocket from the server CPU  81  of the server  13  (step S 205 ). Thereafter, the CPU  101  judges which number pocket  23  into which the ball  27  has fallen by activating the ball sensor  105  (step S 206 ). After that, the CPU  101  transmits the detection signal indicating the number pocket  23  into which the ball  27  has fallen to the server CPU  81  of the server  13  (step S 207 ). 
     Subsequently, the CPU  101  receives the request signal for collecting the ball  27  from the server CPU  81  of the server  13  (step S 208 ). Then, the CPU  101  collects the ball  27  on the roulette wheel  22  by activating the ball collecting device  108  provided beneath the roulette wheel  22  (step S 209 ). The collected ball  27  will be entered onto the roulette wheel  22  again by the ball launching device  104  in the subsequent games. The CPU  101  finishes the subroutine after the step S 209 . 
     Hereinbelow, the processing executed by the terminal CPU  91  of each gaming terminal  4  of the roulette game machine  1  according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to  FIGS. 33 to 37 . The terminal CPU  91  executes the processing in accordance with the programs stored in the ROM  92 .  FIGS. 33 to 37  are flow charts each showing the gaming processing of the gaming terminal of the roulette game machine according to the present embodiment. 
     Here, the flag F in the RAM  93  is assumed to be set to be default, “1”, which is a value indicating the betting period. Moreover, the default BET screen  61  as shown in  FIG. 5  is assumed to be displayed on the display  8  of the gaming terminal  4 . With this state, as shown in  FIG. 33 , the terminal CPU  91  firstly performs used language confirmation processing in step S 300 , then performs betting period confirmation processing in step S 301 , then performs bet accepting processing in step S 302 , and lastly performs order processing in step S 303 . 
     Then, in the used language confirmation processing in step S 300 , the terminal CPU  91  judges whether or not a new smart card  17  is inserted to the card reader  16  in step S 300   a  as shown in  FIG. 34 . If the smart card  17  is not inserted (NO in step S 300   a ), the terminal CPU  91  proceeds to step S 300   e  to be described later. When the smart card  17  is inserted (YES in step S 300   a ), the terminal CPU  91  outputs the message (the conversation sentence) to inquire of the player about the language type to be used in the roulette game (step S 300   b ). 
     This message may be outputted in the form of a sound from the speaker  10  through the sound input circuit  98  or outputted in the form of display of characters or the like on the display  8  through the LCD driving circuit  95 . 
     For example, when outputting the message in the form of the sound, the terminal CPU  91  outputs the sound for requesting for selection of the language to be used in the game from the speaker  10  by using a default language type. When the default language type is English, for instance, the terminal CPU  91  outputs the sound stating “What language do you want to use?” from the speaker  10 . 
     Meanwhile, when outputting the message in the form of display, the terminal CPU  91  displays characters, buttons, and the like on the display  8  in order to promote selection of the language to be used in the game by using the default language type. For example, when the default language type is English, the terminal CPU  91  displays characters stating “What language do you want to use?” together with buttons  63   a ,  63   b ,  63   c ,  63   d ,  63   e , and  63   f  representing language options of “English”, “Japanese”, “French”, “German”, “Spanish”, and “Chinese” as shown in  FIG. 41 . 
     Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91  judges whether or not a response message (a response sentence) to the message outputted in step S 300   b  is inputted (step S 300   c ). 
     Here, when the message outputted in step S 300   b  is in the sound, the presence of the input of the message in response to the outputted message can be confirmed by judging whether or not there is the input to the input unit  1100  of the conversation controller  1000  after outputting the message in step S 300   b . Meanwhile, when the outputted message in step S 300   b  is displayed on the display  8 , the presence of the input of the message in response to the outputted message can be confirmed by judging whether or not an operation of any of language selection buttons displayed on the display  8  (the buttons  63   a ,  63   b ,  63   c ,  63   d ,  63   e , and  63   f  stating “English”, “Japanese”, “French”, “German”, “Spanish”, and “Chinese” shown in  FIG. 41 ) respectively by the player is detected with the touch panel  50 . 
     Then, if no response message to the message outputted in step S 300   b  is inputted (NO in step S 300   c ), the terminal CPU  91  repeats step S 300   c  until there is the input. When the response message is inputted (YES in step S 300   c ), the terminal CPU  91  changes the language of the BET screen  61  to be displayed on the display  8  during the betting period of the roulette game in the language indicated by the message inputted in step S 300   c  (step S 300   d ). Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91  terminates the used language confirmation processing. 
     Here, when the message inputted in step S 300   c  is in the sound, the language indicated in the inputted message can be specified by analyzing the contents of the message inputted in the voice from the microphone  15  in accordance with the previously explained operations of the conversation controller  1000 . Meanwhile, when the inputted message in step S 300   c  is displayed on the display  8 , the language indicated in the inputted message can be confirmed by allowing the terminal CPU  91  to identify contents of an operation of any of the buttons for language selection displayed on the display  8  by the player through the touch panel  50 . 
     In step S 300   e , the terminal CPU  91  checks whether or not the smart card  17  is discharged from the card reader  16 . If the smart card  17  is not discharged (NO in step S 300   e ), the terminal CPU  91  terminates the used language confirmation processing. When the smart card  17  is discharged (YES in step S 300   e ), the terminal CPU  91  displays the BET screen  61  on the display  8  in the default language during the betting period of the roulette game (step S 300   f ). Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91  terminates the used language confirmation processing. Here, the default language type may be defined as English, for example. 
     In the betting period confirmation processing (step S 301 ), as shown in  FIG. 35 , the terminal CPU  91  confirms whether the betting period start signal has been received from the server CPU  81  or not (step S 311 ). In the case where the betting period start signal has been received (step S 311 : YES), the terminal CPU  91  sets the flag F in the RAM  93  which indicates that it is under the betting period to “1” (step S 312 ), and then terminates the betting period confirmation processing. 
     On the other hand, in the case where the betting time start signal has not been received yet (step S 311 : NO), the terminal CPU  91  confirms whether the betting period end signal has been received from the server CPU  81  or not (step S 313 ). In the case where the betting period end signal has been received (step S 313 : YES), the terminal CPU  91  sets the flag F in the RAM  93  which indicates that it is under the betting period to “0” (step S 314 ), and then terminates the betting period confirmation processing. In the case where the betting period end signal has not been received yet (step S 313 : NO), the terminal CPU  91  terminates the betting period confirmation processing. 
     Then, in the bet accepting processing (step S 302  in  FIG. 33 ), as shown in  FIG. 36 , the terminal CPU  91  judges whether the flag F in the RAM  93  is set to “0” or not (step S 321 ). In the case where the flag F is set to “0” (step S 321 : YES), the terminal CPU  91  terminates the bet accepting processing. 
     On the other hand, in the case where the flag F is not set to “0” (step S 321 : NO), the terminal CPU  91  judges whether the remaining betting time has reached the last 5 seconds (“5” or a smaller number is displayed on the bet time display unit  69 ) or not (step S 322 ). In the case where the remaining time has reached the last 5 seconds (step S 322 : YES), the terminal CPU  91  displays a message announcing that the betting time will be ended on the bet screen  61  (step S 323 ), and shifts the processing to the step S 324 . On the other hand, in the case where the remaining time has not reached the last 5 seconds (step S 322 : NO), the terminal CPU  91  shifts the processing to the step S 324 . 
     Here, when the BET screen  61  displayed on the display  8  is written in English as shown in  FIG. 5 , the message of the advance notice for the end of the betting period is shown in the contents such as “HURRY UP! THE BET TIME ENDING SOON.” as shown in  FIG. 42 , for example. 
     The terminal CPU  91  detects the bet placed by the player (step S 324 ). The betting is detected by detecting the player&#39;s touches on the bet area  72  in the table-type betting board  60  and on the bet buttons  66  via the touch panel  50 . When the betting is detected, the chip mark  71  is displayed on the specified bet area  72  on the display  8  according to the number of bet chips. 
     After that, the terminal CPU  91  judges whether the player has confirmed the betting or not (step S 325 ). The betting is confirmed when the player&#39;s touch on the bet confirmation button  65  on the display  8  is detected via the touch panel  50 . 
     In the case where it is judged that the betting has not been confirmed (step S 325 : NO), the terminal CPU  91  judges whether the flag F in the RAM  93  is set to “0” or not (step S 326 ). In the case where the flag F is not set to “0” (step S 326 : NO), the terminal CPU  91  returns the processing to the step S 322 . 
     On the contrary, when the flag F is set to “0” (YES in step S 326 ), the terminal CPU  91  forcibly settles the bet of chips by the player (step S 327 ) and then shifts the processing to step S 329  to be described later. 
     Meanwhile, when the bet of chips by the player is confirmed to be settled in step S 325  (YES), the terminal CPU  91  judges whether or not the flag F of the RAM  93  is set to “0” in step S 328 . When the flag F is not set to “0” (NO in step S 328 ), the terminal CPU  91  repeats step S 326 . On the contrary, when the flag F of the RAM  93  is set to “0” ‘YES in step S 328 ), the terminal CPU  91  shifts the processing to step S 329 . 
     In the step S 328 , the terminal CPU  91  finishes accepting betting operations via the touch panel  50  (step S 329 ). Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91  transmits the betting information of the player (the specified bet area  72 , the number of bet chips and the types of betting) to the server CPU  81  (step S 330 ). 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91  changes the image on the display  8  (step S 331 ). To be more precise, the terminal CPU  91  firstly switches the image on the display  8  to the bet screen  61  including the image indicating that the betting period has ended. 
     Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91  receives the result of the JP bonus game determination processing from the server CPU  81  (step S 332 ). The result of the JP bonus game determination includes the information which indicates: whether to execute the JP bonus game at any gaming terminal  4  or not; which gaming terminal  4  is to win the JP (or all the gaming terminals  4  are to lose) in the case where it is determined to execute the JP bonus game; and which JP (“MEGA”, “MAJOR” or “MINI”) is to be won in the case of having the JP won. 
     After that, the terminal CPU  91  determines whether to execute the JP bonus game or not, according to the result of the JP bonus game determination processing received at the step S 332  (step S 333 ). In the case where it is determined to execute the JP bonus game at its own gaming terminal  4 , the terminal CPU  91  executes a prescribed selection-type JP bonus game. And then, the terminal CPU  91  displays the bonus game result (whether the JP has been won or not) in the bet screen  61  on the display  8  (step S 334 ), according to the determination result received at the step S 332 . 
     In the case where it is determined not to execute the JP bonus game at its own gaming terminal  4  at the step S 333 , or after the step S 334 , the terminal CPU  91  receives the payout result from the server CPU  81  (step S 335 ). Note that the payout result includes the payout for the roulette game and the payout for the JP bonus game. 
     Subsequently, the terminal CPU  91  provides a payout according to the payout result received at the step S 335  (step S 336 ). Specifically, the terminal CPU  91  stores the credit data of the payout for the roulette game in the RAM  93 . And the terminal CPU  91  also stores the accumulated JP credits in the RAM  93  if the JP has been won. Then, when the payout button  5  is touched, the number of medals corresponding to the credits stored in the RAM  93  (usually, one medal per one credit) are paid from the medal payout opening  12 . Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91  terminates the bet accepting processing. 
     Next, as shown in  FIG. 37 , in the order processing in step S 303  of  FIG. 33 , the terminal CPU  91  judges whether or not the language type to be used in the game is designated by the message (the response sentence) inputted in step S 300   c  in the used language confirmation processing shown in  FIG. 34  (step S 341 ). If the language type is not designated (NO in step S 341 ), the terminal CPU  91  terminates the order processing. When the language type is designated (YES in step S 341 ), the terminal CPU  91  proceeds to step S 347  to be described later. 
     Meanwhile, when the language type to be used in the game is not designated (NO in step S 341 ), the terminal CPU  91  checks whether or not a message (a response sentence) to request for display of the menu on the display  8  is inputted (step S 342 ). 
     Here, when the message is formed of the sound, the presence of the input of the message to request for display of the menu on the display  8  can be confirmed by checking whether or not there is an input of a voice message in the language type designated in the step  341  (such as a phrase meaning “I would like something to eat or drink”) that requests for display of the menu to the input unit  1100  of the conversation controller  1000  formed of the microphone  15 . On the other hand, when the message to request for display of the menu on the display  8  is in the form of display of the display  8 , the presence of the input of the message can be confirmed by checking whether or not the touch panel  50  detects an operation of the order button  76  (see  FIG. 5 ) displayed on the BET screen  61  on the display  8  by the player. 
     Then, if the message to request for display of the menu on the display  8  is not inputted (NO in step S 342 ), the terminal CPU  91  terminates the order processing. On the other hand, when the message to request for display of the menu on the display  8  is inputted (YES in step S 342 ), the terminal CPU  91  displays the menu of snacks and beverages written in the default language type on the display  8  instead of the BET screen  61  (step S 343 ). 
     Here, when the default language type is English, the terminal CPU  91  displays a menu screen  61 A (a menu screen in the claims) indicating items of snacks and beverages as well as prices thereof in English on the display  8  as shown in  FIG. 38 . This menu screen  61 A is created by use of menu data stored in the external memory  100 . Moreover, the menu screen  61 A includes: “ADD” buttons  86   b  provided for the respective items and supposed to be operated by the player in the number of times corresponding to ordered quantity; an “OK” button  86   c  to be operated for confirming the order by the player; and a “CANCEL” button  86   d  to be operated for cancelling the order by the player. 
     Then, as the display on the display  8  is switched from the BET screen  61  to the menu screen  61 A in step S 343 , the terminal CPU  91  suspends acceptance of credits bet on the roulette game by the player by means of the operation on the BET screen  61  (step S 344 ). 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91  checks whether or not the player orders a certain item (step S 345 ). Here, when an item is ordered by way of the display on the menu screen  61 A on the display  8 , the terminal CPU  91  can confirm the order by checking whether or not the touch panel  50  detects that the order of an item designated by operating the “ADD” buttons  86   b  displayed on the menu screen  61 A on the display  8  is confirmed through the operation of the “OK” button  86   c.    
     On the other hand, when the player orders a certain item by way of the sound, the terminal CPU  91  can confirm the order by checking whether or not the input unit  1100 , which can be formed of the microphone  15 , of the conversation controller  1000  receives inputs of two kinds of sound messages in the default language type (in English, for example): one is for designating each item name and its quantity to be ordered; and the other is for confirming the order. Accordingly, when the item is ordered in the form of the sound, the menu screen  61 A does not have to include the “ADD” buttons  86   b  and the “OK” button  86   c.    
     When some item is ordered (YES in step S 345 ), the terminal CPU  91  proceeds to step S 352  to be described later. On the other hand, when no item is ordered (NO in step S 345 ), the terminal CPU  91  checks whether or not the order is cancelled (step S 346 ). 
     Here, when the order of an item is cancelled by way of the display on the menu screen  61 A on the display  8 , the terminal CPU  91  can confirm the cancellation of the order by checking whether or not the touch panel  50  detects an operation of the “CANCEL” button  86   d  displayed on the menu screen  61 A on the display  8  prior to the operation of the “OK” button  86   c.    
     On the other hand, when the order of an item is cancelled by way of the sound, the terminal CPU  91  can confirm the cancellation of the order by checking whether or not the input unit  1100 , which can be formed of the microphone  15 , of the conversation controller  1000  receives an input of a sound message in the default language type (in English, for example) for cancelling the order of the item and its quantity designated so far. Accordingly, when the order of items is cancelled in the form of the sound, the menu screen  61 A does not have to include the “CANCEL” button  86   d.    
     The terminal CPU  91  proceeds to step S 345  when the order of an item is not cancelled (NO in step S 346 ). On the other hand, the terminal CPU  91  proceeds to step S 353  to be described later when the order of an item is cancelled (YES in step S 346 ). 
     In step S 347 , the terminal CPU  91  checks whether or not the message (the response sentence) to request for display of the menu on the display  8  is inputted as similar to step S 342 . 
     Then, if the message to request for display of the menu on the display  8  is not inputted (NO in step S 347 ), the terminal CPU  91  terminates the order processing. On the other hand, when the message to request for display of the menu on the display  8  is inputted (YES in step S 347 ), the terminal CPU  91  displays the menu of snacks and beverages written in the language type designated in step S 341  on the display  8  instead of the BET screen  61  (step S 348 ). 
     Here, the terminal CPU  91  displays a menu screen indicating the items of snacks and beverages as well as the prices thereof in the language type designated in the step S 341  on the display  8  corresponding to the menu screen  61 A shown in  FIG. 38 . When the language type designated in step S 341  is Japanese, for example, the terminal CPU  91  displays a menu screen  61 B (a menu screen) indicating the items of snacks and beverages as well as the prices thereof in Japanese as shown in  FIG. 39 . This menu screen  61 B is created by use of the menu data stored in the external memory  100 . Moreover, the menu screen  61 B includes: “TSUIKA” (ADD) buttons  86   b  provided for the respective items and supposed to be operated by the player in the number of times corresponding to ordered quantity; a “KAKUTEI” (OK) button  86   c  to be operated for confirming the order by the player; and a “KYANSERU” (CANCEL) button  86   d  to be operated for cancelling the order by the player. Here, it is noted that “TSUIKA”, “KAKUTEI” and “KYANSERU” respectively represent Japanese language terms meaning “ADD”, “OK” and “CANCEL” phonetically, for illustrative purposes. 
     Then, as the display on the display  8  is switched from the BET screen  61  to the menu screen  61 B in step S 348 , the terminal CPU  91  suspends acceptance of credits bet on the roulette game by the player by means of the operation on the BET screen  61  (step S 349 ). 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91  checks whether or not the player orders a certain item (step S 350 ). Here, when an item is ordered by way of the display on the menu screen  61 B on the display  8  and the language type designated in step  341  is Japanese, the terminal CPU  91  can confirm the order by checking whether or not the touch panel  50  detects that the order of an item designated by operating the “TSUIKA” (ADD) buttons  86   b  displayed in Japanese on the menu screen  61 B on the display  8  is confirmed through the operation of the “KAKUTEI” (OK) button  86   c.    
     On the other hand, when the player orders a certain item by way of the sound, the terminal CPU  91  can confirm the order by checking whether or not the input unit  1100 , which can be formed of the microphone  15 , of the conversation controller  1000  receives inputs of two kinds of sound messages in the language type designated in step S 341  (in Japanese, for example): one is for designating each item name and its quantity to be ordered; and the other is for confirming the order. Accordingly, when the item is ordered in the form of the sound, the menu screen  61 A does not have to include the “TSUIKA” (ADD) buttons  86   b , the “KAKUTEI” (OK) button  86   c , and a “KYANSERU” (CANCEL) button  86   d  on the menu screen  61 B. 
     When some item is ordered (YES in step S 350 ), the terminal CPU  91  proceeds to step S 352  to be described later. On the other hand, when no item is ordered (NO in step S 350 ), the terminal CPU  91  checks whether or not the order is cancelled (step S 351 ). 
     Here, when the order of an item is cancelled by way of the display on the menu screen  61 B on the display  8 , and the language type designated in step  341  is Japanese, the terminal CPU  91  can confirm the cancellation of the order by checking whether or not the touch panel  50  detects an operation of the “KYANSERU” (CANCEL) button  86   d  displayed on the menu screen  61 B on the display  8  prior to the operation of the “KAKUTEI” (OK) button  86   c.    
     On the other hand, when the order of an item is cancelled by way of the sound, the terminal CPU  91  can confirm the cancellation of the order by checking whether or not the input unit  1100 , which can be formed of the microphone  15 , of the conversation controller  1000  receives an input of a sound message in the language type designated in step S 341  (in Japanese, for example) for cancelling the order of the item and its quantity designated so far. Accordingly, when the order of items is cancelled in the form of the sound, the menu screen  61 B does not have to include the “KYANSERU” (CANCEL) button  86   d.    
     The terminal CPU  91  proceeds to step S 350  when the order of any items is not cancelled (NO in step S 351 ). On the other hand, the terminal CPU  91  proceeds to step S 353  when the order of any items is cancelled (YES in step S 351 ). 
     In step S 352 , the terminal CPU  91  creates order data in the default language type (in English, for example) which represent the contents of the item or items ordered in step S 345  in the default language type (in English, for example), or the contents of the item or items ordered in step S 350  in the language type designated in Step S 341  (in Japanese, for example), and outputs the order data to the shop server  86  connected through the local area network. Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91  proceeds to step S 353 . 
     In step S 353 , the terminal CPU  91  resumes acceptance of credits bet on the roulette game by the player, which has been suspended in step S 344  or in step S 349 , by changing the display on the display  8  from the menu screen  61 A or  61 B to the BET screen  61 . Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91  terminates the order processing. 
     Here, when the message to request for the display of the menu on the display  8  inputted in step S 342  or step S 347  is a phrase meaning “I would like something to eat”, for example, the contents of the menu screen  61 A or  61 B to be displayed on the display  8  in step S 343  or step S 348  as shown in  FIG. 38  or  FIG. 39  can be limited to the snack items. Meanwhile, when the message to request for the display of the menu on the display  8  inputted in step S 342  or step S 347  is a phrase meaning “I would like something to drink”, for example, the contents of the menu screen  61 A or  61 B to be displayed on the display  8  in step S 343  or step S 348  as shown in  FIG. 38  or  FIG. 39  can be limited to the beverage items. 
     Incidentally, when the shop server  86  receives the order data outputted in step S 352  which represent the contents of the ordered item or items in the default language type (in English, for example), the shop server  86  displays the contents of the ordered item or items represented by the order data on a shop display  86   a  in the default language type (in English, for example). 
     As apparent from the foregoing description, in the roulette game machine  1  of this embodiment, the controller of the present invention is formed of the terminal CPU  91 . 
     As described above, the gaming terminal  4  of the roulette game device  1  according to the embodiment of the present invention outputs the message (the conversation sentence) to inquire the language type that the player wishes to use in the roulette game in the forms of sounds and (or) characters from the speaker  10  and the display  8  by use of the conversation controller  1000  compatible with the multiple language types or by use of the multiple conversation controllers  1000  respectively compatible with the language types. 
     In response to this output, the player inputs the message (the response sentence) for designating the language type the player wishes to use in the roulette game either in the form of the sound by using the microphone  15  or in the form of the characters by operating the touch panel  50  on the display  8 . 
     After the input of the message by the player for designating the language type to be used in the roulette game in the forms of the sounds or the characters, the gaming terminal  4  exchanges the conversations in the forms of the sounds or the characters with the player in the language type designated by the player. 
     Therefore, in the roulette game device  1  according to the embodiment of the present invention, the language type to be used in the roulette game is set to the language type corresponding to the request by the player by performing the conversations between the gaming terminal  4  and the player in the forms of the sounds or the characters. Thereafter, the information in the conversation mode is exchanged between the gaming terminal  4  and the player in the language type thus set up. Accordingly, it is possible to achieve interactive gaming. 
     Moreover, the roulette game device  1  according to the embodiment of the present invention is configured to analyze the sound message in the language type designated by the player to request for display of the menu of the items orderable through the gaming terminal  4  on the display  8  by use of the conversation controller  1000 . In this way, it is possible to display the requested menu screen  61 B on the display  8  in designated language type. 
     Therefore, the gaming terminal  4  of the roulette game device  1  according to the embodiment of the present invention allows the player to order the item through the gaming terminal  4  by using the menu screen  61 B displayed in the designated language type on the display  8 . 
     Moreover, according to the roulette game device  1  of the embodiment of the present invention, the ordered item is displayed on the shop display  86   a  of the shop server  86  in the default language type regardless of which language type the player uses for ordering the item on the menu screen  61 A or  61 B of the gaming terminal  4 . As a result, even when the player orders the item in the language type other than the default language type, staff in the shop area who receives the order can grasp the contents of the ordered item by means of display on the shop display  86   a  using the default language type recognizable to the staff. In this way, it is possible to establish communication for placing the order between each staff in the shop area and each player by using mutually different language types. 
     When displaying the menu screen  61 A or  61 B on the display  8  in step S 343  or step S 348  in the order processing in  FIG. 37 , the contents therein may be limited to the items affordable by the number of credits previously accumulated in the gaming terminal  4  and displayed on the credit number display unit  68  on the BET screen  61 . 
     For example, if the language type to be used in the game is not designated by the player, the number of remaining credits displayed on the credit number display unit  68  is denominated in US dollars (USD), and the value is equal to “15”, the menu screen  61 A having the contents as shown in  FIG. 40  is displayed on the display  8  in step S 343  in the order processing in  FIG. 37 . 
     In the menu screen  61 A shown in  FIG. 40 , the item having the unit price higher than 15 US dollars, displayed on the displayed number display unit  68 , is deleted from the items of the menu previously displayed on the menu screen  61 A in  FIG. 38  (for example, clubhouse sandwich). The menu screen  61 A as shown in  FIG. 40  can be displayed on the display  8  by comparing the number of remaining credits displayed on the credit number display unit  68  with the prices of the respective items in the menu data stored in the external memory  100 . 
     Alternatively, the order processing in  FIG. 37  may be configured by excluding the processing for suspending the acceptance of credits bet on the roulette game while the menu screen  61 A or  61 B is displayed on the display  8  to allow the player to order an item, that is, the processing performed with a combination of steps S 344  and S 349  with step S 353 . 
     Moreover, it is also possible to allow the player to make a bet of credits on the roulette game even in the course of display of the menu screen  61 A or  61 B on the display  8  of the gaming terminal  4  by displaying the BET screen  61  on the display  8  at the same time. 
     Concrete contents of the order processing in step S 303  in  FIG. 33  applying this configuration will be described with reference to flowcharts in  FIGS. 43A and 43B . 
     First, as shown in  FIG. 43A , the terminal CPU  91  judges whether or not the language type to be used in the game is designated by the message (the response sentence) inputted in step S 300   c  in the used language confirmation processing shown in  FIG. 34  (step S 341 ). When the language type is designated (YES in step S 341 ), the terminal CPU  91  proceeds to step S 347  to be described later. 
     On the other hand, when the language type to be used in the game is not designated (NO in step S 341 ), the terminal CPU  91  checks whether or not the message (the response sentence) to request for display of the menu on the display  8  is inputted (step S 342 ). 
     Then, the terminal CPU  91  terminates the order processing when the message to request for display of the menu on the display  8  is not inputted (NO in step S 342 ). On the other hand, when the message to request for display of the menu on the display  8  is inputted (YES in step S 342 ), the terminal CPU  91  displays the menu of snacks and beverages in the default language type on the display  8  together with the BET screen  61  (step S 343   a ). 
     Here, when the default language type is English, the terminal CPU  91  displays the BET screen  61  shown in  FIG. 5  as well as the menu screen  61 A (a menu screen) shown in  FIG. 38  which indicates the items of snacks and beverages together with prices thereof in English on the display  8  by allocating half areas of the display  8  to the respective screens. 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91  judges whether or not there is designation of an item as an order candidate by the player (step S 345   a ). Here, when an item is ordered by way of the display on the menu screen  61 A on the display  8 , the presence of designation of the order candidate can be judged by checking whether or not the touch panel  50  detects designation of the item as the order candidate by operating any of the “ADD” buttons  86   b  displayed on the menu screen  61 A on the display  8 . 
     On the other hand, when the player orders a certain item by way of the sound, the presence of designation of any items as the order candidates can be judged by checking whether or not there is an input of a sound message in the default language type (in English, for example) for designating any items and quantity to be ordered to the input unit  1100  of the conversation controller  1000  which is formed of the microphone  15 . Accordingly, when the item is ordered in the form of the sound, the menu screen  61 A does not have to include the “ADD” buttons  86   b  on the menu screen  61 A. 
     Meanwhile, the terminal CPU  91  proceeds to step S 346   a  to be described later when there is not designation of the item as the order candidate (NO in step S 345   a ). When there is designation of the item as the order candidate (YES in step S 345   a ), the terminal CPU  91  prohibits use of the credits equivalent to a payment for the item designated as the order candidate to make a bet on the roulette game (step S 345   b ). Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91  proceeds to step S 346   a  to be described later. 
     Here, prohibition of the credits equivalent to the payment for the item designated as the order candidate to make a bet on the roulette game can be achieved by updating the display of the number of remaining credits on the credit number display unit  68  on the BET screen  61  with the number of credits after subtracting the number equivalent to the payment for the item designated as the order candidate. 
     In step S 346   a , the terminal CPU  91  judges whether or not the order of the item is cancelled. Here, when the order of an item is cancelled by way of the display on the menu screen  61 A on the display  8 , the terminal CPU  91  can confirm the cancellation of the order by checking whether or not the touch panel  50  detects an operation of the “CANCEL” button  86   d  displayed on the menu screen  61 A on the display  8  prior to the operation of the “OK” button  86   c.    
     On the other hand, when the order of an item is cancelled by way of the sound, the terminal CPU  91  can confirm the cancellation of the order by checking whether or not the input unit  1100 , which can be formed of the microphone  15 , of the conversation controller  1000  receives an input of a sound message in the default language type (in English, for example) for cancelling the order of the item. Accordingly, when the order of items is cancelled in the form of the sound, the menu screen  61 A does not have to include the “CANCEL” button  86   d    
     The terminal CPU  91  proceeds to step S 346   c  when the order of the item is not cancelled (NO in step S 346   a ). When the order of the item is cancelled (YES in step S 346   a ), the terminal CPU  91  renders the credits, which correspond to the payment for the item designated as the order candidate so far, usable for making a bet on the roulette game again (step S 346   b ). Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91  terminates the order processing. 
     Here, the action to render the credits equivalent to the payment for the item designated as the order candidate so far usable for making a bet on the roulette game again can be achieved by updating the display of the number of remaining credits on the credit number display unit  68  on the BET screen  61  with the display of the number of credits after adding the number equivalent to the payment for the item designated as the order candidate so far. 
     In step S 346   c , the terminal CPU  91  checks whether or not the order of the item designated as the order candidate by using the default language type (in English, for example) in step S 345   a  is confirmed. 
     Here, when confirmation of the order of the item designated as the order candidate is carried out by way of the display on the menu screen  61 A on the display  8 , the presence of confirmation of the order can be judged by checking whether or not the touch panel  50  detects confirmation of the order by operating the “OK” buttons  86   c  displayed on the menu screen  61 A on the display  8  prior to the operation of the “CANCEL” button  86   d.    
     On the other hand, when confirmation of the order of the item is carried out by way of the sound, the presence of confirmation of the order can be judged by checking whether or not there is an input of a sound message in the default language type (in English, for example) for confirming the order to the input unit  1100  of the conversation controller  1000  which is formed of the microphone  15 . Accordingly, when confirmation of the order of the item is made in the form of the sound, the menu screen  61 A does not have to include the “OK” button  86   c  on the menu screen  61 A. 
     Then, the terminal CPU  91  proceeds to step S 345   a  when the order of the item is not confirmed (NO in step S 346   c ). On the other hand, the terminal CPU  91  proceeds to step S 352  to be described later (see  FIG. 43B ) when the order of the item is confirmed (YES in step S 346   c ). 
     Meanwhile, as shown in  FIG. 43B , in step S 347 , the terminal CPU  91  judges whether or not the message (the response sentence) to request for display of the menu on the display  8  is inputted as similar to step S 342 . 
     Then, if the message to request for display of the menu on the display  8  is not inputted (NO in step S 347 ), the terminal CPU  91  terminates the order processing. On the other hand, when the message to request for display of the menu on the display  8  is inputted (YES in step S 347 ), the terminal CPU  91  displays the menu of snacks and beverages written in the language type designated in step S 341  on the display  8  together with the BET screen  61  (step S 348   a ). 
     Here, the terminal CPU  91  displays a menu screen indicating the items of snacks and beverages as well as the prices thereof in the language type designated in step S 341 , which corresponds to the menu screen  61 A shown in  FIG. 38 , together with the BET screen shown in  FIG. 5  on the display  8 . When the language type designated in step S 341  is Japanese, for example, the terminal CPU  91  displays the menu screen  61 B (a menu screen) indicating the items of snacks and beverages as well as the prices thereof in Japanese shown in  FIG. 39  together with the BET screen  61  shown in  FIG. 5  by allocating half areas of the display  8  to the respective screens as shown in  FIG. 45 . 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91  judges whether or not there is designation of an item as an order candidate by the player (step S 350   a ). Here, when an item is ordered by way of the display on the menu screen  61 B on the display  8 , on the assumption that the language type designated in step S 341  is Japanese, the presence of designation of the order candidate can be judged by checking whether or not the touch panel  50  detects designation of the item as the order candidate by operating the “TSUIKA” (ADD) button  86   b  displayed in Japanese on the menu screen  61 B on the display  8 . 
     On the other hand, when an item is ordered by way of the sound, the presence of designation of the item as the order candidate can be confirmed by checking whether or not there is an input of a sound message in the language type designated in step S 341  (in Japanese, for example) for designating any items and quantity to be ordered to the input unit  1100  of the conversation controller  1000  which is formed of the microphone  15 . Accordingly, when the order of items is made in the form of the sound, the menu screen  61 B does not have to include the “TSUIKA” (ADD) buttons  86   b.    
     Meanwhile, the terminal CPU  91  proceeds to step S 351   a  to be described later when there is not designation of the item as the order candidate (NO in step S 350   a ). When there is designation of the item as the order candidate (YES in step S 350   a ), the terminal CPU  91  prohibits use of the credits equivalent to the payment for the item designated as the order candidate to make a bet on the roulette game (step S 350   b ) as similar to step S 345   b . Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91  proceeds to step S 351   a  to be described later. 
     In step S 351   a , the terminal CPU  91  checks whether or not the order of the item is cancelled. Here, when the order of an item is cancelled by way of the display on the menu screen  61 B on the display  8  and the language type designated in step  341  is Japanese, the terminal CPU  91  can confirm the cancellation of the order by checking whether or not the touch panel  50  detects an operation of the “KYANSERU” (CANCEL) button  86   d  displayed on the menu screen  61 B on the display  8  prior to the operation of the “KAKUTEI” (OK) button  86   c.    
     On the other hand, when the order of an item is cancelled by way of the sound, the terminal CPU  91  can confirm the cancellation of the order by checking whether or not the input unit  1100 , which can be formed of the microphone  15 , of the conversation controller  1000  receives an input of a sound message in the language type designated in step S 341  (in Japanese, for example) for cancelling the order of the item. Accordingly, when the order of items is cancelled in the form of the sound, the menu screen  61 B does not have to include the “KYANSERU” (CANCEL) button  86   d.    
     The terminal CPU  91  proceeds to step S 351   c  when the order of the item is not cancelled (NO in step S 351   a ). When the order of the item is cancelled (YES in step S 351   a ), the terminal CPU  91  renders the credits, which correspond to the item designated as the order candidate so far, usable for making a bet on the roulette game again (step S 351   b ) as similar to step S 346   b . Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91  terminates the order processing. 
     In step S 351   c , the terminal CPU  91  checks whether or not the order of the item designated as the order candidate by using the language type designated in step S 341  (in Japanese, for example) in step S 350   a  is confirmed. 
     Here, when confirmation of the order of the item designated as the order candidate is carried out by way of the display on the menu screen  61 B on the display  8 , the presence of confirmation of the order can be confirmed by checking whether or not the touch panel  50  detects confirmation of the order by operating the “KAKUTEI” (OK) buttons  86   c  displayed on the menu screen  61 B on the display  8  prior to the operation of the “KYANSERU” (CANCEL) button  86   d.    
     On the other hand, when confirmation of the order of the item is carried out by way of the sound, the presence of confirmation of the order can be checked by checking whether or not there is an input of a sound message in the language type designated in step S 341  (in Japanese, for example) for confirming the order to the input unit  1100  of the conversation controller  1000  which is formed of the microphone  15 . Accordingly, when confirmation of the order of the item is made in the form of the sound, the menu screen  61 B does not have to include the “KAKUTEI” (OK) button  86   c  Then, the terminal CPU  91  proceeds to step S 350   a  when the order of the item is not confirmed (NO in step S 351   c ). On the other hand, the terminal CPU  91  proceeds to step S 352  when the order of the item is confirmed (YES in step S 351   c ). 
     In step S 352 , the terminal CPU  91  creates the order data in the default language type (in English, for example) which represent the contents of the item or items ordered in the default language type (in English, for example) in step S 345   a  or in the language type designated in Step S 341  (in Japanese, for example) in step S 350   a , and outputs the order data to the shop server  86  connected through the local area network. Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91  proceeds to step S 353   a.    
     In step S 353   a , the terminal CPU  91  changes the display on the display unit  8  from the state of simultaneously displaying the BET screen  61  and any one of the menu screen  61 A and the menu screen  61 B to the state of displaying the BET screen  61  only. Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91  terminates the order processing. 
     In this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to make a bet of credits on the roulette game on the BET screen  61  even in the course of placing the order of the item on the menu screen  61 A or  61 B. Moreover, the credits equivalent to the payment for the item designated as the order candidate cannot be used as resources for making a bet on the roulette game unless the order is cancelled. Therefore, it is possible to secure the credits equivalent to the payment for the item when the order is confirmed. 
     Here, as shown in  FIGS. 44 and 45 , instead of using the half areas on the display  8  respectively for displaying the BET screen  61  shown in  FIG. 5  and any of the menu screens  61 A and  61 B shown in  FIG. 38  and  FIG. 39  at the same time, it is also possible to switch the display on the display  8  between the BET screen  61  shown in  FIG. 5  and any of the menu screens  61 A and  61 B shown in  FIG. 38  and  FIG. 39  at anytime by an instruction of the player. 
     Moreover, it is not always necessary to use the order data outputted in step S 352  in the order processing shown in  FIG. 37  or  FIG. 43B  of the above-described embodiments solely for the purpose of display in the default language (in English, for example) on the shop display  86   a  of the shop server  86 . For example, it is also possible to use the data, as it is, on the shop server  86  for other purposes including management of the ordered items. 
     Second Embodiment 
     Now, operations of a gaming terminal representing an example of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention and outlines of a playing method thereof will be described below with reference to a flow chart shown in  FIG. 46 , a perspective view of a gaming machine shown in  FIG. 47 , and an outward perspective view of a roulette game machine shown in  FIG. 48 . 
     First, in a gaming terminal  4 - 1  according to the second embodiment of the present invention shown in  FIG. 47 , a player can participate in a roulette game executed in a roulette device  2 - 1  by betting credits through a BET screen displayed on a display  8 - 1 . 
     Then, data on a conversation sentence to inquire to a player of a language type to be used for playing a roulette game are created by use of a conversation engine of the gaming terminal  4 - 1  shown in  FIG. 47  (step S 11 - 1 ). Next, the conversation sentence to inquire the language type to be used for playing the roulette game is outputted from an output unit of the gaming terminal  4 - 1  by using the data created by the conversation engine (step S 12 - 1 ). 
     Subsequently, the player inputs a response sentence to designate the language type to be used for playing the roulette game to an input unit of the gaming terminal  4 - 1  in response to the conversation sentence outputted from the output unit (step S 13 - 1 ). Then, data on the response sentence inputted to the input unit by the player are analyzed by the conversation engine of the gaming terminal  4 - 1  (step S 14 - 1 ). 
     Next, a judgment is made as to whether or not the language type to be used for playing the roulette game is designated in the response sentence having the data analyzed by the conversation engine of the gaming terminal  4 - 1  (step S 15 - 1 ). Then, when the language type to be used for playing the roulette game is designated (YES in step S 15 - 1 ), a judgment is made as to whether or not a response sentence (such as a phrase meaning “I would like some food and beverage”) to request an order of an item orderable through the gaming terminal  4 - 1  is inputted to the input unit in the designated language type by the player (step S 16 - 1 ). 
     Thereafter, when the response sentence to request the order of the item is inputted in the designated language type (YES in step S 16 - 1 ), a classification designated by the request for the order of the item is specified (step S 17 - 1 ). Then, one or more classifications at a lower rank than the specified classification are outputted to be presented in the designated language type. Here, if the specified classification is at the lowest rank, then one or more items belonging to the classification are outputted (step S 18 - 1 ). This output can be in the form of a conversation sentence from the output unit of the gaming terminal  4 - 1  by using data created by the conversation engine of the gaming terminal  4 - 1 . Alternatively, this output can also be in the form of display of a menu screen on a display  8 - 1  (see  FIG. 47 ) of the gaming terminal  4 - 1 . 
     In step S 18 - 1 , the classifications and the items can be outputted in the language type designated in the step S 15 - 1  using menu data stored in an external memory  100 - 1  (see  FIG. 53 ; a memory) of the gaming terminal  4 - 1 . The menu data indicate the multiple items orderable by the player through the gaming machine and the classifications of these items in a hierarchical structure in multiple language types usable for playing the roulette game. 
     Subsequently, the player designates one of the one or more classifications at lower ranks presented by the output in step S 18 - 1  or designates one of the one or more items belonging to the lowest presented rank (step S 19 - 1 ). This designation can be inputted to the input unit in the form of a response sentence using the designated language type. Alternatively, this designation can be inputted by operating the menu screen on the display  8 - 1  in the designated language type. 
     Next, a judgment is made as to whether or not one of the presented classifications is designated by way of the response sentence in the designated language type inputted from the input unit and analyzed by the conversation engine or by way of the menu screen in the designated language type operated by the player (step S 20 - 1 ). 
     Then, when one of the presented classifications is designated (YES in step S 20 - 1 ), one or more classifications at a lower rank than the specified classification are outputted to be presented in the designated language type. Here, if the specified classification is at the lowest rank, then one or more items belonging to the classification are outputted (step S 21 - 1 ). This output can be performed in a similar manner to the output in step S 18 - 1 . 
     On the other hand, when one of the items presented in the designated language type is designated (NO in step S 20 - 1 ), the item designated in the designated language type is notified to an order destination in a predetermined language type (step S 22 - 1 ). This notification can be performed by outputting order data representing the content of the designated item in the predetermined language to a server at the order destination. Alternatively, this notification can also be performed by displaying the designated item on a second display at the order destination in the designated language type. 
     According to the gaming terminal  4 - 1  and the playing method of the same of the embodiment of the present invention, the player inputs the response sentence, into the input unit, to designate the language type to be used for playing the roulette game with the gaming terminal, in response to the conversation sentence outputted from the output unit of the gaming terminal  4 - 1 . Then, as the player requests for the order of the item, one or more classifications or items at a lower rank than the classification designated by the request are outputted from the output unit or displayed on the menu screen on the display  8 - 1 . 
     Then, as the player designated the classification at the lower rank, in the designated language type, by means of the input from the input unit or by means of operating the menu screen on the display  8 - 1 , one or more classifications or items at a lower rank than the classification outputted right before from the output unit or on the menu screen on the display  8 - 1  are outputted from the output unit or displayed on the menu screen on the display  8 - 1 . 
     Moreover, as the player designates the item, in the designated language type, by means of the input from the input unit or by means of the operation on the menu screen on the display  8 - 1 , the content of the item ordered by the player is transmitted to the order destination, which is provided with the server configured to receive the output of the order data indicating the content of the order of the item, in the designated language type. 
     As a result, it is possible to place the order of the item in the designated language type through the gaming terminal  4 - 1  by designating the language type to be used in the game through interactive communication between the player and the gaming terminal  4 - 1 . Moreover, it is possible to narrow down and specify the item to be ordered by the interactive communication between the player and the gaming terminal  4 - 1  in the designated language type. In this way, it is possible to offer advanced service to the player. 
     Next, the gaming terminal according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described together with a roulette game device including the gaming terminal with reference to  FIG. 47  to  FIG. 94 . 
       FIG. 47  is a perspective view of the gaming terminal according to the embodiment of the present invention.  FIG. 48  is an external perspective view showing a schematic configuration of the roulette game device according to the embodiment of the present invention, which includes the gaming terminal shown in  FIG. 47 .  FIG. 49  is a plan view of a roulette device  2 - 1  provided on the roulette game device shown in  FIG. 48 .  FIG. 50  is a view showing an example of an image to be displayed on a display provided on the gaming terminal shown in  FIG. 47 .  FIG. 51  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the roulette game device. 
     A roulette game device  1 - 1  shown in  FIG. 48  includes multiple gaming terminals  4 - 1  (a gaming machine) according to the embodiment of the present invention shown in  FIG. 47 . Besides, the roulette game device  1 - 1  includes a roulette device  2 - 1  and a server  13 - 1 . The roulette game device  1 - 1  is disposed, for example, in a casino area in a casino hotel as appropriate. The respective gaming terminals  4 - 1 , the roulette device  2 - 1 , and the server  13 - 1  can be connected to one another through a local area network (communication lines) or the like. 
     Moreover, a shop server  86 - 1  (see  FIG. 51 ; a server) is connected to this local area network. This shop server  86 - 1  is located in a shop area which is away from the casino area in the casino hotel. This shop server  86 - 1  is configured to manage orders of items placed by players through the respective gaming terminals  4 - 1 . The shop server  86 - 1  includes a shop display  86   a - 1  (a second display) for displaying the ordered items. 
     At the roulette device  2 - 1 , the roulette game will be executed under the control of the server  13 - 1 , and the game will be displayed to the players. The players use a plurality of gaming terminals  4 - 1  that are arranged around the roulette device  2 - 1 , in order to participate in the roulette game displayed by the roulette device  2 - 1 . In the present embodiment, the roulette game machine  1 - 1  has nine gaming terminals  4 - 1 . Consequently, at most nine players can participate in the communal roulette game simultaneously. 
     The roulette games to be displayed on the roulette device  2 - 1  are repeatedly executed at a cycle of a predetermined time period under control by the server  13 - 1 . Accordingly, each of the players can make bets on a current roulette game by use of one of the gaming terminals  4 - 1 . To make bets on the current roulette game, each of the gaming terminals  4 - 1  is provided with a display  8 - 1  (a display, a first display). A BET screen  61 - 1  (see  FIG. 50 ) corresponding to the roulette game is displayed on this display  8 - 1 . Display contents of this BET screen  61 - 1  will be described later in detail. 
       FIG. 49  is a plan view of a roulette device provided in a roulette game machine of  FIG. 48 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 49 , the roulette device  2 - 1  has a frame  21 - 1 , and a roulette wheel  22 - 1  which is accommodated and supported rotatably inside the frame  21 - 1 . On an upper surface of the roulette wheel  22 - 1 , a plurality (38 in total in the present embodiment) of number pockets  23 - 1  is formed. In addition, on an upper surface of the roulette wheel  22 - 1  on an outer side of the number pockets  23 - 1 , number plates  25 - 1  are provided for displaying numbers “0”, “00”, “1” to “36” in correspondence to the respective number pockets  23 - 1 . 
     A ball launching hole  36 - 1  is opened on the inner periphery of the frame  21 - 1 . The ball launching hole  36 - 1  is connected to a ball launching device  104 - 1  (see  FIG. 52 ). In conjunction with the activation of the ball launching device  104 - 1 , a ball  27 - 1  will be entered onto the roulette wheel  22 - 1  from the ball launching hole  36 - 1 . Also, a hemispherical transparent acrylic cover  28 - 1  covers over the roulette device  2 - 1  (see  FIG. 48 ). 
     A wheel driving motor  106 - 1  (see  FIG. 52 ) is provided on a lower side of the roulette wheel  22 - 1 . In conjunction with the activation of the wheel driving motor  106 - 1 , the roulette wheel  22 - 1  will be rotated. Metal plates (not shown) are attached at prescribed intervals on a lower surface of the roulette wheel  22 - 1 . As a proximity sensor of a pocket position detection circuit  107 - 1  (see  FIG. 52 ) detects these metal plates, a position of the number pocket  23 - 1  is detected. 
     The frame  21 - 1  is gently inclined toward an inner side, and a guide wall  29 - 1  is formed on its middle section. The entered ball  27 - 1  is rolled by being guided by the guide wall  29 - 1  due to its centrifugal force. The ball  27 - 1  rolls down the slope of the frame  21 - 1  toward the inner side as the rotational speed decreases and the centrifugal force becomes weaker, and reaches to the rotating roulette wheel  22 - 1 . Then, the ball  27 - 1  that reached to the roulette wheel  22 - 1  further falls into one of the number pockets  23 - 1  by passing over the number plates  25 - 1  on an outer side of the rotating roulette wheel  22 - 1 . As a result, the number on the number plate  25 - 1  of the number pocket  23 - 1  into which the ball fell is judged by a ball sensor  105 - 1 , and this number will become a winning number. 
     Next, the configuration of the gaming terminal  4 - 1  will be described. 
     As shown in  FIG. 47 , the gaming terminal  4 - 1  has a medal insertion slot  7 - 1  for inserting game media (currency value: such as cash, a chip, a medal, etc.) and a above-mentioned display  8 - 1  for displaying images related to the game on its upper face. The gaming terminal  4 - 1  accepts the betting operation by the player by using the medal insertion slot  7 - 1  and the display  8 - 1 . The player can play the game by operating the touch panel  50 - 1  (see  FIG. 52 ) or the like that is provided on a front face of the display  8 - 1  while watching the images displayed on the display  8 - 1 . Note that, in the following description, the game media may be referred as their representative “medals”. 
     Also, besides the medal insertion slot  7 - 1  and the display  8 - 1  described above, a payout button  5 - 1 , a ticket printer  6 - 1 , a bill insertion slot  9 - 1 , a speaker  10 - 1 , a microphone  15 - 1 , and a card reader  16 - 1  are provided on an upper face of the gaming terminal  4 - 1 . A medal payout opening  12 - 1  and a medal tray  14 - 1  are provided in a front face of the gaming terminal  4 - 1 . 
     The payout button  5 - 1  is a button for inputting a command for paying out credited medals from the medal payout opening  12 - 1  to the medal tray  14 - 1 . The ticket printer  6 - 1  prints out as the bar code ticket including the data such as the credits, the date, and the identification number of the gaming terminal  4 - 1 . The player can use the bar code ticket at another gaming terminal  4 - 1  and the player can bet to the game at that gaming terminal  4 - 1 . Or the player can exchange the bar code ticket to bills or the like at a prescribed location (a cashier in the casino, for example) in the gaming facility. 
     The bill insertion slot  9 - 1  is configured to validate the appropriateness of bills and to accept authentic bills. Here, the bill insertion slot  9 - 1  may also be configured to be capable of reading a bar-coded ticket  39 - 1 . The speaker  10 - 1  is used to output music, sound effects, speech messages (conversation sentences) to the player, and the like. The microphone  15 - 1  is used to input a speech message (a response sentence) uttered by the player. 
     The card reader  16 - 1 , in which a smart card  17 - 1  (a portable memory) can be inserted, reads data out of the inserted smart card  17 - 1  and writes data into the smart card  17 - 1 . The smart card, owned by the player, includes member card unique to the player, a credit card. 
     The data concerning the gaming history executed by the player (game history information) are stored in the smart card  17 - 1  together with data for identifying the player. The gaming history information includes game type information concerning games ever played by the player, points awarded in the games played in the past, and a language type used by the player in the course of the games. The smart card  17 - 1  may further store data corresponding to coins, bills or credits. Concerning a method of writing and reading the data in and out of this smart card  17 - 1 , any of a contact method and a non-contact method (a radio-frequency identification or RFID method) is applicable. Alternatively, a magnetic stripe card is also applicable, instead of the smart card  17 - 1 . 
     On an upper side of the display  8 - 1  of each gaming terminal  4 - 1 , a WIN lamp  11 - 1  is provided respectively. In the case where the number (“0”, “00” and “1” to “36” in the present embodiment) bet at the gaming terminal  4 - 1  in the game becomes the winning number, the WIN lamp  11 - 1  of the winning gaming terminal  4 - 1  will be turned on. Also, in the jackpot (referred hereafter also as JP) bonus game for obtaining JP, the WIN lamp  11 - 1  of the gaming terminal  4 - 1  that obtained JP will be turned on similarly. Note that this WIN lamp  11 - 1  provided at a position that is visible from all of the arranged gaming terminals  4 - 1  (9 sets in the present embodiment), such that the other players who are playing at the same roulette game machine  1 - 1  can always check which WIN lamp  11 - 1  is turned on. 
     Inside the medal insertion slot  7 - 1 , a medal sensor (not shown) is provided, and it identifies the currency values such as medals that are inserted at the medal insertion slot  7 - 1 , and counts the inserted medals. Also, a hopper (not shown) is provided inside the medal payout opening  12 - 1  and it pays a prescribed number of medals from the medal payout opening  12 - 1 . 
       FIG. 50  is the diagram showing one example of an image to be displayed on the display. 
     The BET screen  61 - 1  as shown in  FIG. 50  is displayed on the display  8 - 1  of each of the gaming terminals  4 - 1 . The BET screen  61 - 1  includes a table-type betting board  60 - 1 . The player can make bets on a roulette game by using his or her chips credited in the gaming terminal  4 - 1  in the form of electronic information and by operating a touch panel  50 - 1  (see  FIG. 52 ) provided on a front face of the display  8 - 1 . 
     To be more precise, the player indicates with a cursor  70 - 1  a BET area  72 - 1  (on a number and a grid of a mark of the number or on a line forming the grid) which is a target for making bets of chips. Then, the player indicates with unit BET buttons  66 - 1  the number of chips to be bet and confirms the number of bet chips with a BET confirmation button  65 - 1 . The above described operations can be executed with the player directly pressing, with fingers, the sections where the BET area  72 - 1 , the unit BET buttons  66 - 1 , and the BET confirmation button  65 - 1  are displayed on the display  8 - 1 . 
     Here, four types of the unit BET buttons  66 - 1 , namely, a 1 BET button  66 A- 1 , a 5 BET button  66 B- 1 , a 10 BET button  66 C- 1 , and a 100 BET button  66 D- 1  are provided corresponding to the number of chips that can be bet in one operation. 
     The number of chips bet in the previous game by the player and the number of payout credits are displayed on a payout result display unit  67 - 1  of the display  8 - 1 . Meanwhile, the number of credits currently owned by the player is displayed on a credit number display unit  68 - 1  of the display  8 - 1 . Moreover, remaining time for which the player can make bets is displayed on a BET time display unit  69 - 1  of the display  8 - 1 . 
     Note that when the ball  27 - 1  entered on the roulette wheel  22 - 1  is housed in any of the number pockets  23 - 1 , the winning number is confirmed and the current roulette game is finished, the next roulette game is started. 
     A MEGA counter  73 - 1  displaying the number of credits accumulated for a “MEGA” JP, a MAJOR counter  74 - 1  displaying the number of credits accumulated for a “MAJOR” JP, and a MINI counter  75 - 1  displaying the number of credits accumulated for a “MINI” JP are provided at the right side of the bet time display unit  69 - 1 . In the case where any one of the JPs is won in the JP bonus game, a JP payout is provided according to the winning credits of the one of the JPs displayed on the respective counters  73 - 1  to  75 - 1 . An initial value (200 credits for “MINI,” 5000 credits for “Major” and 50000 credits for “MEGA”) is displayed on the one of the counters  73 - 1  to  75 - 1  after the JP payout. 
     An order button  76 - 1  is displayed on the left of the BET confirmation button  65 - 1  on the BET screen  61 - 1 . The player can display the menu of orderable items such as beverages or snacks on the display  8 - 1  by touching the order button  76 - 1  through an operation of the touch panel  50 - 1 . 
       FIG. 51  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the roulette game machine according to the present embodiment. 
     As shown in  FIG. 51 , the roulette game machine  1 - 1  has the server  13 - 1 , the roulette device  2 - 1  and a plurality (9 sets in the present embodiment) of the gaming terminals  4 - 1 . The roulette device  2 - 1  and the gaming terminals  4 - 1  are connected to the server  13 - 1 . Note that an internal configuration of the roulette device  2 - 1  and an internal configuration of the gaming terminal  4 - 1  will be described below in detail. 
     The server  13 - 1  has a server CPU  81 - 1  for executing the overall control of the server  13 - 1 , a ROM  82 - 1 , a RAM  83 - 1 , a timer  84 - 1 , a LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)  32 - 1  connected through a LCD driving circuit  85 - 1 , and a keyboard  33 - 1 . 
     The server CPU  81 - 1  carries out various processings according to input signals supplied from each gaming terminals  4 - 1 , and data &amp; programs stored in the ROM  82 - 1  &amp; the RAM  83 - 1 . Also, the server CPU  81 - 1  transmits command signals to the gaming terminals  4 - 1  according to the processing results, to control each gaming terminal  4 - 1  by its initiative. Also, the server CPU  81 - 1  transmits control signals to the roulette device  2 - 1 , to control the shooting of the ball  27 - 1  and the rotation of the roulette wheel  22 - 1 . 
     The ROM  82 - 1  is formed by a semiconductor memory or the like and stores programs that implement basic functions of the roulette game machine  1 - 1 , programs that execute the notification of the maintenance time and the setting &amp; management of the notification condition, the payout rate data for the roulette game (the payout credits with respect to the win per one chip), programs for controlling each gaming terminal  4 - 1  initiatively, etc. 
     On the other hand, the RAM  83 - 1  temporarily stores the betting information supplied from each gaming terminal  4 - 1 , the winning number of the roulette device  2 - 1  detected by the sensors, the accumulated JP credits, the data regarding the result of the processing executed by the server CPU  81 - 1 , etc. 
     In addition, the timer  84 - 1  is connected to the server CPU  81 - 1 . The time information of the timer  84 - 1  is transmitted to the server CPU  81 - 1 . The server CPU  81 - 1  executes the control of the rotation of the roulette wheel  22 - 1  and the shooting of the ball  27 - 1  based on the time information of the timer  84 - 1 . 
       FIG. 52  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the roulette device according to the present embodiment. 
     As shown in  FIG. 52 , the roulette device  2 - 1  has a controller  109 - 1 , the pocket position detection circuit  107 - 1 , the ball launching device  104 - 1 , the ball sensor  105 - 1 , the wheel driving motor  106 - 1 , and a ball collecting device  108 - 1 . The controller  109 - 1  corresponds to the controller of the present invention. 
     The controller  109 - 1  has a CPU  101 - 1 , a ROM  102 - 1 , and a RAM  103 - 1 . The CPU  101 - 1  controls the shooting of the ball  27 - 1  and the rotation of the roulette wheel  22 - 1  according to the control signals supplied from the server  13 - 1 , and data &amp; programs stored in the ROM  102 - 1  &amp; the RAM  103 - 1 . 
     The pocket position detection circuit  107 - 1  has a proximity sensor. It detects the rotation position of the roulette wheel  22 - 1  by detecting metal plates attached to the roulette wheel  22 - 1 . 
     The ball launching device  104 - 1  is for launching the ball  27 - 1  onto the roulette wheel  22 - 1  from the ball launching hole  36 - 1  (see  FIG. 49 ). The ball launching device  104 - 1  shoots the ball  27 - 1  at an initial speed and at a timing set in the control data. 
     The ball sensor  105 - 1  is a device for detecting the number pocket  23 - 1  into which the ball  27 - 1  fell. The wheel driving motor  106 - 1  is for rotating the roulette wheel  22 - 1 . The wheel driving motor  106 - 1  stops the activation after the motor driving time that is set in the control data has elapsed since the start of the activation. The ball collecting device  108 - 1  is for collecting the ball  27 - 1  on the roulette wheel  22 - 1  after the game is over. 
       FIG. 53  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the gaming terminal according to the present embodiment. Note that 9 sets of the gaming terminals  4 - 1  have basically the same configuration, and an example of one gaming terminal  4 - 1  will be described in the following. 
     As shown in  FIG. 53 , the gaming terminal  4 - 1  has a terminal controller  90 - 1  formed by a terminal CPU  91 - 1 , a ROM  92 - 1  and a RAM  93 - 1 . The ROM  92 - 1  is formed by a semiconductor memory or the like and stores programs that implement basic functions of the gaming terminal  4 - 1 , and various programs, data table, etc., that are necessary for controlling the gaming terminal  4 - 1 . Also, the RAM  93 - 1  is a memory for temporarily storing various data calculated by the terminal CPU  91 - 1 , the owned credits by the player (deposited at the gaming terminal  4 - 1 ), the state of betting by the player, a flag F for indicating that it is under the betting period or not, etc. 
     To the terminal CPU  91 - 1 , a payout button  5 - 1  is connected. 
     The payout button  5 - 1  is a button to be pressed by the player usually when the game is over. When the payout button  5 - 1  is pressed by the player, the medals according to the credits acquired in the game by the player will be paid from the medal payout opening  12 - 1  (usually one medal for one credit). 
     The terminal CPU  91 - 1  executes various corresponding operations according to the operation signals outputted by the payout button  5 - 1  as a result of pressing of the payout button  5 - 1 . More specifically, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  executes various processings when signals associated with the pressing of the bet confirmation button  65 - 1  is inputted, according to the input signals and data &amp; programs stored in the ROM  92 - 1  &amp; the RAM  93 - 1 . The terminal CPU  91 - 1  transmits their processing results to the server CPU  81 - 1 . 
     Also, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  receives command signals from the sever CPU  81 - 1  and controls peripheral devices constituting the gaming terminal  4 - 1 , so as to proceed with the game. Also, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  executes various processings according to the above described input signals and data &amp; programs stored in the ROM  92 - 1  &amp; the RAM  93 - 1 , depending on the processing contents. The terminal CPU  91 - 1  controls the peripheral devices constituting the gaming terminal  4 - 1  according to the processing results, so as to proceed with the game. 
     Also, a hopper  94 - 1  is connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 1 . The hopper  94 - 1  pays a prescribed number of medals from the medal payout opening  12 - 1  (see  FIG. 47 ) according to a command signal from the terminal CPU  91 - 1 . 
     In addition, the display  8 - 1  is connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 1  through a LCD driving circuit  95 - 1 . The LCD driving circuit  95 - 1  has a program ROM, an image ROM, an image control CPU, a work RAM, VDP (Video Display Processor), and a video RAM. The program ROM stores an image controlling program and various selection tables regarding the display at the display  8 - 1 . The image ROM stores dot data for forming an image to be displayed at the display  8 - 1 , for example. The image control CPU makes the determination of an image to be displayed at the display  8 - 1  from the dot data in the image ROM, according to the image control program in the program ROM, based on parameters set up by the terminal CPU  91 - 1 . The work RAM is provided as a temporary memory device at a time of executing the image control program at the image control CPU. The VDP forms a display image determined by the image control CPU and outputs it to the display  8 - 1 . Note that the video RAM is provided as a temporary memory device at a time of forming an image by the VDP. 
     Also, the touch panel  50 - 1  is attached on the front surface of the display  8 - 1 . The operation information of the touch panel  50 - 1  is transmitted to the terminal CPU  91 - 1 . At the touch panel  50 - 1 , the betting operation by the player is carried out on the bet screen  61 - 1 . More specifically, the operation of the touch panel  50 - 1  is carried out for the selection of the bet area  72 - 1  and the input via the bet buttons  66 - 1  and the bet confirmation button  65 - 1 , etc. When the touch panel  50 - 1  is operated, its operation information is transmitted to the terminal CPU  91 - 1 . Then, according to that information, the betting information (the bet area and the number of bets specified on the bet screen  61 - 1 ) is stored into the RAM  93 - 1 . In addition, this betting information is transmitted to the server CPU  81 - 1 , and stored in the betting information memory area of the RAM  83 - 1 . 
     Moreover, a round output circuit  96 - 1  and the speaker  10 - 1  are connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 1 . The speaker  10 - 1  generates, based on output signals from the sound output circuit  96 - 1 , various sound effects for executing various effects and dialog message sounds to the player for interactive gaming. 
     Meanwhile, a sound input circuit  98 - 1  and the microphone  15 - 1  are connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 1 . The microphone  15 - 1  is used to input through the sound input circuit  98 - 1 , into the terminal CPU  91 - 1 , response message sounds in the player&#39;s voice to the dialog message sounds outputted from the speaker  10 - 1 . 
     Also, a medal sensor  97 - 1  is connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 1 . The medal sensor  97 - 1  detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot  7 - 1  (see  FIG. 47 ). At the same time, the medal sensor  97 - 1  counts the inserted medals, and transmits its result to the terminal CPU  91 - 1 . The terminal CPU  91 - 1  increases the amount of credits of the player that is stored in the RAM  93 - 1  according to the transmitted signal. 
     Also, a WIN lamp  11 - 1  is connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 1 . The terminal CPU  91 - 1  turns on the WIN lamp  11 - 1  in a prescribed color, when the bet on the bet screen  61 - 1  won or when the JP is won. 
     Moreover, external memories  99 - 1  and  100 - 1  are connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 1 . Each of the external memories is formed of a hard disk device. The terminal CPU  91 - 1  writes and reads data in and out of the external memories  99 - 1  and  100 - 1  as needed. Of these external memories  99 - 1  and  100 - 1 , in the external memory  100 - 1  (a memory), menu data indicating multiple items orderable through this gaming terminal  4 - 1  and classifications of these items in a hierarchical structure are stored in multiple language types usable for playing the roulette game. 
     Moreover, the gaming terminal  4 - 1  provided with the above-described terminal controller  90 - 1  includes a conversation engine. By using this conversation engine, at least part of the roulette games on the gaming terminal  4 - 1  are interactively executed in a dialog style with the player by using the display  8 - 1 , the speaker  10 - 1 , and the microphone  15 - 1  as interfaces. Accordingly, in a certain scene, as the roulette game proceeds, the message sound is outputted from the speaker  10 - 1  to the player through the sound output circuit  96 - 1  and the contents of the message sounds of the player inputted through the microphone  15 - 1  and the sound input circuit  98 - 1  are analyzed. 
     Such a conversation engine can be achieved by using any of the conversation controllers disclosed in US Patent Application Publication No. 2007/0094007, US Patent Application Publication No. 2007/0094008, US Patent Application Publication No. 2007/0094005, and US Patent Application Publication No. 2007/0094004, for example. As will be described later, such a conversation controller can be achieved by use of the display  8 - 1  and the speaker  10 - 1 , the microphone  15 - 1 , the terminal controller  90 - 1 , and the external memory  99 - 1  of the gaming terminal  4 - 1 . 
     Here, a configuration of the conversation controller disclosed in US Patent Application Publication No. 2007/0094007, which is available as the conversation engine to be installed on the gaming terminal  4 - 1  of this embodiment, will be described with reference to  FIG. 54  to  FIG. 75 .  FIG. 54  is a functional block diagram showing a configuration example of a conversation controller. 
     As shown in  FIG. 54 , a conversation controller  1000 - 1  includes an input unit  1100 - 1 , a speech recognition unit  1200 - 1 , a conversation control unit  1300 - 1 , a sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 1 , a conversation database  1500 - 1 , an output unit  1600 - 1 , and a speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 1 . 
     [Input Unit] 
     The input unit  1100 - 1  receives input information (user&#39;s utterance) input by a user. The input unit  1100 - 1  outputs a speech corresponding to contents of the received utterance as a voice signal to the speech recognition unit  1200 - 1 . Note that the input unit  1100 - 1  may be a character input unit such as a keyboard and a touchscreen (touch panel). In this case, the after-mentioned speech recognition unit  1200 - 1  doesn&#39;t need to be provided. 
     [Speech Recognition Unit] 
     The speech recognition unit  1200 - 1  specifies a character string corresponding to the uttered contents based on the uttered contents obtained via the input unit  1100 - 1 . Specifically, the speech recognition unit  1200 - 1  that has received the voice signal from the input unit  1100 - 1  compares the received voice signal with the conversation database  1500 - 1  and dictionaries stored in the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 1  based on the voice signal to output a speech recognition result estimated based on the voice signal to the conversation control unit  1300 - 1 . In a configuration example shown in  FIG. 54 , the speech recognition unit  1200 - 1  requests acquisition of memory contents of the conversation database  1500 - 1  to the conversation control unit  1300 - 1  and then receives the memory contents of the conversation database  1500 - 1  which the conversation control unit  1300 - 1  retrieves according to the request from the speech recognition unit  1200 - 1 . However the speech recognition unit  1200 - 1  may directly retrieves the memory contents of the conversation database  1500 - 1  for comparing with the voice signal. 
     Configuration Example of Speech Recognition Unit 
       FIG. 55  is a functional block diagram showing a configuration example of the speech recognition unit  1200 - 1 . The speech recognition unit  1200 - 1  includes a feature extraction unit  1200 A- 1 , a buffer memory (BM)  1200 B- 1 , a word retrieving unit  1200 C- 1 , a buffer memory (BM)  1200 D- 1 , a candidate determination unit  1200 E- 1  and a word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 1 . The word retrieving unit  1200 C- 1  and the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 1  are connected to the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 1 . In addition, the candidate determination unit  1200 E- 1  is connected to the conversation database  1500 - 1  via the conversation control unit  1300 - 1 . 
     The speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 1  connected to the word retrieving unit  1200 C- 1  stores a phoneme hidden markov model (hereinafter, the hidden markov model is referred as the HMM). The phoneme HMM is described with various states and each of the states includes the following information. It is configured with (a) a state number, (b) an acceptable context class, (c) lists of a previous state and a subsequent state, (d) parameters of an output probability density distribution, and (e) a self-transition probability and a transition probability to a subsequent state. The phoneme HMM used in the present embodiment is generated by converting a prescribed Speaker-Mixture HMM in order to specify which speakers respective distributions are derived from. An output probability density function is a Mixture Gaussian distribution with a 34-dimensional diagonal covariance matrix. The speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 1  connected to the word retrieving unit  1200 C- 1  further stores a word dictionary. The word dictionary stores symbol strings each of which indicates a reading represented as a symbol per each word in the phoneme HMM. 
     A speaker&#39;s speech is input into a microphone or the like and then converted into a voice signal to be input to the feature extraction unit  1200 A- 1 . The feature extraction unit  1200 A- 1  converts the input voice signal from analog to digital and then extracts a feature parameter from the voice signal to output the feature parameter. There are various methods for extracting and outputting the feature parameter. For example, an LPC analysis is executed to extract a 34-dimensional feature parameter including a logarithm power, a 16-dimensional cepstrum coefficient, a Δ-logarithm power and a 16-dimensional Δ-cepstrum coefficient. The time series of the extracted feature parameters are input to the word retrieving unit  1200 C- 1  via the buffer memory (BM)  1200 B- 1 . 
     The word retrieving unit  1200 C- 1  retrieves word hypotheses with a one-pass Viterbi decoding method based on the feature parameters input from the feature extraction unit  1200 A- 1  via the buffer memory (BM)  1200 B- 1  by using the phoneme HMM and the word dictionary stored in the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 1 , and then calculates likelihoods. Here, the word retrieving unit  1200 C- 1  calculates a likelihood in a word and a likelihood from a speech start for each state of the phoneme HMM at each time. The likelihood is calculated each of an identification number of a calculating-object word, a speech start time of the word and a difference of a preceding word previously uttered before the word. The word retrieving unit  1200 C- 1  may reduce grid hypotheses of the lower likelihoods among all of the calculated likelihoods based on the phoneme HMM and the word dictionary in order to reduce a computing throughput. The word retrieving unit  1200 C- 1  outputs information on the retrieved word hypotheses and the likelihoods of the retrieved word hypotheses together with time information regarding an elapsed time from the speech start time (e.g. frame number) to the candidate determination unit  1200 E- 1  and the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 1  via the buffer memory (BM)  1200 D- 1 . 
     The candidate determination unit  1200 E- 1  compares the retrieved word hypotheses with topic specification information in a prescribed discourse space with reference to the conversation control unit  1300 - 1 , and then determines whether or not exists a coincident word hypothesis with the topic specification information in the prescribed discourse space among the retrieved word hypotheses. If the coincident word hypothesis exists, the candidate determination unit  1200 E- 1  outputs the coincident word hypothesis as a recognition result. On the other hand, if the coincident word hypothesis doesn&#39;t exist, the candidate determination unit  1200 E- 1  requires the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 1  to refine the retrieved word hypotheses. 
     An operation of the candidate determination unit  1200 E- 1  will be described. Here, it is assumed that the word retrieving unit  1200 C- 1  outputs plural word hypotheses (“KANTAKU (reclamation)”, “KATAKU (pretext)” and “KANTOKU (director)”) and plural likelihoods (recognition rates) for the respective word hypotheses; the prescribed discourse space relates to movies; the topic specification information of the prescribed discourse space includes “KANTOKU (director)” but neither “KANTAKU (reclamation)” nor “KATAKU (pretext)”; among the likelihoods (recognition rates) of “KANTAKU (reclamation)”, “KATAKU (pretext)” and “KANTOKU (director)”, “KANTAKU (reclamation)” is highest, “KANTOKU (director)” is lowest and “KATAKU (pretext)” is intermediate between the two. 
     The candidate determination unit  1200 E- 1  compares the retrieved word hypotheses with the topic specification information in the prescribed discourse space, and then specifies the coincident word hypothesis “KANTOKU (director)” with the topic specification information to output the word hypothesis “KANTOKU (director)” to the conversation control unit  1300 - 1  as the recognition result. Processed in this manner, the word hypothesis “KANTOKU (director)” relating to the current topic “movies” is selected ahead of the word hypotheses “KANTAKU (reclamation)” and “KATAKU (pretext)” with higher likelihoods. As a result, the recognition result appropriate with the discourse context can be output. 
     On the other hand, if no coincident word hypothesis exists, the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 1  operates to output the recognition result in response to the request from the candidate determination unit  1200 E- 1  to refine the retrieved word hypotheses. The word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 1  refines the retrieved word hypotheses for the same words having the same speech termination time and different speech start time per each initial phonetic environment of the same words with reference to a statistical language model stored in the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 1  based on the plural retrieved word hypotheses output from the word retrieving unit  1200 C- 1  via the buffer memory (BM)  1200 D- 1  so that one word hypothesis with the highest likelihood may be selected as a representative among all of the likelihoods calculated between the speech start and the utterance termination of the word. And then, the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 1  outputs one word string of the one word hypothesis with the highest likelihood as the recognition result among all word strings of the refined word hypotheses. In the present embodiment, the initial phonetic environment of the same word to be processed is preferably defined with a three-phoneme series containing the last phoneme of the word hypothesis preceding the same word and two initial phonemes of the word hypothesis of the same word. 
     A word refinement process executed by the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 1  will be described with reference to  FIG. 56 . 
     For example, it is assumed that the (i)th word Wi, which consists of a phonemic string a 1 , a 2 , . . . and an, follows the (i−1)th word W(i−1) and six hypotheses Wa, Wb, We, Wd, We and Wf exist as a word hypothesis of the (i−1)th word W(i−1). It is further assumed that the last phoneme of the former three word hypotheses Wa, Wb and Wc is /x/, and the last phoneme of the latter three word hypotheses Wd, We and Wf is /y/. If three hypotheses each premised on three word hypotheses Wa, Wb and Wc and also one hypothesis premised on three word hypotheses Wd, We and Wf remain at the speech termination time te, the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 1  is selected one hypothesis with the highest likelihood among the former three hypotheses with the same initial phonetic environment, and other two hypotheses are excluded. 
     Note that, since the initial phonetic environment of the hypothesis premised on the word hypotheses Wd, We and Wf is different from those of the other three hypotheses, that is, the last phoneme of the preceded word hypothesis is not /x/ but /y/, the hypothesis premised on the word hypotheses Wd, We and Wf is not excluded. In other words, one hypothesis is kept for each of the last phonemes of the preceding word hypotheses. 
     In the present embodiment, the initial phonetic environment of the word is defined with a three-phoneme series containing the last phoneme of the word hypothesis preceding the word and two initial phonemes of the word hypothesis of the word. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The initial phonetic environment of the word may be defined with a phoneme series containing a phoneme string of the preceding word hypothesis including the last phoneme of the preceding word hypothesis and at least one serial phoneme with the last phoneme of the preceding word hypothesis and a phoneme string including the first phoneme of the word hypothesis of the word. 
     In the present embodiment, the feature extraction unit  1200 A- 1 , the word retrieving unit  1200 C- 1 , the candidate determination unit  1200 E- 1  and the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 1  are composed of a computer such as a microcomputer. The buffer memories (BMs)  200 B- 1  and  200 D- 1  and the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 1  are composed of a memory unit such as a hard disk storage. 
     In the above-mentioned embodiment, the speech recognition is executed by using the word retrieving unit  1200 C- 1  and the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 1 . However, the present invention is not limited to this. The speech recognition unit  1200 - 1  may be composed of a phoneme comparison unit for referring to the phoneme HMM and a speech recognition unit for executing the speech recognition of a ward with reference to a statistical language model by using, for example, a One Pass DP algorithm. 
     In addition, in the present embodiment, the speech recognition unit  1200 - 1  is explained as a part of the conversation controller  1000 - 1 . However, a independent speech recognition apparatus configured by the speech recognition unit  1200 - 1 , the conversation database  1500 - 1  and the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 1  may be possibly employed. 
     Operating Example of Speech Recognition Unit 
     Next, operations of the speech recognition unit  1200 - 1  will be described with reference to  FIG. 57 .  FIG. 57  is a flow-chart showing process operations of the speech recognition unit  1200 - 1 . 
     The speech recognition unit  1200 - 1  executes a feature analysis of the input speech to generate feature parameters on receiving the voice signal from the input unit  1100 - 1  (step S 401 - 1 ). Next, the feature parameters is compared with the phoneme HMM and the language model stored in the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 1 , and then a certain number of word hypotheses and the likelihoods of the word hypotheses are obtained (step S 402 - 1 ). Next, the speech recognition unit  1200 - 1  compares the obtained certain number of word hypotheses, the retrieved word hypotheses and the topic specification information in the prescribed discourse space to determine whether or not the coincident word hypothesis with the topic specification information in the prescribed discourse space exists among the retrieved word hypotheses (steps S 403 - 1  and S 404 - 1 ). If the coincident word hypothesis exists, the speech recognition unit  1200 - 1  outputs the coincident word hypothesis as the recognition result (step S 405 - 1 ). On the other hand, if no coincident word hypothesis exists, the speech recognition unit  1200 - 1  outputs the word hypothesis with the highest likelihood as the recognition result according to the obtained likelihoods of the word hypotheses (step S 406 - 1 ). 
     [Speech Recognition Dictionary Memory] 
     The configuration example of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  is further described with referring back to  FIG. 54  again. 
     The speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 1  stores character strings corresponding to standard voice signals. The speech recognition unit  1200 - 1 , which has executed the comparison, specifies a word hypothesis for a character string corresponding to the received voice signal, and then outputs the specified word hypothesis as a character string signal to the conversation control unit  1300 - 1 . 
     [Sentence Analyzing Unit] 
     Next, a configuration example of the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 1  will be described with reference to  FIG. 58 .  FIG. 58  is a partly enlarged block diagram of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  and also a block diagram showing a concrete configuration example of the conversation control unit  1300 - 1  and the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 1 . Note that only the conversation control unit  1300 - 1 , the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 1  and the conversation database  1500 - 1  are shown in  FIG. 58  and the other components are omitted to be shown. 
     The sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 1  analyses a character string specified at the input unit  1100 - 1  or the speech recognition unit  1200 - 1 . In the present embodiment as shown in  FIG. 58 , the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 1  includes a character string specifying unit  1410 - 1 , a morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 1 , a morpheme database  1430 - 1 , an input type determining unit  1440 - 1  and an utterance type database  1450 - 1 . The character string specifying unit  1410 - 1  segments a series of character strings specified by the input unit  1100 - 1  or the speech recognition unit  1200 - 1  into segments. Each segment is a minimum segmented sentence which is segmented in the extent to keep a grammatical meaning. Specifically, if the series of the character strings have a time interval more than a certain interval, the character string specifying unit  1410 - 1  segments the character strings there. The character string specifying unit  1410 - 1  outputs the segmented character strings to the morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 1  and the input type determining unit  1440 - 1 . Note that a “character string” to be described below means one segmented character string. 
     [Morpheme Extracting Unit] 
     The morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 1  extracts morphemes constituting minimum units of the character string as first morpheme information from each of the segmented character strings based on each of the segmented character strings segmented by the character string specifying unit  1410 - 1 . In the present embodiment, a morpheme means a minimum unit of a word structure shown in a character string. For example, each minimum unit of a word structure may be a word class such as a noun, an adjective and a verb. 
     In the present embodiment as shown in  FIG. 59 , the morphemes are indicated as m 1 , m 2 , m 3 , . . . .  FIG. 59 . is a diagram showing a relation between a character string and morphemes extracted from the character string. The morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 1 , which has received the character strings from the character string specifying unit  1410 - 1 , compares the received character strings and morpheme groups previously stored in the morpheme database  1430 - 1  (each of the morpheme group is prepared as a morpheme dictionary in which a direction word, a reading, a word class and infected forms are described for each morpheme belonging to each word-class classification) as shown in  FIG. 59 . The morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 1 , which has executed the comparison, extracts coincident morphemes (m 1 , m 2 , . . . ) with any of the stored morpheme groups from the character strings. Other morphemes (n 1 , n 2 , n 3 , . . . ) than the extracted morphemes may be auxiliary verbs, for example. 
     The morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 1  outputs the extracted morphemes to a topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 1  as the first morpheme information. Note that the first morpheme information is not needed to be structurized. Here, “structurizing” means classifying and arranging morphemes included in a character string based on word classes. For example, it may be data conversion in which a character string as an uttered sentence is segmented into morphemes and then the morphemes are arranged in a prescribed order such as “Subject+Object+Predicate”. Needless to say, the structurized first morpheme information doesn&#39;t prevent the operations of the present embodiment. 
     [Input Type Determining Unit] 
     The input type determining unit  1440 - 1  determines an uttered contents type (utterance type) based on the character strings specified by the character string specifying unit  1410 - 1 . In the present embodiment, the utterance type is information for specifying the uttered contents type and, for example, corresponds to “uttered sentence type” shown in  FIG. 60 .  FIG. 60  is a table showing the “uttered sentence types”, two-alphabet codes representing the uttered sentence types, and uttered sentence examples corresponding to the uttered sentence types. 
     Here in the present embodiment as shown in  FIG. 60 , the “uttered sentence types” include declarative sentences (D: Declaration), time sentences (T: Time), locational sentences (L: Location), negational sentences (N: Negation) and so on. A sentence configured by each of these types is an affirmative sentence or an interrogative sentence. A “declarative sentence” means a sentence showing a user&#39;s opinion or notion. In the present embodiment, one example of the “declarative sentence” is the sentence “I like Sato” shown in  FIG. 60 . A “locational sentence” means a sentence involving a location concept. A “time sentence” means a sentence involving a time concept. A “negational sentence” means a sentence to deny a declarative sentence. Sentence examples of the “uttered sentence types” are shown in  FIG. 60 . 
     In the present embodiment as shown in  FIG. 61 , the input type determining unit  1440 - 1  uses a declarative expression dictionary for determination of a declarative sentence, a negational expression dictionary for determination of a negational sentence and so on in order to determine the “uttered sentence type”. Specifically, the input type determining unit  1440 - 1 , which has received the character strings from the character string specifying unit  1410 - 1 , compares the received character strings and the dictionaries stored in the utterance type database  1450 - 1  based on the received character string. The input type determining unit  1440 - 1 , which has executed the comparison, extracts elements relevant to the dictionaries among the character strings. 
     The input type determining unit  1440 - 1  determines the “uttered sentence type” based on the extracted elements. For example, if the character string includes elements declaring an event, the input type determining unit  1440 - 1  determines that the character string including the elements is a declarative sentence. The input type determining unit  1440 - 1  outputs the determined “uttered sentence type” to a reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1 . 
     [Conversation Database] 
     A configuration example of data structure stored in the conversation database  1500 - 1  will be described with reference to  FIG. 62 .  FIG. 62  is a conceptual diagram showing the configuration example of data stored in the conversation database  1500 - 1 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 62 , the conversation database  1500 - 1  stores a plurality of topic specification information  810 - 1  for specifying a conversation topic. In addition, topic specification information  810 - 1  can be associated with other topic specification information  810 - 1 . For example, if topic specification information C ( 810 - 1 ) is specified, three of topic specification information A ( 810 - 1 ), B ( 810 - 1 ) and D ( 810 - 1 ) associated with the topic specification information C ( 810 - 1 ) are also specified. 
     Specifically in the present embodiment, topic specification information  810 - 1  means “keywords” which are relevant to input contents expected to be input from users or relevant to reply sentences to users. 
     The topic specification information  810 - 1  is associated with one or more topic titles  820 - 1 . Each of the topic titles  820 - 1  is configured with a morpheme composed of one character, plural character strings or a combination thereof. A reply sentence  830 - 1  to be output to users is stored in association with each of the topic titles  820 - 1 . Response types indicate types of the reply sentences  830 - 1  and are associated with the reply sentences  830 - 1 , respectively. 
     Next, an association between the topic specification information  810 - 1  and the other topic specification information  810 - 1  will be described.  FIG. 63  is a diagram showing the association between certain topic specification information  810 A- 1  and the other topic specification information  810 B- 1 ,  810 C 1 - 1 - 810 C 4 - 1  and  810 D 1 - 1 - 810 D 3 - 1  . . . . Note that a phrase “stored in association with” mentioned below indicates that, when certain information X is read out, information Y stored in association with the information X can be also read out. For example, a phrase “information Y is stored ‘in association with’ the information X” indicates a state where information for reading out the information Y (such as, a pointer indicating a storing address of the information Y, a physical memory address or a logical address in which the information Y is stored, and so on) is implemented in the information X. 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 63 , the topic specification information can be stored in association with the other topic specification information with respect to a superordinate concept, a subordinate concept, a synonym or an antonym (not shown in  FIG. 63 ). For example as shown in  FIG. 63 , the topic specification information  810 B- 1  (amusement) is stored in association with the topic specification information  810 A- 1  (movie) as a superordinate concept and stored in a higher level than the topic specification information  810 B- 1  (amusement). 
     In addition, subordinate concepts of the topic specification information  810 A- 1  (movie), the topic specification information  810 C 1 - 1  (director),  810 C 2 - 1  (starring actor[ress]),  810 C 3 - 1  (distributor),  810 C 4 - 1  (screen time),  810 D 1 - 1  (“Seven Samurai”),  810 D 2 - 1  (“Ran”),  810 D 3 - 1  (“Yojimbo”), . . . , are stored in association with the topic specification information  810 A- 1 . 
     In addition, synonyms  900 - 1  are associated with the topic specification information  810 A- 1 . In this example, “work”, “contents” and “cinema” are stored as synonyms of “movie” which is a keyword of the topic specification information  810 A- 1 . By defining these synonyms in this manner, the topic specification information  810 A- 1  can be treated as included in an uttered sentence even though the uttered sentence doesn&#39;t include the keyword “movie” but includes “work”, “contents” or “cinema”. 
     In the conversation controller  1000 - 1  according to the present embodiment, when certain topic specification information  810 - 1  has been specified with reference to contents stored in the conversation database  1500 - 1 , other topic specification information  810 - 1  and the topic titles  820 - 1  or the reply sentences  830 - 1  of the other topic specification information  810 - 1 , which are stored in association with the certain topic specification information  810 - 1 , can be retrieved and extracted rapidly. 
     Next, data configuration examples of topic titles  820 - 1  (also referred as “second morpheme information”) will be described with reference to  FIG. 64 .  FIG. 64  is a diagram showing the data configuration examples of the topic titles  820 - 1 . 
     The topic specification information  810 D 1 - 1 ,  810 D 2 - 1 ,  810 D 3 - 1 , . . . , include the topic titles  820   1 - 1 ,  820   2 - 1 , . . . , the topic titles  820   3 - 1 ,  820   4 - 1 , . . . , the topic titles  820   5 - 1 ,  820   6 - 1 , . . . , respectively. In the present embodiment as shown in  FIG. 64 , each of the topic titles  820 - 1  is information composed of first specification information  1001 - 1 , second specification information  1002 - 1  and third specification information  1003 - 1 . Here, the first specification information  1001 - 1  is a main morpheme constituting a topic. For example, the first specification information  1001 - 1  may be a Subject of a sentence. In addition, the second specification information  1002 - 1  is a morpheme closely relevant to the first specification information  1001 - 1 . For example, the second specification information  1002 - 1  may be an Object. Furthermore, the third specification information  1003 - 1  in the present embodiment is a morpheme showing a movement of a certain subject, a morpheme of a noun modifier and so on. For example, the third specification information  1003 - 1  may be a verb, an adverb or an adjective. Note that the first specification information  1001 - 1 , the second specification information  1002 - 1  and the third specification information  1003 - 1  are not limited to the above meanings. The present embodiment can be effected in case where contents of a sentence can be understood based on the first specification information  1001 - 1 , the second specification information  1002 - 1  and the third specification information  1003 - 1  even though they are give other meanings (other ward classes). 
     For example as shown in  FIG. 64 , if the Subject is “Seven Samurai” and the adjective is “interesting”, the topic title  820   2 - 1  (second morpheme information) consists of the morpheme “Seven Samurai” included in the first specification information  1001 - 1  and the morpheme “interesting” included in the third specification information  1003 - 1 . Note that the second specification information  1002 - 1  of this topic title  820   2 - 1  includes no morpheme and a symbol “*” is stored in the second specification information  1002 - 1  for indicating no morpheme included. 
     Note that this topic title  820   2 - 1  (Seven Samurai; *; interesting) has the meaning of “Seven Samurai is interesting.” Hereinafter, parenthetic contents for a topic title  820   2 - 1  indicate the specification information  1001 - 1 , the second specification information  1002 - 1  and the third specification information  1003 - 1  from the left. In addition, when no morpheme is included in any of the first to third specification information, “*” is indicated therein. 
     Note that the specification information constituting the topic titles  820 - 1  is not limited to three and other specification information (fourth specification information and more) may be included. 
     The reply sentences  830 - 1  will be described with reference to  FIG. 65 . In the present embodiment as shown in  FIG. 65 , the reply sentences  830 - 1  are classified into different types (response types) such as declaration (D: Declaration), time (T: Time), location (L: Location) and negation (N: Negation) for making a reply corresponding to the uttered sentence type of the user&#39;s utterance. Note that an affirmative sentence is classified with “A” and an interrogative sentence is classified with “Q”. 
     A configuration example of data structure of the topic specification information  810 - 1  will be described with reference to  FIG. 66 .  FIG. 66  shows a concrete example of the topic titles  820 - 1  and the reply sentences  830 - 1  associated with the topic specification information  810 - 1  “Sato”. 
     The topic specification information  810 - 1  “Sato” is associated with plural topic titles ( 820 - 1 )  1 - 1 ,  1 - 2 , . . . . Each of the topic titles ( 820 - 1 )  1 - 1 ,  1 - 2 , . . . is associated with reply sentences ( 830 - 1 )  1 - 1 ,  1 - 2 , . . . . The reply sentence  830 - 1  is prepared per each of the response types  840 - 1 . 
     For example, when the topic title ( 820 - 1 )  1 - 1  is (Sato; *; like) [these are extracted morphemes included in “I like Sato”], the reply sentences ( 830 - 1 )  1 - 1  associated with the topic title ( 820 - 1 )  1 - 1  include (DA: a declarative affirmative sentence “I like Sato, too.”) and (TA: a time affirmative sentence “I like Sato at bat.”). The after-mentioned reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1  retrieves one reply sentence  830 - 1  associated with the topic title  820 - 1  with reference to an output from the input type determining unit  1440 - 1 . 
     Next-plan designation information  840 - 1  is allocated to each of the reply sentences  830 - 1 . The next-plan designation information  840 - 1  is information for designating a reply sentence to be preferentially output against a user&#39;s utterance in association with the each of the reply sentences (referred as a “next-reply sentence”). The next-plan designation information  840 - 1  may be any information even if a next-reply sentence can be specified by the information. For example, the information may be a reply sentence ID, by which at least one reply sentence can be specified among all reply sentences stored in the conversation database  1500 - 1 . 
     In the present embodiment, the next-plan designation information  840 - 1  is described as information for specifying one next-reply sentence per one reply sentence (for example, a reply sentence ID). However, the next-plan designation information  840 - 1  may be information for specifying next-reply sentences per topic specification information  810 - 1  or per one topic title  820 - 1 . (In this case, since plural replay sentences are designated, they are referred as a “next-reply sentence group”. However, only one of the reply sentences included in the next-reply sentence group will be actually output as the reply sentence.) For example, the present embodiment can be effected in case where a topic title ID or a topic specification information ID is used as the next-plan designation information. 
     [Conversation Control Unit] 
     A configuration example of the conversation control unit  1300 - 1  is further described with referring back to  FIG. 58 . 
     The conversation control unit  1300 - 1  functions to control data transmitting between configuration components in the conversation controller  1000 - 1  (the speech recognition unit  1200 - 1 , the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 1 , the conversation database  1500 - 1 , the output unit  1600 - 1  and the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 1 ), and determine and output a reply sentence in response to a user&#39;s utterance. 
     In the present embodiment shown in  FIG. 58 , the conversation control unit  1300 - 1  includes a managing unit  1310 - 1 , a plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1 , a discourse space conversation control process unit  1330 - 1  and a CA conversation process unit  1340 - 1 . Hereinafter, these configuration components will be described. 
     [Managing Unit] 
     The managing unit  1310 - 1  functions to store discourse histories and update, if needed, the discourse histories. The managing unit  1310 - 1  further functions to transmit some or entire of the stored discourse histories to a part or a whole of the discourse histories to a topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 1 , an elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1 , a topic retrieval unit  1370 - 1  or a reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1  in response to a request therefrom. 
     [Plan Conversation Process Unit] 
     The plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  functions to execute plans and establish conversations between a user and the conversation controller  1000 - 1  according to the plans. A “plan” means providing a predetermined reply to a user in a predetermined order. 
     The plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  functions to output the predetermined reply in the predetermined order in response to a user&#39;s utterance. 
       FIG. 67  is a conceptual diagram to describe plans. As shown in  FIG. 67 , various plans  1402 - 1  such as plural plans  1 ,  2 ,  3  and  4  are prepared in a plan space  1401 - 1 . The plan space  1401 - 1  is a set of the plural plans  1402 - 1  stored in the conversation database  1500 - 1 . The conversation controller  1000 - 1  selects a preset plan  1402 - 1  for a start-up on an activation or a conversation start or arbitrarily selects one of the plans  1402 - 1  in the plan space  1401 - 1  in response to a user&#39;s utterance contents in order to output a reply sentence against the user&#39;s utterance by using the selected plan  1402 - 1 . 
       FIG. 68  shows a configuration example of plans  1402 - 1 . Each plan  1402 - 1  includes a reply sentence  1501 - 1  and next-plan designation information  1502 - 1  associated therewith. The next-plan designation information  1502 - 1  is information for specifying, in response to a certain reply sentence  1501 - 1  in a plan  1402 - 1 , another plan  1402 - 1  including a reply sentence to be output to a user (referred as a “next-reply candidate sentence”). In this example, the plan  1  includes a reply sentence A ( 1501 - 1 ) to be output at an execution of the plan  1  by the conversation controller  1000 - 1  and next-plan designation information  1502 - 1  associated with the reply sentence A ( 1501 - 1 ). The next-plan designation information  1502 - 1  is information [ID: 002] for specifying a plan  2  including a reply sentence B ( 1501 - 1 ) to be a next-reply candidate sentence to the reply sentence A ( 1501 - 1 ). Similarly, since the reply sentence B ( 1501 - 1 ) is also associated with next-plan designation information  1502 - 1 , another plan  1402 - 1  [ID: 043] including the next-reply candidate sentence will be designated when the reply sentence B ( 1501 - 1 ) has output. In this manner, plans  1402 - 1  are chained via next-plan designation information  1502 - 1  and plan conversations in which a series of successive contents can be output to a user. 
     In other words, since contents expected to be provided to a user (an explanatory sentence, an announcement sentence, a questionnaire and so on) are separated into plural reply sentences and the reply sentences are prepared as a plan with their order predetermined, it becomes possible to provide a series of the reply sentences to the user in response to the user&#39;s utterances. Note that a reply sentence  1501 - 1  included in a plan  1402 - 1  designated by next-plan designation information  1502 - 1  is not needed to be output to a user immediately after an output of the user&#39;s utterance in response to an output of a previous reply sentence. The reply sentence  1501 - 1  included in the plan  1402 - 1  designated by the next-plan designation information  1502 - 1  may be output after an intervening conversation on a different topic from a topic in the plan between the conversation controller  1000 - 1  and the user. 
     Note that the reply sentence  1501 - 1  shown in  FIG. 68  corresponds to a sentence string of one of the reply sentences  830 - 1  shown in  FIG. 66 . In addition, the next-plan designation information  1502 - 1  shown in  FIG. 68  corresponds to the next-plan designation information  840 - 1  shown in  FIG. 66 . 
     Note that linkages between the plans  1402 - 1  are not limited to form a one-dimensional geometry shown in  FIG. 68 .  FIG. 69  shows an example of plans  1402 - 1  with another linkage geometry. In the example shown in  FIG. 69 , a plan  1  ( 1402 - 1 ) includes two of next-plan designation information  1502 - 1  to designate two reply sentences as next replay candidate sentences, in other words, to designate two plans  1402 - 1 . The two of next-plan designation information  1502 - 1  are prepared in order that the plan  2  ( 1402 - 1 ) including a reply sentence B ( 1501 - 1 ) and the plan  3  ( 1402 - 1 ) including a reply sentence C ( 1501 - 1 ) are to be designated as plans each including a next-reply candidate sentence. Note that the reply sentences are selective and alternative, so that, when one has been output, another is not output and then the plan  1  ( 1501 - 1 ) is terminated. In this manner, the linkages between the plans  1402 - 1  is not limited to forming a one-dimensional geometry and may form a tree-diagram-like geometry or a cancellous geometry. 
     Note that it is not limited that how many next-reply candidate sentences each plan  1402 - 1  includes. In addition, no next-plan designation information  1502 - 1  may be included in a plan  1402 - 1  which terminates a conversation. 
       FIG. 70  shows an example of a certain series of plans  1402 - 1 . As shown in  FIG. 70 , this series of plans  1402   1 - 1  to  1402   4 - 1  are associated with reply sentences  1501   1 - 1  to  1501   4 - 1  which notify crisis management information to a user. The reply sentences  1501   1 - 1  to  1501   4 - 1  constitute one coherent topic as a whole. Each of the plans  1402   1 - 1  to  1402   4 - 1  includes ID data  1702   1 - 1  to  1702   4 - 1  for indicating itself such as “1000-01, 1000-02”, “1000-03” and “1000-04”, respectively. In addition, each of the plans  1402   1 - 1  to  1402   4 - 1  further includes ID data  1502   1 - 1  to  1502   4 - 1  as the next-plan designation information such as “1000-02, 1000-03”, “1000-04” and “1000-0F”, respectively. Note that each value after a hyphen in the ID data is information indicating an output order. Especially, “0F” is information indicating the final plan (the last in the order). 
     In this example, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  starts to execute this series of plans when a user has uttered &#39;s utterance has been “Please tell me a crisis management applied when a large earthquake occurs.” Specifically, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  searches in the plan space  1401 - 1  and checks whether or not a plan  1402 - 1  including a reply sentence  1501   1 - 1  associated with the user&#39;s utterance “Please tell me a crisis management applied when a large earthquake occurs,” when the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  has received the user&#39;s utterance “Please tell me a crisis management applied when a large earthquake occurs.” In this example, a user&#39;s utterance character string  1701   1 - 1  associated with the user&#39;s utterance “Please tell me a crisis management applied when a large earthquake occurs,” is associated with a plan  1402   1 - 1 . 
     The plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  retrieves the reply sentence  1501   1 - 1  included in the plan  1402   1 - 1  on discovering the plan  1402   1 - 1  and outputs the reply sentence  1501   1 - 1  to the user as a reply sentence in response to the user&#39;s utterance. And then, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  specifies the next-reply candidate sentence with reference to the next-plan designation information  1502   1 - 1 . 
     Next, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  executes the plan  1402   2 - 1  on receiving another user&#39;s utterance via the input unit  1100 - 1 , a speech recognition unit  1200 - 1  or the like after an output of the reply sentence  1501   1 - 1 . Specifically, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  judges whether or not to execute the plan  1402   2 - 1  designated by the next-plan designation information  1502   1 - 1 , in other words, whether or not to output the second reply sentence  1501   2 - 1 . More specifically, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  compares a user&#39;s utterance character string (also referred as an illustrative sentence)  1701   2 - 1  associated with the reply sentence  1501   2 - 1  and the received user&#39;s utterance, or compares a topic title  820 - 1  (not shown in  FIG. 70 ) associated with the reply sentence  1501   2 - 1  and the received user&#39;s utterance. And then, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  determines whether or not the two are related to each other. If the two are related to each other, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  outputs the second reply sentence  1501   2 - 1 . In addition, since the plan  1402   2 - 1  including the second reply sentence  1501   2 - 1  also includes the next-plan designation information  1502   2 - 1 , the next-reply candidate sentence is specified. 
     Similarly, according to ongoing user&#39;s utterances, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  transit into the plans  1402   3 - 1  and  1402   4 - 1  in turn and can output the third and fourth reply sentences  1501   3 - 1  and  1501   4 - 1 . Note that, since the fourth reply sentence  1501   4 - 1  is the final reply sentence, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  terminates plan-executions when the fourth reply sentence  1501   4 - 1  has been output. 
     In this manner, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  can provide previously prepared conversation contents to the user in a predetermined order by sequentially executing the plans  1402   1 - 1  to  1402   4 - 1 . 
     [Discourse Space Conversation Control Process Unit] 
     The configuration example of the conversation control unit  1300 - 1  is further described with referring back to  FIG. 58 . 
     The discourse space conversation control process unit  1330 - 1  includes the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 1 , the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1 , the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 1  and the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1 . The managing unit  1310 - 1  totally controls the conversation control unit  1300 - 1 . 
     A “discourse history” is information for specifying a conversation topic or theme between a user and the conversation controller  1000 - 1  and includes at least one of “focused topic specification information”, a “focused topic title”, “user input sentence topic specification information” and “reply sentence topic specification information”. The “focused topic specification information”, the “focused topic title” and the “reply sentence topic specification information” are not limited to be defined from a conversation done just before but may be defined from the previous “focused topic specification information”, the “focused topic title” and the “reply sentence topic specification information” during a predetermined past period or from an accumulated record thereof. 
     Hereinbelow, each of the units constituting the discourse space conversation control process unit  1330 - 1  will be described. 
     [Topic Specification Information Retrieval Unit] 
     The topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 1  compares the first morpheme information extracted by the morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 1  and the topic specification information, and then retrieves the topic specification information corresponding to a morpheme in the first morpheme information among the topic specification information. Specifically, when the first morpheme information received from the morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 1  is two morphemes “Sato” and “like”, the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 1  compares the received first morpheme information and the topic specification information group. 
     If a focused topic title  820 - 1   focus  (indicated as  820 - 1   focus  to be differentiated from previously retrieved topic titles or other topic titles) includes a morpheme (for example, “Sato”) in the first morpheme information, the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 1  outputs the focused topic title  820 - 1   focus  to the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1 . On the other hand, if no focused topic title  820 - 1   focus  includes the morpheme in the first morpheme information, the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 1  determines user input sentence topic specification information based on the received first morpheme information, and then outputs the first morpheme information and the user input sentence topic specification information to the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1 . Note that the “user input sentence topic specification information” is topic specification information corresponding-to or probably-corresponding-to a morpheme relevant to topic contents talked by a user among morphemes included in the first morpheme information. 
     [Elliptical Sentence Complementation Unit] 
     The elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1  generates various complemented first morpheme information by complementing the first morpheme information with the previously retrieved topic specification information  810 - 1  (hereinafter referred as the “focused topic specification information”) and the topic specification information  810 - 1  included in the final reply sentence (hereinafter referred as the “reply sentence topic specification information”). For example, if a user&#39;s utterance is “like”, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1  generates the complemented first morpheme information “Sato, like” by including the focused topic specification information “Sato” into the first morpheme information “like”. 
     In other words, if it is assumed that the first morpheme information is defined as “W” and a set of the focused topic specification information and the reply sentence topic specification information is defined as “D”, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1  generates the complemented first morpheme information by including an element(s) in the set “D” into the first morpheme information “W”. 
     In this manner, in case where, for example, a sentence constituted with the first morpheme information is an elliptical sentence which is unclear as a language, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1  can include, by using the set “D”, an element(s) (for example, “Sato”) in the set “D” into the first morpheme information “W”. As a result, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1  can complement the first morpheme information “like” into the complemented first morpheme information “Sato, like”. Note that the complemented first morpheme information “Sato, like” corresponds to a user&#39;s utterance “I like Sato.” 
     That is, even when user&#39;s utterance contents are provided as an elliptical sentence, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1  can complement the elliptical sentence by using the set “D”. As a result, even when a sentence constituted with the first morpheme information is an elliptical sentence, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1  can complement the sentence into an appropriate sentence as a language. 
     In addition, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1  retrieves the topic title  820 - 1  related to the complemented first morpheme information based on the set “D”. If the topic title  820 - 1  related to the complemented first morpheme information has been found, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1  outputs the topic title  820 - 1  to the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1 . The reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1  can output a reply sentence  830 - 1  best-suited for the user&#39;s utterance contents based on the appropriate topic title  820 - 1  found by the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1 . 
     Note that the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1  is not limited to including an element(s) in the set “D” into the first morpheme information. The elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1  may include, based on a focused topic title, a morpheme(s) included in any of the first, second and third specification information in the topic title, into the extracted first morpheme information. 
     [Topic Retrieval Unit] 
     The topic retrieval unit  1370 - 1  compares the first morpheme information and topic titles  820 - 1  associated with the user input sentence topic specification information to retrieve a topic title  820 - 1  best-suited for the first morpheme information among the topic titles  820 - 1  when the topic title  820 - 1  has not been determined by the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1 . 
     Specifically, the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 1 , which has received a retrieval command signal from the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1 , retrieves the topic title  820 - 1  best-suited for the first morpheme information among the topic titles associated with the user input sentence topic specification information based on the user input sentence topic specification information and the first morpheme information which are included in the received retrieval command signal. The topic retrieval unit  1370 - 1  outputs the retrieved topic title  820 - 1  as a retrieval result signal to the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1 . 
     Above-mentioned  FIG. 66  shows the concrete example of the topic titles  820 - 1  and the reply sentences  830 - 1  associated with the topic specification information  810 - 1  (=“Sato”). For example as shown in  FIG. 66 , since topic specification information  810 - 1  (=“Sato”) is included in the received first morpheme information “Sato, like”, the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 1  specifies the topic specification information  810 - 1  (=“Sato”) and then compares the topic titles ( 820 - 1 )  1 - 1 ,  1 - 2 , . . . associated with the topic specification information  810 - 1  (=“Sato”) and the received first morpheme information “Sato, like”. 
     The topic retrieval unit  1370 - 1  retrieves the topic title ( 820 - 1 )  1 - 1  (Sato; *; like) related to the received first morpheme information “Sato, like” among the topic titles ( 820 - 1 )  1 - 1 ,  1 - 2 , . . . based on the comparison result. The topic retrieval unit  1370 - 1  outputs the retrieved topic title ( 820 - 1 )  1 - 1  (Sato; *; like) as a retrieval result signal to the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1 . 
     [Reply Retrieval Unit] 
     The reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1  retrieves, based on the topic title  820 - 1  retrieved by the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1  or the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 1 , a reply sentence associated with the topic title  820 - 1 . In addition, the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1  compares, based on the topic title  820 - 1  retrieved by the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 1 , the response types associated with the topic title  820 - 1  and the utterance type determined by the input type determining unit  1440 - 1 . The reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1 , which has executed the comparison, retrieves one response type related to the determined utterance type among the response types. 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 66 , when the topic title retrieved by the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 1  is the topic title  1 - 1  (Sato; *; like), the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1  specifies the response type (for example, DA) coincident with the “uttered sentence type” (DA) determined by the input type determining unit  1440 - 1  among the reply sentences  1 - 1  (DA, TA and so on) associated with the topic title  1 - 1 . The reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1 , which has specified the response type (DA), retrieves the reply sentence  1 - 1  (“I like Sato, too.”) associated with the response type (DA) based on the specified response type (DA). 
     Here, “A” in above-mentioned “DA”, “TA” and so on means an affirmative form. Therefore, when the utterance types and the response types include “A”, it indicates an affirmation on a certain matter. In addition, the utterance types and the response types can include the types of “DQ”, “TQ” and so on. “Q” in “DQ”, “TQ” and so on means a question about a certain matter. 
     If the response type takes an interrogative form (Q), a reply sentence associated with this response type takes an affirmative form (A). A reply sentence with an affirmative form (A) may be a sentence for replying to a question and so on. For example, when an uttered sentence is “Have you ever operated slot machines?”, the utterance type of the uttered sentence is an interrogative form (Q). A reply sentence associated with this interrogative form (Q) may be “I have operated slot machines before,” (affirmative form (A)), for example. 
     On the other hand, when the response type is an affirmative form (A), a reply sentence associated with this response type takes an interrogative form (Q). A reply sentence in an interrogative form (Q) may be an interrogative sentence for asking back against uttered contents, an interrogative sentence for getting out a certain matter. For example, when the uttered sentence is “Playing slot machines is my hobby,” the utterance type of this uttered sentence takes an affirmative form (A). A reply sentence associated with this affirmative form (A) may be “Playing pachinko is your hobby, isn&#39;t it?” (an interrogative sentence (Q) for getting out a certain matter), for example. 
     The reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1  outputs the retrieved reply sentence  830 - 1  as a reply sentence signal to the managing unit  1310 - 1 . The managing unit  1310 - 1 , which has received the reply sentence signal from the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1 , outputs the received reply sentence signal to the output unit  1600 - 1 . 
     [CA Conversation Process Unit] 
     When a reply sentence in response to a user&#39;s utterance has not been determined by the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  or the discourse space conversation control process unit  1330 - 1 , the CA conversation process unit  1340 - 1  functions to output a reply sentence for continuing a conversation with a user according to contents of the user&#39;s utterance. 
     The configuration example of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  is further described with referring back to  FIG. 54 . 
     [Output Unit] 
     The output unit  1600 - 1  outputs the reply sentence retrieved by the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1 . The output unit  1600 - 1  may be a speaker or a display, for example. Specifically, the output unit  1600 - 1 , which has received the reply sentence from the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1 , outputs voice sounds of the received reply sentence (for example, “I like Sato, too,”) based on the received reply sentence. With that, describing the configuration example of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  has ended. 
     [Conversation Control Method] 
     The conversation controller  100 - 1  with the above-mentioned configuration puts a conversation control method in execution by operating as described hereinbelow. 
     Next, operations of the conversation controller  1000 - 1 , more specifically the conversation control unit  1300 - 1 , according to the present embodiment will be described. 
       FIG. 71  is a flow-chart showing an example of a main process executed by conversation control unit  1300 - 1 . This main process is a process executed each time when the conversation control unit  1300 - 1  receives a user&#39;s utterance. A reply sentence in response to the user&#39;s utterance is output due to an execution of this main process, so that a conversation (an interlocution) between a user and the conversation controller  100 - 1  is established. 
     Upon executing the main process, the conversation controller  100 - 1 , more specifically the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  firstly executes a plan conversation control process (S 1801 - 1 ). The plan conversation control process is a process for executing a plan(s). 
       FIGS. 72 and 73  are flow-charts showing an example of the plan conversation control process. Hereinbelow, the example of the plan conversation control process will be described with reference to  FIGS. 72 and 73 . 
     Upon executing the plan conversation control process, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  firstly executes a basic control state information check (S 1901 - 1 ). The basic control state information is information on whether or not an execution(s) of a plan(s) has been completed and is stored in a predetermined memory area. 
     The basic control state information serves to indicate a basic control state of a plan. 
       FIG. 74  is a diagram showing four basic control states which are possibly established due to a so-called scenario-type plan. 
     (1) Cohesiveness 
     This basic control state corresponds to a case where a user&#39;s utterance is coincident with the currently executed plan  1402 - 1 , more specifically the topic title  820 - 1  or the example sentence  1701 - 1  associated with the plan  1402 - 1 . In this case, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  terminates the plan  1402 - 1  and then transfers to another plan  1402 - 1  corresponding to the reply sentence  1501 - 1  designated by the next-plan designation information  1502 - 1 . 
     (2) Cancellation 
     This basic control state is a basic control state which is set in a case where it is determined that user&#39;s utterance contents require a completion of a plan  1402 - 1  or that a user&#39;s interest has changed to another matter than the currently executed plan. When the basic control state indicates the cancellation, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  retrieves another plan  1402 - 1  associated with the user&#39;s utterance than the plan  1402 - 1  targeted as the cancellation. If the other plan  1402 - 1  exists, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  start to execute the other plan  1402 - 1 . If the other plan  1402 - 1  does not exist, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  terminates a execution(s) of a plan(s). 
     (3) Maintenance 
     This basic control state is a basic control state which is set in a case where a user&#39;s utterance is not coincident with the topic title  820 - 1  (see FIG.  66 ) or the example sentence  1701 - 1  (see  FIG. 70 ) associated with the currently executed plan  1402 - 1  and also the user&#39;s utterance does not correspond to the basic control state “cancellation”. 
     In the case of this basic control state, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  firstly determines whether or not to resume a pending or pausing plan  1402 - 1  on receiving the user&#39;s utterance. If the user&#39;s utterance is not adapted for resuming the plan  1402 - 1 , for example, in case where the user&#39;s utterance is not related to a topic title  820 - 1  or an example sentence  1701 - 1  associated with the plan  1402 - 1 , the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  starts to execute another plan  1402 - 1 , an after-mentioned discourse space conversation control process (S 1802 - 1 ) and so on. If the user&#39;s utterance is adapted for resuming the plan  1402 - 1 , the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  outputs a reply sentence  1501 - 1  based on the stored next-plan designation information  1502 - 1 . 
     In case where the basic control state is the “maintenance”, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  retrieves other plans  1402 - 1  in order to enable outputting another reply sentence than the reply sentence  1501 - 1  associated with the currently executed plan  1402 - 1 , or executes the discourse space conversation control process. However, if the user&#39;s utterance is adapted for resuming the plan  1402 - 1 , the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  resumes the plan  1402 - 1 . 
     (4) Continuation 
     This state is a basic control state which is set in a case where a user&#39;s utterance is not related to reply sentences  1501 - 1  included in the currently executed plan  1402 - 1 , contents of the user&#39;s utterance do not correspond to the basic control sate “cancellation” and use&#39;s intention construed from the user&#39;s utterance is not clear. 
     In case where the basic control state is the “continuation”, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  firstly determines whether or not to resume a pending or pausing plan  1402 - 1  on receiving the user&#39;s utterance. If the user&#39;s utterance is not adapted for resuming the plan  1402 - 1 , the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  executes an after-mentioned CA conversation control process in order to enable outputting a reply sentence for getting out a further user&#39;s utterance. 
     The plan conversation control process is further described with referring back to  FIG. 72 . 
     The plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1 , which has referred to the basic control state, determines whether or not the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is the “cohesiveness” (step S 1902 - 1 ). If it has been determined that the basic control state is the “cohesiveness” (YES in step S 1902 - 1 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  determines whether or not the reply sentence  1501 - 1  is the final reply sentence in the currently executed plan  1402 - 1  (step S 1903 - 1 ). 
     If it has been determined that the final reply sentence  1501 - 1  has been output already (YES in step S 1903 - 1 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  retrieves another plan  1402 - 1  related to the use&#39;s utterance in the plan space in order to determine whether or not to execute the other plan  1402 - 1  (step S 1904 - 1 ) because the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  has provided all contents to be replied to the user already. If the other plan  1402 - 1  related to the user&#39;s utterance has not been found due to this retrieval (NO in step S 1905 - 1 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  terminates the plan conversation control process because no plan  1402 - 1  to be provided to the user exists. 
     On the other hand, if the other plan  1402 - 1  related to the user&#39;s utterance has been found due to this retrieval (YES in step S 1905 - 1 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  transfers into the other plan  1402 - 1  (step S 1906 - 1 ). Since the other plan  1402 - 1  to be provided to the user still remains, an execution of the other plan  1402 - 1  (an output of the reply sentence  1501 - 1  included in the other plan  1402 - 1 ) is started. 
     Next, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  outputs the reply sentence  1501 - 1  included in that plan  1402 - 1  (step S 1908 - 1 ). The reply sentence  1501 - 1  is output as a reply to the user&#39;s utterance, so that the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  provides information to be supplied to the user. 
     The plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  terminates the plan conversation control process after the reply sentence output process (step S 1908 - 1 ). 
     On the other hand, if the previously output reply sentence  1501 - 1  is not determined as the final reply sentence in the determination whether or not the previously output reply sentence  1501 - 1  is the final reply sentence (step S 1903 - 1 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  transfers into a plan  1402 - 1  associated with the reply sentence  1501 - 1  following the previously output reply sentence  1501 - 1 , i.e. the specified reply sentence  1501 - 1  by the next-plan designation information  1502 - 1  (step S 1907 - 1 ). 
     Subsequently, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  outputs the reply sentence  1501 - 1  included in that plan  1402 - 1  to provide a reply to the user&#39;s utterance (step  1908 - 1 ). The reply sentence  1501 - 1  is output as the reply to the user&#39;s utterance, so that the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  provides information to be supplied to the user. The plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  terminates the plan conversation control process after the reply sentence output process (step S 1908 - 1 ). 
     Here, if the basic control state is not the “cohesiveness” in the determination process in step S 1902 - 1  (NO in step S 1902 - 1 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  determines whether or not the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is the “cancellation” (step S 1909 - 1 ). If it has been determined that the basic control state is the “cancellation” (YES in step S 1909 - 1 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  retrieves another plan  1402 - 1  related to the use&#39;s utterance in the plan space  1401 - 1  in order to determine whether or not the other plan  1402 - 1  to be started newly exists (step S 1904 - 1 ) because a plan  1402 - 1  to be successively executed does not exist. Subsequently, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  executes the processes of steps S 1905 - 1  to S 1908 - 1  as well as the processes in case of the above-mentioned step S 1903 - 1  (YES). 
     On the other hand, if the basic control state is not the “cancellation” in the determination process in step S 1902 - 1  (NO in step S 1902 - 1 ) in the determination whether or not the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is the “cancellation” (step S 1909 - 1 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  further determines whether or not the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is the “maintenance” (step S 1910 - 1 ). 
     If the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is the “maintenance” (YES in step S 1910 - 1 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  determined whether or not the user presents the interest on the pending or pausing plan  1402 - 1  again and then resumes the pending or pausing plan  1402 - 1  in case where the interest is presented (step S 2001 - 1  in  FIG. 73 ). In other words, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  evaluates the pending or pausing plan  1402 - 1  (step S 2001 - 1  in  FIG. 73 ) and then determines whether or not the user&#39;s utterance is related to the pending or pausing plan  1402 - 1  (step S 2002 - 1 ). 
     If it has been determined that the user&#39;s utterance is related to that plan  1402 - 1  (YES in step S 2002 - 1 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  transfers into the plan  1402 - 1  related to the user&#39;s utterance (step S 2003 - 1 ) and then executes the reply sentence output process (step S 1908 - 1  in  FIG. 72 ) to output the reply sentence  1501 - 1  included in the plan  1402 - 1 . Operating in this manner, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  can resume the pending or pausing plan  1402 - 1  according to the user&#39;s utterance, so that all contents included in the previously prepared plan  1402 - 1  can be provided to the user. 
     On the other hand, if it has been determined that the user&#39;s utterance is not related to that plan  1402 - 1  (NO in step S 2002 - 1 ) in the above-mentioned S 2002 - 1  (see  FIG. 73 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  retrieves another plan  1402 - 1  related to the use&#39;s utterance in the plan space  1401 - 1  in order to determine whether or not the other plan  1402 - 1  to be started newly exists (step S 1904 - 1  in  FIG. 72 ). Subsequently, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  executes the processes of steps S 1905 - 1  to S 1908 - 1  as well as the processes in case of the above-mentioned step S 1903 - 1  (YES). 
     If it is determined that the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is not the “maintenance” (NO in step S 1910 - 1 ) in the determination in step S 1910 - 1 , it means that the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is the “continuation”. In this case, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  terminates the plan conversation control process without outputting a reply sentence. With that, describing the plan control process has ended. 
     The main process is further described with referring back to  FIG. 71 . 
     The conversation control unit  1300 - 1  executes the discourse space conversation control process (step S 1802 - 1 ) after the plan conversation control process (step S 1801 - 1 ) has been completed. Note that, if the reply sentence has been output in the plan conversation control process (step S 1801 - 1 ), the conversation control unit  1300 - 1  executes a basic control information update process (step S 1804 - 1 ) without executing the discourse space conversation control process (step S 1802 - 1 ) and the after-mentioned CA conversation control process (step S 1803 - 1 ) and then terminates the main process. 
       FIG. 75  is a flow-chart showing an example of a discourse space conversation control process according to the present embodiment. 
     The input unit  1100 - 1  firstly executes a step for receiving a user&#39;s utterance (step S 2201 - 1 ). Specifically, the input unit  1100 - 1  receives voice sounds of the user&#39;s utterance. The input unit  1100 - 1  outputs the received voice sounds to the speech recognition unit  1200 - 1  as a voice signal. Note that the input unit  1100 - 1  may receive a character string input by a user (for example, text data input in a text format) instead of the voice sounds. In this case, the input unit  1100 - 1  may be a text input device such as a keyboard or a touchscreen. 
     Next, the speech recognition unit  1200 - 1  executes a step for specifying a character string corresponding to the uttered contents based on the uttered contents retrieved by the input unit  1100 - 1  (step S 2202 - 1 ). Specifically, the speech recognition unit  1200 - 1 , which has received the voice signal from the input unit  1100 - 1 , specifies a word hypothesis (candidate) corresponding to the voice signal based on the received voice signal. The speech recognition unit  1200 - 1  retrieves a character string corresponding to the specified word hypothesis and outputs the retrieved character string to the conversation control unit  1300 - 1 , more specifically the discourse space conversation control process unit  1330 - 1 , as a character string signal. 
     And then, the character string specifying unit  1410 - 1  segments a series of the character strings specified by the speech recognition unit  1200 - 1  into segments (step S 2203 - 1 ). Specifically, if the series of the character strings have a time interval more than a certain interval, the character string specifying unit  1410 - 1 , which has received the character string signal or a morpheme signal from the managing unit  1310 - 1 , segments the character strings there. The character string specifying unit  1410 - 1  outputs the segmented character strings to the morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 1  and the input type determining unit  1440 - 1 . Note that it is preferred that the character string specifying unit  1410 - 1  segments a character string at a punctuation, a space and so on in a case where the character string has been input from a keyboard. 
     Subsequently, the morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 1  executes a step for extracting morphemes constituting minimum units of the character string as first morpheme information based on the character string specified by the character string specifying unit  1410 - 1  (step S 2204 - 1 ). Specifically, the morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 1 , which has received the character strings from the character string specifying unit  1410 - 1 , compares the received character strings and morpheme groups previously stored in the morpheme database  1430 - 1 . Note that, in the present embodiment, each of the morpheme groups is prepared as a morpheme dictionary in which a direction word, a reading, a word class and an inflected forms are described for each morpheme belonging to each word-class classification. 
     The morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 1 , which has executed the comparison, extracts coincident morphemes (m 1 , m 2 , . . . ) with the morphemes included in the previously stored morpheme groups from the received character string. The morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 1  outputs the extracted morphemes to the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 1  as the first morpheme information. 
     Next, the input type determining unit  1440 - 1  executes a step for determining the “uttered sentence type” based on the morphemes which constitute one sentence and are specified by the character string specifying unit  1410 - 1  (step S 2205 - 1 ). Specifically, the input type determining unit  1440 - 1 , which has received the character strings from the character string specifying unit  1410 - 1 , compares the received character strings and the dictionaries stored in the utterance type database  1450 - 1  based on the received character strings and extracts elements relevant to the dictionaries among the character strings. The input type determining unit  1440 - 1 , which has extracted the elements, determines to which “uttered sentence type” the extracted element(s) belongs based on the extracted element(s). The input type determining unit  1440 - 1  outputs the determined “uttered sentence type” (utterance type) to the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1 . 
     And then, the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 1  executes a step for comparing the first morpheme information extracted by the morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 1  and the focused topic title  820 - 1   focus  (step S 2206 - 1 ). 
     If a morpheme in the first morpheme information is related to the focused topic title  820 - 1   focus , the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 1  outputs the focused topic title  820 - 1   focus  to the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1 . On the other hand, if no morpheme in the first morpheme information is related to the focused topic title  820 - 1   focus , the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 1  outputs the received first morpheme information and the user input sentence topic specification information to the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1  as the retrieval command signal. 
     Subsequently, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1  executes a step for including the focused topic specification information and the reply sentence topic specification information into the received first morpheme information based on the first morpheme information received from the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 1  (step S 2207 - 1 ). Specifically, if it is assumed that the first morpheme information is defined as “W” and a set of the focused topic specification information and the reply sentence topic specification information is defined as “D”, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1  generates the complemented first morpheme information by including an element(s) in the set “D” into the first morpheme information “W” and compares the complemented first morpheme information and all the topic titles  820 - 1  to retrieve the topic title  820 - 1  related to the complemented first morpheme information. If the topic title  820 - 1  related to the complemented first morpheme information has been found, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1  outputs the topic title  820 - 1  to the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1 . On the other hand, if no topic title  820 - 1  related to the complemented first morpheme information has been found, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1  outputs the first morpheme information and the user input sentence topic specification information to the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 1 . 
     Next, the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 1  executes a step for comparing the first morpheme information and the user input sentence topic specification information and retrieves the topic title  820 - 1  best-suited for the first morpheme information among the topic titles  820 - 1  (step S 2208 - 1 ). Specifically, the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 1 , which has received the retrieval command signal from the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1 , retrieves the topic title  820 - 1  best-suited for the first morpheme information among topic titles  820 - 1  associated with the user input sentence topic specification information based on the user input sentence topic specification information and the first morpheme information included in the received retrieval command signal. The topic retrieval unit  1370 - 1  outputs the retrieved topic title  820 - 1  to the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1  as the retrieval result signal. 
     Next, the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1  compares, in order to select the reply sentence  830 - 1 , the user&#39;s utterance type determined by the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 1  and the response type associated with the retrieved topic title  820 - 1  based on the retrieved topic title  820 - 1  by the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 1 , the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 1  or the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 1  (step S 2209 - 1 ). 
     The reply sentence  830 - 1  is selected in particular as explained hereinbelow. Specifically, based on the “topic title” associated with the received retrieval result signal and the received “uttered sentence type”, the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1 , which has received the retrieval result signal from the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 1  and the “uttered sentence type” from the input type determining unit  1440 - 1 , specifies one response type coincident with the “uttered sentence type” (for example, DA) among the response types associated with the “topic title”. 
     Consequently, the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 1  outputs the reply sentence  830 - 1  retrieved in step S 2209 - 1  to the output unit  1600 - 1  via the managing unit  1310 - 1  (S 2210 - 1 ). The output unit  1600 - 1 , which has received the reply sentence  830 - 1  from the managing unit  1310 - 1 , outputs the received reply sentence  830 - 1 . 
     With that, describing the discourse space conversation control process has ended and the main process is further described with referring back to  FIG. 71 . 
     The conversation control unit  1300 - 1  executes the CA conversation control process (step S 1803 - 1 ) after the discourse space conversation control process has been completed. Note that, if the reply sentence has been output in the plan conversation control process (step S 1801 - 1 ) or the discourse space conversation control (S 1802 - 1 ), the conversation control unit  1300 - 1  executes the basic control information update process (step S 1804 - 1 ) without executing the CA conversation control process (step S 1803 - 1 ) and then terminates the main process. 
     The CA conversation control process is a process in which it is determined whether a user&#39;s utterance is an utterance for “explaining something”, an utterance for “confirming something”, an utterance for “accusing or rebuking something” or an utterance for “other than these”, and then a reply sentence is output according to the user&#39;s utterance contents and the determination result. 
     By the CA conversation control process, a so-called “bridging” reply sentence for continuing the uninterrupted conversation with the user can be output even if a reply sentence suited for the user&#39;s utterance can not be output by the plan conversation control process nor the discourse space conversation control process. 
     Next, the conversation control unit  1300 - 1  executes the basic control information update process (step S 1804 - 1 ). In this process, the conversation control unit  1300 - 1 , more specifically the managing unit  1310 - 1 , sets the basic control information to the “cohesiveness” when the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  has output a reply sentence, sets the basic control information to the “cancellation” when the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 1  has cancelled an output of a reply sentence, sets the basic control information to the “maintenance” when the discourse space conversation control process unit  1330 - 1  has output a reply sentence, or sets the basic control information to the “continuation” when the CA conversation process unit  1340 - 1  has output a reply sentence. 
     The basic control information set in this basic control information update process is referred in the above-mentioned plan conversation control process (step S 1801 - 1 ) to be employed for continuation or resumption of a plan. 
     As described the above, the conversation controller  1000 - 1  can executes a previously prepared plan(s) or can adequately respond to a topic(s) which is not included in a plan(s) according to a user&#39;s utterance by executing the main process each time when receiving the user&#39;s utterance. 
     In the gaming terminal  4 - 1  of this embodiment, the above-described input unit  1100 - 1  of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  can be formed of the display  8 - 1  (the touch panel  50 - 1  fitted thereto) and the microphone  15 - 1 . Meanwhile, the output unit  1600 - 1  can be formed of the display  8 - 1  and the speaker  10 - 1 . Further, the speech recognition unit  1200 - 1 , the conversation control unit  1300 - 1 , and the character string specifying unit  1410 - 1 , the morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 1  and the input type determining unit  1440 - 1  each of which is in the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 1  can be formed of the terminal controller  90 - 1 . Meanwhile, both of the morpheme database  1430 - 1  and the utterance type database  1450 - 1  in the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 1 , the conversation database  1500 - 1 , and the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 1  can be formed of the external memory  99 - 1 . 
     Moreover, in this embodiment, it is possible to determine the language used in the course of the roulette games through the dialog with the player by using the conversation engine, which utilize the conversation controller  1000 - 1  achieved in the gaming terminal  4 - 1  with the above-described configuration. 
     Accordingly, in order to recognize the type of the language used in the speech message of the player inputted from the microphone  15 - 1 , the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 1  of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  formed of the external memory  99 - 1  includes word dictionaries in several languages. Meanwhile, the morpheme database  1430 - 1  of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  formed of the external memory  99 - 1  includes morpheme groups (morpheme dictionaries) in several languages. Further, the utterance type database  1450 - 1  of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  formed of the external memory  99 - 1  also includes dictionaries for the respective utterance types in several languages. 
     Meanwhile, in order to output the speech messages from the speaker  10 - 1  to the player in the language selected by the player and to display the messages on the display  8 - 1  in the language selected by the player, the conversation database  1500 - 1  formed by the terminal controller  90 - 1  also stores data of “sentences” in several languages. The “sentences” includes a message for requesting to input a specific word or a specific sentence (either orally or by means of an operation using the display  8 - 1 ) in the language desired to be used in the roulette games, a message for asking the player to confirm that the language used for inputting the specific work or the specific sentence is also used to execute the roulette games. 
     Here, instead of providing the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 1 , the morpheme database  1430 - 1 , or the utterance type database  1450 - 1  of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  with the word dictionaries in multiple languages or storing the “sentence” data in several languages in the conversation database  1500 - 1 , the single gaming terminal  4 - 1  can be configured to include several conversation controllers  1000 - 1  of the respective language types supportable by the gaming terminal  4 - 1 . 
     Operations of the above-mentioned conversation controller  1000 - 1  in the gaming terminal  4 - 1  of this embodiment will be described later. 
     Subsequently, contents of the gaming processes to be respectively executed by the server  13 - 1 , the roulette device  2 - 1 , and the gaming terminal  4 - 1  of the roulette game machine  1 - 1  according to this embodiment will be described below. 
     With reference to  FIGS. 76 and 77 , descriptions will be provided for a server gaming processing and a roulette gaming processing. Here, the server gaming processing is executed by the server CPU  81 - 1  of the server  13 - 1  in accordance with programs stored in the ROM  82 - 1 , and the roulette gaming processing is executed by the CPU  101 - 1  of the roulette device  2 - 1  in accordance with programs stored in the ROM  102 - 1 .  FIGS. 76 and 77  are flow charts showing the gaming processings of the server  13 - 1  and the roulette device  2 - 1  in the roulette game machine  1 - 1  according to the present embodiment. 
     Firstly, the gaming processing of the server  13 - 1  will be described referring to  FIGS. 76 and 77 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 76 , the server CPU  81  starts the measurement of the betting period first (step S 101 - 1 ). The betting period is a period when the bet can be placed. The player participating in the game can place a bet on the bet area  72 - 1  predicted by himself, by operating the touch panel  50 - 1  during the betting period. When the measurement of the betting period is started, the server CPU  81  transmits a betting period start signal to the terminal CPU  91 - 1  (step S 102 - 1 ). 
     Next, the server CPU  81 - 1  judges whether the remaining betting period has become  5 - 1  seconds or less (step S 103 - 1 ). The remaining betting period is displayed on the bet time display unit  69 - 1  of the display  8 - 1  at each of the gaming terminals  4 - 1  (see  FIG. 50 ). In the case where it is judged that it has not reached the last 5 seconds, the processing will be returned to the step S 103 - 1 . On the other hand, in the case where it is judged that it has reached the last 5 seconds, the processing will move to the step S 104 - 1 . 
     The server CPU  81 - 1  transmits the control signal for starting the operation of the roulette device  2 - 1  to the CPU  101 - 1  (step S 104 - 1 ). After that, the server CPU  81 - 1  judges whether the betting period of the roulette game has ended or not (step S 105 - 1 ). In the case where it is judged that the betting period has not ended, the server CPU  81 - 1  suspends the processing until the betting period ends. On the other hand, in the case where it is judged that the betting period of the roulette game has ended, the server CPU  81 - 1  transmits a betting period end signal to the terminal CPU  91 - 1  (step S 106 - 1 ). 
     Subsequently, the server CPU  81 - 1  receives the betting information (the specified bet area  72 - 1 , the number of bet chips, and the type of betting) at each gaming terminal  4 - 1  from the terminal CPU  91 - 1 , and stores it into the betting information memory area  83 A- 1  of the RAM  83 - 1  (step S 107 - 1 ). 
     After that, the server CPU  81 - 1  executes a JP accumulation processing (step S 108 - 1 ). In this JP accumulation processing, 0.30% of the total credits which have been bet at all the gaming terminals  4 - 1  that are received at the step S 107 - 1  are accumulatively added to the JP credits stored in the “MINI” JP accumulated memory area  83 C- 1  in the RAM  83 - 1 . Moreover, in the JP accumulation processing, 0.20% of the total credits are accumulatively added to the JP credits stored in the “MAJOR” JP credit memory area  83 D- 1  in the RAM  83 - 1 . In addition, in the JP accumulation processing, 0.15% of the total credits are accumulatively added to the JP credits stored in the “MEGA” JP credit memory area  83 E- 1  in the RAM  83 - 1 . Furthermore, in the JP accumulation processing, the displays on the JP amount display  15 - 1 , the MEGA counter  73 - 1 , the MAJOR counter  74 - 1  and the MINI counter  75 - 1  are updated according to the JP credits thus accumulatively added. 
     Next, as shown in  FIG. 77 , the server CPU  81 - 1  executes a JP bonus game determination processing (step S 109 - 1 ). In this processing, the server CPU  81 - 1  determines whether to execute the JP bonus game at each gaming terminal  4 - 1  or not, by using a random number value sampled by a sampling circuit or the like. In addition, the server CPU  81 - 1  determines which gaming terminal  4 - 1  is to win the JP (or all the gaming terminals  4 - 1  are to lose) in the case where it is determined to execute the JP bonus game. Also, the server CPU  81 - 1  determines which JP (“MEGA”, “MAJOR” or “MINI”) is to be won in the case of having the JP won. 
     Next, the server CPU  81 - 1  transmits the JP bonus game determination result to each gaming terminal  4 , according to the processing of the step S 109 - 1  (step S 110 - 1 ). After that, the server CPU  81 - 1  transmits a control signal to the CPU  101 - 1  of the roulette device  2 - 1 , and thereby causes the CPU  101 - 1  to judge into which number pocket  23 - 1  the ball  27 - 1  has fallen (step S 111 - 1 ). Then, the server CPU  81 - 1  receives a detection signal of the number pocket  23 - 1  into which the ball  27 - 1  has fallen from the CPU  101 - 1  (step S 112 - 1 ). 
     Thereafter, the server CPU  81 - 1  judges whether the bet placed at each gaming terminal  4 - 1  has won or not, based on the betting information of each gaming terminal  4 - 1  received at the step S 107 - 1  and the detection signal of the number pocket  23 - 1  received at the step S 112 - 1  (step S 113 - 1 ). 
     After that, the server CPU  81 - 1  executes the payout calculation processing (step S 114 - 1 ). In the payout calculation processing, the server CPU  81 - 1  firstly recognizes the number of winning bets on the winning number for each gaming terminal  4 - 1 . Then, the server CPU  81 - 1  calculates the total payout credits for each gaming terminal  4 - 1  by using the payout rate (credits to be paid per one bet) that is stored in the payout memory area  82 A- 1  of the ROM  82 - 1 . 
     Next, the server CPU  81 - 1  executes the transmission processing of the credit payout result according to the payout calculation processing of the step S 113 - 1  and the JP payout result according to the JP bonus game determination processing of the step S 109 - 1  (step S 115 - 1 ). More specifically, the server CPU  81 - 1  outputs the credit data corresponding to the payout credits for the game to the terminal CPU  91 - 1  of the winning gaming terminal  4 - 1 . Moreover, the server CPU  81 - 1  additionally outputs the credit data corresponding to the accumulated JP credits in the case where the JP has been won. After that, the server CPU  81 - 1  transmits a request signal for collecting the ball  27 - 1  on the roulette wheel  22 - 1  to the CPU  101 - 1  of the roulette device  2 - 1  (step S 116 - 1 ). The server CPU  81 - 1  finishes the subroutine after the step S 116 - 1 . 
     Hereinafter, the gaming processing of the roulette device  2 - 1  will be described with references to  FIGS. 76 and 77 . 
     Firstly, as shown in  FIG. 76 , the CPU  101 - 1  receives the control signal for starting the operation of the roulette device  2 - 1  from the server CPU  81 - 1  of the server  13 - 1  (step S 201 - 1 ). 
     Next, the CPU  101 - 1  drives the wheel driving motor  106 - 1  and rotates the roulette wheel  22 - 1  (step S 202 - 1 ). 
     Then, the CPU  101 - 1  detects the detection signal from the pocket position detection circuit  107 - 1  when a prescribed time (20 seconds, for example) elapses after the rotation of the roulette wheel  22 - 1  is started (step S 203 - 1 : YES). The CPU  101 - 1  enters the ball  27 - 1  (step S 204 - 1 ) when the delay time elapses after the detection signal is detected. 
     Then, as shown in  FIG. 77 , the CPU  101 - 1  receives the control signal for detecting the pocket from the server CPU  81 - 1  of the server  13 - 1  (step S 205 - 1 ). Thereafter, the CPU  101 - 1  judges which number pocket  23 - 1  into which the ball  27 - 1  has fallen by activating the ball sensor  105 - 1  (step S 206 - 1 ). After that, the CPU  101 - 1  transmits the detection signal indicating the number pocket  23 - 1  into which the ball  27 - 1  has fallen to the server CPU  81 - 1  of the server  13 - 1  (step S 207 - 1 ). 
     Subsequently, the CPU  101 - 1  receives the request signal for collecting the ball  27 - 1  from the server CPU  81 - 1  of the server  13 - 1  (step S 208 - 1 ). Then, the CPU  101 - 1  collects the ball  27 - 1  on the roulette wheel  22 - 1  by activating the ball collecting device  108 - 1  provided beneath the roulette wheel  22  (step S 209 - 1 ). The collected ball  27  will be entered onto the roulette wheel  22 - 1  again by the ball launching device  104 - 1  in the subsequent games. The CPU  101 - 1  finishes the subroutine after the step S 209 - 1 . 
     Hereinbelow, the processing executed by the terminal CPU  91 - 1  of each gaming terminal  4 - 1  of the roulette game machine  1 - 1  according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to  FIGS. 78 to 83 . The terminal CPU  91 - 1  executes the processing in accordance with the programs stored in the ROM  92 - 1 .  FIGS. 78 to 83  are flow charts each showing the gaming processing of the gaming terminal of the roulette game machine according to the present embodiment. 
     Here, the flag F in the RAM  93 - 1  is assumed to be set to be default, “1”, which is a value indicating the betting period. Moreover, the default BET screen  61 - 1  as shown in  FIG. 50  is assumed to be displayed on the display  8 - 1  of the gaming terminal  4 - 1 . With this state, as shown in  FIG. 78 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  firstly performs used language confirmation processing in step S 300 - 1 , then performs betting period confirmation processing in step S 301 - 1 , then performs bet accepting processing in step S 302 - 1 , and lastly performs order processing in step S 303 - 1 . 
     Then, in the used language confirmation processing in step S 300 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  judges whether or not the new smart card  17 - 1  is inserted to the card reader  16 - 1  in step S 300   a - 1  as shown in  FIG. 79 . If the smart card  17 - 1  is not inserted (NO in step S 300   a - 1 ), the terminal CPI  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 300   e - 1  to be described later. When the smart card  17 - 1  is inserted (YES in step S 300   a - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  outputs the message (the conversation sentence) to inquire of the player about the language type to be used in the roulette game (step S 300   b - 1 ). 
     This message may be outputted in the form of a sound from the speaker  10 - 1  through the sound input circuit  98 - 1  or outputted in the form of display of characters or the like on the display  8 - 1  through the LCD driving circuit  95 - 1 . 
     For example, when the message is outputted in the form of the sound, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  outputs the sound for requesting for selection of the language to be used in the game from the speaker  10 - 1  in a default language type. When the default language type is English, for instance, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  outputs the sound stating “What language do you want to use?” from the speaker  10 - 1 . 
     Meanwhile, when the message is outputted in the form of display, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  displays characters, buttons, and the like on the display  8 - 1  in order to promote selection of the language to be used in the game in the default language type. For example, when the default language type is English, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  displays characters stating “What language do you want to use?” together with buttons  63   a - 1 ,  63   b - 1 ,  63   c - 1 ,  63   d - 1 ,  63   e - 1 , and  63   f - 1  representing language options of “English”, “Japanese”, “French”, “German”, “Spanish”, and “Chinese” as shown in  FIG. 93 . 
     Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  judges whether or not a response message (a response sentence) to the message outputted in step S 300   b - 1  is inputted (step S 300   c - 1 ). 
     Here, when the message outputted in step S 300   b - 1  is in the sound, the presence of the input of the message in response to the outputted message can be confirmed by judging whether or not there is the input to the input unit  1100 - 1  of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  after outputting the message in step S 300   b - 1 . Meanwhile, when the outputted message in step S 300   b - 1  is displayed on the display  8 - 1 , the presence of the input of the message in response to the outputted message can be confirmed by judging whether or not an operation of any of language selection buttons displayed on the display  8 - 1  (the buttons  63   a - 1 ,  63   b - 1 ,  63   c - 1 ,  63   d - 1 ,  63   e - 1 , and  63   f - 1  stating “English”, “Japanese”, “French”, “German”, “Spanish”, and “Chinese” shown in  FIG. 93 ) respectively by the player is detected with the touch panel  50 - 1 . 
     Then, if no response message to the message outputted in step S 300   b - 1  is inputted (NO in step S 300   c - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  repeats step S 300   c - 1  until there is the input. When the response message is inputted (YES in step S 300   c - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  changes the language of the BET screen  61 - 1  to be displayed on the display  8 - 1  during the betting period of the roulette game in the language indicated by the message inputted in step S 300   c - 1  (step S 300   d - 1 ). Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  terminates the used language confirmation processing. 
     Here, when the message inputted in step S 300   c - 1  is in the sound, the language indicated in the inputted message can be specified by analyzing the contents of the message inputted in the voice from the microphone  15 - 1  in accordance with the previously explained operations of the conversation controller  1000 - 1 . Meanwhile, when the inputted message in step S 300   c - 1  is displayed on the display  8 - 1 , the language indicated in the inputted message can be confirmed by allowing the terminal CPU  91 - 1  to identify contents of an operation of any of the buttons for language selection displayed on the display  8 - 1  by the player through the touch panel  50 - 1 . 
     In step S 300   e - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  checks whether or not the smart card  17 - 1  is discharged from the card reader  16 - 1 . If the smart card  17 - 1  is not discharged (NO in step S 300   e - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  terminates the used language confirmation processing. When the smart card  17 - 1  is discharged (YES in step S 300   e - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  displays the BET screen  61 - 1  on the display  8 - 1  in the default language during the betting period of the roulette game (step S 300   f - 1 ). Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  terminates the used language confirmation processing. Here, the default language type may be defined as English, for example. 
     In the betting period confirmation processing (step S 301 - 1 ), as shown in  FIG. 80 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  confirms whether the betting period start signal has been received from the server CPU  81 - 1  or not (step S 311 - 1 ). In the case where the betting period start signal has been received (step S 311 - 1 : YES), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  sets the flag F in the RAM  93 - 1  which indicates that it is under the betting period to “1” (step S 312 - 1 ), and then terminates the betting period confirmation processing. 
     On the other hand, in the case where the betting time start signal has not been received yet (step S 311 - 1 : NO), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  confirms whether the betting period end signal has been received from the server CPU  81 - 1  or not (step S 313 - 1 ). In the case where the betting period end signal has been received (step S 313 - 1 : YES), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  sets the flag F in the RAM  93 - 1  which indicates that it is under the betting period to “0” (step S 314 - 1 ), and then terminates the betting period confirmation processing. In the case where the betting period end signal has not been received yet (step S 313 - 1 : NO), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  terminates the betting period confirmation processing. 
     Then, in the bet accepting processing (step S 302 - 1  in  FIG. 78 ), as shown in  FIG. 81 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  judges whether the flag F in the RAM  93 - 1  is set to “0” or not (step S 321 - 1 ). In the case where the flag F is set to “0” (step S 321 - 1 : YES), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  terminates the bet accepting processing. 
     On the other hand, in the case where the flag F is not set to “0” (step S 321 - 1 : NO), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  judges whether the remaining betting time has reached the last 5 seconds (“5” or a smaller number is displayed on the bet time display unit  69 - 1 ) or not (step S 322 - 1 ). In the case where the remaining time has reached the last 5 seconds (step S 322 - 1 : YES), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  displays a message announcing that the betting time will be ended on the bet screen  61 - 1  (step S 323 - 1 ), and shifts the processing to the step S 324 - 1 . On the other hand, in the case where the remaining time has not reached the last 5 seconds (step S 322 - 1 : NO), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  shifts the processing to the step S 324 - 1 . 
     Here, when the BET screen  61 - 1  displayed on the display  8 - 1  is written in English as shown in  FIG. 50 , the message of the advance notice for the end of the betting period is shown in the contents such as “HURRY UP! THE BET TIME ENDING SOON.” as shown in  FIG. 94 , for example. 
     The terminal CPU  91 - 1  detects the bet placed by the player (step S 324 - 1 ). The betting is detected by detecting the player&#39;s touches on the bet area  72 - 1  in the table-type betting board  60 - 1  and on the bet buttons  66 - 1  via the touch panel  50 - 1 . When the betting is detected, the chip mark  71 - 1  is displayed on the specified bet area  72 - 1  on the display  8 - 1  according to the number of bet chips. 
     After that, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  judges whether the player has confirmed the betting or not (step S 325 - 1 ). The betting is confirmed when the player&#39;s touch on the bet confirmation button  65 - 1  on the display  8 - 1  is detected via the touch panel  50 - 1 . 
     In the case where it is judged that the betting has not been confirmed (step S 325 - 1 : NO), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  judges whether the flag F in the RAM  93 - 1  is set to “0” or not (step S 326 - 1 ). In the case where the flag F is not set to “0” (step S 326 - 1 : NO), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  returns the processing to the step S 322 - 1 . 
     On the contrary, when the flag F is set to “0” (YES in step S 326 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  forcibly settles the bet of chips by the player (step S 327 - 1 ) and then shifts the processing to step S 329 - 1  to be described later. 
     Meanwhile, when the bet of chips by the player is confirmed to be settled in step S 325 - 1  (YES), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  judges whether or not the flag F of the RAM  93 - 1  is set to “0” in step S 328 - 1 . When the flag F is not set to “0” (NO in step S 328 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  repeats step S 326 - 1 . On the contrary, when the flag F of the RAM  93 - 1  is set to “0” ‘YES in step S 328 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  shifts the processing to step S 329 - 1 . 
     In the step S 328 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  finishes accepting betting operations via the touch panel  50 - 1  (step S 329 - 1 ). Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  transmits the betting information of the player (the specified bet area  72 - 1 , the number of bet chips and the types of betting) to the server CPU  81 - 1  (step S 330 - 1 ). 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  changes the image on the display  8 - 1  (step S 331 - 1 ). To be more precise, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  firstly switches the image on the display  8 - 1  to the bet screen  61 - 1  including the image indicating that the betting period has ended. 
     Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  receives the result of the JP bonus game determination processing from the server CPU  81 - 1  (step S 332 - 1 ). The result of the JP bonus game determination includes the information which indicates: whether to execute the JP bonus game at any gaming terminal  4 - 1  or not; which gaming terminal  4 - 1  is to win the JP (or all the gaming terminals  4 - 1  are to lose) in the case where it is determined to execute the JP bonus game; and which JP (“MEGA”, “MAJOR” or “MINI”) is to be won in the case of having the JP won. 
     After that, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  determines whether to execute the JP bonus game or not, according to the result of the JP bonus game determination processing received at the step S 332 - 1  (step S 333 - 1 ). In the case where it is determined to execute the JP bonus game at its own gaming terminal  4 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  executes a prescribed selection-type JP bonus game. And then, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  displays the bonus game result (whether the JP has been won or not) in the bet screen  61 - 1  on the display  8 - 1  (step S 334 - 1 ), according to the determination result received at the step S 332 - 1 . 
     In the case where it is determined not to execute the JP bonus game at its own gaming terminal  4 - 1  at the step S 333 - 1 , or after the step S 334 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  receives the payout result from the server CPU  81 - 1  (step S 335 - 1 ). Note that the payout result includes the payout for the roulette game and the payout for the JP bonus game. 
     Subsequently, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  provides a payout according to the payout result received at the step S 335 - 1  (step S 336 - 1 ). Specifically, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  stores the credit data of the payout for the roulette game in the RAM  93 - 1 . And the terminal CPU  91 - 1  also stores the accumulated JP credits in the RAM  93 - 1  if the JP has been won. Then, when the payout button  5 - 1  is touched, the number of medals corresponding to the credits stored in the RAM  93 - 1  (usually, one medal per one credit) are paid from the medal payout opening  12 - 1 . Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  terminates the bet accepting processing. 
     Next, as shown in  FIG. 82A , in the order processing in step S 303 - 1  of  FIG. 78 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  judges whether or not the language type to be used in the game is designated by the message (the response sentence) inputted in step S 300   c - 1  in the used language confirmation processing shown in  FIG. 79  (step S 341 - 1 ). If the language type is designated (YES in step S 341 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 352 - 1  (see  FIG. 82B ) to be described later. 
     On the other hand, when the language type to be used in the game is not designated (NO in step S 341 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  judges whether or not a message (a response sentence) to request an order of an item is inputted in a default language type (in English, for example) (step S 342 - 1 ). 
     Here, when the message is in the form of the sound, whether the message to request the order of the item is inputted can be judged by checking whether or not the input unit  1100 - 1 , which can be formed of the microphone  15 - 1 , of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  receives an input of a sound message (such as a phrase meaning “I would like some food and beverage”) that requests the order of the item in the default language. On the other hand, when the message to request the order of the item is in the form of display on the display  8 - 1 , whether the message is inputted can be judged by checking whether or not the touch panel  50 - 1  detects an operation of the order button  76 - 1  (see  FIG. 50 ) displayed on the BET screen  61 - 1  on the display  8 - 1  by the player. 
     Then, if the message to request the order of the item is not inputted (NO in step S 342 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  terminates the order processing. On the other hand, when the message to request the order of the item is inputted (YES in step S 342 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  suspends acceptance of a bet by disallowing the player to make a bet of credits on the roulette game through the operation on the BET screen  61 - 1  (step S 343 - 1 ). Moreover, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  specifies the classification designated by the inputted message (the message to request the order of the item inputted in step S 342 - 1  in this case) (step S 344 - 1 ). Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 345 - 1  to be described later. 
     The classification designated by the inputted message (the response sentence) can be specified by analyzing the message (the response sentence) inputted in the default language type by use of the speech recognition unit  1200 - 1  and the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 1  of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  formed of the terminal CPU  91 - 1  and the external memory  99 - 1 . 
     For example, when the input of the sound message (the response sentence) having the content stating that “I would like some food and beverage” in the default language type in step S 342 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  can recognize from the presence of keywords “food” and “beverage” in the message (the response sentence) that the message designates a grand classification including both of “food” and “beverage” located at the top rank in the menu data in the external memory  100 - 1 . 
     Similarly, when the sound message (the response sentence) having the content stating that “I would like some food” or the sound message (the response sentence) having the content stating that “I would like some beverage” is inputted in the default language type in step S 342 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  can recognize from the presence of keywords “food” or “beverage” in the message (the response sentence) that the message designates a food classification including the “food” or a beverage classification including the “beverage” in the menu data in the external memory  100 - 1  is designated in each case. 
     Meanwhile, when the player operates the order button  76 - 1  (see  FIG. 50 ) displayed on the BET screen  61 - 1  on the display  8 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  can detect the operation and thereby judge that the grand classification including both of the “food” and the “beverage” located at the top rank in the menu data in the external memory  100 - 1  are designated. 
     In step S 345 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  judges whether or not there is any classification at the rank located immediately below the classification specified in step S 344 - 1  from the contents of the menu data corresponding to the default language type stored in the external memory  100 - 1 . When there is no classification (NO in step S 345 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 349 - 1  to be described later. 
     On the other hand, when there is any classification at the rank located immediately below the classification specified in step S 344 - 1  (YES in step S 345 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  creates data on a message (a conversation sentence) in the default language type (in English, for example) including one or more classifications by use of the conversation control unit  1300 - 1  of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  formed of the terminal CPU  91 - 1  and the conversation database  1500 - 1  of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  formed of the external memory  99 - 1  (step S 346 - 1 ). 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  outputs the message (the conversation sentence) including one or more items, whose data is created in step S 349 - 1 , at the rank located immediately below the classification specified in step S 344 - 1  in the form of the sound (step S 347 - 1 ). The output of this message can be achieved by use of the output unit  1600 - 1  of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  formed of the speaker  10 - 1 . Thereafter, the terminal CPU proceeds to step S 348 - 1  to be described later. 
     In step S 348 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  judges whether or not a message (a response sentence), which designates one of the items presented in that message, is inputted in the default language type (in English, for example) in response to the message (the conversation sentence) outputted in the form of the sound in step S 347 - 1 . When no massage is inputted (NO in step S 348 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  repeats step S 348 - 1  until a massage is inputted. When the massage is inputted (YES in step S 351 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 344 - 1 . 
     Therefore, in step S 344 - 1  transited from step S 348 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  specifies the classification designated in the message inputted in step S 348 - 1  (the message to designate one of the classifications presented in the message (the conversation sentence) outputted in step S 347 - 1 . 
     In step S 349 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  creates data on a message (a conversation sentence) including one or more items located below the classification specified in steps S 344 - 1  in the menu data in the external memory  100 - 1 , in the default language type (in English, for example), by use of the conversation control unit  1300 - 1  of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  formed of the terminal CPU  91 - 1  and the conversation database  1500 - 1  of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  formed of the external memory  99 - 1 . 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  outputs the message (the conversation sentence) including one or more items, whose data is created in step S 349 - 1 , at the rank located immediately below the classification specified in step S 344 - 1  in the form of the sound (step S 350 - 1 ). The output of this message can be achieved by use of the output unit  1600 - 1  of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  formed of the speaker  10 - 1 . Thereafter, the terminal CPU proceeds to step S 351 - 1  to be described later. 
     In step S 351 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  judges whether or not a message (a response sentence), which designates one of the items presented in the message, is inputted in the default language type (in English, for example) in respond to the message (the conversation sentence) outputted in the form of the sound in step S 350 - 1 . When the terminal CPU  91 - 1  receives no input, (NO in step S 351 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  repeats step S 351 - 1  until the terminal CPU  91 - 1  receives the input. When the terminal CPU  91 - 1  receives the input (YES in step S 351 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 362 - 1  to be described later (see  FIG. 82B ). 
     As shown in  FIG. 82B , in step S 352 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  judges whether or not a message (a response sentence) to request the order of the item is inputted in language type designated in step S 341 - 1  in a similar manner to step S 342 - 1 . 
     Then, if the message to request the order of the item is not inputted (NO in step S 352 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  terminates the order processing. On the other hand, when the message to request the order of the item is inputted (YES in step S 352 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  suspends acceptance of a bet of credits on the roulette game through the operation on the BET screen  61 - 1  by the player as similar to step S 343 - 1  (step S 353 - 1 ). Moreover, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  specifies the classification designated by the inputted message (the message to request the order of the item inputted in step S 352 - 1  in this case) as similar to step S 344 - 1  (step S 354 - 1 ). Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 355 - 1  to be described later. 
     In step S 355 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  judges whether or not there is any classification at the rank located immediately below the classification specified in step S 354 - 1  from the contents of the menu data corresponding to the language type designated in step  341 - 1  which are stored in the external memory  100 - 1 . When there is no classification (NO in step S 355 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 359 - 1  to be described later. 
     On the other hand, when there is any classification at the rank located immediately below the classification specified in step S 354 - 1  (YES in step S 355 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  creates data on a message (a conversation sentence) including one or more classifications, in the language type designated in step S 341 - 1  (in Japanese, for example) by use of the conversation control unit  1300 - 1  of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  formed of the terminal CPU  91 - 1  and the conversation database  1500 - 1  of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  formed of the external memory  99 - 1  (step S 356 - 1 ). 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  outputs the message (the conversation sentence) including one or more classifications, whose data is created in step S 356 - 1 , at the rank located immediately below the classification specified in step S 354 - 1  in the form of the sound (step S 357 - 1 ). The output of this message can be achieved by use of the output unit  1600 - 1  of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  formed of the speaker  10 - 1 . Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 358 - 1  to be described later. 
     In step S 358 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  judges whether or not a message (a response sentence), which designates one of the classifications presented in the message, is inputted in the language type designated in step S 341 - 1  (in Japanese, for example), in response to the message (the conversation sentence) outputted in the form of the sound in step S 357 - 1 . When the terminal CPU  91 - 1  receives no input, (NO in step S 358 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  repeats step S 358 - 1  until the terminal CPU  91 - 1  receives an input. When the terminal CPU  91 - 1  receives an input (YES in step S 358 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 354 - 1 . 
     Therefore, in step S 354 - 1  transited from step S 358 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  specifies the classification designated in the message inputted in step S 358 - 1  (the message to designate one of the classifications presented in the message (the conversation sentence) outputted in step S 357 - 1 ). 
     In step S 359 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  creates data on a message (a conversation sentence) in the language type designated in step S 341 - 1  (in Japanese, for example) including one or more items located below the classification specified in steps S 354 - 1  in the menu data in the external memory  100 - 1  by use of the conversation control unit  1300 - 1  of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  formed of the terminal CPU  91 - 1  and the conversation database  1500 - 1  of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  formed of the external memory  99 - 1 . 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  outputs the message (the conversation sentence) including one or more items, whose data is created in step S 359 - 1 , located below the classification specified in steps S 354 - 1  in the form of the sound (step S 360 - 1 ). The output of this message can be performed by use of the output unit  1600 - 1  of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  formed of the speaker  10 - 1 . Thereafter, the terminal CPU proceeds to step S 361 - 1  to be described later. 
     In step S 361 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  judges whether or not a message (a response sentence), which designates one of the items presented in the message, is inputted in the language type designated in step S 341 - 1  (in Japanese, for example), in response to the message (the conversation sentence) outputted in the form of the sound in step S 360 - 1 . When the terminal CPU  91 - 1  receives no input, (NO in step S 361 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  repeats step S 361 - 1  until the terminal CPU  91 - 1  receives the input. When the terminal CPU  91 - 1  receives the input (YES in step S 361 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 362 - 1 . 
     In step S 362 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  creates order data in the default language type (in English, for example) which represent the contents of the item designated by the message inputted in the default language type (in English, for example) in step S 351 - 1  or the contents of the item designated in the language type designated in Step S 341 - 1  (in Japanese, for example) in step S 361 - 1 , and outputs the order data to the shop server  86 - 1  as a destination of connection through the local area network. Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 363 - 1 . 
     In step S 363 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  resumes acceptance of a bet which has been suspended in step S 343 - 1  or in step S 353 - 1 , thereby effectuating the bet of credits on the roulette game by the player through the operation on the BET screen  61 - 1 . Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  terminates the order processing. 
     Incidentally, when the shop server  86 - 1  receives the order data outputted in step S 362 - 1  which represent the contents of the ordered item in the default language type (in English, for example), the shop server  86 - 1  displays the contents of the ordered item represented by the order data on a shop display  86   a - 1  in the default language type (in English, for example). 
     As apparent from the foregoing description, in the roulette game machine  1 - 1  of this embodiment, the controller of the present invention is formed of the terminal CPU  91 - 1 . 
     In the gaming terminal  4 - 1  according to this embodiment configured as described above, the following actions take place when the player determines the language type (either the default language type or the designated language type) to be used in the roulette game and then inputs the sound message to request the order of the item to the microphone  15 - 1  in the language type. 
     For example, when the player inputs the sound message having the phrase meaning “I would like some food and beverage”, the message is deemed to specify the grand classification due to the keywords “food” and “beverage” in the sound message. Then, subsequent to a message stating “please select a classification which you like”, a message sequentially enumerating the classifications located immediately below the grand classification (such as “foods”, “beverages”, and so on) in the menu data in the external memory  100 - 1  is outputted from the speaker  10 - 1 . 
     Here, if the player inputs a sound message stating “foods”, then subsequent to a message stating “please select a classification which you like”, a message sequentially enumerating the classifications located immediately below the food classification (such as “croque-monsieur”, “clubhouse sandwich”, “BLT sandwich”, “French fries”, and so on) in the menu data in the external memory  100 - 1  is outputted from the speaker  10 - 1 . 
     Thereafter, the item that the player wishes to order is eventually specified by repeating inputs and outputs of the sound messages as described above. 
     For example, the classification inputted in the form of the sound message by the player is assumed to be a Wild Turkey (registered trademark) classification in a Kentucky and Bourbon whiskey classification located below a whiskey classification that is located below the beverage classification. Then, three classifications of “Wild Turkey 101 proof”, “Wild Turkey 12 YO”, and “Wild Turkey 17 YO” existing in the menu data in the external memory  100 - 1  as the classifications at a rank immediately below this Wild Turkey classification are outputted from the speaker  10 - 1  subsequent to the message stating “please select a classification which you like”. 
     Here, a sound message to designate the “Wild Turkey 12 YO” classification is assumed to be inputted by the player. There are not classifications below this “Wild Turkey 12 YO” classification in the menu data in the external memory  100 - 1 . Instead, only the items (drinking-styles in this case) are located therebelow. Accordingly, subsequent to the message stating “please select a drinking-style”, a voice message sequentially enumerating concrete items (“straight”, “on the rocks”, “twice-up”, “whiskey and soda”, and so on, for example) located below the Wild Turkey 12 YO classification in the menu data in the external memory  100 - 1  and prices thereof is outputted from the speaker  10 - 1 . 
     Then, when the player inputs a sound message stating “on the rocks”, for example, the item ordered by the player is specified as the “on the rocks” in the “Wild Turkey 12 YO”. 
     The content of the item ordered by the player thus specified is displayed on the shop display  86   a - 1  of the shop server  86 - 1  in the default language type (in English, for example). 
     As described above, the gaming terminal  4 - 1  of the roulette game device  1 - 1  according to the embodiment of the present invention outputs the message (the conversation sentence) to inquire the language type that the player wishes to use in the roulette game in the forms of sounds and characters from the speaker  10 - 1  and the display  8 - 1  by use of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  compatible with the multiple language types or by use of the multiple conversation controllers  1000 - 1  respectively compatible with the language types. 
     In response to this output, the player inputs the message (the response sentence) for designating the language type that the player wishes to use in the roulette game either in the form of the sound by using the microphone  15 - 1  or in the form of the characters by operating the touch panel  50 - 1  on the display  8 - 1 . 
     After the input of the message by the player for designating the language type to be used in the roulette game in the forms of the sounds and the characters, the gaming terminal  4 - 1  exchanges the conversations in the forms of the sounds and the characters with the player in the language type designated by the player. 
     Therefore, in the roulette game device  1  according to the embodiment of the present invention, the language type to be used in the roulette game is set to the language type corresponding to the request by the player by performing the conversations between the gaming terminal  4 - 1  and the player in the forms of the sounds and the characters. Thereafter, the information in the conversation mode is exchanged between the gaming terminal  4 - 1  and the player in the language type thus set up. Accordingly, it is possible to achieve interactive gaming. 
     Moreover, in the roulette game device  1 - 1  according to the embodiment of the present invention, when the player inputs the sound message in the designated language type to request the order of the item orderable through the gaming terminal from the input unit  1100 - 1  formed of the microphone  15 - 1 , the conversation controller  1000 - 1  analyzes the message and creates the sound message to inquire the classification of the item, and this message is outputted from the output unit  1600 - 1  formed of the speaker  10 - 1  toward the player. Interactive exchange between the player and the gaming terminal  4 - 1  is established by repeating the inputs of sound messages from the player and the outputs of the sound messages from the conversation controller  1000 - 1 , whereby the scope of the item that the player wishes to order is gradually narrowed down from the top rank to the bottom rank and eventually specified. 
     Therefore, in the gaming terminal  4 - 1  of the roulette game device  1 - 1  according to the embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to order the item interactively through the gaming terminal  4 - 1  by exchanging the information in the conversation mode between the gaming terminal  4 - 1  and the player in the designated language type. 
     Moreover, according to the roulette game device  1 - 1  of the embodiment of the present invention, the ordered item is displayed on the shop display  86   a - 1  of the shop server  86 - 1  in the default language type regardless of what language type the player uses for ordering the item. As a result, even when the player orders the item in the language type other than the default language type, staff in the shop area who receives the order can grasp the contents of the ordered item by means of display on the shop display  86   a - 1  using in default language type recognizable to the staff. In this way, it is possible to establish communication for placing the order in mutually different language types between the player and the staff in the shop area. 
     The above-described embodiment has explained the case of exchanging the interactive messages between the gaming terminal  4 - 1  and the player by using the sounds throughout the process to narrow down the item that the player wishes to order to the process to specify the item. However, it is also possible to apply a configuration to exchange the messages by means of display on the display  8 - 1  instead. 
     Concrete contents of the ordering process in step S 303 - 1  in  FIG. 78  by applying such a configuration will now be described with reference to flowcharts in  FIGS. 83A and 83B . 
     First, as shown in  FIG. 83A , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  performs the processes from step S 341 - 1  to step S 345 - 1  shown in  FIG. 82A . Subsequently, when there is no classification at the rank immediately below the classification specified in step S 344 - 1  (NO in step S 345 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 349   a - 1  to be described later. 
     On the other hand, when there is any classification at the rank located immediately below the classification specified in step S 344 - 1  (YES in step S 345 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  displays a menu screen in the default language type (in English, for example) for guiding one or more classifications on the display  8 - 1  (step S 346   a - 1 ). Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 348   a - 1  to be described later. 
     In step S 348   a - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  judges whether or not the player designates one of the classifications presented on the menu screen by means of the operation on the menu screen displayed on the display  8 - 1  in step S 346   a - 1 . When no classification is designated (NO in step S 348   a - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  repeats step S 348   a - 1  until any classification is designated. The terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 344 - 1  when the classification is designated (YES in step S 348   a - 1 ). 
     Therefore, in step S 344 - 1  transited from step S 343 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  specifies the classification which is designated by the message (the conversation sentence) to request the order of the item inputted in step S 342 - 1 . Meanwhile, in step S 344 - 1  transited from step S 348   a - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  specifies the classification among the classifications presented on the menu screen displayed on the display  8 - 1  in step S 346   a - 1  which is designated by the player. 
     In step S 349   a - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  displays a menu screen in the default language type (in English, for example) on the display  8 - 1  in order to guide one or more items in the menu data in the external memory  100 - 1 , which are located below the classification specified in step S 344 - 1 . 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  judges whether or not the player designates one of the items presented on the menu screen by operating the menu screen displayed on the display  8 - 1  in step S 349   a - 1  (step S 351   a - 1 ). When no item is designated (NO in step S 351   a - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  repeats step S 351   a - 1  until any item is designated. When the item is designated (YES in step S 351   a - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 362 - 1  to be described later (see  FIG. 83B ). 
     Meanwhile, as shown in  FIG. 83B , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  performs the processes from step S 352 - 1  to step S 355 - 1  shown in  FIG. 82B . Subsequently, when there is no classification at the rank immediately below the classification specified in step S 354 - 1  (NO in step S 355 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 359   a - 1  to be described later. 
     On the other hand, when there is any classification at the rank located immediately below the classification specified in step S 354 - 1  (YES in step S 355 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  displays a menu screen in the language type designated in step S 341 - 1  (in Japanese, for example) for guiding one or more classifications on the display  8 - 1  (step S 356   a - 1 ). Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 358   a - 1  to be described later. 
     In step S 358   a - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  judges whether or not the player designates one of the classifications presented on the menu screen by means of the operation on the menu screen displayed on the display  8 - 1  in step S 356   a - 1 . When no classification is designated (NO in step S 358   a - 1 ), the terminal CPU  92 - 1  repeats step S 358   a - 1  until any classification is designated. The terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 354 - 1  when the classification is designated (YES in step S 358   a - 1 ). 
     Therefore, in step S 354 - 1  transited from step S 352 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  specifies the classification which is designated by the message (the conversation sentence) to request the order of the item inputted in step S 352 - 1 . Meanwhile, in step S 354 - 1  transited from step S 358   a - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  specifies the classification among the classifications presented on the menu screen displayed on the display  8 - 1  in step S 356   a - 1  which is designated by the player. 
     In step S 359   a - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  displays a menu screen in the language type designated in step S 341 - 1  (in Japanese, for example) on the display  8 - 1  in order to guide one or more items in the menu data in the external memory  100 - 1 , which are located below the classification specified in step S 354 - 1 . 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  judges whether or not the player designates one of the items presented on the menu screen by operating the menu screen displayed on the display  8 - 1  in step S 359   a - 1  (step S 361   a - 1 ). When no item is designated (NO in step S 361   a - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  repeats step S 361   a - 1  until any item is designated. When the item is designated (YES in step S 361   a - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 362 - 1  to be described later. 
     In step S 362 - 1  and subsequent step S 363 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  executes the same processing as step S 362 - 1  and step S 363 - 1  shown in  FIG. 82B . 
     In the gaming terminal  4 - 1  configured as described above, the following actions take place when the player determines the language type (either the default language type or the designated language type) to be used in the roulette game and then inputs the sound message to request for the order of the item to the microphone  15 - 1  in the language type. Here, the default language type (English, for example) is assumed to be the language type to be used in the roulette game. 
     For example, when the player inputs the sound message having the phrase meaning “I would like some food and beverage”, the message is deemed to specify the grand classification due to the keywords “food” and “beverage” in the sound message. Then, as shown in  FIG. 84 , subsequent to a message stating “please select a classification which you like” in the default language (in English, for example), a menu screen  61 C- 1  arranging the classifications in the menu data in the external memory  100 - 1  located immediately below the grand classification (such as “foods”, “beverages”, and so on) is displayed on the display  8 - 1 . 
     Here, if the player operates a “select” button  86   e - 1  beside the “foods” classification on the menu screen  61 C- 1 , then subsequent to a message stating “please select a classification which you like” in the default language (in English, for example), a menu screen  61 D- 1  arranging the classifications in the menu data in the external memory  100 - 1  located immediately below the food classification (such as “appetizers”, “side dishes”, “main dishes”, “desserts”, and so on) is displayed on the display  8 - 1 . 
     Thereafter, the item that the player wishes to order is eventually specified by repeating the display of the classifications (or the items) on the menu screens as described above on the display  8 - 1  and operations on the menu screens by the player. 
     For example, the classification inputted by the operation on the menu screen on the display  8 - 1  by the player is assumed to be the Wild Turkey classification as described in the previous example. Then, as shown in  FIG. 86 , a menu screen  61 E- 1  arranging three classifications of “Wild Turkey 101 proof”, “Wild Turkey 12 YO”, and “Wild Turkey 17 YO” existing in the menu data in the external memory  100 - 1  as the classifications at a rank immediately below this Wild Turkey classification together with the message stating “please select a classification which you like” is displayed on the display  8 - 1 . 
     Here, the “select” button  86   e - 1  beside the “Wild Turkey 12 YO” classification on the menu screen  61 E- 1  is assumed to be operated by the player. There are not classifications below this “Wild Turkey 12 YO” classification in the menu data in the external memory  100 - 1 . Instead, only the items (drinking-styles in this case) are located therebelow. Accordingly, subsequent to the message stating “please select a drinking-style”, a menu screen  61 F- 1  arranging the concrete items (“straight”, “on the rocks”, “twice-up”, “whiskey and soda”, and so on, for example) located below the Wild Turkey 12 YO classification in the menu data in the external memory  100 - 1  and prices thereof is displayed on the display  8 - 1  in the default language (in English, for example) as shown in  FIG. 87 . 
     Then, when the player operates the “select” button  86   e - 1  beside the “on the rocks” on a menu screen  61 F- 1 , for example, the item ordered by the player is specified as the “on the rocks” in the “Wild Turkey 12 YO”. 
     Here, “cancel” buttons  86   d - 1  on the menu screens  61 C- 1 ,  61 D- 1 ,  61 E- 1 , and  61 F- 1  in  FIG. 84  to  FIG. 87  are buttons to be operated by the player for cancelling specification of the classification by the operations on the respective menu screens  61 C- 1 ,  61 D- 1 ,  61 E- 1 , and  61 F- 1 . 
     The content of the item ordered by the player thus specified is displayed on the shop display  86   a - 1  of the shop server  86 - 1  in the default language type (in English, for example). 
     In this configuration, the player is able to narrow down the classification of the item to order from the top rank to the bottom rank in the hierarchical structure and to specify the item to order eventually while confirming the information on the menu screens  61 C- 1 ,  61 D- 1 ,  61 E- 1 , and  61 F- 1  on the display  8 - 1 . Accordingly, it is possible to prevent an erroneous order of the item. 
     The above-described embodiment has described the case in which the default language type (English, for example) is determined as the language type used in the roulette game. However, when a different language type is determined as the language type used in the roulette game, the same language type is used on the menu screens  61 C- 1 ,  61 D- 1 ,  61 E- 1 , and  61 F- 1 . For example, when Japanese is designated as the language type to be used in the roulette game, the menu screens  61 C- 1 ,  61 D- 1 ,  61 E- 1 , and  61 F- 1  shown in  FIG. 84  to  FIG. 87  are replaced by contents shown in  FIG. 88  to  FIG. 91 , respectively. 
     At the same time, the “cancel” buttons  86   d - 1  and the “select” buttons  86   e - 1  on the menu screens  61 C- 1 ,  61 D- 1 ,  61 E- 1 , and  61 F- 1  in  FIG. 84  to  FIG. 87  are replaced by “KYANSERU” (CANCEL) buttons  86   d - 1  and “SENTAKU” (SELECT) buttons  86   e - 1 , respectively. Here, it is noted that “KYANSERU” and “SENTAKU” respectively represent Japanese language terms meaning “CANCEL” and “SELECT” phonetically, for illustrative purposes. 
     Here, when the eventually ordered items are presented to the player by means of the output of the sound message or of the display of the menu screen  61 F- 1 , for example, the contents therein may only include the items affordable by the number of credits previously accumulated in the gaming terminal  4 - 1  and displayed on the credit number display unit  68 - 1  on the BET screen  61 - 1 . 
     For example, an assumption will be made that the language type to be used in the game is not designated by the player, that the number of remaining credits displayed on the credit number display unit  68 - 1  is denominated in US dollars (USD), and that the value is equal to “6”. Here, another assumption will be made that the player designates the classification “Wild Turkey 12 YO” located in a place at certain ranks below the beverage classification. 
     In this case, among the original concrete items (“straight”, “on the rocks”, “twice-up”, “whiskey and soda”, and so on, for example) located below the Wild Turkey 12 YO classification as described previously, the item (“whiskey and soda”) requiring the unit price higher than 6 US dollars displayed on the credit number display unit  68 - 1  is deleted from the contents to be presented to the player by way of the sound message or the menu screen  61 F- 1  (see the menu screen  61 F- 1  in  FIG. 88 ). 
     As shown in the drawing, the item requiring the unit price higher than the number of credits displayed on the credit number display unit  68 - 1  can be deleted from the contents to be presented to the player by comparing the number of remaining credits displayed on the credit number display unit  68 - 1  with the prices of the respective items in the menu data stored in the external storage device  100 - 1 . 
     Meanwhile, the order processing in  FIG. 82A ,  82 B or  FIG. 83A ,  83 B may be configured by excluding the processing for suspending the acceptance of credits bet on the roulette game while the menu screen  61 A- 1  or  61 B- 1  is displayed on the display  8 - 1  to allow the player to order an item, that is, the processing performed with a combination of steps S 343 - 1  and S 354 - 1  with step S 363 - 1 . 
     Further, in the respective embodiments described above, the order is fixed at the point when the player eventually designates the item presented by the output of the sound message or by the display on the menu screen  61 F- 1 . However, it is also possible to apply a configuration in which the item tentatively becomes an order candidate at the point of designation of the presented item and the item being the order candidate is duly determined as the order by an approval of the player afterwards. 
     When applying this configuration, the display  8 - 1  is configured to be able to switch the display between the BET screen  61 - 1  and the menu screen  61 F- 1  at any time by way of an instruction by the player. 
     Then, the contents of the order processing in step S 303 - 1  in  FIG. 78  are partially changed from the contents shown in  FIGS. 82A and 82B  or  FIGS. 83A and 83B  into contents shown in  FIGS. 95A and 95B  or  FIGS. 96A and 96B . 
     First, consider the case where the player narrows down the scope of the items from the top rank to the bottom rank in the hierarchical structure, and eventually specifies the item that the player wishes to order by means of exchanging the sound messages. In this case, as shown in  FIG. 95A , if the player inputs the message to request the order of the item (YES) in step S 342 - 1 , then the terminal CPU  91 - 1  specifies the classification designated in the inputted message while skipping the processing in step S 343 - 1  adopted in the flowchart in  FIG. 82A  (step S 344 - 1 ). 
     Meanwhile, as shown in  FIG. 95A , when no message (the response sentence) responding to the message (the conversation sentence) outputted in the form of the sound in step S 350 - 1  and designating one of the items presented in the message is inputted in the default language type (English, for example) (NO in step S 351 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 351 - 2 - 1  to be described later. 
     On the other hand, when the message (the response sentence) to designate one of the presented items is inputted in the default language type (English, for example) (YES in step S 351 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  determines that the item is designated as the order candidate and therefore prohibits use of the credits equivalent to a payment for the item designated as the order candidate to make a bet on the roulette game (step S 351 - 1 - 1 ). Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 351 - 2 - 1  to be described later. 
     Here, prohibition of use of the credits equivalent to the payment for the item designated as the order candidate to make a bet on the roulette game can be achieved by updating the display of the number of remaining credits on the credit number display unit  68 - 1  on the BET screen  61 - 1  with the number of credits after subtracting the number equivalent to the payment for the item designated as the order candidate, for example. 
     In step S 351 - 2 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  judges whether or not the order of the item is cancelled. Here, whether the order is canceled can be judged by checking whether or not the input unit  1100 - 1 , which can be formed of the microphone  15 - 1 , of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  receives an input of a sound message in the default language type (in English, for example) for representing cancellation of the order of the item. 
     The terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 351 - 4 - 1  when the order of the item is not cancelled (NO in step S 351 - 2 - 1 ). On the other hand, when the order of the item cancelled (YES in step S 351 - 2 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  renders the credits equivalent to the payment for the item designated as the order candidate so far, usable for making a bet on the roulette game again (step S 351 - 3 - 1 ). Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  terminates the order processing. 
     Here, the action to render the credits equivalent to the payment for the item designated as the order candidate so far usable for making a bet on the roulette game again can be achieved by updating the display of the number of remaining credits on the credit number display unit  68 - 1  on the BET screen  61 - 1  with the number of credits after adding the number equivalent to the payment for the item designated as the order candidate so far. 
     In step S 351 - 4 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  checks whether or not the order of the item designated as the order candidate in the default language type (in English, for example) in step S 351 - 1  is confirmed. 
     Here, whether the order is canceled can be confirmed by checking whether or not the input unit  1100 - 1 , which can be formed of the microphone  15 - 1 , of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  receives an input of a sound message in the default language type (in English, for example) for confirming the order. 
     The terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 351 - 1  when the order of the item is not confirmed (NO in step S 351 - 4 - 1 ). On the other hand, as shown in  FIG. 95C , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 352 - 1  and so forth shown in  FIG. 82B  when the order of the item is confirmed (YES in step S 351 - 4 - 1 ). 
     Next, if the message to request the order of item is inputted (YES) in step S 352 - 1  in  FIG. 95B  transited from step S 341 - 1  in  FIG. 95A  when the language type to be used in the game is designated (YES), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  specifies the classification designated by the inputted message (step S 354 - 1 ) while skipping the processing in step S 343 - 1  previously carried out in the flowchart in  FIG. 82A . 
     Meanwhile, as shown in  FIG. 95B , when the message (the response sentence) corresponding to the message (the conversation sentence) outputted in the form of the sound in step S 360 - 1  and designating one of the items presented in that message is not inputted (NO) by using the language type designated in step S 341 - 1  (Japanese, for example) in step S 361 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 361 - 2 - 1  to be described later. 
     On the other hand, when the message (the response sentence) to designate one of the presented items is inputted in the language type designated in step S  341 - 1  (Japanese, for example) (YES in step S 361 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  determines that the item is designated as the order candidate and therefore prohibits use of credits equivalent to the payment for the item designated as the order candidate to make a bet on the roulette game (step S 361 - 1 - 1 ). Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 361 - 2 - 1  to be described later. 
     In step S 361 - 2 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  judges whether or not the order of the item is cancelled. Here, the presence of cancellation of the order can be judged by checking whether or not the input unit  1100 - 1 , which can be formed of the microphone  15 - 1 , of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  receives an input of a sound message in the language type designated in step S 341 - 1  (in Japanese, for example) for representing cancellation of the order of the item 
     The terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 361 - 4 - 1  when the order of the item is not cancelled (NO in step S 361 - 2 - 1 ). On the other hand, when the order of the item cancelled (YES in step S 361 - 2 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  renders the credits equivalent to the payment for the item designated as the order candidate so far, usable for making a bet on the roulette game again (step S 361 - 3 - 1 ). Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  terminates the order processing. 
     In step S 361 - 4 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  checks whether or not the order of the item designated as the order candidate in the language type designated in step S 341 - 1  (in Japanese, for example) in step S 361 - 1  is confirmed. 
     Here, the presence of confirmation of the order can be confirmed by checking whether or not the input unit  1100 - 1 , which can be formed of the microphone  15 - 1 , of the conversation controller  1000 - 1  receives an input of a sound message in the language type designated in step S 341 - 1  (in Japanese, for example) for confirming the order. 
     The terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 361 - 1  when the order of the item is not confirmed (NO in step S 361 - 4 - 1 ). On the other hand, as shown in  FIG. 95C , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 352 - 1  and so forth shown in  FIG. 82B  when the order of the item is confirmed (YES in step S 361 - 4 - 1 ). 
     Next, consider the case where the player narrows down the scope of the items from the top rank to the bottom rank in the hierarchical structure, and eventually specifies the item that the player wishes to order, while visually confirming the operations on the menu screens  61 C- 1 ,  61 D- 1 ,  61 E- 1 , and  61 F- 1  on the display  8 - 1 . In this case, if the player inputs the message to request the order of the item as shown in  FIG. 96A  (YES in step S 342 - 1 ), then the terminal CPU  91 - 1  specifies the classification designated in the inputted message, while skipping the processing in step S 343 - 1  adopted in the flowchart in  FIG. 83A  (step S 344 - 1 ). 
     Meanwhile, as shown in  FIG. 96A , when the player does not designate one of the items presented on the menu screen  61 F- 1  (NO in step S 351   a - 1 ) by means of the operation on the menu screen  61 F- 1  (see  FIG. 97 ) in the default language type (in English, for example) displayed on the display  8 - 1  in step S 349   a - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 351 - 2 - 1  to be described later. 
     On the other hand, when one of the presented items is designated by the player (YES in step S 351   a - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  determines that the item is designated as the order candidate and therefore prohibits use of credits equivalent to the payment for the item designated as the order candidate to make a bet on the roulette game (step S 351 - 1 - 1 ). Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 351 - 2 - 1  to be described later. 
     In step S 351 - 2 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  judges whether or not the order of the item is cancelled. Here, the presence of cancellation of the order can be confirmed by checking whether or not the touch panel  50 - 1  detects an operation of a “CANCEL” button  86   d - 1  prior to confirmation of the order by operating the “OK” button  86   c - 1 , which are additionally provided on the menu screen  61 F- 1  as shown in  FIG. 97 . 
     The terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 351 - 4 - 1  when the order of the item is not cancelled (NO in step S 351 - 2 - 1 ). When the order of the item cancelled (YES in step S 351 - 2 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  renders the credits equivalent to the payment for the item designated as the order candidate so far, usable for making a bet on the roulette game again (step S 351 - 3 - 1 ). Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  terminates the order processing. 
     In step S 351 - 4 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  checks whether or not the order of the item designated as the order candidate in the default language type (in English, for example) in step S 351   a - 1  is confirmed. 
     Here, as shown in  FIG. 97 , the presence of confirmation of the order can be confirmed by checking whether or not the touch panel  50 - 1  detects confirmation of the order by operating the “OK” button  86   c - 1  prior to cancellation of the order by operating the “CANCEL” button  86   d - 1 . 
     The terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 351   a - 1  when the order of the item is not confirmed (NO in step S 351 - 4 - 1 ). On the other hand, as shown in  FIG. 96C , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 362 - 1  and so forth shown in  FIG. 82B  when the order of the item is confirmed (YES in step S 351 - 4 - 1 ). 
     Next, if the message to request the order of item is inputted (YES) in step S 352 - 1  in  FIG. 96B  transited from step S 341 - 1  in  FIG. 96A  when the language type to be used in the game is designated (YES), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  specifies the classification designated by the inputted message (step S 354 - 1 ) while skipping the processing in step S 343 - 1  previously carried out in the flowchart in  FIG. 83A . 
     Meanwhile, as shown in  FIG. 96A , when the player does not designate one of the items presented on the menu screen  61 F- 1  in step S 361   a - 1  (NO) by means of the operation on the menu screen  61 F- 1  (see  FIG. 98 ) in the language type designated in step S 341 - 1  (Japanese, for example) displayed on the display  8 - 1  in step S 359   a - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 361 - 2 - 1  to be described later. 
     On the other hand, when one of the presented items is designated by the player (YES in step S 361   a - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  determines that the item is designated as the order candidate and therefore prohibits use of credits equivalent to the payment for the item designated as the order candidate to make a bet on the roulette game (step S 361 - 1 - 1 ). Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 361 - 2 - 1  to be described later. 
     In step S 361 - 2 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  judges whether or not the order of the item is cancelled. Here, the presence of cancellation of the order can be confirmed by checking whether or not the touch panel  50 - 1  detects an operation of the “KYANSERU” (CANCEL) button  86   d - 1  prior to confirmation of the order by operating a “KAKUTEI” (OK) button  86   c - 1 , which are additionally provided on the menu screen  61 F- 1  as shown in  FIG. 98 . Here, it is noted that “KAKUTEI” represents a Japanese language term meaning “OK” phonetically, for illustrative purposes. 
     The terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 361 - 4 - 1  when the order of the item is not cancelled (NO in step S 361 - 2 - 1 ). When the order of the item cancelled (YES in step S 361 - 2 - 1 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 1  renders the credits equivalent to the payment for the item designated as the order candidate so far, usable for making a bet on the roulette game again (step S 361 - 3 - 1 ). Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  terminates the order processing. 
     In step S 361 - 4 - 1 , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  checks whether or not the order of the item designated as the order candidate in step S 361   a - 1  in the language type designated in step S 341 - 1  (in Japanese, for example) is confirmed. 
     Here, as shown in  FIG. 98 , the presence of confirmation of the order can be confirmed by checking whether or not the touch panel  50 - 1  detects confirmation of the order by operating the “KAKUTEI” (OK) button  86   c - 1  prior to cancellation of the order by operating the “KYANSERU” (CANCEL) button  86   d - 1 . 
     Then, the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 361   a - 1  when the order of the item is not confirmed (NO in step S 361 - 4 - 1 ). On the other hand, as shown in  FIG. 96C , the terminal CPU  91 - 1  proceeds to step S 362 - 1  and so forth shown in  FIG. 83B  when the order of the item is confirmed (YES in step S 361 - 4 - 1 ). 
     In this configuration, it is possible to make a bet of credits on the roulette game even in the course of placing the order of the item by switching the display on the display  8 - 1  from the menu screen  61 F- 1  to the BET screen  61 - 1 . Moreover, the credits equivalent to the payment for the item designated as the order candidate cannot be used as resources for making a bet on the roulette game unless the order is cancelled. Therefore, it is possible to secure the credits equivalent to the payment for the item when the order is confirmed. 
     Here, instead of switching the display on the display  8 - 1  between the BET screen  61 - 1  and the menu screen  61 F- 1  at any time by the instruction from the player, it is also possible to display the BET screen  61 - 1  and the menu screen  61 F- 1  at the same time as shown in  FIG. 99  or  FIG. 100  by using half areas on the display  8 - 1  respectively for displaying the BET screen  61 - 1  and the menu screen  61 F- 1 . 
     Incidentally, each of  FIG. 99  and  FIG. 100  illustrates the example of displaying the menu screen  61 F- 1  as shown in  FIG. 97  or  FIG. 98  and the BET screen  61 - 1  as shown in  FIG. 50  at the same time. Instead, it is also possible to display any of the menu screens  61 C- 1 ,  61 D- 1 , and  61 E- 1  as shown in  FIG. 84  to  FIG. 86  and  FIG. 89  to  FIG. 91  simultaneously with the BET screen  61 - 1  as shown in  FIG. 50 . 
     However, when displaying any of the menu screens  61 C- 1 ,  61 D- 1 , and  61 E- 1  as shown in  FIG. 84  to  FIG. 86  and  FIG. 89  to  FIG. 91  simultaneously with the BET screen  61 - 1  as shown in  FIG. 50 , it is necessary to add the “OK” button  86   c - 1  and the “CANCEL” button  86   d - 1  or the “KAKUTEI” (OK) button  86   c - 1  and the “KYANSERU” (CANCEL) button  86   d - 1  to the menu screens  61 C- 1 ,  61 D- 1 , and  61 E- 1  as similar to the menu screens  61 F- 1  in  FIG. 97  and  FIG. 98 . 
     Moreover, it is not always necessary to use the order data outputted in step S 362 - 1  in the order processing shown in  FIG. 82B  or  FIG. 83B  of the above-described embodiments solely for the purpose of display in the default language (in English, for example) on the shop display  86   a - 1  of the shop server  86 - 1 . For example, it is also possible to use the data directly on the shop server  86 - 1  for other purposes including management of the ordered items. 
     Third and Fourth Embodiments 
       FIG. 101  is a flow chart showing a general process flow of game execution processing executed in a gaming system according to third and fourth embodiments of the present invention.  FIG. 102  is a perspective view showing a gaming terminal  4 - 2  provided in a plurality in the gaming system according to the third and fourth embodiments of the present invention.  FIG. 108  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the gaming system. Hereinafter, the general process flow in the gaming system according to the present invention will be explained with reference to the drawings. 
     A terminal CPU  91 - 2  shown in  FIG. 108  confirms a player&#39;s language on a gaming terminal  4 - 2  through a player&#39;s input operation or an after-mentioned conversation engine (step S 1 - 2  in  FIG. 101 ). A recognition processing of language will be explained later. 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  configures a conversation database  1500 - 2  corresponding to the language confirmed in the process of step S 1 - 2  among a conversation database  1500 - 2  (see  FIG. 109 ) stored in a hard disc drive (HDD)  34 - 2  of a server  13 - 2  shown in  FIG. 106  and corresponding to plural languages (step S 2 - 2 ). For example, if the player&#39;s language is “Japanese”, a conversation database  1500 - 2  corresponding to “Japanese” is configured. 
     The terminal CPU  91 - 2  configures a translating program corresponding to the language confirmed in the process of step S 1 - 2  from translating programs which are stored in the HDD  34 - 2  of the server  13 - 2  shown in  FIG. 106  and correspond to plural languages (step S 3 - 2 ). For example, if the player&#39;s language is “Japanese”, a “Japanese-English” translating program is configured. 
     Subsequently, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  executes a roulette game with conducting a conversation with the player using a conversation engine (step S 4 - 2 ). 
     In a conversational processing during a roulette game execution, an utterance input into a microphone  15 - 2  of the gaming terminal  4 - 2  is analyzed (step S 4   a - 2 ). Then, a reply to the utterance is generated by the conversation engine and the generated reply is output as sound from a speaker  10 - 2  (step S 4   b - 2 ). 
     For example, if the player makes an utterance “Tell me how to place a bet. (in Japanese)” into the microphone  15 - 2 , the conversation engine analyzes the utterance using the Japanese conversation database and outputs a reply “Please insert medals into a medal insertion slot or press bet buttons.” from the speaker  10 - 2  in Japanese. Since the terminal CPU  91 - 2  outputs the reply in the player&#39;s language, the player can easily understand a message output from the gaming terminal  4 - 2 . 
     In addition, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  read out history information stored in a smart card had been inserted in a card reader  16 - 2  shown in  FIG. 102  to confirm the history information (step S 5 - 2 ). The history information includes, for example, information on a restaurant(s) previously visited by the player, information on a souvenir(s) previously purchased by the player and so on. 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  sends the confirmed history information to the server  13 - 2  (step S 6 - 2 ). 
     And then, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  determines whether or not a message sent from the server  13 - 2  has been received (step S 7 - 2 ). If the message has been received, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  translates this message into the player&#39;s language (for example, Japanese) using the translating program (step S 8 - 2 ). For example, if a message “We are pleased to announce that we have this year&#39;s Beaujolais Nouveau in stock now. We are looking forward to your order.” has been received, this message is translated into Japanese. 
     Then, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  displays the translated message on a display  8 - 2  to notify the player of it (step S 9 - 2 ). In addition, the message is converted into a sound signal by the conversation engine and is output from the speaker  10 - 2 . 
     Therefore, a message(s) suitable for each player can be provided to the gaming terminals  4 - 2 . In addition, since the massage(s) sent to each of the gaming terminals  4 - 2  is translated to the player&#39;s language to be output as sounds or images, the player can recognize the message contents with ease. 
     Third Embodiment 
     Next, a gaming system in the embodiments according to the present invention will be explained in detail.  FIG. 102  is a perspective view showing a gaming terminal in the third embodiment according to the present invention.  FIG. 103  is an apparent perspective view showing a general configuration of a roulette game machine  1 - 2  including the gaming terminal shown in  FIG. 102 , which is an example of the gaming system of the embodiment according to the present invention.  FIG. 104  is a plan view of a roulette unit  2 - 2  provided in the roulette game machine  1 - 2 .  FIG. 105  is a screen image example displayed on a display of the gaming terminal shown in  FIG. 102 . 
     Plural (nine in the drawing) gaming terminals  4 - 2  in the third embodiment shown in  FIG. 102  are provided as parts of the roulette game machine  1 - 2  shown in  FIG. 103 . In addition, the roulette game machine  1 - 2  includes the roulette unit  2 - 2  and a server (host server)  13 - 2 . Each of the gaming terminals  4 - 2 , the roulette unit  2 - 2  and the server  13 - 2  can be connected each other via a local network and so on. 
     At the roulette unit  2 - 2 , the roulette game will be executed under the control of the server  13 - 2 , and the game can be visible by players. Players use the gaming terminals  4 - 2  which are arranged around the roulette unit  2 - 2  to participate in a roulette game displayed by the roulette unit  2 - 2 . In the present embodiment, the roulette game machine  1 - 2  includes the nine gaming terminals  4 - 2 . Therefore, up to nine players can participate in a communal roulette game simultaneously. 
     A roulette game displayed on the roulette unit  2 - 2  is executed repeatedly at prescribed time intervals under the control of the server  13 - 2 . Accordingly, a player who participates in a game play with each of the gaming terminals  4 - 2  can place a bet for a current roulette game. A display  8 - 2  is provided at each of the gaming terminals  4 - 2  for placing the bet on the current roulette game. A betting screen  61 - 2  (see  FIG. 105 ) for betting on a roulette game is displayed on the display  8 - 2 . Displayed contents on the betting screen  61 - 2  will be explained later in detail. 
       FIG. 104  is a plan view of the roulette unit provided in the roulette game machine shown in  FIG. 103 . As shown in  FIG. 104 , the roulette unit  2 - 2  includes a frame  21 - 2  and a roulette wheel  22 - 2  which is accommodated and supported rotatably inside the frame  21 - 2 . Plural number pockets  23 - 2  (thirty-eight in total in the present embodiment) are formed on an upper surface of the roulette wheel  22 - 2 . In addition, number plates  25 - 2  are provided on an upper surface of the roulette wheel  22 - 2  outside the number pockets  23 - 2  for displaying numbers “0”, “00” and “1” to “36” in correspondence to the respective number pockets  23 - 2 . 
     A ball launching port  36 - 2  is provided inside the frame  21 - 2 . A ball launching unit  104 - 2  (see  FIG. 107 ) is coupled with the ball launching port  36 - 2 . With driving the ball launching unit  104 - 2 , a ball  27 - 2  is launched from the ball launching port  36 - 2  onto the roulette wheel  22 - 2 . In addition, the entire roulette unit  2 - 2  is covered by a hemispherical transparent acrylic cover  28 - 2  (see  FIG. 103 ) covers over. 
     A wheel drive motor  106 - 2  (see  FIG. 107 ) is provided beneath the roulette wheel  22 - 2 . As the wheel drive motor  106 - 2  is driven, the roulette wheel  22 - 2  spins. Metal plates (not shown) are attached on a back surface of the roulette wheel  22 - 2  with space apart each other at prescribed intervals. A proximity sensor of a pocket position detecting circuit  107 - 2  (see  FIG. 107 ) detects these metal plates to detect the positions of the number pockets  23 - 2 . 
     The frame  21 - 2  is moderately inclined toward its inner side and the guide wall  29 - 2  is formed around an intermediate circumference of the frame  21 - 2 . The guide wall  29 - 2  guides the launched ball  27 - 2  to spin with counterworking a centrifugal force of the ball  27 - 2 . The ball  27 - 2 , as its velocity slows down, loses its centrifugal force and rolls down on the inclined surface of the frame  21 - 2 . And then, the ball  27 - 2  reaches the spinning roulette wheel  22 - 2  and gets across the number plates  25 - 2 . The ball  27 - 2  falls into one of the number pockets  23 - 2 . As a result, the number of the number plate  25 - 2  corresponding to the number pocket  23 - 2  into which the ball  27 - 2  has fallen, is detected by a ball sensor  105 - 2  and determined as a winning number. 
     Next, the configuration of the gaming terminal  4 - 2  will be explained. 
     As shown in  FIG. 102 , the gaming terminal  4 - 2  includes at least a medal insertion slot  7 - 2  for inserting game media having currency values such as cash, chips, medals and so on, and the above-mentioned display  8 - 2  for displaying images related to the game on its upper surface. The gaming terminal  4 - 2  accepts a player&#39;s betting operation via the medal insertion slot  7 - 2  and the display  8 - 2 . A player can advance a displayed game by operating a touchscreen  50 - 2  (see  FIGS. 102 and 108 ) provided on an upper surface of the display  8 - 2  and so on while watching the images displayed on the display  8 - 2 . Note that, in the following explanation, the game media may be referred as their representative “medals”. 
     In addition to the medal insertion slot  7 - 2  and the display  8 - 2  described above, a payout button  5 - 2 , a ticket printer  6 - 2 , a bill insertion slot  9 - 2 , a speaker  10 - 2 , a microphone  15 - 2  and a card reader  16 - 2  are provided on the upper surface of the gaming terminal  4 - 2 . A medal payout chute  12 - 2  and a medal tray  14 - 2  are provided on a front face of the gaming terminal  4 - 2 . 
     The payout button  5 - 2  is a button for inputting a command for paying out credited medals from the medal payout chute  12 - 2  onto the medal tray  14 - 2 . The ticket printer  6 - 2  prints out a bar code ticket including the data such as the credits, the date, and the identification number of the gaming terminal  4 - 2 . A player can use the bar code ticket at another gaming terminal  4 - 2  to place a bet on a game at that gaming terminal  4 - 2  or can exchange the bar code ticket to bills and so on at a prescribed location in a gaming facility (for example, a cashier in a casino). 
     The bill insertion slot  9 - 2  judges the legitimacy of bills and accepts legitimate bills. The speaker  10 - 2  outputs music, effect sounds, sound messages for a player and so on. The microphone  15 - 2  collects sound messages uttered by a player. 
     A smart card can be inserted into the card reader  16 - 2 . The card reader  16 - 2  reads data from the inserted smart card and writes data into the inserted card. The smart card is carried by a player and corresponds to the player&#39;s member&#39;s card, credit card or the like. 
     A smart card stores data about playing history played by a player (history information) together with data for identifying the player. Information on game kinds played, points provided in played games, language kind used by the player in game plays and so on are included in the history data. 
     Furthermore, data equivalent to coins, bills or credits are stored in a smart card and items can be purchased with the smart card. In addition, information such as a restaurant(s) previously visited, a beverage(s) previously ordered, a purchased souvenir(s) and so on can be stored in the smart card in addition to information on the game plays. 
     Read-from/write-into method with a smart card may employ contact type or non-contact type (RFID type). Alternatively, a magnetic stripe card may be employed. 
     In addition, since a smart card is inserted into the card reader  16 - 2  when a player participates in a game at the gaming terminal  4 - 2 , it can be detected whether or not a player is at the gaming terminal by detecting whether or not a smart card has been inserted in the card reader  16 - 2 . In other words, the card reader  16 - 2  functions as a detecting sensor to detect a presence of a player. 
     In addition, in respect to the detecting sensor, it may be possible to detect a presence of a player based on data detected by a pressure sensor provided on a seat on which a player sits or images captured by a camera provided at the gaming terminal  4 - 2 . 
     A WIN lamp  11 - 2  is provided on an upper portion of the display  8 - 2  of each gaming terminal  4 - 2 . In the case where the number (“0”, “00” and “1” to “36” in the present embodiment) on which a bet has been placed at the gaming terminal  4 - 2  in a game comes to a winning number, the WIN lamp  11 - 2  of the winning gaming terminal  4 - 2  will be turned on. In addition, in the jackpot (referred hereafter also as JP) bonus game for awarding JP, the WIN lamp  11 - 2  of the JP winning gaming terminal  4 - 2  will be turned on similarly. Note that the WIN lamp  11 - 2  is provided at a position that is visible from all of the arranged gaming terminals  4 - 2  (nine in the present embodiment) so that other players playing at the same roulette game machine  1 - 2  can always check turning-on of the WIN lamp  11 - 2 . 
     A medal sensor  97 - 2  (see  FIG. 108 ) is provided inside the medal insertion slot  7 - 2 . The medal sensor  97 - 2  identifies medals inserted into the medal insertion slot  7 - 2  and counts the inserted medals. In addition, a hopper  94 - 2  (see  FIG. 108 ) is provided inside the medal payout chute  12 - 2 . The hopper  94 - 2  payouts a prescribed number of medals from the medal payout chute  12 - 2 . 
       FIG. 105  is a diagram showing a screen image example displayed on the display  8 - 2 . A betting screen  61 - 2  shown in  FIG. 105  is displayed on the display  8 - 2  on each of the gaming terminals  4 - 2 . The betting screen  61 - 2  includes a table-type betting board  60 - 2 . A player can place a bet by operating a touchscreen  50 - 2  (see  FIG. 108 ) provided on a front surface of the display  8 - 2 , by using own chips, which are credited as an electronic data in the gaming terminal  4 - 2 . 
     Specifically, a player pointed out a bet area  72 - 2  (in a section of a number or a section of a number&#39;s mark, or on a grid line(s)) to place a chip for betting by a cursor  70 - 2 . Then, a bet chip amount is set by bet buttons  66 - 2  and the bet chip amount is fixed by a bet fixing button  65 - 2 . These setting and fixing are executed by player&#39;s fingers directly touching on the bet areas  72 - 2 , the bet buttons  66 - 2  and bet fixing button  65 - 2  displayed on the display  8 - 2 . 
     Note that the bet buttons  66 - 2  are provided with four kinds of buttons, a one-bet button  66 A- 2 , a five-bet button  66 B- 2 , a ten-bet button  66 C- 2  and a one-hundred-bet button  66 D- 2  for a bet chip amount capable of being placed by one operation. 
     A payout counter  67 - 2  displays a player&#39;s bet chip amount and a payout credits amount for a payout in the last game. In addition, a credit counter  68 - 2  displays the current credits owned by a player. Furthermore, a bet time counter  69 - 2  displays remaining time in which a player can place a bet. 
     Note that the next game starts at the time when the ball  27 - 2  launched onto the roulette wheel  27 - 2  fell into any one of the number pockets  23 - 2  and the current game has ended. 
     A MEGA counter  73 - 2  displaying a credit amount accumulated for a “MEGA” JP, a MAJOR counter  74 - 2  displaying a credit amount accumulated for a “MAJOR” JP and a MINI counter  75 - 2  displaying the number of credits accumulated for a “MINI” JP are provided at the right side of the bet time counter  69 - 2 . If any one of the JP&#39;s is won in a JP bonus game, a credit amount is awarded according to the winning JP among the JP&#39;s displayed on the counters  73 - 2  to  75 - 2  and then an initial value (200 credits for “MINI”, 5000 credits for “MAJOR” and 50000 credits for “MEGA”) is displayed the corresponding counter. 
     In addition, a display area  61 A- 2  is provided on a lower-left corner on the betting screen  61 - 2 . A message(s) to the player is displayed in the display area  61 A- 2 . Details will be explained later. 
       FIG. 106  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the roulette game machine  1 - 2  according to the present embodiment. As shown in  FIG. 106 , the roulette game machine  1 - 2  is configured with the server  13 - 2 , the roulette unit  2 - 2  connected to the server  13 - 2  via the local network and the plural gaming terminals  4 - 2  (nine in the present embodiment). Note that an internal configuration of the roulette unit  2 - 2  and an internal configuration of the gaming terminals  4 - 2  will be described later in detail. 
     The server  13 - 2  shown in  FIG. 106  includes a server CPU  81 - 2  for executing the overall control of the server  13 - 2 , a ROM  82 - 2 , a RAM  83 - 2 , a timer  84 - 2 , an LCD (liquid crystal display)  32 - 2  connected via an LCD driving circuit  85 - 2 , a touchscreen  32 A- 2  provided on a surface of the LCD  32 - 2 , a keyboard  33 - 2 , the HDD  34 - 2  and a microphone  35 - 2  into which a user&#39;s voices is input. 
     The server CPU  81 - 2  executes various processings according to input signals supplied from the gaming terminals  4 - 2  and data and programs stored in the ROM  82 - 2  and the RAM  83 - 2 . In addition, the server CPU  81 - 2  sends command signals to the gaming terminals  4 - 2  according to the processing results to control the gaming terminals  4 - 2  under its initiative. Specifically, the server CPU  81 - 2  transmits control signals to the roulette device  2 - 1  to control launching of the ball  27 - 2  and spinning of the roulette wheel  22 - 2 . 
     The ROM  82 - 2  is configured by a semiconductor memory or the like and stores programs which implement basic functions of the roulette game machine  1 - 2 , programs which execute notification of maintenance time and setting/management of notification condition, odds data of a roulette game (payout credits per one chip at winning), programs for controlling the gaming terminals  4 - 2  under their initiatives and so on. 
     In addition, the RAM  83 - 2  temporarily stores a chip-betting information supplied from each of the gaming terminals  4 - 2 , a winning number of the roulette unit  2 - 2  detected by the sensor, an accumulated JP credits, data on results of processings executed by the server CPU  81 - 2  and so on. Furthermore, the RAM  83 - 2  stores a message(s) which is input via the keyboard  33 - 2  or the microphone and then sent to the gaming terminals  4 - 2 . 
     Furthermore, the timer  84 - 2  for counting time is connected to the server CPU  81 - 2 . Time information of the timer  84 - 2  is transmitted to the server CPU  81 - 2 . The server CPU  81 - 2  executes controls of spinning the roulette wheel  22 - 2  and launching the ball  27 - 2  based on the time information of the timer  84 - 2 . It is obvious from the above description that the server controller of the present invention is configured by the server CPU  81 - 2 . 
     The HDD  34 - 2  stores translating programs between English, which is set as a reference language, and various other languages. For example, plural translating programs are stored such as a “Japanese-English” translating program, a “Chinese-English” translating program or a “French-English” translating program. Note that, although an example case is explained in the present embodiment where “English” is represented as the reference language, the reference language is not limited to English but may be any other language. 
     Furthermore, the HDD  34 - 2  stores conversation data to be used in the conversation engine explained later. In other words, the HDD  34 - 2  includes a function as the conversation database  1500 - 2  shown in  FIG. 109 . The conversation database stores conversation data used at generating a reply to a player by the conversation engine and is provided for each of the plural languages. For example, a conversation database for English, a conversation database for Japanese, a conversation database for Chinese and so on are provided. 
       FIG. 107  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the roulette unit  2 - 2  according to the present embodiment. As shown in  FIG. 107 , the roulette unit  2 - 2  includes a controller  109 - 2 , the pocket position detecting circuit  107 - 2 , the ball launching unit  104 - 2 , the ball sensor  105 - 2 , the wheel drive motor  106 - 2  and a ball collecting device  108 - 2 . 
     The controller  109 - 2  includes a CPU  101 - 2 , a ROM  102 - 2  and a RAM  103 - 2 . The CPU  101 - 2  controls launching the ball  27 - 2  and spinning the roulette wheel  22 - 2  based on control commands supplied from the server  13 - 2  and data and programs stored in the ROM  102 - 2  and the RAM  103 - 2 . 
     The pocket position detecting circuit  107 - 2  includes the proximity sensor to detect spinning position of the roulette wheel  22 - 2  by detecting the metal plates attached onto the roulette wheel  22 - 2 . 
     The ball launching unit  104 - 2  is a unit for launching the ball  27 - 2  onto the roulette wheel  22 - 2  from the ball launching port  36 - 2  (see  FIG. 104 ). The ball launching unit  104 - 2  launches the ball  27 - 2  at the initial speed and the timing set in a control data. 
     The ball sensor  105 - 2  is a unit for detecting the number pocket  23 - 2  into which the ball  27 - 2  has fallen. The wheel drive motor  106 - 2  is a unit for spinning the roulette wheel  22 - 2  and it stops its spinning when a motor driving time set in the control data has elapsed since a start of the driving. 
       FIG. 108  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the gaming terminal according to the present embodiment. Note that each of the nine gaming terminals  4 - 2  has an identical configuration basically and one of the gaming terminals  4 - 2  will be explained as the representative hereinafter. 
     As shown in  FIG. 108 , the gaming terminal  4 - 2  includes a terminal controller  90 - 2  configured by a terminal CPU  91 - 2 , a ROM  92 - 2  and a RAM  93 - 2 . The ROM  92 - 2  is configured by a semiconductor memory or the like. The ROM  92 - 2  stores programs which implement basic functions of the gaming terminal  4 - 2 , various programs which are necessary for controlling the gaming terminal  4 - 2 , data tables and so on. In addition, the RAM  93 - 2  is a memory for temporarily storing various data calculated by the terminal CPU  91 - 2 , a credit amount currently owned by the player (deposited at the gaming terminal  4 - 2 ), a player&#39;s betting status, a flag F for indicating whether or not during the betting period and so on. 
     A payout button  5 - 2  (see  FIG. 102 ) is connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 2 . The payout button  5 - 2  is a button to be pressed by a player usually when the game is over. Medals will be paid out from the medal payout chute  12 - 2  according to credits which have been provided in games and currently owned by the player (usually one medal for one credit) when the payout button  5 - 2  is pressed by the player. 
     In addition, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  receives command signals from the sever CPU  81 - 2  and controls peripheral devices constituting the gaming terminal  4 - 2 , so as to proceed with the game at the gaming terminal  4 - 2 . Furthermore, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  executes various processings according to the above-mentioned input signals and data and programs stored in the ROM  92 - 2  and the RAM  93 - 2  depending on the processing contents. The terminal CPU  91 - 2  controls the peripheral devices constituting the gaming terminal  4 - 2  according to the processing results, so as to proceed with the game. 
     In addition, the hopper  94 - 2  is connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 2 . The hopper  94 - 2  payouts a prescribed number of medals from the medal payout chute  12 - 2  (see  FIG. 103 ) according to a command signal from the terminal CPU  91 - 2 . 
     Furthermore, the display  8 - 2  is connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 2  via an LCD drive circuit  95 - 2 . The LCD drive circuit  95 - 2  includes a program ROM, an image ROM, an image control CPU, a work RAM, a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a video RAM. The program ROM stores image control programs and various selection tables for displaying on the display  8 - 2 . The image ROM stores dot data for forming images to be displayed on the display  8 - 2 , for example. The image control CPU determines images to be displayed on the display  8 - 2  among the dot data in the image ROM according to the image control programs stored in the program ROM based on parameters set up in the terminal CPU  91 - 2 . The work RAM is provided as a temporary memory unit during an execution of the image control programs by the image control CPU. The VDP forms screen images according to the display contents determined by the image control CPU and outputs them to the display  8 - 2 . Note that the video RAM is provided as a temporary memory unit during the VDP forming screen images. 
     In addition, the touchscreen  50 - 2  is attached on the front surface of the display  8 - 2 . Information of a player&#39;s operation onto the touchscreen  50 - 2  is sent to the terminal CPU  91 - 2 . A player&#39;s chip-betting operation is done via the bet screen  61 - 2  (see  FIG. 105 ) on the touchscreen  50 - 2 . Specifically, the player&#39;s operation onto the touchscreen  50 - 2  is done for the selection of the bet area  72 - 2 , the input via the bet buttons  66 - 2  and the bet fixing button  65 - 2  and so on. The information of a player&#39;s operation is sent to the terminal CPU  91 - 2  when the touchscreen  50 - 2  has been operated. Then, the player&#39;s current betting information (the bet area and the bet amount placed via the bet screen  61 - 2 ) is stored into the RAM  93 - 2  sequentially according to that information. Furthermore, this betting information is sent to the server CPU  81 - 2  and stored in a betting information storing area in the RAM  83 - 2 . 
     In addition, a sound output circuit  96 - 2  and the speaker  10 - 2  are connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 2 . The speaker  10 - 2  outputs various effect sounds when various effects are generated and interactive conversation messages to a player for proceeding a game interactively based on output signals from the sound output circuit  96 - 2 . 
     In addition, a sound input circuit  98 - 2  and the microphone  15 - 2  are connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 2 . The microphone  15 - 2  transmits player&#39;s reply message sound in response to interactive message sound output from the speaker  10 - 2  to the terminal CPU  91 - 2  via the sound input circuit  98 - 2 . 
     Furthermore, a second external storage unit  76 - 2  is connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 2 . A conversation database of a language (Japanese, for example) of a player who is playing at the gaming terminal  4 - 2  is downloaded to the second external storage unit  76 - 2 . Additionally, a translating program between the player&#39;s language and the reference language, i.e. English, is downloaded. The second external storage unit  76 - 2  is configured by an HDD unit. Its details will be described later. 
     In addition, the medal sensor  97 - 2  is connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 2 . The medal sensor  97 - 2  detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot  7 - 2  (see  FIG. 103 ) and counts the inserted medals to send the counting result data to the terminal CPU  91 - 2 . The terminal CPU  91 - 2  increases the player&#39;s credit amount stored in the RAM  93 - 2  according to the data. 
     Furthermore, the WIN lamp  11 - 2  is connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 2 . The terminal CPU  91 - 2  lights up the WIN lamp  11 - 2  in a prescribed color when credits bet via the bet screen  61 - 2  has won or when a JP winning has been awarded. 
     In addition, a first external storage unit  99 - 2  is connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 2 . The first external storage unit  99 - 2  is configured by an HDD unit. The terminal CPU  91 - 2  reads/writes data from/to the first external storage unit  99 - 2  if needed. 
     The gaming terminal  4 - 2  having the terminal control unit  90 - 2  includes the conversation engine. At least some of the roulette game procedures on the gaming terminal  4 - 2  are executed by the conversation engine interactively with the player by using the display  8 - 2 , the speaker  10 - 2  and the microphone  15 - 2  as interfaces. Therefore, message sound for the player is output from the speaker  10 - 2  via the sound output circuit  96 - 2  in certain situations according to the roulette game procedures. In addition, contents of player&#39;s message sound input via the microphone  15 - 2  and the sound input circuit  98 - 2  are construed. 
     Such a conversation engine can be realized using a conversation controller described in, for example, United States patent application publication 2007/0094007, United States patent application publication 2007/0094008, United States patent application publication 2007/0094005 or United States patent application publication 2005/0094004. As will be explained hereinafter, such a conversation controller can be realized using the display  8 - 2 , the speaker  10 - 2 , the microphone  15 - 2 , the terminal controller  90 - 2  and the first external storage unit  99 - 2  of the gaming terminal  4 - 2 . 
     Here, a configuration of the conversation controller described in United States patent application publication 2007/0094007, which can be applied as the conversation engine installed in the gaming terminal  4 - 2  of the present embodiment, will be explained with reference to  FIGS. 109 to 130 .  FIG. 109  is a functional block diagram showing a configuration example of the conversation controller. 
     As shown in  FIG. 109 , the conversation controller  1000 - 2  comprises an input unit  1100 - 2 , a speech recognition unit  1200 - 2 , a conversation control unit  1300 - 2 , a sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 2 , a conversation database  1500 - 2 , an output unit  1600 - 2  and a speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 2 . 
     [Input Unit] 
     The input unit  1100 - 2  receives input information (user&#39;s utterance) input by a user. The input unit  1100 - 2  outputs a speech corresponding to contents of the received utterance as a voice signal to the speech recognition unit  1200 - 2 . Note that the input unit  1100 - 2  may be a character input unit such as a keyboard and a touchscreen. In this case, the after-mentioned speech recognition unit  1200 - 2  doesn&#39;t need to be provided. 
     [Speech Recognition Unit] 
     The speech recognition unit  1200 - 2  specifies a character string corresponding to the uttered contents based on the uttered contents obtained via the input unit  1100 - 2 . Specifically, the speech recognition unit  1200 - 2  that has received the voice signal from the input unit  1100 - 2  compares the received voice signal with the conversation database  1500 - 2  and dictionaries stored in the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 2  based on the voice signal to output a speech recognition result estimated based on the voice signal to the conversation control unit  1300 - 2 . In a configuration example shown in  FIG. 109 , the speech recognition unit  1200 - 2  requests acquisition of memory contents of the conversation database  1500 - 2  to the conversation control unit  1300 - 2  and then receives the memory contents of the conversation database  1500 - 2  which the conversation control unit  1300 - 2  retrieves according to the request from the speech recognition unit  1200 - 2 . However the speech recognition unit  1200 - 2  may directly retrieves the memory contents of the conversation database  1500 - 2  for comparing with the voice signal. 
     Configuration Example of Speech Recognition Unit 
       FIG. 110  is a functional block diagram showing a configuration example of the speech recognition unit  1200 - 2 . The speech recognition unit  1200 - 2  includes a feature extraction unit  1200 A- 2 , a buffer memory (BM)  1200 B- 2 , a word retrieving unit  1200 C- 2 , a buffer memory (BM)  1200 D- 2 , a candidate determination unit  1200 E- 2  and a word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 2 . The word retrieving unit  1200 C- 2  and the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 2  are connected to the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 2 . In addition, the candidate determination unit  1200 E- 2  is connected to the conversation database  1500 - 2  via the conversation control unit  1300 - 2 . 
     The speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 2  connected to the word retrieving unit  1200 C- 2  stores a phoneme hidden Markov model (hereinafter, the hidden Markov model is referred as the HMM). The phoneme HMM is described with various states and each of the states includes the following information. It is configured with (a) a state number, (b) an acceptable context class, (c) lists of a previous state and a subsequent state, (d) parameters of an output probability density distribution, and (e) a self-transition probability and a transition probability to a subsequent state. The phoneme HMM used in the present embodiment is generated by converting a prescribed Speaker-Mixture HMM in order to specify which speakers respective distributions are derived from. An output probability density function is a Mixture Gaussian distribution with a 34-dimensional diagonal covariance matrix. The speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 2  connected to the word retrieving unit  1200 C- 2  further stores a word dictionary. The word dictionary stores symbol strings each of which indicates a reading represented as a symbol per each word in the phoneme HMM. 
     A speaker&#39;s speech is input into a microphone or the like and then converted into a voice signal to be input to the feature extraction unit  1200 A- 2 . The feature extraction unit  1200 A- 2  converts the input voice signal from analog to digital and then extracts a feature parameter from the voice signal to output the feature parameter. There are various methods for extracting and outputting the feature parameter. For example, an LPC analysis is executed to extract a 34-dimensional feature parameter including a logarithm power, a 16-dimensional cepstrum coefficient, a Δ-logarithm power and a 16-dimensional Δ-cepstrum coefficient. The time series of the extracted feature parameters are input to the word retrieving unit  1200 C- 2  via the buffer memory (BM)  1200 B- 2 . 
     The word retrieving unit  1200 C- 2  retrieves word hypotheses with a one-pass Viterbi decoding method based on the feature parameters input from the feature extraction unit  1200 A- 2  via the buffer memory (BM)  1200 B- 2  by using the phoneme HMM and the word dictionary stored in the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 2 , and then calculates likelihoods. Here, the word retrieving unit  1200 C- 2  calculates a likelihood in a word and a likelihood from a speech start for each state of the phoneme HMM at each time. The likelihood is calculated each of an identification number of a calculating-object word, a speech start time of the word and a difference of a preceding word previously uttered before the word. The word retrieving unit  1200 C- 2  may reduce grid hypotheses of the lower likelihoods among all of the calculated likelihoods based on the phoneme HMM and the word dictionary in order to reduce a computing throughput. The word retrieving unit  1200 C- 2  outputs information on the retrieved word hypotheses and the likelihoods of the retrieved word hypotheses together with time information regarding an elapsed time from the speech start time (e.g. frame number) to the candidate determination unit  1200 E- 2  and the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 2  via the buffer memory (BM)  1200 D- 2 . 
     The candidate determination unit  1200 E- 2  compares the retrieved word hypotheses with topic specification information in a prescribed discourse space with reference to the conversation control unit  1300 - 2 , and then determines whether or not exists a coincident word hypothesis with the topic specification information in the prescribed discourse space among the retrieved word hypotheses. If the coincident word hypothesis exists, the candidate determination unit  1200 E- 2  outputs the coincident word hypothesis as a recognition result. On the other hand, if no coincident word hypothesis exists, the candidate determination unit  1200 E- 2  requires the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 2  to refine the retrieved word hypotheses. 
     An operation of the candidate determination unit  1200 E- 2  will be described. Here, it is assumed that the word retrieving unit  1200 C- 2  outputs plural word hypotheses (“KANTAKU (reclamation)”, “KATAKU (pretext)” and “KANTOKU (director)”) and plural likelihoods (recognition rates) for the respective word hypotheses; the prescribed discourse space relates to movies; the topic specification information of the prescribed discourse space includes “KANTOKU (director)” but neither “KANTAKU (reclamation)” nor “KATAKU (pretext)”; among the likelihoods (recognition rates) of “KANTAKU (reclamation)”, “KATAKU (pretext)” and “KANTOKU (director)”, “KANTAKU (reclamation)” is highest, “KANTOKU (director)” is lowest and “KATAKU (pretext)” is intermediate between the two. 
     In the above situation, the candidate determination unit  1200 E- 2  compares the retrieved word hypotheses with the topic specification information in the prescribed discourse space, and then specifies the coincident word hypothesis “KANTOKU (director)” with the topic specification information to output the word hypothesis “KANTOKU (director)” to the conversation control unit  1300 - 2  as the recognition result. Processed in this manner, the word hypothesis “KANTOKU (director)” relating to the current topic “movies” is selected ahead of the word hypotheses “KANTAKU (reclamation)” and “KATAKU (pretext)” with higher likelihoods. As a result, the recognition result appropriate with the discourse context can be output. 
     On the other hand, if no coincident word hypothesis exists, the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 2  operates to output the recognition result in response to the request from the candidate determination unit  1200 E- 2  to refine the retrieved word hypotheses. The word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 2  refines the retrieved word hypotheses for the same words having the same speech termination time and different speech start time per each initial phonetic environment of the same words with reference to a statistical language model stored in the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 2  based on the plural retrieved word hypotheses output from the word retrieving unit  1200 C- 2  via the buffer memory (BM)  1200 D- 2  so that one word hypothesis with the highest likelihood may be selected as a representative among all of the likelihoods calculated between the speech start and the utterance termination of the word. And then, the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 2  outputs one word string of the one word hypothesis with the highest likelihood as the recognition result among all word strings of the refined word hypotheses. In the present embodiment, the initial phonetic environment of the same word to be processed is preferably defined with a three-phoneme series containing the last phoneme of the word hypothesis preceding the same word and two initial phonemes of the word hypothesis of the same word. 
     A word refinement process executed by the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 2  will be described with reference to  FIG. 111 . 
     For example, it is assumed that the (i)th word Wi, which consists of a phonemic string a 1 , a 2 , . . . and an, follows the (i−1)th word W(i−1) and six hypotheses Wa, Wb, We, Wd, We and Wf exist as a word hypothesis of the (i−1)th word W(i−1). It is further assumed that the last phoneme of the former three word hypotheses Wa, Wb and Wc is /x/, and the last phoneme of the latter three word hypotheses Wd, We and Wf is /y/. If three hypotheses each premised on three word hypotheses Wa, Wb and Wc and also one hypothesis premised on three word hypotheses Wd, We and Wf remain at the speech termination time te, the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 2  is selected one hypothesis with the highest likelihood among the former three hypotheses with the same initial phonetic environment, and other two hypotheses are excluded. 
     Note that, since the initial phonetic environment of the hypothesis premised on the word hypotheses Wd, We and Wf is different from those of the other three hypotheses, that is, the last phoneme of the preceded word hypothesis is not /x/ but /y/, the hypothesis premised on the word hypotheses Wd, We and Wf is not excluded. In other words, one hypothesis is kept for each of the last phonemes of the preceding word hypotheses. 
     In the present embodiment, the initial phonetic environment of the word is defined with a three-phoneme series containing the last phoneme of the word hypothesis preceding the word and two initial phonemes of the word hypothesis of the word. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The initial phonetic environment of the word may be defined with a phoneme series containing a phoneme string of the preceding word hypothesis including the last phoneme of the preceding word hypothesis and at least one serial phoneme with the last phoneme of the preceding word hypothesis and a phoneme string including the first phoneme of the word hypothesis of the word. 
     In the present embodiment, the feature extraction unit  1200 A- 2 , the word retrieving unit  1200 C- 2 , the candidate determination unit  1200 E- 2  and the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 2  are composed of a computer such as a microcomputer. The buffer memories (BMs)  200 B- 2  and  200 D- 2  and the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 2  are composed of a memory unit such as hard disc storage. 
     In the above-mentioned embodiment, the speech recognition is executed by using the word retrieving unit  1200 C- 2  and the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 2 . However, the present invention is not limited to this. The speech recognition unit  1200 - 2  may be composed of a phoneme comparison unit for referring to the phoneme HMM and a speech recognition unit for executing the speech recognition of a ward with reference to a statistical language model by using, for example, a One Pass DP algorithm. 
     In addition, in the present embodiment, the speech recognition unit  1200 - 2  is explained as a part of the conversation controller  1000 - 2 . However, an independent speech recognition apparatus configured by the speech recognition unit  1200 - 2 , the conversation database  1500 - 2  and the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 2  may be possibly employed. 
     Operating Example of Speech Recognition Unit 
     Next, operations of the speech recognition unit  1200 - 2  will be described with reference to  FIG. 112 .  FIG. 112  is a flow chart showing process operations of the speech recognition unit  1200 - 2 . 
     The speech recognition unit  1200 - 2  executes a feature analysis of the input speech to generate feature parameters on receiving the voice signal from the input unit  1100 - 2  (step S 401 - 2 ). Next, the feature parameters is compared with the phoneme HMM and the language model stored in the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 2 , and then a certain number of word hypotheses and the likelihoods of the word hypotheses are obtained (step S 402 - 2 ). Next, the speech recognition unit  1200 - 2  compares the obtained certain number of word hypotheses, the retrieved word hypotheses and the topic specification information in the prescribed discourse space to determine whether or not the coincident word hypothesis with the topic specification information in the prescribed discourse space exists among the retrieved word hypotheses (steps S 403 - 2  and S 404 - 2 ). If the coincident word hypothesis exists, the speech recognition unit  1200 - 2  outputs the coincident word hypothesis as the recognition result (step S 405 - 2 ). On the other hand, if no coincident word hypothesis exists, the speech recognition unit  1200 - 2  outputs the word hypothesis with the highest likelihood as the recognition result according to the obtained likelihoods of the word hypotheses (step S 406 - 2 ). 
     [Speech Recognition Dictionary Memory] 
     The configuration example of the conversation controller  1000 - 2  is further described with referring back to  FIG. 109  again. 
     The speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 2  stores character strings corresponding to standard voice signals. The speech recognition unit  1200 - 2 , which has executed the comparison, specifies a word hypothesis for a character string corresponding to the received voice signal, and then outputs the specified word hypothesis as a character string signal to the conversation control unit  1300 - 2 . 
     [Sentence Analyzing Unit] 
     Next, a configuration example of the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 2  will be described with reference to  FIG. 113 .  FIG. 113  is a partly enlarged block diagram of the conversation controller  1000 - 2  and also a block diagram showing a concrete configuration example of the conversation control unit  1300 - 2  and the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 2 . Note that only the conversation control unit  1300 - 2 , the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 2  and the conversation database  1500 - 2  are shown in  FIG. 113  and the other components are omitted to be shown. 
     The sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 2  analyses a character string specified at the input unit  1100 - 2  or the speech recognition unit  1200 - 2 . In the present embodiment as shown in  FIG. 113 , the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 2  includes a character string specifying unit  1410 - 2 , a morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 2 , a morpheme database  1430 - 2 , an input type determining unit  1440 - 2  and an utterance type database  1450 - 2 . The character string specifying unit  1410 - 2  segments a series of character strings specified by the input unit  1100 - 2  or the speech recognition unit  1200 - 2  into segments. Each segment is a minimum segmented sentence which is segmented in the extent to keep a grammatical meaning. Specifically, if the series of the character strings have a time interval more than a certain interval, the character string specifying unit  1410 - 2  segments the character strings there. The character string specifying unit  1410 - 2  outputs the segmented character strings to the morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 2  and the input type determining unit  1440 - 2 . Note that a “character string” to be described below means one segmented character string. 
     [Morpheme Extracting Unit] 
     The morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 2  extracts morphemes constituting minimum units of the character string as first morpheme information from each of the segmented character strings based on each of the segmented character strings segmented by the character string specifying unit  1410 - 2 . In the present embodiment, a morpheme means a minimum unit of a word structure shown in a character string. For example, each minimum unit of a word structure may be a word class such as a noun, an adjective and a verb. 
     In the present embodiment as shown in  FIG. 114 , the morphemes are indicated as m 1 , m 2 , m 3 , . . . .  FIG. 114  is a diagram showing a relation between a character string and morphemes extracted from the character string. The morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 2 , which has received the character strings from the character string specifying unit  1410 - 2 , compares the received character strings and morpheme groups previously stored in the morpheme database  1430 - 2  (each of the morpheme group is prepared as a morpheme dictionary in which a direction word, a reading, a word class and infected forms are described for each morpheme belonging to each word-class classification) as shown in  FIG. 114 . The morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 2 , which has executed the comparison, extracts coincident morphemes (m 1 , m 2 , . . . ) with any of the stored morpheme groups from the character strings. Other morphemes (n 1 , n 2 , n 3 , . . . ) than the extracted morphemes may be auxiliary verbs, for example. 
     The morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 2  outputs the extracted morphemes to a topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 2  as the first morpheme information. Note that the first morpheme information is not needed to be structurized. Here, “structurizing” means classifying and arranging morphemes included in a character string based on word classes. For example, it may be data conversion in which a character string as an uttered sentence is segmented into morphemes and then the morphemes are arranged in a prescribed order such as “Subject+Object+Predicate”. Needless to say, the structurized first morpheme information doesn&#39;t prevent the operations of the present embodiment. 
     [Input Type Determining Unit] 
     The input type determining unit  1440 - 2  determines an uttered contents type (utterance type) based on the character strings specified by the character string specifying unit  1410 - 2 . In the present embodiment, the utterance type is information for specifying the uttered contents type and, for example, corresponds to “uttered sentence type” shown in  FIG. 115 .  FIG. 115  is a table showing the “uttered sentence types”, two-alphabet codes representing the uttered sentence types, and uttered sentence examples corresponding to the uttered sentence types. 
     Here in the present embodiment as shown in  FIG. 115 , the “uttered sentence types” include declarative sentences (D: Declaration), time sentences (T: Time), locational sentences (L: Location), negational sentences (N: Negation) and so on. A sentence configured by each of these types is an affirmative sentence or an interrogative sentence. A “declarative sentence” means a sentence showing a user&#39;s opinion or notion. In the present embodiment, one example of the “declarative sentence” is the sentence “I like Sato” shown in  FIG. 115 . A “locational sentence” means a sentence involving a locational notion. A “time sentence” means a sentence involving a timelike notion. A “negational sentence” means a sentence to deny a declarative sentence. Sentence examples of the “uttered sentence types” are shown in  FIG. 115 . 
     In the present embodiment as shown in  FIG. 116 , the input type determining unit  1440 - 2  uses a declarative expression dictionary for determination of a declarative sentence, a negational expression dictionary for determination of a negational sentence and so on in order to determine the “uttered sentence type”. Specifically, the input type determining unit  1440 - 2 , which has received the character strings from the character string specifying unit  1410 - 2 , compares the received character strings and the dictionaries stored in the utterance type database  1450 - 2  based on the received character string. The input type determining unit  1440 - 2 , which has executed the comparison, extracts elements relevant to the dictionaries among the character strings. 
     The input type determining unit  1440 - 2  determines the “uttered sentence type” based on the extracted elements. For example, if the character string includes elements declaring an event, the input type determining unit  1440 - 2  determines that the character string including the elements is a declarative sentence. The input type determining unit  1440 - 2  outputs the determined “uttered sentence type” to a reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2 . 
     [Conversation Database] 
     A configuration example of data structure stored in the conversation database  1500 - 2  will be described with reference to  FIG. 117 .  FIG. 117  is a conceptual diagram showing the configuration example of data stored in the conversation database  1500 - 2 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 117 , the conversation database  1500 - 2  stores a plurality of topic specification information  810 - 2  for specifying a conversation topic. In addition, topic specification information  810 - 2  can be associated with other topic specification information  810 - 2 . For example, if topic specification information C ( 810 - 2 ) is specified, three of topic specification information A ( 810 - 2 ), B ( 810 - 2 ) and D ( 810 - 2 ) associated with the topic specification information C ( 810 - 2 ) are also specified. 
     Specifically in the present embodiment, topic specification information  810 - 2  means “keywords” which are relevant to input contents expected to be input from users or relevant to reply sentences to users. 
     The topic specification information  810 - 2  is associated with one or more topic titles  820 - 2 . Each of the topic titles  820 - 2  is configured with a morpheme composed of one character, plural character strings or a combination thereof. A reply sentence  830 - 2  to be output to users is stored in association with each of the topic titles  820 - 2 . Response types for indicating types of the reply sentences  830 - 2  are associated with the reply sentences  830 - 2 , respectively. 
     Next, an association between the topic specification information  810 - 2  and the other topic specification information  810 - 2  will be described.  FIG. 118  is a diagram showing the association between certain topic specification information  810 A- 2  and the other topic specification information  810 B- 2 ,  810 C 1 - 2 - 810 C 4 - 2  and  810 D 1 - 2 - 810 D 3 - 2  . . . . Note that a phrase “stored in association with” mentioned below indicates that, when certain information X is read out, information Y stored in association with the information X can be also read out. For example, a phrase “information Y is stored ‘in association with’ the information X” indicates a state where information for reading out the information Y (such as, a pointer indicating a storing address of the information Y, a physical memory address or a logical address in which the information Y is stored, and so on) is implemented in the information X. 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 118 , the topic specification information can be stored in association with the other topic specification information with respect to a superordinate concept, a subordinate concept, a synonym or an antonym (not shown in  FIG. 118 ). For example as shown in  FIG. 118 , the topic specification information  810 B- 2  (amusement) is stored in association with the topic specification information  810 A- 2  (movie) as a superordinate concept and stored in a higher level than the topic specification information  810 B- 2  (amusement). 
     In addition, subordinate concepts of the topic specification information  810 A- 2  (movie), the topic specification information  810 C 1 - 2  (director),  810 C 2 - 2  (starring actor/actress),  810 C 3 - 2  (distributor),  810 C 4 - 2  (runtime),  810 D 1 - 2  (“Seven Samurai”),  810 D 2 - 2  (“Ran”),  810 D 3 - 2  (“Yojimbo”), . . . , are stored in association with the topic specification information  810 A- 2 . 
     In addition, synonyms  900 - 2  are associated with the topic specification information  810 A- 2 . In this example, “work”, “contents” and “cinema” are stored as synonyms of “movie” which is a keyword of the topic specification information  810 A- 2 . By defining these synonyms in this manner, the topic specification information  810 A- 2  can be treated as included in an uttered sentence even though the uttered sentence doesn&#39;t include the keyword “movie” but includes “work”, “contents” or “cinema”. 
     In the conversation controller  1000 - 2  according to the present embodiment, when certain topic specification information  810 - 2  has been specified with reference to contents stored in the conversation database  1500 - 2 , other topic specification information  810 - 2  and the topic titles  820 - 2  or the reply sentences  830 - 2  of the other topic specification information  810 - 2 , which are stored in association with the certain topic specification information  810 - 2 , can be retrieved and extracted rapidly. 
     Next, data configuration examples of topic titles  820 - 2  (also referred as “second morpheme information”) will be described with reference to  FIG. 119 .  FIG. 119  is a diagram showing the data configuration examples of the topic titles  820 - 2 . 
     The topic specification information  810 D 1 - 2 ,  810 D 2 - 2 ,  810 D 3 - 2 , . . . , include the topic titles  820   1 - 2 ,  820   2 - 2 , . . . , the topic titles  820   3 - 2 ,  820   4 - 2 , . . . , the topic titles  820   5 - 2 ,  820   6 - 2 , . . . , respectively. In the present embodiment as shown in  FIG. 119 , each of the topic titles  820 - 2  is information composed of first specification information  1001 - 2 , second specification information  1002 - 2  and third specification information  1003 - 2 . Here, the first specification information  1001 - 2  is a main morpheme constituting a topic. For example, the first specification information  1001 - 2  may be a Subject of a sentence. In addition, the second specification information  1002 - 2  is a morpheme closely relevant to the first specification information  1001 - 2 . For example, the second specification information  1002 - 2  may be an Object. Furthermore, the third specification information  1003 - 2  in the present embodiment is a morpheme showing a movement of a certain subject, a morpheme of a noun modifier and so on. For example, the third specification information  1003 - 2  may be a verb, an adverb or an adjective. Note that the first specification information  1001 - 2 , the second specification information  1002 - 2  and the third specification information  1003 - 2  are not limited to the above meanings. The present embodiment can be effected in case where contents of a sentence can be understood based on the first specification information  1001 - 2 , the second specification information  1002 - 2  and the third specification information  1003 - 2  even though they are give other meanings (other ward classes). 
     For example as shown in  FIG. 119 , if the Subject is “Seven Samurai” and the adjective is “interesting”, the topic title  820   2 - 2  (second morpheme information) consists of the morpheme “Seven Samurai” included in the first specification information  1001 - 2  and the morpheme “interesting” included in the third specification information  1003 - 2 . Note that the second specification information  1002 - 2  of this topic title  820   2 - 2  includes no morpheme and a symbol “*” is stored in the second specification information  1002 - 2  for indicating no morpheme included. 
     Note that this topic title  820   2 - 2  (Seven Samurai; *; interesting) has the meaning of “Seven Samurai is interesting.” Hereinafter, parenthetic contents for a topic title  820   2 - 2  indicate the specification information  1001 - 2 , the second specification information  1002 - 2  and the third specification information  1003 - 2  from the left. In addition, when no morpheme is included in any of the first to third specification information, “*” is indicated therein. 
     Note that the specification information constituting the topic titles  820 - 2  is not limited to three and other specification information (fourth specification information and more) may be included. 
     Next, the reply sentences  830 - 2  will be described with reference to  FIG. 120 . In the present embodiment as shown in  FIG. 120 , the reply sentences  830 - 2  are classified into different types (response types) such as declaration (D: Declaration), time (T: Time), location (L: Location) and negation (N: Negation) for making a reply corresponding to the uttered sentence type of the user&#39;s utterance. Note that an affirmative sentence is classified with “A” and an interrogative sentence is classified with “Q”. 
     A configuration example of data structure of the topic specification information  810 - 2  will be described with reference to  FIG. 121 .  FIG. 121  shows a concrete example of the topic titles  820 - 2  and the reply sentences  830 - 2  associated with the topic specification information  810 - 2  “Sato”. 
     The topic specification information  810 - 2  “Sato” is associated with plural topic titles ( 820 - 2 )  1 - 1 ,  1 - 2 , . . . . Each of the topic titles ( 820 - 2 )  1 - 1 ,  1 - 2 , . . . is associated with reply sentences ( 830 - 2 )  1 - 1 ,  1 - 2 , . . . . The reply sentence  830 - 2  is prepared per each of the response types  840 - 2 . 
     For example, when the topic title ( 820 - 2 )  1 - 1  is (Sato; *; like) [these are extracted morphemes included in “I like Sato”], the reply sentences ( 830 - 2 )  1 - 1  associated with the topic title ( 820 - 2 )  1 - 1  include (DA: a declarative affirmative sentence “I like Sato, too.”) and (TA: a time affirmative sentence “I like Sato at bat.”). The after-mentioned reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2  retrieves one reply sentence  830 - 2  associated with the topic title  820 - 2  with reference to an output from the input type determining unit  1440 - 2 . 
     Next-plan designation information  840 - 2  is allocated to each of the reply sentences  830 - 2 . The next-plan designation information  840 - 2  is information for designating a reply sentence to be preferentially output against a user&#39;s utterance in association with the each of the reply sentences (referred as a “next-reply sentence”). The next-plan designation information  840 - 2  may be any information even if a next-reply sentence can be specified by the information. For example, the information may be a reply sentence ID, by which at least one reply sentence can be specified among all reply sentences stored in the conversation database  1500 - 2 . 
     In the present embodiment, the next-plan designation information  840 - 2  is described as information for specifying one next-reply sentence per one reply sentence (for example, a reply sentence ID). However, the next-plan designation information  840 - 2  may be information for specifying next-reply sentences per topic specification information  810 - 2  or per one topic title  820 - 2 . (In this case, since plural replay sentences are designated, they are referred as a “next-reply sentence group”. However, only one of the reply sentences included in the next-reply sentence group will be actually output as the reply sentence.) For example, the present embodiment can be effected in case where a topic title ID or a topic specification information ID is used as the next-plan designation information. 
     [Conversation Control Unit] 
     A configuration example of the conversation control unit  1300 - 2  is further described with referring back to  FIG. 113 . 
     The conversation control unit  1300 - 2  functions to control data transmitting between configuration components in the conversation controller  1000 - 2  (the speech recognition unit  1200 - 2 , the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 2 , the conversation database  1500 - 2 , the output unit  1600 - 2  and the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 2 ), and determine and output a reply sentence in response to a user&#39;s utterance. 
     In the present embodiment shown in  FIG. 113 , the conversation control unit  1300 - 2  includes a managing unit  1310 - 2 , a plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2 , a discourse space conversation control process unit  1330 - 2  and a CA conversation process unit  1340 - 2 . Hereinafter, these configuration components will be described. 
     [Managing Unit] 
     The managing unit  1310 - 2  functions to store discourse histories and update, if needed, the discourse histories. The managing unit  1310 - 2  further functions to transmit some or entire of the stored discourse histories to a part or a whole of the discourse histories to a topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 2 , an elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2 , a topic retrieval unit  1370 - 2  or a reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2  in response to a request therefrom. 
     [Plan Conversation Process Unit] 
     The plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  functions to execute plans and establish conversations between a user and the conversation controller  1000 - 2  according to the plans. A “plan” means providing a predetermined reply to a user in a predetermined order. 
     The plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  functions to output the predetermined reply in the predetermined order in response to a user&#39;s utterance. 
       FIG. 122  is a conceptual diagram to describe plans. As shown in  FIG. 122 , various plans  1402 - 2  such as plural plans  1 ,  2 ,  3  and  4  are prepared in a plan space  1401 - 2 . The plan space  1401 - 2  is a set of the plural plans  1402 - 2  stored in the conversation database  1500 - 2 . The conversation controller  1000 - 2  selects a preset plan  1402 - 2  for a start-up on an activation or a conversation start or arbitrarily selects one of the plans  1402 - 2  in the plan space  1401 - 2  in response to a user&#39;s utterance contents in order to output a reply sentence against the user&#39;s utterance by using the selected plan  1402 - 2 . 
       FIG. 123  shows a configuration example of plans  1402 - 2 . Each plan  1402 - 2  includes a reply sentence  1501 - 2  and next-plan designation information  1502 - 2  associated therewith. The next-plan designation information  1502 - 2  is information for specifying, in response to a certain reply sentence  1501 - 2  in a plan  1402 - 2 , another plan  1402 - 2  including a reply sentence to be output to a user (referred as a “next-reply candidate sentence”). In this example, the plan  1  includes a reply sentence A ( 1501 - 2 ) to be output at an execution of the plan  1  by the conversation controller  1000 - 2  and next-plan designation information  1502 - 2  associated with the reply sentence A ( 1501 - 2 ). The next-plan designation information  1502 - 2  is information [ID: 002] for specifying a plan  2  including a reply sentence B ( 1501 - 2 ) to be a next-reply candidate sentence to the reply sentence A ( 1501 - 2 ). Similarly, since the reply sentence B ( 1501 - 2 ) is also associated with next-plan designation information  1502 - 2 , another plan  1402 - 2  ([ID: 043]: not shown) including the next-reply candidate sentence will be designated by next-plan designation information  1502 - 2  when the reply sentence B ( 1501 - 2 ) has output. In this manner, plans  1402 - 2  are chained via next-plan designation information  1502 - 2  and plan conversations in which a series of successive contents can be output to a user. 
     In other words, since contents expected to be provided to a user (an explanatory sentence, an announcement sentence, a questionnaire and so on) are separated into plural reply sentences and the reply sentences are prepared as a plan with their order predetermined, it becomes possible to provide a series of the reply sentences to the user in response to the user&#39;s utterances. Note that a reply sentence  1501 - 2  included in a plan  1402 - 2  designated by next-plan designation information  1502 - 2  is not needed to be output to a user immediately after an output of the user&#39;s utterance in response to an output of a previous reply sentence. The reply sentence  1501 - 2  included in the plan  1402 - 2  designated by the next-plan designation information  1502 - 2  may be output after an intervening conversation on a different topic from a topic in the plan between the conversation controller  1000 - 2  and the user. 
     Note that the reply sentence  1501 - 2  shown in  FIG. 123  corresponds to a sentence string of one of the reply sentences  830 - 2  shown in  FIG. 121 . In addition, the next-plan designation information  1502 - 2  shown in  FIG. 123  corresponds to the next-plan designation information  840 - 2  shown in  FIG. 121 . 
     Note that linkages between the plans  1402 - 2  are not limited to form a one-dimensional geometry shown in  FIG. 123 .  FIG. 124  shows an example of plans  1402 - 2  with another linkage geometry. In the example shown in  FIG. 124 , a plan  1  ( 1402 - 2 ) includes two of next-plan designation information  1502 - 2  to designate two reply sentences as next replay candidate sentences, in other words, to designate two plans  1402 - 2 . The two of next-plan designation information  1502 - 2  are prepared in order that the plan  2  ( 1402 - 2 ) including a reply sentence B ( 1501 - 2 ) and the plan  3  ( 1402 - 2 ) including a reply sentence C ( 1501 - 2 ) are to be designated as plans each including a next-reply candidate sentence. Note that the reply sentences are selective and alternative, so that, when one has been output, another is not output and then the plan  1  ( 1501 - 2 ) is terminated. In this manner, the linkages between the plans  1402 - 2  is not limited to forming a one-dimensional geometry and may form a tree-diagram-like geometry or a cancellous geometry. 
     Note that it is not limited that how many next-reply candidate sentences each plan  1402 - 2  includes. In addition, no next-plan designation information  1502 - 2  may be included in a plan  1402 - 2  which terminates a conversation. 
       FIG. 125  shows an example of a certain series of plans  1402 - 2 . As shown in  FIG. 125 , this series of plans  1402   1 - 2  to  1402   4 - 2  are associated with reply sentences  1501   1 - 2  to  1501   4 - 2  which notify crisis management information to a user. The reply sentences  1501   1 - 2  to  1501   4 - 2  constitute one coherent topic as a whole. Each of the plans  1402   1 - 2  to  1402   4 - 2  includes ID data  1702   1 - 2  to  1702   4 - 2  for indicating itself such as “1000-01, 1000-02”, “1000-03” and “1000-04”, respectively. Note that each value after a hyphen in the ID data is information indicating an output order. In addition, each of the plans  1402   1 - 2  to  1402   4 - 2  further includes ID data  1502   1 - 2  to  1502   4 - 2  as the next-plan designation information such as “1000-02, 1000-03”, “1000-04” and “1000-0F”, respectively. Especially, “0F” is information indicating the final plan (the last in the order). 
     In this example, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  starts to execute this series of plans when a user has uttered &#39;s utterance has been “Please tell me a crisis management applied when a large earthquake occurs.” Specifically, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  searches in the plan space  1401 - 2  and checks whether or not a plan  1402 - 2  including a reply sentence  1501   1 - 2  associated with the user&#39;s utterance “Please tell me a crisis management applied when a large earthquake occurs,” when the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  has received the user&#39;s utterance “Please tell me a crisis management applied when a large earthquake occurs.” In this example, a user&#39;s utterance character string  1701   1 - 2  associated with the user&#39;s utterance “Please tell me a crisis management applied when a large earthquake occurs,” is associated with a plan  1402   1 - 2 . 
     The plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  retrieves the reply sentence  1501   1 - 2  included in the plan  1402   1 - 2  on discovering the plan  1402   1 - 2  and outputs the reply sentence  1501   1 - 2  to the user as a reply sentence in response to the user&#39;s utterance. And then, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  specifies the next-reply candidate sentence with reference to the next-plan designation information  1502   1 - 2 . 
     Next, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  executes the plan  1402   2 - 2  on receiving another user&#39;s utterance via the input unit  1100 - 2 , a speech recognition unit  1200 - 2  or the like after an output of the reply sentence  1501   1 - 2 . Specifically, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  judges whether or not to execute the plan  1402   2 - 2  designated by the next-plan designation information  1502   1 - 2 , in other words, whether or not to output the second reply sentence  1501   2 - 2 . More specifically, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  compares a user&#39;s utterance character string (also referred as an illustrative sentence)  1701   2 - 2  associated with the reply sentence  1501   2 - 2  and the received user&#39;s utterance, or compares a topic title  820 - 2  (not shown in  FIG. 125 ) associated with the reply sentence  1501   2 - 2  and the received user&#39;s utterance. And then, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  determines whether or not the two are related to each other. If the two are related to each other, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  outputs the second reply sentence  1501   2 - 2 . In addition, since the plan  1402   2 - 2  including the second reply sentence  1501   2 - 2  also includes the next-plan designation information  1502   2 - 2 , the next-reply candidate sentence is specified. 
     Similarly, according to ongoing user&#39;s utterances, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  transit into the plans  1402   3 - 2  and  1402   4 - 2  in turn and can output the third and fourth reply sentences  1501   3 - 2  and  1501   4 - 2 . Note that, since the fourth reply sentence  1501   4 - 2  is the final reply sentence, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  terminates plan-executions when the fourth reply sentence  1501   4 - 2  has been output. 
     In this manner, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  can provide previously prepared conversation contents to the user in a predetermined order by sequentially executing the plans  1402   1 - 2  to  1402   4 - 2 . 
     [Discourse Space Conversation Control Process Unit] 
     The configuration example of the conversation control unit  1300 - 2  is further described with referring back to  FIG. 113 . 
     The discourse space conversation control process unit  1330 - 2  includes the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 2 , the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2 , the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 2  and the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2 . The managing unit  1310 - 2  totally controls the conversation control unit  1300 - 2 . 
     A “discourse history” is information for specifying a conversation topic or theme between a user and the conversation controller  1000 - 2  and includes at least one of “focused topic specification information”, a “focused topic title”, “user input sentence topic specification information” and “reply sentence topic specification information”. The “focused topic specification information”, the “focused topic title” and the “reply sentence topic specification information” are not limited to be defined from a conversation done just before but may be defined from the previous “focused topic specification information”, the “focused topic title” and the “reply sentence topic specification information” during a predetermined past period or from an accumulated record thereof. 
     Hereinbelow, each of the units constituting the discourse space conversation control process unit  1330 - 2  will be described. 
     [Topic Specification Information Retrieval Unit] 
     The topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 2  compares the first morpheme information extracted by the morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 2  and the topic specification information, and then retrieves the topic specification information corresponding to a morpheme in the first morpheme information among the topic specification information. Specifically, when the first morpheme information received from the morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 2  is two morphemes “Sato” and “like”, the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 2  compares the received first morpheme information and the topic specification information group. 
     If a focused topic title  820 - 2   focus  (indicated as  820 - 2   focus  to be differentiated from previously retrieved topic titles or other topic titles) includes a morpheme (for example, “Sato”) in the first morpheme information, the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 2  outputs the focused topic title  820 - 2   focus  to the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2 . On the other hand, if no topic title includes the morpheme in the first morpheme information, the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 2  determines user input sentence topic specification information based on the received first morpheme information, and then outputs the first morpheme information and the user input sentence topic specification information to the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2 . Note that the “user input sentence topic specification information” is topic specification information corresponding-to or probably-corresponding-to a morpheme relevant to topic contents talked by a user among morphemes included in the first morpheme information. 
     [Elliptical Sentence Complementation Unit] 
     The elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2  generates various complemented first morpheme information by complementing the first morpheme information with the previously retrieved topic specification information  810 - 2  (hereinafter referred as the “focused topic specification information”) and the topic specification information  810 - 2  included in the final reply sentence (hereinafter referred as the “reply sentence topic specification information”). For example, if a user&#39;s utterance is “like”, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2  generates the complemented first morpheme information “Sato, like” by including the focused topic specification information “Sato” into the first morpheme information “like”. 
     In other words, if it is assumed that the first morpheme information is defined as “W” and a set of the focused topic specification information and the reply sentence topic specification information is defined as “D”, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2  generates the complemented first morpheme information by including an element(s) in the set “D” into the first morpheme information “W”. 
     In this manner, in case where, for example, a sentence constituted with the first morpheme information is an elliptical sentence which is unclear as language, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2  can include, by using the set “D”, an element(s) (for example, “Sato”) in the set “D” into the first morpheme information “W”. As a result, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2  can complement the first morpheme information “like” into the complemented first morpheme information “Sato, like”. Note that the complemented first morpheme information “Sato, like” corresponds to a user&#39;s utterance “I like Sato.” 
     That is, even when user&#39;s utterance contents are provided as an elliptical sentence, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2  can complement the elliptical sentence by using the set “D”. As a result, even when a sentence constituted with the first morpheme information is an elliptical sentence, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2  can complement the sentence into an appropriate sentence as language. 
     In addition, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2  retrieves the topic title  820 - 2  related to the complemented first morpheme information based on the set “D”. If the topic title  820 - 2  related to the complemented first morpheme information has been found, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2  outputs the topic title  820 - 2  to the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2 . The reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2  can output a reply sentence  830 - 2  best-suited for the user&#39;s utterance contents based on the appropriate topic title  820 - 2  found by the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2 . 
     Note that the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2  is not limited to including an element(s) in the set “D” into the first morpheme information. The elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2  may include, based on a focused topic title, a morpheme(s) included in any of the first, second and third specification information in the topic title, into the extracted first morpheme information. 
     [Topic Retrieval Unit] 
     The topic retrieval unit  1370 - 2  compares the first morpheme information and topic titles  820 - 2  associated with the user input sentence topic specification information to retrieve a topic title  820 - 2  best-suited for the first morpheme information among the topic titles  820 - 2  when the topic title  820 - 2  has not been determined by the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2 . 
     Specifically, the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 2 , which has received a retrieval command signal from the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2 , retrieves the topic title  820 - 2  best-suited for the first morpheme information among the topic titles associated with the user input sentence topic specification information based on the user input sentence topic specification information and the first morpheme information which are included in the received retrieval command signal. The topic retrieval unit  1370 - 2  outputs the retrieved topic title  820 - 2  as a retrieval result signal to the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2 . 
     Above-mentioned  FIG. 121  shows the concrete example of the topic titles  820 - 2  and the reply sentences  830 - 2  associated with the topic specification information  810 - 2  (=“Sato”). For example as shown in  FIG. 121 , since topic specification information  810 - 2  (=“Sato”) is included in the received first morpheme information “Sato, like”, the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 2  specifies the topic specification information  810 - 2  (=“Sato”) and then compares the topic titles ( 820 - 2 )  1 - 1 ,  1 - 2 , . . . associated with the topic specification information  810 - 2  (=“Sato”) and the received first morpheme information “Sato, like”. 
     The topic retrieval unit  1370 - 2  retrieves the topic title ( 820 - 2 )  1 - 1  (Sato; *; like) related to the received first morpheme information “Sato, like” among the topic titles ( 820 - 2 )  1 - 1 ,  1 - 2 , . . . based on the comparison result. The topic retrieval unit  1370 - 2  outputs the retrieved topic title ( 820 - 2 )  1 - 1  (Sato; *; like) as a retrieval result signal to the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2 . 
     [Reply Retrieval Unit] 
     The reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2  retrieves, based on the topic title  820 - 2  retrieved by the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2  or the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 2 , a reply sentence associated with the topic title  820 - 2 . In addition, the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2  compares, based on the topic title  820 - 2  retrieved by the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 2 , the response types associated with the topic title  820 - 2  and the utterance type determined by the input type determining unit  1440 - 2 . The reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2 , which has executed the comparison, retrieves one response type related to the determined utterance type among the response types. 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 121 , when the topic title retrieved by the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 2  is the topic title  1 - 1  (Sato; *; like), the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2  specifies the response type (for example, DA) coincident with the “uttered sentence type” (DA) determined by the input type determining unit  1440 - 2  among the reply sentences  1 - 1  (DA, TA and so on) associated with the topic title  1 - 1 . The reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2 , which has specified the response type (DA), retrieves the reply sentence  1 - 1  (“I like Sato, too.”) associated with the response type (DA) based on the specified response type (DA). 
     Here, “A” in above-mentioned “DA”, “TA” and so on means an affirmative form. Therefore, when the utterance types and the response types include “A”, it indicates an affirmation on a certain matter. In addition, the utterance types and the response types can include the types of “DQ”, “TQ” and so on. “Q” in “DQ”, “TQ” and so on means a question about a certain matter. 
     If the response type takes an interrogative form (Q), a reply sentence associated with this response type takes an affirmative form (A). A reply sentence with an affirmative form (A) may be a sentence for replying to a question and so on. For example, when an uttered sentence is “Have you ever operated slot machines?”, the utterance type of the uttered sentence is an interrogative form (Q). A reply sentence associated with this interrogative form (Q) may be “I have operated slot machines before,” (affirmative form (A)), for example. 
     On the other hand, when the response type is an affirmative form (A), a reply sentence associated with this response type takes an interrogative form (Q). A reply sentence in an interrogative form (Q) may be an interrogative sentence for asking back against uttered contents, an interrogative sentence for getting out a certain matter. For example, when the uttered sentence is “Playing slot machines is my hobby,” the utterance type of this uttered sentence takes an affirmative form (A). A reply sentence associated with this affirmative form (A) may be “Playing pachinko is your hobby, isn&#39;t it?” (an interrogative sentence (Q) for getting out a certain matter), for example. 
     The reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2  outputs the retrieved reply sentence  830 - 2  as a reply sentence signal to the managing unit  1310 - 2 . The managing unit  1310 - 2 , which has received the reply sentence signal from the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2 , outputs the received reply sentence signal to the output unit  1600 - 2 . 
     [CA Conversation Process Unit] 
     When a reply sentence in response to a user&#39;s utterance has not been determined by the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  or the discourse space conversation control process unit  1330 - 2 , the CA conversation process unit  1340 - 2  functions to output a reply sentence for continuing a conversation with a user according to contents of the user&#39;s utterance. 
     The configuration example of the conversation controller  1000 - 2  is further described with referring back to  FIG. 109 . 
     [Output Unit] 
     The output unit  1600 - 2  outputs the reply sentence retrieved by the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2 . The output unit  1600 - 2  may be a speaker or a display, for example. Specifically, the output unit  1600 - 2 , which has received the reply sentence from the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2 , outputs voice sounds of the received reply sentence (for example, “I like Sato, too,”) based on the received reply sentence. With that, describing the configuration example of the conversation controller  1000 - 2  has ended. 
     [Conversation Control Method] 
     The conversation controller  1000 - 2  with the above-mentioned configuration puts a conversation control method in execution by operating as described hereinbelow. 
     Next, operations of the conversation controller  1000 - 2 , more specifically the conversation control unit  1300 - 2 , according to the present embodiment will be described. 
       FIG. 126  is a flow chart showing an example of a main process executed by conversation control unit  1300 - 2 . This main process is a process executed each time when the conversation control unit  1300 - 2  receives a user&#39;s utterance. A reply sentence in response to the user&#39;s utterance is output due to an execution of this main process, so that a conversation (an interlocution) between a user and the conversation controller  100 - 2  is established. 
     Upon executing the main process, the conversation controller  100 - 2 , more specifically the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  firstly executes a plan conversation control process (S 1801 - 2 ). The plan conversation control process is a process for executing a plan(s). 
       FIGS. 127 and 128  are flow charts showing an example of the plan conversation control process. Hereinbelow, the example of the plan conversation control process will be described with reference to  FIGS. 127 and 128 . 
     Upon executing the plan conversation control process, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  firstly executes a basic control state information check (S 1901 - 2 ). The basic control state information is information on whether or not an execution(s) of a plan(s) has been completed and is stored in a predetermined memory area. 
     The basic control state information serves to indicate a basic control state of a plan. 
       FIG. 129  is a diagram showing four basic control states which are possibly established due to a so-called scenario-type plan. 
     (1) Cohesiveness 
     This basic control state corresponds to a case where a user&#39;s utterance is coincident with the currently executed plan  1402 - 2 , more specifically the topic title  820 - 2  or the example sentence  1701 - 2  associated with the plan  1402 - 2 . In this case, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  terminates the plan  1402 - 2  and then transfers to another plan  1402 - 2  corresponding to the reply sentence  1501 - 2  designated by the next-plan designation information  1502 - 2 . 
     (2) Cancellation 
     This basic control state is a basic control state which is set in a case where it is determined that user&#39;s utterance contents require a completion of a plan  1402 - 2  or that a user&#39;s interest has changed to another matter than the currently executed plan. When the basic control state indicates the cancellation, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  retrieves another plan  1402 - 2  associated with the user&#39;s utterance than the plan  1402 - 2  targeted as the cancellation. If the other plan  1402 - 2  exists, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  start to execute the other plan  1402 - 2 . If the other plan  1402 - 2  does not exist, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  terminates an execution(s) of a plan(s). 
     (3) Maintenance 
     This basic control state is a basic control state which is set in a case where a user&#39;s utterance is not coincident with the topic title  820 - 2  (see  FIG. 121 ) or the example sentence  1701 - 2  (see  FIG. 125 ) associated with the currently executed plan  1402 - 2  and also the user&#39;s utterance does not correspond to the basic control state “cancellation”. 
     In the case of this basic control state, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  firstly determines whether or not to resume a pending or pausing plan  1402 - 2  on receiving the user&#39;s utterance. If the user&#39;s utterance is not adapted for resuming the plan  1402 - 2 , for example, in case where the user&#39;s utterance is not related to a topic title  820 - 2  or an example sentence  1701 - 2  associated with the plan  1402 - 2 , the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  starts to execute another plan  1402 - 2 , an after-mentioned discourse space conversation control process (S 1802 - 2 ) and so on. If the user&#39;s utterance is adapted for resuming the plan  1402 - 2 , the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  outputs a reply sentence  1501 - 2  based on the stored next-plan designation information  1502 - 2 . 
     In case where the basic control state is the “maintenance”, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  retrieves other plans  1402 - 2  in order to enable outputting another reply sentence than the reply sentence  1501 - 2  associated with the currently executed plan  1402 - 2 , or executes the discourse space conversation control process. However, if the user&#39;s utterance is adapted for resuming the plan  1402 - 2 , the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  resumes the plan  1402 - 2 . 
     (4) Continuation 
     This state is a basic control state which is set in a case where a user&#39;s utterance is not related to reply sentences  1501 - 2  included in the currently executed plan  1402 - 2 , contents of the user&#39;s utterance do not correspond to the basic control sate “cancellation” and use&#39;s intention construed from the user&#39;s utterance is not clear. 
     In case where the basic control state is the “continuation”, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  firstly determines whether or not to resume a pending or pausing plan  1402 - 2  on receiving the user&#39;s utterance. If the user&#39;s utterance is not adapted for resuming the plan  1402 - 2 , the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  executes an after-mentioned CA conversation control process in order to enable outputting a reply sentence for getting out a further user&#39;s utterance. 
     The plan conversation control process is further described with referring back to  FIG. 127 . 
     The plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2 , which has referred to the basic control state, determines whether or not the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is the “cohesiveness” (step S 1902 - 2 ). If it has been determined that the basic control state is the “cohesiveness” (YES in step S 1902 - 2 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  determines whether or not the reply sentence  1501 - 2  is the final reply sentence in the currently executed plan  1402 - 2  (step S 1903 - 2 ). 
     If it has been determined that the final reply sentence  1501 - 2  has been output already (YES in step S 1903 - 2 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  retrieves another plan  1402 - 2  related to the use&#39;s utterance in the plan space in order to determine whether or not to execute the other plan  1402 - 2  (step S 1904 - 2 ) because the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  has provided all contents to be replied to the user already. If the other plan  1402 - 2  related to the user&#39;s utterance has not been found due to this retrieval (NO in step S 1905 - 2 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  terminates the plan conversation control process because no plan  1402 - 2  to be provided to the user exists. 
     On the other hand, if the other plan  1402 - 2  related to the user&#39;s utterance has been found due to this retrieval (YES in step S 1905 - 2 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  transfers into the other plan  1402 - 2  (step S 1906 - 2 ). Since the other plan  1402 - 2  to be provided to the user still remains, an execution of the other plan  1402 - 2  (an output of the reply sentence  1501 - 2  included in the other plan  1402 - 2 ) is started. 
     Next, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  outputs the reply sentence  1501 - 2  included in that plan  1402 - 2  (step S 1908 - 2 ). The reply sentence  1501 - 2  is output as a reply to the user&#39;s utterance, so that the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  provides information to be supplied to the user. 
     The plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  terminates the plan conversation control process after the reply sentence output process (step S 1908 - 2 ). 
     On the other hand, if the previously output reply sentence  1501 - 2  is not determined as the final reply sentence in the determination whether or not the previously output reply sentence  1501 - 2  is the final reply sentence (step S 1903 - 2 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  transfers into a plan  1402 - 2  associated with the reply sentence  1501 - 2  following the previously output reply sentence  1501 - 2 , i.e. the specified reply sentence  1501 - 2  by the next-plan designation information  1502 - 2  (step S 1907 - 2 ). 
     Subsequently, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  outputs the reply sentence  1501 - 2  included in that plan  1402 - 2  to provide a reply to the user&#39;s utterance (step  1908 - 2 ). The reply sentence  1501 - 2  is output as the reply to the user&#39;s utterance, so that the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  provides information to be supplied to the user. The plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  terminates the plan conversation control process after the reply sentence output process (step S 1908 - 2 ). 
     Here, if the basic control state is not the “cohesiveness” in the determination process in step S 1902 - 2  (NO in step S 1902 - 2 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  determines whether or not the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is the “cancellation” (step S 1909 - 2 ). If it has been determined that the basic control state is the “cancellation” (YES in step S 1909 - 2 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  retrieves another plan  1402 - 2  related to the use&#39;s utterance in the plan space  1401 - 2  in order to determine whether or not the other plan  1402 - 2  to be started newly exists (step S 1904 - 2 ) because a plan  1402 - 2  to be successively executed does not exist. Subsequently, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  executes the processes of steps S 1905 - 2  to S 1908  as well as the processes in case of the above-mentioned step S 1903 - 2  (YES). 
     On the other hand, if the basic control state is not the “cancellation” in the determination process in step S 1902 - 2  (NO in step S 1902 - 2 ) in the determination whether or not the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is the “cancellation” (step S 1909 - 2 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  further determines whether or not the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is the “maintenance” (step S 1910 - 2 ). 
     If the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is the “maintenance” (YES in step S 1910 - 2 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  determined whether or not the user presents the interest on the pending or pausing plan  1402 - 2  again and then resumes the pending or pausing plan  1402 - 2  in case where the interest is presented (step S 2001 - 2  in  FIG. 128 ). In other words, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  evaluates the pending or pausing plan  1402 - 2  (step S 2001 - 2  in  FIG. 128 ) and then determines whether or not the user&#39;s utterance is related to the pending or pausing plan  1402 - 2  (step S 2002 - 2 ). 
     If it has been determined that the user&#39;s utterance is related to that plan  1402 - 2  (YES in step S 2002 - 2 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  transfers into the plan  1402 - 2  related to the user&#39;s utterance (step S 2003 - 2 ) and then executes the reply sentence output process (step S 1908 - 2  in  FIG. 127 ) to output the reply sentence  1501 - 2  included in the plan  1402 - 2 . Operating in this manner, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  can resume the pending or pausing plan  1402 - 2  according to the user&#39;s utterance, so that all contents included in the previously prepared plan  1402 - 2  can be provided to the user. 
     On the other hand, if it has been determined that the user&#39;s utterance is not related to that plan  1402 - 2  (NO in step S 2002 - 2 ) in the above-mentioned S 2002  (see  FIG. 128 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  retrieves another plan  1402 - 2  related to the use&#39;s utterance in the plan space  1401 - 2  in order to determine whether or not the other plan  1402 - 2  to be started newly exists (step S 1904 - 2  in  FIG. 127 ). Subsequently, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  executes the processes of steps S 1905 - 2  to S 1908 - 2  as well as the processes in case of the above-mentioned step S 1903 - 2  (YES). 
     If it is determined that the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is not the “maintenance” (NO in step S 1910 - 2 ) in the determination in step S 1910 - 2 , it means that the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is the “continuation”. In this case, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  terminates the plan conversation control process without outputting a reply sentence. With that, describing the plan control process has ended. 
     The main process is further described with referring back to  FIG. 126 . The conversation control unit  1300 - 2  executes the discourse space conversation control process (step S 1802 - 2 ) after the plan conversation control process (step S 1801 - 2 ) has been completed. Note that, if the reply sentence has been output in the plan conversation control process (step S 1801 - 2 ), the conversation control unit  1300 - 2  executes a basic control information update process (step S 1804 - 2 ) without executing the discourse space conversation control process (step S 1802 - 2 ) and the after-mentioned CA conversation control process (step S 1803 - 2 ) and then terminates the main process. 
       FIG. 130  is a flow chart showing an example of a discourse space conversation control process according to the present embodiment. The input unit  1100 - 2  firstly executes a step for receiving a user&#39;s utterance (step S 2201 - 2 ). Specifically, the input unit  1100 - 2  receives voice sounds of the user&#39;s utterance. The input unit  1100 - 2  outputs the received voice sounds to the speech recognition unit  1200 - 2  as a voice signal. Note that the input unit  1100 - 2  may receive a character string input by a user (for example, text data input in a text format) instead of the voice sounds. In this case, the input unit  1100 - 2  may be a text input device such as a keyboard or a touchscreen. 
     Next, the speech recognition unit  1200 - 2  executes a step for specifying a character string corresponding to the uttered contents based on the uttered contents retrieved by the input unit  1100 - 2  (step S 2202 - 2 ). Specifically, the speech recognition unit  1200 - 2 , which has received the voice signal from the input unit  1100 - 2 , specifies a word hypothesis (candidate) corresponding to the voice signal based on the received voice signal. The speech recognition unit  1200 - 2  retrieves a character string corresponding to the specified word hypothesis and outputs the retrieved character string to the conversation control unit  1300 - 2 , more specifically the discourse space conversation control process unit  1330 - 2 , as a character string signal. 
     And then, the character string specifying unit  1410 - 2  segments a series of the character strings specified by the speech recognition unit  1200 - 2  into segments (step S 2203 - 2 ). Specifically, if the series of the character strings have a time interval more than a certain interval, the character string specifying unit  1410 - 2 , which has received the character string signal or a morpheme signal from the managing unit  1310 - 2 , segments the character strings there. The character string specifying unit  1410 - 2  outputs the segmented character strings to the morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 2  and the input type determining unit  1440 - 2 . Note that it is preferred that the character string specifying unit  1410 - 2  segments a character string at a punctuation, a space and so on in a case where the character string has been input from a keyboard. 
     Subsequently, the morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 2  executes a step for extracting morphemes constituting minimum units of the character string as first morpheme information based on the character string specified by the character string specifying unit  1410 - 2  (step S 2204 - 2 ). Specifically, the morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 2 , which has received the character strings from the character string specifying unit  1410 - 2 , compares the received character strings and morpheme groups previously stored in the morpheme database  1430 - 2 . Note that, in the present embodiment, each of the morpheme groups is prepared as a morpheme dictionary in which a direction word, a reading, a word class and an inflected forms are described for each morpheme belonging to each word-class classification. 
     The morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 2 , which has executed the comparison, extracts coincident morphemes (m 1 , m 2 , . . . ) with the morphemes included in the previously stored morpheme groups from the received character string. The morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 2  outputs the extracted morphemes to the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 2  as the first morpheme information. 
     Next, the input type determining unit  1440 - 2  executes a step for determining the “uttered sentence type” based on the morphemes which constitute one sentence and are specified by the character string specifying unit  1410 - 2  (step S 2205 - 2 ). Specifically, the input type determining unit  1440 - 2 , which has received the character strings from the character string specifying unit  1410 - 2 , compares the received character strings and the dictionaries stored in the utterance type database  1450 - 2  based on the received character strings and extracts elements relevant to the dictionaries among the character strings. The input type determining unit  1440 - 2 , which has extracted the elements, determines to which “uttered sentence type” the extracted element(s) belongs based on the extracted element(s). The input type determining unit  1440 - 2  outputs the determined “uttered sentence type” (utterance type) to the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2 . 
     And then, the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 2  executes a step for comparing the first morpheme information extracted by the morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 2  and the focused topic title  820 - 2   focus  (step S 2206 - 2 ). 
     If a morpheme in the first morpheme information is related to the focused topic title  820 - 2   focus , the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 2  outputs the focused topic title  820 - 2   focus  to the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2 . On the other hand, if no morpheme in the first morpheme information is related to the focused topic title  820 - 2   focus , the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 2  outputs the received first morpheme information and the user input sentence topic specification information to the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2  as the retrieval command signal. 
     Subsequently, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2  executes a step for including the focused topic specification information and the reply sentence topic specification information into the received first morpheme information based on the first morpheme information received from the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 2  (step S 2207 - 2 ). Specifically, if it is assumed that the first morpheme information is defined as “W” and a set of the focused topic specification information and the reply sentence topic specification information is defined as “D”, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2  generates the complemented first morpheme information by including an element(s) in the set “D” into the first morpheme information “W” and compares the complemented first morpheme information and all the topic titles  820 - 2  to retrieve the topic title  820 - 2  related to the complemented first morpheme information. If the topic title  820 - 2  related to the complemented first morpheme information has been found, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2  outputs the topic title  820 - 2  to the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2 . On the other hand, if no topic title  820 - 2  related to the complemented first morpheme information has been found, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2  outputs the first morpheme information and the user input sentence topic specification information to the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 2 . 
     Next, the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 2  executes a step for comparing the first morpheme information and the user input sentence topic specification information and retrieves the topic title  820 - 2  best-suited for the first morpheme information among the topic titles  820 - 2  (step S 2208 - 2 ). Specifically, the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 2 , which has received the retrieval command signal from the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2 , retrieves the topic title  820 - 2  best-suited for the first morpheme information among topic titles  820 - 2  associated with the user input sentence topic specification information based on the user input sentence topic specification information and the first morpheme information included in the received retrieval command signal. The topic retrieval unit  1370 - 2  outputs the retrieved topic title  820 - 2  to the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2  as the retrieval result signal. 
     Next, the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2  compares, in order to select the reply sentence  830 - 2 , the user&#39;s utterance type determined by the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 2  and the response type associated with the retrieved topic title  820 - 2  based on the retrieved topic title  820 - 2  by the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 2 , the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 2  or the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 2  (step S 2209 - 2 ). 
     The reply sentence  830 - 2  is selected in particular as explained hereinbelow. Specifically, based on the “topic title” associated with the received retrieval result signal and the received “uttered sentence type”, the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2 , which has received the retrieval result signal from the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 2  and the “uttered sentence type” from the input type determining unit  1440 - 2 , specifies one response type coincident with the “uttered sentence type” (for example, DA) among the response types associated with the “topic title”. 
     Consequently, the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 2  outputs the reply sentence  830 - 2  retrieved in step S 2209 - 2  to the output unit  1600 - 2  via the managing unit  1310 - 2  (S 2210 - 2 ). The output unit  1600 - 2 , which has received the reply sentence  830 - 2  from the managing unit  1310 - 2 , outputs the received reply sentence  830 - 2 . 
     With that, describing the discourse space conversation control process has ended and the main process is further described with referring back to  FIG. 126 . 
     The conversation control unit  1300 - 2  executes the CA conversation control process (step S 1803 - 2 ) after the discourse space conversation control process has been completed. Note that, if the reply sentence has been output in the plan conversation control process (step S 1801 - 2 ) or the discourse space conversation control (step S 1802 - 2 ), the conversation control unit  1300 - 2  executes the basic control information update process (step S 1804 - 2 ) without executing the CA conversation control process (step S 1803 - 2 ) and then terminates the main process. 
     The CA conversation control process is a process in which it is determined whether a user&#39;s utterance is an utterance for “explaining something”, an utterance for “confirming something”, an utterance for “accusing or rebuking something” or an utterance for “other than these”, and then a reply sentence is output according to the user&#39;s utterance contents and the determination result. By the CA conversation control process, a so-called “bridging” reply sentence for continuing the uninterrupted conversation with the user can be output even if a reply sentence suited for the user&#39;s utterance can not be output by the plan conversation control process nor the discourse space conversation control process. 
     Next, the conversation control unit  1300 - 2  executes the basic control information update process (step S 1804 - 2 ). In this process, the conversation control unit  1300 - 2 , more specifically the managing unit  1310 - 2 , sets the basic control information to the “cohesiveness” when the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  has output a reply sentence, sets the basic control information to the “cancellation” when the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 2  has cancelled an output of a reply sentence, sets the basic control information to the “maintenance” when the discourse space conversation control process unit  1330 - 2  has output a reply sentence, or sets the basic control information to the “continuation” when the CA conversation process unit  1340 - 2  has output a reply sentence. 
     The basic control information set in this basic control information update process is referred in the above-mentioned plan conversation control process (step S 1801 - 2 ) to be employed for continuation or resumption of a plan. 
     As described the above, the conversation controller  1000 - 2  can executes a previously prepared plan(s) or can adequately respond to a topic(s) which is not included in a plan(s) according to a user&#39;s utterance by executing the main process each time when receiving the user&#39;s utterance. 
     In the gaming terminal  4 - 2  of the present embodiment, the input unit  1100 - 2  of the conversation controller  1000 - 2  explained above may be configured by the touchscreen  50 - 2  attached to the display  8 - 2  and the microphone  15 - 2 . In addition, the output unit  1600 - 2  may be configured by the display  8 - 2  and the speaker  10 - 2 . Furthermore, the speech recognition unit  1200 - 2 ; the conversation control unit  1300 - 2 ; and the character string specifying unit  1410 - 2 , the morpheme extraction portion  1420 - 2  and the input type determining portion  1440 - 2  of the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 2  may be configured by the terminal controller  90 - 2 . In addition, the morpheme database  1430 - 2  and the utterance type database  1450 - 2  of the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 2 , and the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 2  can be configured by the first external storage unit  99 - 2  (see  FIG. 108 ). Note that, although the conversation database  1500 - 2  can be stored also in the first external storage unit  99 - 2 , it is stored in the HDD  34 - 2  of the above-mentioned server  13 - 2  in the present embodiment (see  FIG. 106 ). And, as explained later, there are methods such as directly accessing the HDD  34 - 2  and downloading the conversation data stored in the HDD  34 - 2  at the time when using the conversation data stored in the conversation database  1500 - 2 . 
     And, in the present embodiment, the language to be used in the roulette game can be determined through a conversation with the player by the conversation engine achieved with the above-mentioned configuration in the gaming terminal  4 - 2  by the conversation controller  1000 - 2 . 
     Here, the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 2  of the conversation controller  1000 - 2  configured by the first external storage unit  99 - 2  has word dictionaries for the plural languages in order to confirm a language type of sound messages input into the microphone  15 - 2  by the player. In addition, the morphological database  1430 - 2  of the conversation controller  1000 - 2  configured by the first external storage unit  99 - 2  has the morpheme groups for the plural languages (morpheme dictionaries). Furthermore, the utterance type database  1450 - 2  of the conversation controller  1000 - 2  configured by the first external storage unit  99 - 2  also has dictionaries of the respective utterance types for the plural languages. 
     In addition, “sentence” data for the plural languages are also stored in the conversation database  1500 - 2  configured by the terminal controller  90 - 2  in order to output sound messages from the speaker  10 - 2  to the player in the language selected by the player or to display the messages on the display  8 - 2 . The “sentences” include a message for requesting an input (by an utterance or an operation on the display  8 - 2 ) of a specific phrase or sentence in the language desired to be used in the roulette game, a message for confirming the player to proceed the roulette game in the language of the input specific phrase or sentence, or the like. 
     The operations of the above-mentioned conversation engine of the gaming terminal  4 - 2  of the present embodiment will be explained later. 
     Next, contents of gaming processing executed in each of the server  13 - 2 , the roulette unit  2 - 2  and the gaming terminals  4 - 2  on the roulette game machine  1 - 2  according to the present embodiment will be explained. 
     To begin with, gaming processing of the server, which is executed by the server CPU  81 - 2  of the server  13 - 2  according to the programs stored in the ROM  82 - 2 , and gaming processing of the roulette unit, which is executed by the CPU  101 - 2  of the roulette unit  2 - 2  according to the programs stored in the ROM  102 - 2 , will explained based on  FIGS. 131 and 132 .  FIGS. 131 and 132  are flow charts of the gaming processings of the server and the roulette unit in the roulette gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 
     First, the gaming processing of the server  13 - 2  will be explained based on  FIGS. 131 and 132 . At first, as shown in  FIG. 131 , the server CPU  81 - 2  starts counting the betting period (step S 101 - 2 ). The betting period is a period during which a player can place a bet(s). A player participating in a game can place a bet on the bet area  72 - 2  (see  FIG. 105 ) which corresponds to the number predicted by the player during the betting period. The server CPU  81 - 2  sends a betting period start signal to the terminal CPU  91 - 2  when the betting period counting has been started (step S 102 - 2 ). 
     Next, the server CPU  81 - 2  determines whether or not the remaining betting period has reached five seconds (step S 103 - 2 ). Note that the remaining betting period is displayed on the bet time counter  69 - 2  on the display  8 - 2  at each of the gaming terminals  4 - 2  (see  FIG. 105 ). If it is determined that it has not reached the last five seconds, the processing will be returned to the step S 103 - 2 . On the other hand, if it is determined that it has reached the last five seconds, the processing will proceed to the step S 104 - 2 . 
     The server CPU  81 - 2  sends a control command to the CPU  101 - 2  of the roulette unit  2 - 2  to start the operation of the roulette unit  2 - 2  (step S 104 - 2 ). Next, the server CPU  81 - 2  determines whether or not the betting period has ended (step S 105 - 2 ). If it is determined that the betting period has not ended (NO in step S 105 - 2 ), the server CPU  81 - 2  suspends the processing until the betting period ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the betting period has ended (YES in step S 105 - 2 ), the server CPU  81 - 2  sends a betting period end signal indicating the expiry of the betting period to the terminal CPU  91 - 2  (step S 106 - 2 ). 
     Next, the server CPU  81 - 2  receives the betting information (the information such as a specified bet area  72 - 2 , a bet amount of chips and a betting type) input at each of the gaming terminals  4 - 2  by players from each of the terminal CPU&#39;s  91 - 2  (step S 107 - 2 ) and stores it into the betting information storing area in the RAM  83 - 2 . 
     Subsequently, the server CPU  81 - 2  executes a JP accumulation processing (step S 108 - 2 ). In this JP accumulation processing, 0.30% of the total credits which have been bet at all the gaming terminals  4 - 2  and received in step S 107 - 2  is accumulatively added to a JP amount stored in a “MINI” JP accumulation storing area in the RAM  83 - 2 . In addition, in the JP accumulation processing, 0.20% of the total credits which have been bet at all the gaming terminals  4 - 2  and received in step S 107 - 2  is accumulatively added to a JP amount stored in A “MAJOR” JP accumulation storing area in the RAM  83 - 2 . Furthermore, in the JP accumulation processing, 0.15% of the total credits which have been bet at all the gaming terminals  4 - 2  and received in step S 107 - 2  is accumulatively added to a JP amount stored in the “MEGA” JP accumulation storing area in the RAM  83 - 2 . In addition, in the JP accumulation processing, displays in a MEGA counter  73 - 2 , a MAJOR counter  74 - 2  and a MINI counter  75 - 2  are updated based on the accumulated JP amounts. 
     Next, as shown in  FIG. 132 , the server CPU  81 - 2  executes a JP bonus game determination processing (step S 109 - 2 ). In this processing, the server CPU  81 - 2  determines whether or not to execute a JP bonus game at each of the gaming terminals  4 - 2  by using random number values sampled by a sampling circuit or the like, which of the gaming terminals  4 - 2  would win the JP (or all the gaming terminals  4 - 2  are to lose) in the case where the JP bonus game is to be executed and which JP (“MEGA”, “MAJOR” or “MINI”) is to be awarded in the case where the JP is to be awarded. 
     Next, the server CPU  81 - 2  sends a JP bonus game determination result to each of the gaming terminals  4 - 2  based on the process of step S 109 - 2  (step S 110 - 2 ). Subsequently, the server CPU  81 - 2  sends a control command to the CPU  101 - 2  of the roulette device  2 - 1  in order for the CPU  101 - 2  to detect the number pocket  23 - 2  into which the ball  27 - 2  has fallen into in the roulette unit  2 - 2  (step S 111 - 2 ). Then, the server CPU  81 - 2  receives a control signal indicating the number pocket  23 - 2  into which the ball  27 - 2  has fallen from the CPU  101 - 2  of the roulette unit  2 - 2  (step S 112 - 2 ). 
     Next, the server CPU  81 - 2  determines whether or not the bet placed at each of the gaming terminals  4 - 2  has won based on the betting information of each the gaming terminals  4 - 2  received in step S 107 - 2  and the control signal indicating the number pocket  23 - 2  into which the ball  27 - 2  has fallen received in step S 112 - 2  (step S 113 - 2 ). 
     Next, the server CPU  81 - 2  executes a payout calculation processing (step S 114 - 2 ). In the payout calculation processing, the server CPU  81 - 2  firstly specifies credits bet on the winning number for each of the gaming terminal  4 - 2  and then calculates the total payout credits to be paid out for each of the gaming terminals  4 - 2  by using odds (a credit amount to be paid out per one chip (one bet)) for each bet area  72 - 2  which is stored in an odds storing area in the ROM  82 - 2 . 
     Next, the server CPU  81 - 2  executes a sending processing of the payout result of credits for a game based on the payout calculation processing of step S 113 - 2  and the JP payout result based on the JP bonus game determination processing of step S 109 - 2  (step S 115 - 2 ). Specifically, the credit data, which corresponds to the payout credits for the game to the terminal CPU  91 - 2  of each of the winning gaming terminals  4 - 2 , is output and the credit data, which corresponds to the currently accumulated JP credits, is output in the case where the JP is to be awarded. Next, the server CPU  81 - 2  sends a request command for collecting the ball  27 - 2  on the roulette wheel  22 - 2  to the CPU  101 - 2  of the roulette unit  2 - 2  (step S 116 - 2 ). After the process of step S 116 - 2 , this subroutine is terminated. 
     Next, the gaming processing of the roulette unit  2 - 2  will be explained based on  FIGS. 131 and 132 . To begin with, as shown in  FIG. 131 , the CPU  101 - 2  receives the control command for staring the operation of the roulette unit  2 - 2  from the server CPU  81 - 2  of the server  13 - 2  (step S 201 - 2 ). 
     Subsequently, the CPU  101 - 2  drives the wheel drive motor  106 - 2  to spin the roulette wheel  22 - 2  (step S 202 - 2 ). 
     Next, after a prescribed time period has elapsed since the roulette wheel  22 - 2  starts spinning (YES in step S 203 - 2 ), the CPU  101 - 2  launches the ball  27 - 2  at the time when a launching delay time has elapsed since it receives a detection signal from the pocket position detecting circuit  107 - 2  (step S 204 - 2 ). 
     Next, as shown in  FIG. 132 , the CPU  101 - 2  receives the control command for detecting the pocket  23 - 2  into which the ball  27 - 2  has fallen from the server CPU  81 - 2  of the server  13 - 2  (step S 205 - 2 ). Next, the CPU  101 - 2  determines which of the number pocket  23 - 2  into which the ball  27 - 2  has fallen by operating the ball sensor  105 - 2  (step S 206 - 2 ). And then, the CPU  101 - 2  sends the detection result indicating the number pocket  23 - 2  into which the ball  27 - 2  has fallen to the server CPU  81 - 2  of the server  13 - 2  (step S 207 - 2 ). 
     Next, the CPU  101 - 2  receives the request command for collecting the ball  27 - 2  from the server CPU  81 - 2  of the server  13 - 2  (step S 208 - 2 ). Next, the CPU  101 - 2  collects the ball  27 - 2  on the roulette wheel  22 - 2  by operating the ball collecting unit  108 - 2  provided beneath the roulette wheel  22 - 2  (step S 209 - 2 ). The collected ball  27 - 2  will be launched onto the roulette wheel  22 - 2  again by the ball launching unit  104 - 2  in the next game. After the process of step S 209 - 2 , this subroutine is terminated. 
     Next, processes executed by the terminal CPU  91 - 2  of the gaming terminal  4 - 2  of the roulette gaming machine  1 - 2  according to the present embodiment in accordance with the programs stored in the ROM  92 - 2  will be explained with reference to  FIGS. 133 to 144 . 
     Here, the flag F in the RAM  93 - 2  is set to a default value “1” which indicates during the betting period. In addition, a default bet screen  61 - 2  shown in  FIG. 105  is displayed on the display  8 - 2  of the gaming terminal  4 - 2 . In this state, as shown in  FIG. 133 , the terminal CPU  91 - 2  first executes language confirmation processing (step S 300 - 2 ), then executes conversation database setting processing (step S 301 - 2 ), then executes translating program setting processing (step S 302 - 2 ), then executes betting period confirmation processing (step S 303 - 2 ), then executes bet acceptance processing (step S 304 - 2 ), and then executes message output processing (step S 305 - 2 ). 
     Then, in the language confirmation processing of step S 300 - 2 , the terminal CPU  91 - 2  confirms whether or not a new smart card has been inserted into the card reader  16 - 2  as shown in  FIG. 134  (step S 300   a - 2 ). If it is not inserted (NO in step S 300   a - 2 ), the language confirmation processing is terminated. If it is inserted (YES in step S 300   a - 2 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 2  reads, from the inserted smart card, a language type used in a game play by a player who possesses the smart card (step S 300   b - 2 ). 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  outputs a message inquiring whether or not a game is proceeded in the read-out language type (step S 300   c - 2 ). The message may be output as sound from the speaker  10 - 2  via the sound input circuit  98 - 2 , as texts on the display  8 - 2  via the LCD drive circuit  95 - 2  and so on. 
     For example, if the language type read by the card reader  16 - 2  from the smart card is English and a sound message is to be output from the speaker  10 - 2 , the terminal CPU  91 - 2  outputs sound “English will be used. Is it all right?” 
     If the language type read by the card reader  16 - 2  from the smart card is English, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  assumes that a sound input “I want to use English. Is it all right?” have been input into the input unit  1100 - 2  of the conversation controller  1000 - 2  configured by the microphone  15 - 2 , and outputs the above-mentioned sound from the speaker  10 - 2  served as the output unit  1600 - 2  (see  FIG. 109 ) by making the conversation controller  1000 - 2  to execute corresponding processing. 
     In addition, if the language type read by the card reader  16 - 2  from the smart card is English, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  may output sound “English will be used. Is it all right?” from the speaker  10 - 2  according to the programs stored in the ROM  92 - 2  without using the conversation controller  1000 - 2 . 
     Alternatively, if the language type read by the card reader  16 - 2  from the smart card is English and a display message is to be output, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  displays sentences “English will be used. Is it all right?” on the display  8 - 2  together with “YES” and “NO” buttons  64   a - 2  and  64   b - 2  as shown in  FIG. 137 . 
     If the language type read by the card reader  16 - 2  from the smart card is English, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  assumes that character strings “I want to use English. Is it all right?” have been input into the input unit  1100 - 2  of the conversation controller  1000 - 2  configured by the touchscreen  50 - 2  on the display  8 - 2 , and displays the above-mentioned sentences together with “YES” and “NO” buttons  64   a - 2  and  64   b - 2  on the display  8 - 2  served as the output unit  1600 - 2  by making the conversation controller  1000 - 2  to execute corresponding processing. 
     In addition, if the language type read by the card reader  16 - 2  from the smart card is English, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  may display sentences “English will be used. Is it all right?” on the display  8 - 2  together with “YES” and “NO” buttons  64   a - 2  and  64 - 2   b  according to the programs stored in the ROM  92 - 2  without using the conversation controller  1000 - 2 . 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  determines whether or not an affirmative message has been input in response to the output message in step S 300   c - 2  (step S 300   d - 2 ). 
     Here, if the message in step S 300   c - 2  has been output as sound, it can be confirmed whether or not the message has been input in response to the output message by confirming whether or not the input unit  1100 - 2  of the conversation controller  1000 - 2  configured by the microphone  15 - 2  receives an input after the message has been output in step S 300   c - 2 . Alternatively, if the message in step S 300   c - 2  has been displayed on the display  8 - 2  in English as shown in  FIG. 137 , it can be confirmed whether or not the message has been input in response to the output message by confirming whether or not a player&#39;s operation on the “YES” and “NO” buttons  64   a - 2  and  64   b - 2  displayed on the display  8 - 2  has been detected via the touchscreen  50 - 2 . 
     In addition, it can be confirmed whether or not the input message in response to the output message in step S 300   c - 2  is an affirmative message by analyzing contents of the sound message input into the microphone  15 - 2  using the conversation controller  1000 - 2 , or detecting which of the “YES” and “NO” buttons  64   a - 2  and  64   b - 2  displayed on the display  8 - 2  as shown in  FIG. 137  has been operated by the player. 
     Then, if an affirmative message has been input (YES in step S 300   d - 2 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 2  displays a bet screen  61 - 2  which is displayed on the display  8 - 2  during the betting period of the roulette game in the language read by the card reader  16 - 2  from the smart card (step S 300   e - 2 ). For example, if the language type read by the card reader  16 - 2  from the smart card is English, a bet screen  61 - 2  presented in English as shown in  FIG. 105  is displayed on the display  8 - 2  during the betting period of the roulette game. Subsequently, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  terminates the language confirmation processing. 
     On the other hand, if an affirmative message has not been input (NO in step S 300   d - 2 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 2  outputs a message for selecting the type of language to be used for proceeding the roulette game (step S 300   f - 2 ). The message may be output as sound from the speaker  10 - 2  via the sound output circuit  96 - 2 , or as texts on the display  8 - 2  via the LCD drive circuit  95 - 2 . 
     For example, when a sound message is to be output, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  outputs sound requesting to select the language to be used in a game from the speaker  10 - 2 . For example, if the language type read by the card reader  16 - 2  from the smart card is English, sound “What language do you want to use?” is output from the speaker  10 - 2 . 
     The requesting sound to select the language to be used in a game is output from the speaker  10 - 2  with the language type had been read by the card reader  16 - 2  from the smart card. If a sound input in the negative has been input to the input unit  1100 - 2  of the conversation controller  1000 - 2  configured by the microphone  15 - 2  in response to the inquiring sound whether or not to proceed the game play in the above-mentioned language, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  makes the conversation controller  1000 - 2  to execute corresponding processing and then outputs a processing result thereof from the speaker  10 - 2  served as the output unit  1600 - 2 . 
     Alternatively, if a display message is to be output, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  displays a sentence and buttons for selecting the language to be used in a game on the display  8 - 2 . For example, if the language type read by the card reader  16 - 2  from the smart card is English, a sentence “What language do you want to use?” is displayed together with language selection buttons  63   a - 2 ,  63   b - 2 ,  63   c - 2 ,  63   d - 2 ,  63   e - 2  and  63   f - 2 , each corresponding to “English”, “Japanese”, “French”, “German”, “Spanish” and “Chinese”, as shown in  FIG. 138 . 
     The sentence or the like for selecting the language to be used in a game are displayed on the display  8 - 2  with the language type read by the card reader  16 - 2  from the smart card. If an operation on a button indicating a player&#39;s rejection (e.g., the “NO” button  64   b  shown in  FIG. 137 ) has been detected via the touchscreen  50 - 2 , the terminal CPU  91 - 2  makes the conversation controller  1000 - 2  to execute corresponding processing and then displays a processing result thereof on the display  8 - 2  served as the output unit  1600 - 2 . 
     Then, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  confirms whether or not a reply message in response to the output message in step S 300   f - 2  has been input (step S 300   g - 2 ). 
     Here, if the message in step S 300   f - 2  has been output as sound, it can be confirmed whether or not the message has been input in response to the output by confirming whether or not the input unit  1100 - 2  of the conversation controller  1000 - 2  configured by the microphone  15 - 2  receives an input after the message has been output in step S 300   e - 2 . Alternatively, if the message in step S 300   f - 2  has been displayed on the display  8 - 2 , it can be confirmed whether or not the message has been input in response to the output message by confirming whether or not a player&#39;s operation on the language selection buttons (e.g., the buttons  63   a - 2 ,  63   b - 2 ,  63   c - 2 ,  63   d - 2 ,  63   e - 2  and  63   f - 2  each corresponding to “English”, “Japanese”, “French”, “German”, “Spanish” and “Chinese” as shown in  FIG. 138 ) displayed on the display  8 - 2  has been detected via the touchscreen  50 - 2 . 
     Then, if a reply message in response to the output message in step S 300   f - 2  has not been input (NO in step S 300   g - 2 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 2  repeats step S 300   g - 2  until a reply is input. On the other hand, if a reply message has been input (YES in step S 300   g - 2 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 2  displays a bet screen  61 - 2  on the display  8 - 2  during the betting period of the roulette game in the language specified by the input message in step S 300   g - 2  (step S 300   h - 2 ). Subsequently, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  terminates the language confirmation processing. 
     Here, if the message has been input as sound in step S 300   g - 2 , the language selected by the input message can be specified by analyzing contents of the sound message input into the microphone  15 - 2  using the conversation controller  1000 - 2 . Alternatively, if the message has been input via a display screen on the display  8 - 2  in step S 300   g - 2 , the language selected by the input message can be specified by detecting contents of a player&#39;s operation onto the language selection buttons displayed on the display  8 - 2  by the terminal CPU  91 - 2  via the touchscreen  50 - 2 . 
     Furthermore, in case of replacement of a player such as replacement of a smart card, the language confirmation processing shown in  FIG. 134  is executed again. 
     Next, the conversation database setting processing of step S 301 - 2  in  FIG. 133  will be explained with reference to a flow chart shown in  FIG. 140 . 
     The terminal CPU  91 - 2  of the gaming terminal  4 - 2  sends a signal for setting the conversation database corresponding to the player&#39;s language (e.g., Japanese) to the server  13 - 2  via the network based on the player&#39;s language determined in the language confirmation processing (step S 51 - 2 ). 
     The server CPU  81 - 2  (see  FIG. 106 ) of the server  13 - 2  receives the conversation database setting signal transmitted from the gaming terminal  4 - 2  (step S 61 - 2 ) and makes a conversation database corresponding to the specified language activatable among the conversation database corresponding to plural languages in the HDD  34 - 2  (step S 62 - 2 ). 
     Subsequently, the server CPU  81 - 2  sends an activatable signal indicating that the conversation database is being activatable to the gaming terminal  4 - 2  (step S 63 - 2 ). The gaming terminal  4 - 2  receives the activatable signal (step S 52 - 2 ). As a result, the conversation database corresponding to the player&#39;s language is made available in the gaming terminal  4 - 2  and the conversational processing using the conversation engine is made available. 
     Next, the translating program setting processing of step S 302 - 2  in  FIG. 133  will be described with reference to a flow chart shown in  FIG. 141 . 
     The terminal CPU  91 - 2  of the gaming terminal  4 - 2  sends a setting signal of the translating program between the player&#39;s language (e.g., Japanese) and the reference language (e.g., English) to the server  13 - 2  via the network based on the player&#39;s language determined in the language confirmation processing (step S 11 - 2 ). 
     The server CPU  81 - 2  (see  FIG. 106 ) of the server  13 - 2  receives the translating program setting signal transmitted from the gaming terminal  4 - 2  (step S 21 - 2 ) and makes a specified translating program (e.g., a “Japanese-English” translating program) activatable among translating programs corresponding to plural languages in the HDD  34 - 2  (step S 22 - 2 ). 
     Subsequently, the server CPU  81 - 2  sends an activatable signal indicating that the translating program is being activatable to the gaming terminal  4 - 2  (step S 23 - 2 ). The gaming terminal  4 - 2  receives the activatable signal (step S 12 - 2 ). As a result, the translating program for translating the player&#39;s language into the reference language is made available in the gaming terminal  4 - 2 . 
     Then, conversations using the conversation engine corresponding to the player&#39;s language are made available by the above-mentioned conversation database setting processing being executed. Therefore, since conversations using the language of the player playing at each of the gaming terminals  4 - 2  are enabled, games can be processed smoothly. Furthermore, messages for each player can be translated into the player&#39;s language and displayed on the display  8 - 2  by the above-mentioned translating program setting processing being executed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to understand message. 
     Next, the betting period confirmation processing of step S 303 - 2  in  FIG. 133  will be explained with reference to a flow chart shown in  FIG. 135 . As shown in  FIG. 135 , the terminal CPU  91 - 2  confirms whether or not the betting period start signal has been received from the server CPU  81 - 2  (step S 311 - 2 ). If the betting period start signal has been received (YES in step S 311 - 2 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 2  sets the flag F in the RAM  93 - 2  to “1” which indicates that it is under the betting period (step S 312 - 2 ) and then terminates the betting period confirmation processing. 
     On the other hand, if the betting time start signal has not been received (NO in step S 311 - 2 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 2  confirms whether or not the betting period end signal has been received from the server CPU  81 - 2  (step S 313 - 2 ). If the betting period end signal has been received (YES in step S 313 - 2 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 2  sets the flag F in the RAM  93 - 2  to “0” which indicates that it is not under the betting period (step S 314 - 2 ) and then terminates the betting period confirmation processing. If the betting period end signal has not been received (NO in step S 313 - 2 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 2  terminates the betting period confirmation processing. 
     Next, in the bet accepting processing of step S 304 - 2  in  FIG. 133 , as shown in  FIG. 136 , the terminal CPU  91 - 2  confirms whether or not the flag F in the RAM  93 - 2  is set to “0” (step S 321 - 2 ). If the flag F is set to “0” (YES in step S 321 - 2 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 2  terminates the bet accepting processing. 
     On the other hand, if the flag F is not set to “0” (NO in step S 321 - 2 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 2  accepts a bet by a player. In this case, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  outputs a sound message “Bet acceptance starts.” from the speaker  10 - 2  using the conversation engine and the translating program. Specifically, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  sends a message data “Bet acceptance starts.” in the reference language (e.g., English) to the server  13 - 2  shown in  FIG. 106 . The server CPU  81 - 2  translates the message data into the player&#39;s language (e.g., Japanese) using the translating program (e.g., a “Japanese-English” translating program) stored in the HDD  34 - 2  and sends back the translated data to the gaming terminal  4 - 2 . Then, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  receives the translated data and converts the translated data into sound data using the conversation engine to outputs from the speaker  10 - 2 . Therefore, the message “Bet acceptance starts.” is output from the speaker in the player&#39;s language (e.g., Japanese). 
     In addition, for example, if a player utters “Tell me how to bet. (in Japanese)” into the microphone  15 - 2 , the conversation engine analyzes this utterance using the Japanese conversation database and outputs a sound reply “Please insert medals into a medal insertion slot or press bet buttons. (in Japanese)” from the speaker  10 - 2 . 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  confirms whether or not the remaining betting period has reached the last five seconds with the remaining time displayed on the bet time counter  69 - 2  being “5” (step S 322 - 2 ). If the remaining time has reached the last 5 seconds (YES in step S 322 - 2 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 2  displays a message to preannounce the end of the betting period on the bet screen  61 - 2  (step S 323 - 2 ). Simultaneously, a sound message “Five seconds left for bets.” is output from the speaker  10 - 2  in the player&#39;s language. In addition, for example, if the player&#39;s language were Japanese, a sentence “Betting time will expire soon.” shown in  FIG. 139  would be displayed in Japanese in the display area  61 A- 2  on the bet screen  61 - 2  of the display  8 - 2 . 
     On the other hand, if the remaining time has not reached the last five seconds (it remains more than five seconds) (NO in step S 322 - 2 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 2  proceeds to the step S 324 - 2 . 
     The terminal CPU  91 - 2  detects a bet placed by a player (step S 324 - 2 ). A chip betting is detected by the player&#39;s touching on the bet area  72 - 2  in the betting board  60 - 2  or on the bet buttons  66 - 2  via the touchscreen  50 - 2 . In addition, a bet can be accepted by way of a player&#39;s utterance into the microphone  15 - 2  and recognition of this utterance by the conversation engine. For example, a player makes an utterance “I will bet fifty credits.” after having selected a desired bet area  72 - 2  on the touchscreen  50 - 2 . As a result, the utterance is detected via the microphone  15 - 2  and its sound data are analyzed by the conversation engine, and thereby a fifty-credit bet is confirmed. Furthermore, a reply “Fifty credits have been bet!” is output from the speaker  10 - 2 . After a bet with a chip(s) has been detected, a chip mark  71 - 2  with an amount of the bet chip(s) is displayed on a specified bet area  72 - 2  on the display  8 - 2 . 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  confirms whether or not the player&#39;s bet has been confirmed (step S 325 - 2 ). The betting confirmation is detected by the player&#39;s touching on the bet confirmation button  65 - 2  on the display  8 - 2  via the touchscreen  50 - 2 . 
     If it is confirmed that the player&#39;s bet has not been confirmed (NO in step S 325 - 2 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 2  confirms whether or not the flag F in the RAM  93 - 2  is set to “0” (step S 326 - 2 ). If the flag F is not set to “0” (NO in step S 326 - 2 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 2  returns the processing to step S 322 - 2 . 
     On the other hand, if the flag F is set to “0” (YES in step S 326 - 2 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 2  fixes the player&#39;s bet forcibly (step S 327 - 2 ) and then sifts the processing to after-mentioned step  329 - 2 . 
     Alternatively, if it is confirmed that the player&#39;s bet has been confirmed (YES in step S 325 - 2 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 2  confirms whether or not the flag F in the RAM  93 - 2  is set to “0” or not (step S 328 - 2 ). If the flag F is not set to “0” (NO in step S 328 - 2 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 2  repeats step S 328 - 2 . On the contrary, if the flag F in the RAM  93 - 2  is set to “0” (YES in step S 328 - 2 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 2  proceeds to step S 329 - 2 . 
     The terminal CPU  91 - 2  closes acceptation of betting operations via the touchscreen  50 - 2  (step S 329 - 2 ). Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  sends the player&#39;s betting information (the specified bet area  72 - 2 , the number of bet chips (bet amount)) of the gaming terminal  4 - 2  to the server CPU  81 - 2  (step S 330 - 2 ). 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  changes the screen image on the display  8 - 2  (step S 331 - 2 ). Specifically, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  firstly switches the screen image on the display  8 - 2  to the bet screen  61 - 2  including an indication of the betting period expiry. 
     Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  receives the result of the JP bonus game determination processing executed by the server CPU  81 - 2  from the server CPU  81 - 2  (step S 332 - 2 ). The result of the JP bonus game determination includes the information which indicates: whether or not to execute the JP bonus game at any of the gaming terminals  4 - 2 ; which of the nine gaming terminals  4 - 2  is to win the JP (or all of the gaming terminals  4 - 2  are to lose) in the case where it is determined to execute the JP bonus game; and which JP (“MEGA”, “MAJOR” or “MINI”) is to be awarded in the case of the JP winning. 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  determines whether or not to execute the JP bonus game based on the result of the JP bonus game determination processing received in step S 332 - 2  (step S 333 - 2 ). In the case where it is determined to execute the JP bonus game in the gaming terminal  4 - 2 , the terminal CPU  91 - 2  executes a prescribed selection-type JP bonus game. And then, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  displays the bonus game result (whether or not the JP has been awarded) in the bet screen  61 - 2  on the display  8 - 2  (step S 334 - 2 ) based on the determination result received in step S 332 - 2 . 
     In the case where it is determined not to execute the JP bonus game in the gaming terminal  4 - 2  in step S 333 - 2 , or after the processing in step S 334 - 2 , the terminal CPU  91 - 2  receives the payout result of credits from the server CPU  81 - 2  (step S 335 - 2 ). Note that the payout result of credits includes the payout result for the game and the JP payout result for the JP bonus game. Here, in case of the payout of five hundred medals to be awarded for example, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  will output a sound message “Five hundred medals is awarded” from the speaker  10 - 2  in the player&#39;s language (for example, in Japanese). 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  awards a payout according to the payout result received in step S 335 - 2  (step S 336 - 2 ). Specifically, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  stores, in the RAM  93 - 2 , the credit data corresponding to the payout for the game and the credit data corresponding to the currently accumulated JP credits if the JP is awarded in the gaming terminal  4 - 2 . Then, when the payout button  5 - 2  has been touched, medals corresponding to the credits stored in the RAM  93 - 2  (usually, one medal per one credit) are paid out from the medal payout chute  12 - 2 . Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  terminates the bet accepting processing. 
     It is obvious from the above description that the terminal controller of the present invention is configured by the terminal CPU  91 - 2  in the roulette gaming machine  1 - 2  of the third embodiment. 
     Next, the history storing processing in respect to a player&#39;s smart card will be explained with reference to  FIG. 142 . As explained above, a smart card is player&#39;s member&#39;s card or credit card and stores data on player&#39;s playing history (history information) therein together with player&#39;s identification data. The history data include information on kinds of games previously played, points awarded in previously played games, the player&#39;s language used in playing games and so on. 
     Furthermore, data equivalent to coins, bills or credits are stored in a smart card and items can be purchased with the smart card. In addition, information such as a restaurant(s) previously visited, a beverage(s) previously ordered, a purchased souvenir(s) and so on can be stored in the smart card in addition to information on the game plays. 
     As shown in  FIG. 142 , the terminal CPU  91 - 2  of the gaming terminal  4 - 2  determines whether or not a smart card has been inserted into the card reader  16 - 2  (see  FIG. 102 ) (step S 151 - 2 ). Then, when a smart card insertion has been detected and a game play(s) has been done in the gaming terminal  4 - 2 , history data on the game play(s) are stored in the smart card (step S 152 - 2 ). 
     Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the player has purchased an item(s) with the smart card (step S 153 - 2 ). 
     And then, when the player has purchased an item(s) with the smart card, for example, purchasing a souvenir(s) at a souvenir shop, having a meal(s) at a restaurant, enjoying massaging service or the like, information with respect to these is stored in the smart card (step S 154 - 2 ). For example, information such as “purchasing wine on Δ/Δ (month and day) at OO (liquor shop name)” is stored in the smart card. In this manner, various history data are stored in the player&#39;s smart card. 
     Next, the message output processing of step S 305 - 2  in  FIG. 133  will be explained. The message output processing is composed of “message sending processing” due to which the sever  13 - 2  sends a message to the gaming terminals  4 - 2  and “message notifying processing” due to which a message received at the gaming terminal  4 - 2  is notified to a player. 
     Hereinafter, the message sending processing will be explained with reference to  FIG. 143 . The server CPU  81 - 2  shown in  FIG. 106  determines whether or not a message(s) has been externally input (step S 161 - 2 ). Specifically, as shown in  FIG. 147 , a text string “Now accepting a message input.” and an “INPUT START” image  86 - 2  are displayed on the LCD  32 - 2  of the server  13 - 2  shown in  FIG. 106 . When the “INPUT START” image  86  has been touched by a user, this touching operation is detected via the touchscreen  32 A- 2  and a message input is started. A message input is conducted by an operation in which the user input a message via the keyboard  33 - 2  or an operation in which a message is input as sound data due to a user&#39;s utterance into the microphone  35 - 2 . The user can input a message to be provided to players by these operations. 
     Furthermore, the user inputs a classification on the input message. As shown in  FIG. 146 , message classifications includes “Souvenir information”, “Liquor stock information”, “Japanese restaurant info.”, “European or American restaurant info.”, “Chinese restaurant info.”, “Beverage service info.”, “Massage room info.”, “News” and “Other information”. Images relating to these are displayed on the LCD  32 - 2 , as shown in  FIG. 148 . Then, the user inputs a message classification by touching one of these images. For example, the user inputs a message “We are pleased to announce that we have this year&#39;s Beaujolais Nouveau in stock now. We are looking forward to your order.” by an utterance into the microphone  35 - 2  (see  FIG. 106 ) and further selects “Liquor stock information” shown in  FIG. 148 . 
     Subsequently, the server CPU  81 - 2  specify the message classification of the input message (step S 162 - 2 ). Further, the server CPU  81 - 2  search the gaming terminal(s) suitable for the message classification based on the history information of each smart card read out by the card reader  16 - 2  of each of the gaming terminals  4 - 2  (step S 163 - 2 ). 
     In this process, the server CPU  81 - 2  read out the history information in the smart card used at each of the gaming terminals  4 - 2  via the network to determine whether or not there is history information suitable for the message classification among the history information stored in the smart cards. And then, the gaming terminal(s) at which the smart card storing the history information suitable for the message classification is used, is set as the destination gaming terminal(s)  4  of the message. 
     For example, if a history of previously purchasing wine is included in information stored in a smart card, the gaming terminal  4 - 2  at which the smart card is used is set as the destination gaming terminal  4 - 2  of a liquor stock information message. 
     Subsequently, the server CPU  81 - 2  sends the message to the gaming terminal(s)  4  set as a destination. Therefore, the message “We are pleased to announce that we have this year&#39;s Beaujolais Nouveau in stock now. We are looking forward to your order.” is sent to the gaming terminal(s)  4  of a player(s) who purchased liquor in the past. 
     Next, the message notifying processing executed at each of the gaming terminals  4 - 2  will be explained with reference to a flow chart shown in  FIG. 144 . 
     The terminal CPU  91 - 2  shown in  FIG. 108  determines whether a player is present or absent (step S 171 - 2 ). Specifically, if a smart card has been inserted in the above-mentioned card reader  16 - 2 , it is determined that a player is present. If no smart card has been inserted in the card reader  16 - 2 , it is determined that a player is absent. Note that it may be possible to detect a presence of a player based on a method in which it is detected whether or not a pressure is detected by a pressure sensor provided on a seat on which a player sits, another method in which image processing is made to an image capturing a player by a camera, or the like. 
     Then, if it is determined that a player is present (YES in step S 171 - 2 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 2  determines whether or not the message sent from the server  13 - 2  has been received (step S 172 - 2 ). If the message has been received (Yes in step S 172 - 2 ), the message in the reference language (for example, English) is translated into the player&#39;s language (for example, Japanese) using the translating program (step S 173 - 2 ). 
     Subsequently, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  converts the translated message into sound data using the conversation engine to be output from the speaker  10 - 2  (step S 174 - 2 ). 
     For example, upon receiving the English message “We are pleased to announce that we have this year&#39;s Beaujolais Nouveau in stock now. We are looking forward to your order.” sent from the server  13 - 2 , the terminal CPU  91 - 2  translated the message into the player&#39;s language Japanese to sound-output it from the speaker  10 - 2 . Therefore, the player can recognize, in his/her language Japanese, that Beaujolais Nouveau is in stock. 
     Next, a modified example of the message notifying processing executed at each of the gaming terminals  4 - 2  will be explained with reference to a flow chart shown in  FIG. 145 . 
     First, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  determines whether a player is present or absent (step S 181 - 2 ). Specifically, if a smart card has been inserted in the above-mentioned card reader  16 - 2 , it is determined that a player is present. If no smart card has been inserted in the card reader  16 - 2 , it is determined that a player is absent. 
     Then, if it is determined that a player is present (YES in step S 181 - 2 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 2  determines whether or not the message sent from the server  13 - 2  has been received (step S 182 - 2 ). If the message has been received (Yes in step S 182 - 2 ), the message in the reference language (for example, English) is translated into the player&#39;s language (for example, Japanese) using the translating program (step S 183 - 2 ). 
     Subsequently, the terminal CPU  91 - 2  displays the translated message on the display  8 - 2  (step S 184 - 2 ). 
     For example, upon receiving the English message “We are pleased to announce that we have this year&#39;s Beaujolais Nouveau in stock now. We are looking forward to your order.” sent from the server  13 - 2 , the terminal CPU  91 - 2  translated the message into the player&#39;s language Japanese to display it on the display  8 - 2 . Specifically, as shown in  FIG. 149 , the message “We are pleased to announce that we have this year&#39;s Beaujolais Nouveau in stock now. We are looking forward to your order.” is displayed in Japanese in the display area  61 A- 2  on the betting screen  61 - 2  shown in  FIG. 105 . Therefore, the player can recognize, in his/her language Japanese, that Beaujolais Nouveau is in stock. 
     In addition, in another example as shown in  FIG. 150 , in case where a message had been input by the user is “We Japanese restaurant OO are pleased to announce that we have fresh king crabs in stock now. We are looking forward to your visit.”, its message classification is classified to “Japanese restaurant information” (see  FIG. 146 ). Therefore, this message is sent to the player who visited the Japanese restaurant in the past and shown on the display  8 - 2  after being translated into the player&#39;s language Japanese. 
     Furthermore, in yet another example as shown in  FIG. 151 , in case where a message had been input by the user is “Mr. Bush is sure to be elected the President of United states of America.”, its message classification is classified to “News” (see  FIG. 146 ). Therefore, this message is sent to all of the gaming terminals  4 - 2  and shown on each display  8 - 2  after being translated into each player&#39;s language (Japanese in  FIG. 151 ). 
     In this manner, a player&#39;s language is confirmed by the conversation engine and a conversation with a player is done in the language in the gaming system according to the third embodiment. For example, if the player uses Japanese, information relating to a game will be given to the player as a sound message(s) in Japanese. In addition, a player&#39;s utterance in Japanese is analyzed to proceed a game. Therefore, the player can play a game by having a voice conversation in the player&#39;s language. 
     In addition, in case where messages relating to various information have been input at the server  13 - 2 , a destination gaming terminal(s)  4  is selected based on their message classifications and the history information stored in the smart cards used at the gaming terminals  4 - 2 . As a result, the messages are sent to players who needs the message and uninterested messages are not sent. 
     Fourth Embodiment 
     Next, the fourth embodiment of the game execution processing will be explained. In the fourth embodiment, conversation data of the conversation database corresponding to the player&#39;s language are transmitted to the gaming terminal  4 - 2  among the conversation database corresponding to plural languages stored in the HDD  34 - 2  of the server  13 - 2 . In addition, the translating program to be used is transmitted to the gaming terminal  4 - 2  among plural translating programs stored in the HDD  34 - 2 . Then, the gaming terminal  4 - 2  downloads the conversation data and the translating program that have been transmitted to the second external storage unit  76 - 2  (see  FIG. 108 ). The terminal CPU  91 - 2  of the gaming terminal  4 - 2  executes a roulette game with the conversation data and the translating program that have been downloaded. 
     Hereinafter, the game execution processing according to the fourth embodiment will be explained with reference to a flow chart shown in  FIG. 152 . As shown in  FIG. 152 , the terminal CPU  91 - 2  first executes the language identifying processing (step S 300 - 2 ), then executes conversation data download processing (step S 301   a - 2 ), then executes translating program download processing (step S 302   a - 2 ), then executes the betting period confirmation processing (step S 303 - 2 ), then executes the bet acceptance processing (step S 304 - 2 ), and then executes the message output processing (step S 305 - 2 ). 
     Since the language confirmation processing of step S 300 - 2 , the betting period confirmation processing of step S 303 - 2 , the bet acceptance processing of step S 304 - 2  and the message output processing of step S 305 - 2  are similar to those of the above-described third embodiment, their description is omitted. Hereinafter, the conversation data download processing of step S 301   a  will be explained with reference to a flow chart shown in  FIG. 153 . 
     The terminal CPU  91 - 2  of the gaming terminal  4 - 2  sends a conversation data setting signal corresponding to the player&#39;s language (e.g., Japanese) to the server  13 - 2  via the network based on the player&#39;s language determined in the language confirmation processing (step S 71 - 2 ). 
     The server CPU  81 - 2  (see  FIG. 106 ) of the server  13 - 2  receives the conversation data setting signal transmitted from the gaming terminal  4 - 2  (step S 81 - 2 ) and then acquires the conversation data of the specified conversation database among conversation database corresponding to plural languages in the HDD  34 - 2  to send it to the gaming terminal  4 - 2  via the network (step S 82 - 2 ). 
     The gaming terminal  4 - 2  receives the conversation data (step S 72 - 2 ). Furthermore, the gaming terminal  4 - 2  downloads the received conversation data to the second external storage unit  76 - 2  (step S 73 - 2 ). 
     Next, the translating program download processing of step S 302   a - 2  in  FIG. 152  will be explained with reference to a flow chart shown in  FIG. 154 . 
     The terminal CPU  91 - 2  of the gaming terminal  4 - 2  sends a setting signal of the translating program between the player&#39;s language (e.g., Japanese) and the reference language (e.g., English) to the server  13 - 2  via the network based on the player&#39;s language determined in the language confirmation processing (step S 31 - 2 ). 
     The server CPU  81 - 2  (see  FIG. 106 ) of the server  13 - 2  receives the translating program setting signal transmitted from the gaming terminal  4 - 2  (step S 41 - 2 ) and reads out the specified translating program (e.g., a “Japanese-English” translating program) among plural translating programs in the HDD  34 - 2  to send it to the gaming terminal  4 - 2  via the network (step S 42 - 2 ). 
     The gaming terminal  4 - 2  receives the translating program (step S 32 - 2 ). Furthermore, the gaming terminal  4 - 2  downloads the received translating program to the second external storage unit  76 - 2  (step S 33 - 2 ). 
     In this manner, since the conversation data used in the conversation engine is downloaded to the second external storage unit  76 - 2 , a conversation with the player using this conversation data can be done. Furthermore, since the translating program to be used for notifying a message to a player is similarly downloaded to the second external storage unit  76 - 2 , the message to be notified to the player can be translated into the player&#39;s language to be displayed. 
     As described above, in the gaming system according to the fourth embodiment, the conversation data used in the conversation engine and the translating program used at the gaming terminal  4 - 2  are downloaded in the second external storage unit  76 - 2  and then utilized. According to this configuration, similarly to the above-described third embodiment, a player can hear a sound message output in his/her language and can play a game through an utterance(s) in his/her language. Furthermore, the player can recognize the message displayed on the display  8 - 2  in his/her language. 
     Fifth and Sixth Embodiments 
       FIG. 155  is a flow chart showing a general process flow of game execution processing executed in a gaming system according to fifth and sixth embodiments of the present invention.  FIG. 156  is a perspective view showing a gaming terminal  4 - 3  provided in a plurality in the gaming system according to the fifth and sixth embodiments of the present invention.  FIG. 162  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the gaming system. Hereinafter, the general process flow in the gaming system according to the present invention will be explained with reference to the drawings. 
     A terminal CPU  91 - 3  shown in  FIG. 162  confirms a player&#39;s language on a gaming terminal  4 - 3  through a player&#39;s input operation or an after-mentioned conversation engine (step S 1 - 3  in  FIG. 155 ). A recognition processing of language will be explained later. 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  configures a conversation database  1500 - 3  corresponding to the language confirmed in the process of step S 1 - 3  among a conversation database  1500 - 3  (see  FIG. 163 ) stored in a hard disc drive (HDD)  34 - 3  of a server  13 - 3  shown in  FIG. 160  and corresponding to plural languages (step S 2 - 3 ). For example, if the player&#39;s language is “Japanese”, a conversation database  1500 - 3  corresponding to “Japanese” is configured. 
     The terminal CPU  91 - 3  configures a translating program corresponding to the language confirmed in the process of step S 1 - 3  from translating programs which are stored in the HDD  34 - 3  of the server  13 - 3  shown in  FIG. 160  and correspond to plural languages (step S 3 - 3 ). For example, if the player&#39;s language is “Japanese”, a “Japanese-English” translating program is configured. 
     Furthermore, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  reads out a character image corresponding to the player&#39;s language among plural character images stored in an image memory  77 - 3  shown in  FIG. 162  to display the character image on a display  8 - 3  (step S 4 - 3 ). For example, if the player&#39;s language is Japanese, a character image which looks like a Japanese is selected. If the player&#39;s language is Chinese, a character image which looks like a Chinese is selected. If the player&#39;s language is Arabic, a character image which looks like an Arabic is selected. Therefore, the player&#39;s language used at the gaming terminal can be understood intuitively when someone except the player see the display  8 - 3 . 
     Subsequently, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  executes a roulette game with conducting a conversation with the player using a conversation engine (step S 5 - 3 ). 
     In a conversational processing during a roulette game execution, an utterance input into a microphone  15 - 3  of the gaming terminal  4 - 3  is analyzed (step S 5   a - 3 ). Then, a reply to the utterance is generated by the conversation engine and the generated reply is output as sound from a speaker  10 - 3  (step S 5   b - 3 ). 
     For example, if the player makes an utterance “Tell me how to place a bet!” into the microphone  15 - 3  in Japanese, the conversation engine analyzes the utterance using the Japanese conversation database and outputs a reply sentence “Please insert medals into a medal insertion slot or press bet buttons.” in Japanese from the speaker  10 - 3 . Since the terminal CPU  91 - 3  outputs the reply in the player&#39;s language, the player can easily understand a message output from the gaming terminal  4 - 3   a.    
     Furthermore, in case where a message(s) is to be notified to the player, this message is displayed on the display  8 - 3  in the player&#39;s language confirmed in the process of step S 1 - 3  (step S 5   c - 3 ). For example, when a bet acceptance is to be started, a text message “Bet acceptance starts.” is displayed in Japanese. Therefore, the player can recognize the message displayed on the display  8 - 3  in the player&#39;s familiar language. 
     Fifth Embodiment 
     Next, a gaming system in the embodiments according to the present invention will be explained in detail.  FIG. 156  is a perspective view showing a gaming terminal in the fifth embodiment according to the present invention.  FIG. 157  is an apparent perspective view showing a general configuration of a roulette game machine  1 - 3  including the gaming terminal shown in  FIG. 156 , which is an example of the gaming system of the embodiment according to the present invention.  FIG. 158  is a plan view of a roulette unit  2 - 3  provided in the roulette game machine  1 - 3 .  FIG. 159  is a screen image example displayed on a display of the gaming terminal shown in  FIG. 156 . 
     Plural (nine in the drawing) gaming terminals  4 - 3  in the fifth embodiment shown in  FIG. 156  are provided as parts of the roulette game machine  1 - 3  shown in  FIG. 157 . In addition, the roulette game machine  1 - 3  includes the roulette unit  2 - 3  and a server (host server)  13 - 3 . Each of the gaming terminals  4 - 3 , the roulette unit  2 - 3  and the server  13 - 3  can be connected each other via a local network and so on. 
     At the roulette unit  2 - 3 , the roulette game will be executed under the control of the server  13 - 3 , and the game can be visible by players. Players use the gaming terminals  4 - 3  which are arranged around the roulette unit  2 - 3  to participate in a roulette game displayed by the roulette unit  2 - 3 . In the present embodiment, the roulette game machine  1 - 3  includes the nine gaming terminals  4 - 3 . Therefore, up to nine players can participate in a communal roulette game simultaneously. 
     A roulette game displayed on the roulette unit  2 - 3  is executed repeatedly at prescribed time intervals under the control of the server  13 - 3 . Accordingly, a player who participates in a game play with each of the gaming terminals  4 - 3  can place a bet for a current roulette game. A display  8 - 3  is provided at each of the gaming terminals  4 - 3  for placing the bet on the current roulette game. A betting screen  61 - 3  (see  FIG. 159 ) for betting on a roulette game is displayed on the display  8 - 3 . Displayed contents on the betting screen  61 - 3  will be explained later in detail. 
       FIG. 158  is a plan view of the roulette unit provided in the roulette game machine shown in  FIG. 157 . As shown in  FIG. 158 , the roulette unit  2 - 3  includes a frame  21 - 3  and a roulette wheel  22 - 3  which is accommodated and supported rotatably inside the frame  21 - 3 . Plural number pockets  23 - 3  (thirty-eight in total in the present embodiment) are formed on an upper surface of the roulette wheel  22 - 3 . In addition, number plates  25 - 3  are provided on an upper surface of the roulette wheel  22 - 3  outside the number pockets  23 - 3  for displaying numbers “0”, “00” and “1” to “36” in correspondence to the respective number pockets  23 - 3 . 
     A ball launching port  36 - 3  is provided inside the frame  21 - 3 . A ball launching unit  104 - 3  (see  FIG. 161 ) is coupled with the ball launching port  36 - 3 . With driving the ball launching unit  104 - 3 , a ball  27 - 3  is launched from the ball launching port  36 - 3  onto the roulette wheel  22 - 3 . In addition, the entire roulette unit  2 - 3  is covered by a hemispherical transparent acrylic cover  28 - 3  (see  FIG. 157 ) covers over. 
     A wheel drive motor  106 - 3  (see  FIG. 161 ) is provided beneath the roulette wheel  22 - 3 . As the wheel drive motor  106 - 3  is driven, the roulette wheel  22 - 3  spins. Metal plates (not shown) are attached on a back surface of the roulette wheel  22 - 3  with space apart each other at prescribed intervals. A proximity sensor of a pocket position detecting circuit  107 - 3  (see  FIG. 161 ) detects these metal plates to detect the positions of the number pockets  23 - 3 . 
     The frame  21 - 3  is moderately inclined toward its inner side and the guide wall  29 - 3  is formed around an intermediate circumference of the frame  21 - 3 . The guide wall  29 - 3  guides the launched ball  27 - 3  to spin with counterworking a centrifugal force of the ball  27 - 3 . The ball  27 - 3 , as its velocity slows down, loses its centrifugal force and rolls down on the inclined surface of the frame  21 - 3 . And then, the ball  27 - 3  reaches the spinning roulette wheel  22 - 3  and gets across the number plates  25 - 3 . The ball  27 - 3  falls into one of the number pockets  23 - 3 . As a result, the number of the number plate  25 - 3  corresponding to the number pocket  23 - 3  into which the ball  27 - 3  has fallen, is detected by a ball sensor  105 - 3  and determined as a winning number. 
     Next, the configuration of the gaming terminal  4 - 3  will be explained. 
     As shown in  FIG. 156 , the gaming terminal  4 - 3  includes at least a medal insertion slot  7 - 3  for inserting game media having currency values such as cash, chips, medals and so on, and the above-mentioned display  8 - 3  for displaying images related to the game on its upper surface. The gaming terminal  4 - 3  accepts a player&#39;s betting operation via the medal insertion slot  7 - 3  and the display  8 - 3 . A player can advance a displayed game by operating a touchscreen  50 - 3  (see  FIG. 162 ) provided on an upper surface of the display  8 - 3  and so on while watching the images displayed on the display  8 - 3 . Note that, in the following explanation, the game media may be referred as their representative “medals”. 
     In addition to the medal insertion slot  7 - 3  and the display  8 - 3  described above, a payout button  5 - 3 , a ticket printer  6 - 3 , a bill insertion slot  9 - 3 , a speaker  10 - 3 , a microphone  15 - 3  and a card reader  16 - 3  are provided on the upper surface of the gaming terminal  4 - 3 . A medal payout chute  12 - 3  and a medal tray  14 - 3  are provided on a front face of the gaming terminal  4 - 3 . 
     The payout button  5 - 3  is a button for inputting a command for paying out credited medals from the medal payout chute  12 - 3  onto the medal tray  14 - 3 . The ticket printer  6 - 3  prints out a bar code ticket including the data such as the credits, the date, and the identification number of the gaming terminal  4 - 3 . A player can use the bar code ticket at another gaming terminal  4 - 3  to place a bet on a game at that gaming terminal  4 - 3  or can exchange the bar code ticket to bills and so on at a prescribed location in a gaming facility (for example, a cashier in a casino). 
     The bill insertion slot  9 - 3  judges the legitimacy of bills and accepts legitimate bills. The speaker  10 - 3  outputs music, effect sounds, sound messages for a player and so on. The microphone  15 - 3  collects sound messages uttered by a player. 
     A smart card can be inserted into the card reader  16 - 3 . The card reader  16 - 3  reads data from the inserted smart card and writes data into the inserted card. The smart card is carried by a player and corresponds to the player&#39;s member&#39;s card, credit card or the like. 
     A smart card stores data about playing history played by a player (playing history data) together with data for identifying the player. Information on game kinds played, points provided in played games, language kind used by the player in game plays and so on are included in the playing history data. Data equivalent to coins, bills or credits may be stored in a smart card. Read-from/write-into method with a smart card may employ contact type or non-contact type (RFID type). Alternatively, a magnetic stripe card may be employed. 
     A WIN lamp  11 - 3  is provided on an upper portion of the display  8 - 3  of each gaming terminal  4 - 3 . In the case where the number (“0”, “00” and “1” to “36” in the present embodiment) on which a bet has been placed at the gaming terminal  4 - 3  in a game comes to a winning number, the WIN lamp  11 - 3  of the winning gaming terminal  4 - 3  will be turned on. In addition, in the jackpot (referred hereafter also as JP) bonus game for awarding JP, the WIN lamp  11 - 3  of the JP winning gaming terminal  4 - 3  will be turned on similarly. Note that the WIN lamp  11 - 3  is provided at a position that is visible from all of the arranged gaming terminals  4 - 3  (nine in the present embodiment) so that other players playing at the same roulette game machine  1 - 3  can always check turning-on of the WIN lamp  11 - 3 . 
     A medal sensor  97 - 3  (see  FIG. 162 ) is provided inside the medal insertion slot  7 - 3 . The medal sensor  97 - 3  identifies medals inserted into the medal insertion slot  7 - 3  and counts the inserted medals. In addition, a hopper  94 - 3  (see  FIG. 162 ) is provided inside the medal payout chute  12 - 3 . The hopper  94 - 3  payouts a prescribed number of medals from the medal payout chute  12 - 3 . 
       FIG. 159  is a diagram showing a screen image example displayed on the display  8 - 3 . A betting screen  61 - 3  shown in  FIG. 159  is displayed on the display  8 - 3  on each of the gaming terminals  4 - 3 . The betting screen  61 - 3  includes a table-type betting board  60 - 3 . A player can place a bet by operating a touchscreen  50 - 3  (see  FIG. 162 ) provided on a front surface of the display  8 - 3 , by using own chips, which are credited as an electronic data in the gaming terminal  4 - 3 . 
     Specifically, a player pointed out a bet area  72 - 3  (in a section of a number or a section of a number&#39;s mark, or on a grid line(s)) to place a chip for betting by a cursor  70 - 3 . Then, a bet chip amount is set by bet buttons  66 - 3  and the bet chip amount is fixed by a bet fixing button  65 - 3 . These setting and fixing are executed by player&#39;s fingers directly touching on the bet areas  72 - 3 , the bet buttons  66 - 3  and bet fixing button  65 - 3  displayed on the display  8 - 3 . 
     Note that the bet buttons  66 - 3  are provided with four kinds of buttons, a one-bet button  66 A- 3 , a five-bet button  66 B- 3 , a ten-bet button  66 C- 3  and a one-hundred-bet button  66 D- 3  for a bet chip amount capable of being placed by one operation. 
     A payout counter  67 - 3  displays a player&#39;s bet chip amount and a payout credits amount for a payout in the last game. In addition, a credit counter  68 - 3  displays the current credits owned by a player. Furthermore, a bet time counter  69 - 3  displays remaining time in which a player can place a bet. 
     Note that the next game starts at the time when the ball  27 - 3  launched onto the roulette wheel  27 - 3  fell into any one of the number pockets  23 - 3  and the current game has ended. 
     A MEGA counter  73 - 3  displaying a credit amount accumulated for a “MEGA” JP, a MAJOR counter  74 - 3  displaying a credit amount accumulated for a “MAJOR” JP and a MINI counter  75 - 3  displaying the number of credits accumulated for a “MINI” JP are provided at the right side of the bet time counter  69 - 3 . If any one of the JP&#39;s is won in a JP bonus game, a credit amount is awarded according to the winning JP among the JP&#39;s displayed on the counters  73 - 3  to  75 - 3  and then an initial value (200 credits for “MINI”, 5000 credits for “MAJOR” and 50000 credits for “MEGA”) is displayed the corresponding counter. 
       FIG. 160  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the roulette game machine  1 - 3  according to the present embodiment. As shown in  FIG. 160 , the roulette game machine  1 - 3  is configured with the server  13 - 3 , the roulette unit  2 - 3  connected to the server  13 - 3  via the local network and the plural gaming terminals  4 - 3  (nine in the present embodiment). Note that an internal configuration of the roulette unit  2 - 3  and an internal configuration of the gaming terminals  4 - 3  will be described later in detail. 
     The server  13 - 3  shown in  FIG. 160  includes a server CPU  81 - 3  for executing the overall control of the server  13 - 3 , a ROM  82 - 3 , a RAM  83 - 3 , a timer  84 - 3 , an LCD (liquid crystal display)  32 - 3  connected via an LCD driving circuit  85 - 3 , a keyboard  33 - 3 , the HDD  34 - 3  and a playing history storing unit (storing unit)  35 - 3 . 
     The server CPU  81 - 3  executes various processings according to input signals supplied from the gaming terminals  4 - 3  and data and programs stored in the ROM  82 - 3  and the RAM  83 - 3 . In addition, the server CPU  81 - 3  sends command signals to the gaming terminals  4 - 3  according to the processing results to control the gaming terminals  4 - 3  under its initiative. Specifically, the server CPU  81 - 3  transmits control signals to the roulette device  2 - 3  to control launching of the ball  27 - 3  and spinning of the roulette wheel  22 - 3 . 
     The ROM  82 - 3  is configured by a semiconductor memory or the like and stores programs which implement basic functions of the roulette game machine  1 - 3 , programs which execute notification of maintenance time and setting/management of notification condition, odds data of a roulette game (payout credits per one chip at winning), programs for controlling the gaming terminals  4 - 3  under their initiatives and so on. 
     In addition, the RAM  83 - 3  temporarily stores a chip-betting information supplied from each of the gaming terminals  4 - 3 , a winning number of the roulette unit  2 - 3  detected by the sensor, an accumulated JP credits, data on results of processings executed by the server CPU  81 - 3  and so on. 
     Furthermore, the timer  84 - 3  for counting time is connected to the server CPU  81 - 3 . Time information of the timer  84 - 3  is transmitted to the server CPU  81 - 3 . The server CPU  81 - 3  executes controls of spinning the roulette wheel  22 - 3  and launching the ball  27 - 3  based on the time information of the timer  84 - 3 . 
     The HDD  34 - 3  stores translating programs between English, which is set as a reference language, and various other languages. For example, plural translating programs are stored such as a “Japanese-English” translating program, a “Chinese-English” translating program or a “French-English” translating program. Note that, although an example case is explained in the present embodiment where “English” is represented as the reference language, the reference language is not limited to English but may be any other language. 
     Furthermore, the HDD  34 - 3  stores conversation data to be used in the conversation engine explained later. In other words, the HDD  34 - 3  includes a function as the conversation database  1500 - 3  shown in  FIG. 163 . The conversation database stores conversation data used at generating a reply to a player by the conversation engine and is provided for each of the plural languages. For example, a conversation database for English, a conversation database for Japanese, a conversation database for Chinese and so on are provided. 
     The playing history storing unit  35 - 3  stores playing results of roulette games played at each of the gaming terminals  4 - 3 . Specifically, the server  13 - 3  accesses the gaming terminals via the network at predetermined time intervals (for example, ten minutes) to acquire and store the playing results such as a winning percentage, a profit amount and a loss amount. The playing history storing unit  35 - 3  is linked to the above-mentioned conversation database  1500 - 3  and used when a conversation is conducted with the player using the conversation engine. Therefore, the player obtains information on the playing history of the gaming terminal  4 - 3  by conducting a conversation using the conversation engine. 
       FIG. 161  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the roulette unit  2 - 3  according to the present embodiment. As shown in  FIG. 161 , the roulette unit  2 - 3  includes a controller  109 - 3 , the pocket position detecting circuit  107 - 3 , the ball launching unit  104 - 3 , the ball sensor  105 - 3 , the wheel drive motor  106 - 3  and a ball collecting device  108 - 3 . 
     The controller  109 - 3  includes a CPU  101 - 3 , a ROM  102 - 3  and a RAM  103 - 3 . The CPU  101 - 3  controls launching the ball  27 - 3  and spinning the roulette wheel  22 - 3  based on control commands supplied from the server  13 - 3  and data and programs stored in the ROM  102 - 3  and the RAM  103 - 3 . 
     The pocket position detecting circuit  107 - 3  includes the proximity sensor to detect spinning position of the roulette wheel  22 - 3  by detecting the metal plates attached onto the roulette wheel  22 - 3 . 
     The ball launching unit  104 - 3  is a unit for launching the ball  27 - 3  onto the roulette wheel  22 - 3  from the ball launching port  36 - 3  (see  FIG. 158 ). The ball launching unit  104 - 3  launches the ball  27 - 3  at the initial speed and the timing set in a control data. 
     The ball sensor  105 - 3  is a unit for detecting the number pocket  23 - 3  into which the ball  27 - 3  has fallen. The wheel drive motor  106 - 3  is a unit for spinning the roulette wheel  22 - 3  and it stops its spinning when a motor driving time set in the control data has elapsed since a start of the driving. 
       FIG. 162  is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the gaming terminal according to the present embodiment. Note that each of the nine gaming terminals  4 - 3  has an identical configuration basically and one of the gaming terminals  4 - 3  will be explained as the representative hereinafter. 
     As shown in  FIG. 162 , the gaming terminal  4 - 3  includes a terminal controller  90 - 3  configured by a terminal CPU  91 - 3 , a ROM  92 - 3  and a RAM  93 - 3 . The ROM  92 - 3  is configured by a semiconductor memory or the like. The ROM  92 - 3  stores programs which implement basic functions of the gaming terminal  4 - 3 , various programs which are necessary for controlling the gaming terminal  4 - 3 , data tables and so on. In addition, the RAM  93 - 3  is a memory for temporarily storing various data calculated by the terminal CPU  91 - 3 , a credit amount currently owned by the player (deposited at the gaming terminal  4 - 3 ), a player&#39;s betting status, a flag F for indicating whether or not during the betting period and so on. 
     A payout button  5 - 3  (see  FIG. 156 ) is connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 3 . The payout button  5 - 3  is a button to be pressed by a player usually when the game is over. Medals will be paid out from the medal payout chute  12 - 3  according to credits which have been provided in games and currently owned by the player (usually one medal for one credit) when the payout button  5 - 3  is pressed by the player. 
     In addition, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  receives command signals from the sever CPU  81 - 3  and controls peripheral devices constituting the gaming terminal  4 - 3 , so as to proceed with the game at the gaming terminal  4 - 3 . Furthermore, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  executes various processings according to the above-mentioned input signals and data and programs stored in the ROM  92 - 3  and the RAM  93 - 3  depending on the processing contents. The terminal CPU  91 - 3  controls the peripheral devices constituting the gaming terminal  4 - 3  according to the processing results, so as to proceed with the game. 
     In addition, the hopper  94 - 3  is connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 3 . The hopper  94 - 3  payouts a prescribed number of medals from the medal payout chute  12 - 3  (see  FIG. 157 ) according to a command signal from the terminal CPU  91 - 3 . 
     Furthermore, the display  8 - 3  is connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 3  via an LCD drive circuit  95 - 3 . The LCD drive circuit  95 - 3  includes a program ROM, an image ROM, an image control CPU, a work RAM, a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a video RAM. The program ROM stores image control programs and various selection tables for displaying on the display  8 - 3 . The image ROM stores dot data for forming images to be displayed on the display  8 - 3 , for example. The image control CPU determines images to be displayed on the display  8 - 3  among the dot data in the image ROM according to the image control programs stored in the program ROM based on parameters set up in the terminal CPU  91 - 3 . The work RAM is provided as a temporary memory unit during an execution of the image control programs by the image control CPU. The VDP forms screen images according to the display contents determined by the image control CPU and outputs them to the display  8 - 3 . Note that the video RAM is provided as a temporary memory unit during the VDP forming screen images. 
     In addition, the touchscreen  50 - 3  is attached on the front surface of the display  8 - 3 . Information of a player&#39;s operation onto the touchscreen  50 - 3  is sent to the terminal CPU  91 - 3 . A player&#39;s chip-betting operation is done via the bet screen  61 - 3  (see  FIG. 159 ) on the touchscreen  50 - 3 . Specifically, the player&#39;s operation onto the touchscreen  50 - 3  is done for the selection of the bet area  72 - 3 , the input via the bet buttons  66 - 3  and the bet fixing button  65 - 3  and so on. The information of a player&#39;s operation is sent to the terminal CPU  91 - 3  when the touchscreen  50 - 3  has been operated. Then, the player&#39;s current betting information (the bet area and the bet amount placed via the bet screen  61 - 3 ) is stored into the RAM  93 - 3  sequentially according to that information. Furthermore, this betting information is sent to the server CPU  81 - 3  and stored in a betting information storing area in the RAM  83 - 3 . 
     In addition, a sound output circuit  96 - 3  and the speaker  10 - 3  are connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 3 . The speaker  10 - 3  outputs various effect sounds when various effects are generated and interactive conversation messages to a player for proceeding a game interactively based on output signals from the sound output circuit  96 - 3 . 
     In addition, a sound input circuit  98 - 3  and the microphone  15 - 3  are connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 3 . The microphone  15 - 3  transmits player&#39;s reply message sound in response to interactive message sound output from the speaker  10 - 3  to the terminal CPU  91 - 3  via the sound input circuit  98 - 3 . 
     Furthermore, a second external storage unit  76 - 3  is connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 3 . A conversation database of a language (Japanese, for example) of a player who is playing at the gaming terminal  4 - 3  is downloaded to the second external storage unit  76 - 3 . Additionally, a translating program between the player&#39;s language and the reference language, i.e. English, is downloaded. The second external storage unit  76 - 3  is configured by an HDD unit. Its details will be described later. 
     In addition, the image memory  77 - 3  is connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 3 . Character images corresponding to various languages are stored in the image memory  77 - 3 . For example, a character image which looks like a Japanese is stored with being associated with Japanese. A character image which looks like a Chinese is stored with being associated with Chinese. A character image which looks like an Arabic is stored with being associated with Arabic. 
     In addition, the medal sensor  97 - 3  is connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 3 . The medal sensor  97 - 3  detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot  7 - 3  (see  FIG. 157 ) and counts the inserted medals to send the counting result data to the terminal CPU  91 - 3 . The terminal CPU  91 - 3  increases the player&#39;s credit amount stored in the RAM  93 - 3  according to the data. 
     Furthermore, the WIN lamp  11 - 3  is connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 3 . The terminal CPU  91 - 3  lights up the WIN lamp  11 - 3  in a prescribed color when credits bet via the bet screen  61 - 3  has won or when a JP winning has been awarded. 
     In addition, a first external storage unit  99 - 3  is connected to the terminal CPU  91 - 3 . The first external storage unit  99 - 3  is configured by an HDD unit. The terminal CPU  91 - 3  reads/writes data from/to the first external storage unit  99 - 3  if needed. 
     The gaming terminal  4 - 3  having the terminal control unit  90 - 3  includes the conversation engine. At least some of the roulette game procedures on the gaming terminal  4 - 3  are executed by the conversation engine interactively with the player by using the display  8 - 3 , the speaker  10 - 3  and the microphone  15 - 3  as interfaces. Therefore, message sound for the player is output from the speaker  10 - 3  via the sound output circuit  96 - 3  in certain situations according to the roulette game procedures. In addition, contents of player&#39;s message sound input via the microphone  15 - 3  and the sound input circuit  98 - 3  are construed. 
     Such a conversation engine can be realized using a conversation controller described in, for example, United States patent application publication 2007/0094007, United States patent application publication 2007/0094008, United States patent application publication 2007/0094005 or United States patent application publication 2005/0094004. As will be explained hereinafter, such a conversation controller can be realized using the display  8 - 3 , the speaker  10 - 3 , the microphone  15 - 3 , the terminal controller  90 - 3  and the first external storage unit  99 - 3  of the gaming terminal  4 - 3 . 
     Here, a configuration of the conversation controller described in United States patent application publication 2007/0094007, which can be applied as the conversation engine installed in the gaming terminal  4 - 3  of the present embodiment, will be explained with reference to  FIGS. 163 to 184 .  FIG. 163  is a functional block diagram showing a configuration example of the conversation controller. 
     As shown in  FIG. 163 , the conversation controller  1000 - 3  comprises an input unit  1100 - 3 , a speech recognition unit  1200 - 3 , a conversation control unit  1300 - 3 , a sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 3 , a conversation database  1500 - 3 , an output unit  1600 - 3  and a speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 3 . 
     [Input Unit] 
     The input unit  1100 - 3  receives input information (user&#39;s utterance) input by a user. The input unit  1100 - 3  outputs a speech corresponding to contents of the received utterance as a voice signal to the speech recognition unit  1200 - 3 . Note that the input unit  1100 - 3  may be a character input unit such as a keyboard and a touchscreen. In this case, the after-mentioned speech recognition unit  1200 - 3  doesn&#39;t need to be provided. 
     [Speech Recognition Unit] 
     The speech recognition unit  1200 - 3  specifies a character string corresponding to the uttered contents based on the uttered contents obtained via the input unit  1100 - 3 . Specifically, the speech recognition unit  1200 - 3  that has received the voice signal from the input unit  1100 - 3  compares the received voice signal with the conversation database  1500 - 3  and dictionaries stored in the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 3  based on the voice signal to output a speech recognition result estimated based on the voice signal to the conversation control unit  1300 - 3 . In a configuration example shown in  FIG. 163 , the speech recognition unit  1200 - 3  requests acquisition of memory contents of the conversation database  1500 - 3  to the conversation control unit  1300 - 3  and then receives the memory contents of the conversation database  1500 - 3  which the conversation control unit  1300 - 3  retrieves according to the request from the speech recognition unit  1200 - 3 . However the speech recognition unit  1200 - 3  may directly retrieves the memory contents of the conversation database  1500 - 3  for comparing with the voice signal. 
     Configuration Example of Speech Recognition Unit 
       FIG. 164  is a functional block diagram showing a configuration example of the speech recognition unit  1200 - 3 . The speech recognition unit  1200 - 3  includes a feature extraction unit  1200 A- 3 , a buffer memory (BM)  1200 B- 3 , a word retrieving unit  1200 C- 3 , a buffer memory (BM)  1200 D- 3 , a candidate determination unit  1200 E- 3  and a word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 3 . The word retrieving unit  1200 C- 3  and the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 3  are connected to the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 3 . In addition, the candidate determination unit  1200 E- 3  is connected to the conversation database  1500 - 3  via the conversation control unit  1300 - 3 . 
     The speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 3  connected to the word retrieving unit  1200 C- 3  stores a phoneme hidden Markov model (hereinafter, the hidden Markov model is referred as the HMM). The phoneme HMM is described with various states and each of the states includes the following information. It is configured with (a) a state number, (b) an acceptable context class, (c) lists of a previous state and a subsequent state, (d) parameters of an output probability density distribution, and (e) a self-transition probability and a transition probability to a subsequent state. The phoneme HMM used in the present embodiment is generated by converting a prescribed Speaker-Mixture HMM in order to specify which speakers respective distributions are derived from. An output probability density function is a Mixture Gaussian distribution with a 34-dimensional diagonal covariance matrix. The speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 3  connected to the word retrieving unit  1200 C- 3  further stores a word dictionary. The word dictionary stores symbol strings each of which indicates a reading represented as a symbol per each word in the phoneme HMM. 
     A speaker&#39;s speech is input into a microphone or the like and then converted into a voice signal to be input to the feature extraction unit  1200 A- 3 . The feature extraction unit  1200 A- 3  converts the input voice signal from analog to digital and then extracts a feature parameter from the voice signal to output the feature parameter. There are various methods for extracting and outputting the feature parameter. For example, an LPC analysis is executed to extract a 34-dimensional feature parameter including a logarithm power, a 16-dimensional cepstrum coefficient, a Δ-logarithm power and a 16-dimensional Δ-cepstrum coefficient. The time series of the extracted feature parameters are input to the word retrieving unit  1200 C- 3  via the buffer memory (BM)  1200 B- 3 . 
     The word retrieving unit  1200 C- 3  retrieves word hypotheses with a one-pass Viterbi decoding method based on the feature parameters input from the feature extraction unit  1200 A- 3  via the buffer memory (BM)  1200 B- 3  by using the phoneme HMM and the word dictionary stored in the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 3 , and then calculates likelihoods. Here, the word retrieving unit  1200 C- 3  calculates a likelihood in a word and a likelihood from a speech start for each state of the phoneme HMM at each time. The likelihood is calculated each of an identification number of a calculating-object word, a speech start time of the word and a difference of a preceding word previously uttered before the word. The word retrieving unit  1200 C- 3  may reduce grid hypotheses of the lower likelihoods among all of the calculated likelihoods based on the phoneme HMM and the word dictionary in order to reduce a computing throughput. The word retrieving unit  1200 C- 3  outputs information on the retrieved word hypotheses and the likelihoods of the retrieved word hypotheses together with time information regarding an elapsed time from the speech start time (e.g. frame number) to the candidate determination unit  1200 E- 3  and the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 3  via the buffer memory (BM)  1200 D- 3 . 
     The candidate determination unit  1200 E- 3  compares the retrieved word hypotheses with topic specification information in a prescribed discourse space with reference to the conversation control unit  1300 - 3 , and then determines whether or not exists a coincident word hypothesis with the topic specification information in the prescribed discourse space among the retrieved word hypotheses. If the coincident word hypothesis exists, the candidate determination unit  1200 E- 3  outputs the coincident word hypothesis as a recognition result. On the other hand, if no coincident word hypothesis exists, the candidate determination unit  1200 E- 3  requires the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 3  to refine the retrieved word hypotheses. 
     An operation of the candidate determination unit  1200 E- 3  will be described. Here, it is assumed that the word retrieving unit  1200 C- 3  outputs plural word hypotheses (“KANTAKU (reclamation)”, “KATAKU (pretext)” and “KANTOKU (director)”) and plural likelihoods (recognition rates) for the respective word hypotheses; the prescribed discourse space relates to movies; the topic specification information of the prescribed discourse space includes “KANTOKU (director)” but neither “KANTAKU (reclamation)” nor “KATAKU (pretext)”; among the likelihoods (recognition rates) of “KANTAKU (reclamation)”, “KATAKU (pretext)” and “KANTOKU (director)”, “KANTAKU (reclamation)” is highest, “KANTOKU (director)” is lowest and “KATAKU (pretext)” is intermediate between the two. 
     In the above situation, the candidate determination unit  1200 E- 3  compares the retrieved word hypotheses with the topic specification information in the prescribed discourse space, and then specifies the coincident word hypothesis “KANTOKU (director)” with the topic specification information to output the word hypothesis “KANTOKU (director)” to the conversation control unit  1300 - 3  as the recognition result. Processed in this manner, the word hypothesis “KANTOKU (director)” relating to the current topic “movies” is selected ahead of the word hypotheses “KANTAKU (reclamation)” and “KATAKU (pretext)” with higher likelihoods. As a result, the recognition result appropriate with the discourse context can be output. 
     On the other hand, if no coincident word hypothesis exists, the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 3  operates to output the recognition result in response to the request from the candidate determination unit  1200 E- 3  to refine the retrieved word hypotheses. The word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 3  refines the retrieved word hypotheses for the same words having the same speech termination time and different speech start time per each initial phonetic environment of the same words with reference to a statistical language model stored in the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 3  based on the plural retrieved word hypotheses output from the word retrieving unit  1200 C- 3  via the buffer memory (BM)  1200 D- 3  so that one word hypothesis with the highest likelihood may be selected as a representative among all of the likelihoods calculated between the speech start and the utterance termination of the word. And then, the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 3  outputs one word string of the one word hypothesis with the highest likelihood as the recognition result among all word strings of the refined word hypotheses. In the present embodiment, the initial phonetic environment of the same word to be processed is preferably defined with a three-phoneme series containing the last phoneme of the word hypothesis preceding the same word and two initial phonemes of the word hypothesis of the same word. 
     A word refinement process executed by the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 3  will be described with reference to  FIG. 165 . 
     For example, it is assumed that the (i)th word Wi, which consists of a phonemic string a 1 , a 2 , . . . and an, follows the (i−1)th word W(i−1) and six hypotheses Wa, Wb, Wc, Wd, We and Wf exist as a word hypothesis of the (i−1)th word W(i−1). It is further assumed that the last phoneme of the former three word hypotheses Wa, Wb and Wc is /x/, and the last phoneme of the latter three word hypotheses Wd, We and Wf is /y/. If three hypotheses each premised on three word hypotheses Wa, Wb and Wc and also one hypothesis premised on three word hypotheses Wd, We and Wf remain at the speech termination time te, the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 3  is selected one hypothesis with the highest likelihood among the former three hypotheses with the same initial phonetic environment, and other two hypotheses are excluded. 
     Note that, since the initial phonetic environment of the hypothesis premised on the word hypotheses Wd, We and Wf is different from those of the other three hypotheses, that is, the last phoneme of the preceded word hypothesis is not /x/ but /y/, the hypothesis premised on the word hypotheses Wd, We and Wf is not excluded. In other words, one hypothesis is kept for each of the last phonemes of the preceding word hypotheses. 
     In the present embodiment, the initial phonetic environment of the word is defined with a three-phoneme series containing the last phoneme of the word hypothesis preceding the word and two initial phonemes of the word hypothesis of the word. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The initial phonetic environment of the word may be defined with a phoneme series containing a phoneme string of the preceding word hypothesis including the last phoneme of the preceding word hypothesis and at least one serial phoneme with the last phoneme of the preceding word hypothesis and a phoneme string including the first phoneme of the word hypothesis of the word. 
     In the present embodiment, the feature extraction unit  1200 A- 3 , the word retrieving unit  1200 C- 3 , the candidate determination unit  1200 E- 3  and the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 3  are composed of a computer such as a microcomputer. The buffer memories (BMs)  200 B- 3  and  200 D- 3  and the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 3  are composed of a memory unit such as hard disc storage. 
     In the above-mentioned embodiment, the speech recognition is executed by using the word retrieving unit  1200 C- 3  and the word hypothesis refinement unit  1200 F- 3 . However, the present invention is not limited to this. The speech recognition unit  1200 - 3  may be composed of a phoneme comparison unit for referring to the phoneme HMM and a speech recognition unit for executing the speech recognition of a ward with reference to a statistical language model by using, for example, a One Pass DP algorithm. 
     In addition, in the present embodiment, the speech recognition unit  1200 - 3  is explained as a part of the conversation controller  1000 - 3 . However, an independent speech recognition apparatus configured by the speech recognition unit  1200 - 3 , the conversation database  1500 - 3  and the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 3  may be possibly employed. 
     Operating Example of Speech Recognition Unit 
     Next, operations of the speech recognition unit  1200 - 3  will be described with reference to  FIG. 166 .  FIG. 166  is a flow chart showing process operations of the speech recognition unit  1200 - 3 . 
     The speech recognition unit  1200 - 3  executes a feature analysis of the input speech to generate feature parameters on receiving the voice signal from the input unit  1100 - 3  (step S 401 - 3 ). Next, the feature parameters is compared with the phoneme HMM and the language model stored in the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 3 , and then a certain number of word hypotheses and the likelihoods of the word hypotheses are obtained (step S 402 - 3 ). Next, the speech recognition unit  1200 - 3  compares the obtained certain number of word hypotheses, the retrieved word hypotheses and the topic specification information in the prescribed discourse space to determine whether or not the coincident word hypothesis with the topic specification information in the prescribed discourse space exists among the retrieved word hypotheses (steps S 403 - 3  and S 404 - 3 ). If the coincident word hypothesis exists, the speech recognition unit  1200 - 3  outputs the coincident word hypothesis as the recognition result (step S 405 - 3 ). On the other hand, if no coincident word hypothesis exists, the speech recognition unit  1200 - 3  outputs the word hypothesis with the highest likelihood as the recognition result according to the obtained likelihoods of the word hypotheses (step S 406 - 3 ). 
     [Speech Recognition Dictionary Memory] 
     The configuration example of the conversation controller  1000 - 3  is further described with referring back to  FIG. 163  again. 
     The speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 3  stores character strings corresponding to standard voice signals. The speech recognition unit  1200 - 3 , which has executed the comparison, specifies a word hypothesis for a character string corresponding to the received voice signal, and then outputs the specified word hypothesis as a character string signal to the conversation control unit  1300 - 3 . 
     [Sentence Analyzing Unit] 
     Next, a configuration example of the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 3  will be described with reference to  FIG. 167 .  FIG. 167  is a partly enlarged block diagram of the conversation controller  1000 - 3  and also a block diagram showing a concrete configuration example of the conversation control unit  1300 - 3  and the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 3 . Note that only the conversation control unit  1300 - 3 , the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 3  and the conversation database  1500 - 3  are shown in  FIG. 167  and the other components are omitted to be shown. 
     The sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 3  analyses a character string specified at the input unit  1100 - 3  or the speech recognition unit  1200 - 3 . In the present embodiment as shown in  FIG. 167 , the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 3  includes a character string specifying unit  1410 - 3 , a morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 3 , a morpheme database  1430 - 3 , an input type determining unit  1440 - 3  and an utterance type database  1450 - 3 . The character string specifying unit  1410 - 3  segments a series of character strings specified by the input unit  1100 - 3  or the speech recognition unit  1200 - 3  into segments. Each segment is a minimum segmented sentence which is segmented in the extent to keep a grammatical meaning. Specifically, if the series of the character strings have a time interval more than a certain interval, the character string specifying unit  1410 - 3  segments the character strings there. The character string specifying unit  1410 - 3  outputs the segmented character strings to the morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 3  and the input type determining unit  1440 - 3 . Note that a “character string” to be described below means one segmented character string. 
     [Morpheme Extracting Unit] 
     The morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 3  extracts morphemes constituting minimum units of the character string as first morpheme information from each of the segmented character strings based on each of the segmented character strings segmented by the character string specifying unit  1410 - 3 . In the present embodiment, a morpheme means a minimum unit of a word structure shown in a character string. For example, each minimum unit of a word structure may be a word class such as a noun, an adjective and a verb. 
     In the present embodiment as shown in  FIG. 168 , the morphemes are indicated as m 1 , m 2 , m 3 , . . . .  FIG. 168  is a diagram showing a relation between a character string and morphemes extracted from the character string. The morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 3 , which has received the character strings from the character string specifying unit  1410 - 3 , compares the received character strings and morpheme groups previously stored in the morpheme database  1430 - 3  (each of the morpheme group is prepared as a morpheme dictionary in which a direction word, a reading, a word class and infected forms are described for each morpheme belonging to each word-class classification) as shown in  FIG. 168 . The morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 3 , which has executed the comparison, extracts coincident morphemes (m 1 , m 2 , . . . ) with any of the stored morpheme groups from the character strings. Other morphemes (n 1 , n 2 , n 3 , . . . ) than the extracted morphemes may be auxiliary verbs, for example. 
     The morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 3  outputs the extracted morphemes to a topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 3  as the first morpheme information. Note that the first morpheme information is not needed to be structurized. Here, “structurizing” means classifying and arranging morphemes included in a character string based on word classes. For example, it may be data conversion in which a character string as an uttered sentence is segmented into morphemes and then the morphemes are arranged in a prescribed order such as “Subject+Object+Predicate”. Needless to say, the structurized first morpheme information doesn&#39;t prevent the operations of the present embodiment. 
     [Input Type Determining Unit] 
     The input type determining unit  1440 - 3  determines an uttered contents type (utterance type) based on the character strings specified by the character string specifying unit  1410 - 3 . In the present embodiment, the utterance type is information for specifying the uttered contents type and, for example, corresponds to “uttered sentence type” shown in  FIG. 169 .  FIG. 169  is a table showing the “uttered sentence types”, two-alphabet codes representing the uttered sentence types, and uttered sentence examples corresponding to the uttered sentence types. 
     Here in the present embodiment as shown in  FIG. 169 , the “uttered sentence types” include declarative sentences (D: Declaration), time sentences (T: Time), locational sentences (L: Location), negational sentences (N: Negation) and so on. A sentence configured by each of these types is an affirmative sentence or an interrogative sentence. A “declarative sentence” means a sentence showing a user&#39;s opinion or notion. In the present embodiment, one example of the “declarative sentence” is the sentence “I like Sato” shown in  FIG. 169 . A “locational sentence” means a sentence involving a locational notion. A “time sentence” means a sentence involving a timelike notion. A “negational sentence” means a sentence to deny a declarative sentence. Sentence examples of the “uttered sentence types” are shown in  FIG. 169 . 
     In the present embodiment as shown in  FIG. 170 , the input type determining unit  1440 - 3  uses a declarative expression dictionary for determination of a declarative sentence, a negational expression dictionary for determination of a negational sentence and so on in order to determine the “uttered sentence type”. Specifically, the input type determining unit  1440 - 3 , which has received the character strings from the character string specifying unit  1410 - 3 , compares the received character strings and the dictionaries stored in the utterance type database  1450 - 3  based on the received character string. The input type determining unit  1440 - 3 , which has executed the comparison, extracts elements relevant to the dictionaries among the character strings. 
     The input type determining unit  1440 - 3  determines the “uttered sentence type” based on the extracted elements. For example, if the character string includes elements declaring an event, the input type determining unit  1440 - 3  determines that the character string including the elements is a declarative sentence. The input type determining unit  1440 - 3  outputs the determined “uttered sentence type” to a reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3 . 
     [Conversation Database] 
     A configuration example of data structure stored in the conversation database  1500 - 3  will be described with reference to  FIG. 171 .  FIG. 171  is a conceptual diagram showing the configuration example of data stored in the conversation database  1500 - 3 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 171 , the conversation database  1500 - 3  stores a plurality of topic specification information  810 - 3  for specifying a conversation topic. In addition, topic specification information  810 - 3  can be associated with other topic specification information  810 - 3 . For example, if topic specification information C ( 810 - 3 ) is specified, three of topic specification information A ( 810 - 3 ), B ( 810 - 3 ) and D ( 810 - 3 ) associated with the topic specification information C ( 810 - 3 ) are also specified. 
     Specifically in the present embodiment, topic specification information  810 - 3  means “keywords” which are relevant to input contents expected to be input from users or relevant to reply sentences to users. 
     The topic specification information  810 - 3  is associated with one or more topic titles  820 - 3 . Each of the topic titles  820 - 3  is configured with a morpheme composed of one character, plural character strings or a combination thereof. A reply sentence  830 - 3  to be output to users is stored in association with each of the topic titles  820 - 3 . Response types for indicating types of the reply sentences  830 - 3  are associated with the reply sentences  830 - 3 , respectively. 
     Next, an association between the topic specification information  810 - 3  and the other topic specification information  810 - 3  will be described.  FIG. 172  is a diagram showing the association between certain topic specification information  810 A- 3  and the other topic specification information  810 B- 3 ,  810 C 1 - 3 - 810 C 4 - 3  and  810 D 1 - 3 - 810 D 3 - 3  . . . . Note that a phrase “stored in association with” mentioned below indicates that, when certain information X is read out, information Y stored in association with the information X can be also read out. For example, a phrase “information Y is stored ‘in association with’ the information X” indicates a state where information for reading out the information Y (such as, a pointer indicating a storing address of the information Y, a physical memory address or a logical address in which the information Y is stored, and so on) is implemented in the information X. 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 172 , the topic specification information can be stored in association with the other topic specification information with respect to a superordinate concept, a subordinate concept, a synonym or an antonym (not shown in  FIG. 172 ). For example as shown in  FIG. 172 , the topic specification information  810 B- 3  (amusement) is stored in association with the topic specification information  810 A- 3  (movie) as a superordinate concept and stored in a higher level than the topic specification information  810 B- 3  (amusement). 
     In addition, subordinate concepts of the topic specification information  810 A- 3  (movie), the topic specification information  810 C 1 - 3  (director),  810 C 2 - 3  (starring actor/actress),  810 C 3 - 3  (distributor),  810 C 4 - 3  (runtime),  810 D 1 - 3  (“Seven Samurai”),  810 D 2 - 3  (“Ran”),  810 D 3 - 3  (“Yojimbo”), . . . , are stored in association with the topic specification information  810 A- 3 . 
     In addition, synonyms  900 - 3  are associated with the topic specification information  810 A- 3 . In this example, “work”, “contents” and “cinema” are stored as synonyms of “movie” which is a keyword of the topic specification information  810 A- 3 . By defining these synonyms in this manner, the topic specification information  810 A- 3  can be treated as included in an uttered sentence even though the uttered sentence doesn&#39;t include the keyword “movie” but includes “work”, “contents” or “cinema”. 
     In the conversation controller  1000 - 3  according to the present embodiment, when certain topic specification information  810 - 3  has been specified with reference to contents stored in the conversation database  1500 - 3 , other topic specification information  810 - 3  and the topic titles  820 - 3  or the reply sentences  830 - 3  of the other topic specification information  810 - 3 , which are stored in association with the certain topic specification information  810 - 3 , can be retrieved and extracted rapidly. 
     Next, data configuration examples of topic titles  820 - 3  (also referred as “second morpheme information”) will be described with reference to  FIG. 173 .  FIG. 173  is a diagram showing the data configuration examples of the topic titles  820 - 3 . 
     The topic specification information  810 D 1 - 3 ,  810 D 2 - 3 ,  810 D 3 - 3 , . . . , include the topic titles  820   1 - 3 ,  820   2 - 3 , . . . , the topic titles  820   3 - 3 ,  820   4 - 3 , . . . , the topic titles  820   5 - 3 ,  820   6 - 3 , . . . , respectively. In the present embodiment as shown in  FIG. 173 , each of the topic titles  820 - 3  is information composed of first specification information  1001 - 3 , second specification information  1002 - 3  and third specification information  1003 - 3 . Here, the first specification information  1001 - 3  is a main morpheme constituting a topic. For example, the first specification information  1001 - 3  may be a Subject of a sentence. In addition, the second specification information  1002 - 3  is a morpheme closely relevant to the first specification information  1001 - 3 . For example, the second specification information  1002 - 3  may be an Object. Furthermore, the third specification information  1003 - 3  in the present embodiment is a morpheme showing a movement of a certain subject, a morpheme of a noun modifier and so on. For example, the third specification information  1003 - 3  may be a verb, an adverb or an adjective. Note that the first specification information  1001 - 3 , the second specification information  1002 - 3  and the third specification information  1003 - 3  are not limited to the above meanings. The present embodiment can be effected in case where contents of a sentence can be understood based on the first specification information  1001 - 3 , the second specification information  1002 - 3  and the third specification information  1003 - 3  even though they are give other meanings (other ward classes). 
     For example as shown in  FIG. 173 , if the Subject is “Seven Samurai” and the adjective is “interesting”, the topic title  820   2 - 3  (second morpheme information) consists of the morpheme “Seven Samurai” included in the first specification information  1001 - 3  and the morpheme “interesting” included in the third specification information  1003 - 3 . Note that the second specification information  1002 - 3  of this topic title  820   2 - 3  includes no morpheme and a symbol “*” is stored in the second specification information  1002 - 3  for indicating no morpheme included. 
     Note that this topic title  820   2 - 3  (Seven Samurai; *; interesting) has the meaning of “Seven Samurai is interesting.” Hereinafter, parenthetic contents for a topic title  820   2 - 3  indicate the specification information  1001 - 3 , the second specification information  1002 - 3  and the third specification information  1003 - 3  from the left. In addition, when no morpheme is included in any of the first to third specification information, “*” is indicated therein. 
     Note that the specification information constituting the topic titles  820 - 3  is not limited to three and other specification information (fourth specification information and more) may be included. 
     Next, the reply sentences  830 - 3  will be described with reference to  FIG. 174 . In the present embodiment as shown in  FIG. 174 , the reply sentences  830 - 3  are classified into different types (response types) such as declaration (D: Declaration), time (T: Time), location (L: Location) and negation (N: Negation) for making a reply corresponding to the uttered sentence type of the user&#39;s utterance. Note that an affirmative sentence is classified with “A” and an interrogative sentence is classified with “Q”. 
     A configuration example of data structure of the topic specification information  810 - 3  will be described with reference to  FIG. 175 .  FIG. 175  shows a concrete example of the topic titles  820 - 3  and the reply sentences  830 - 3  associated with the topic specification information  810 - 3  “Sato”. 
     The topic specification information  810 - 3  “Sato” is associated with plural topic titles ( 820 - 3 )  1 - 1 ,  1 - 2 , . . . . Each of the topic titles ( 820 - 3 )  1 - 1 ,  1 - 2 , . . . is associated with reply sentences ( 830 - 3 )  1 - 1 ,  1 - 2 , . . . . The reply sentence  830 - 3  is prepared per each of the response types  840 - 3 . 
     For example, when the topic title ( 820 - 3 )  1 - 1  is (Sato; *; like) [these are extracted morphemes included in “I like Sato”], the reply sentences ( 830 - 3 )  1 - 1  associated with the topic title ( 820 - 3 )  1 - 1  include (DA: a declarative affirmative sentence “I like Sato, too.”) and (TA: a time affirmative sentence “I like Sato at bat.”). The after-mentioned reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3  retrieves one reply sentence  830 - 3  associated with the topic title  820 - 3  with reference to an output from the input type determining unit  1440 - 3 . 
     Next-plan designation information  840 - 3  is allocated to each of the reply sentences  830 - 3 . The next-plan designation information  840 - 3  is information for designating a reply sentence to be preferentially output against a user&#39;s utterance in association with the each of the reply sentences (referred as a “next-reply sentence”). The next-plan designation information  840 - 3  may be any information even if a next-reply sentence can be specified by the information. For example, the information may be a reply sentence ID, by which at least one reply sentence can be specified among all reply sentences stored in the conversation database  1500 - 3 . 
     In the present embodiment, the next-plan designation information  840 - 3  is described as information for specifying one next-reply sentence per one reply sentence (for example, a reply sentence ID). However, the next-plan designation information  840 - 3  may be information for specifying next-reply sentences per topic specification information  810 - 3  or per one topic title  820 - 3 . (In this case, since plural replay sentences are designated, they are referred as a “next-reply sentence group”. However, only one of the reply sentences included in the next-reply sentence group will be actually output as the reply sentence.) For example, the present embodiment can be effected in case where a topic title ID or a topic specification information ID is used as the next-plan designation information. 
     [Conversation Control Unit] 
     A configuration example of the conversation control unit  1300 - 3  is further described with referring back to  FIG. 167 . 
     The conversation control unit  1300 - 3  functions to control data transmitting between configuration components in the conversation controller  1000 - 3  (the speech recognition unit  1200 - 3 , the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 3 , the conversation database  1500 - 3 , the output unit  1600 - 3  and the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 3 ), and determine and output a reply sentence in response to a user&#39;s utterance. 
     In the present embodiment shown in  FIG. 167 , the conversation control unit  1300 - 3  includes a managing unit  1310 - 3 , a plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3 , a discourse space conversation control process unit  1330 - 3  and a CA conversation process unit  1340 - 3 . Hereinafter, these configuration components will be described. 
     [Managing Unit] 
     The managing unit  1310 - 3  functions to store discourse histories and update, if needed, the discourse histories. The managing unit  1310 - 3  further functions to transmit some or entire of the stored discourse histories to a part or a whole of the discourse histories to a topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 3 , an elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3 , a topic retrieval unit  1370 - 3  or a reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3  in response to a request therefrom. 
     [Plan Conversation Process Unit] 
     The plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  functions to execute plans and establish conversations between a user and the conversation controller  1000 - 3  according to the plans. A “plan” means providing a predetermined reply to a user in a predetermined order. 
     The plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  functions to output the predetermined reply in the predetermined order in response to a user&#39;s utterance. 
       FIG. 176  is a conceptual diagram to describe plans. As shown in  FIG. 176 , various plans  1402 - 3  such as plural plans  1 ,  2 ,  3  and  4  are prepared in a plan space  1401 - 3 . The plan space  1401 - 3  is a set of the plural plans  1402 - 3  stored in the conversation database  1500 - 3 . The conversation controller  1000 - 3  selects a preset plan  1402 - 3  for a start-up on an activation or a conversation start or arbitrarily selects one of the plans  1402 - 3  in the plan space  1401 - 3  in response to a user&#39;s utterance contents in order to output a reply sentence against the user&#39;s utterance by using the selected plan  1402 - 3 . 
       FIG. 177  shows a configuration example of plans  1402 - 3 . Each plan  1402 - 3  includes a reply sentence  1501 - 3  and next-plan designation information  1502 - 3  associated therewith. The next-plan designation information  1502 - 3  is information for specifying, in response to a certain reply sentence  1501 - 3  in a plan  1402 - 3 , another plan  1402 - 3  including a reply sentence to be output to a user (referred as a “next-reply candidate sentence”). In this example, the plan  1  includes a reply sentence A ( 1501 - 3 ) to be output at an execution of the plan  1  by the conversation controller  1000 - 3  and next-plan designation information  1502 - 3  associated with the reply sentence A ( 1501 - 3 ). The next-plan designation information  1502 - 3  is information [ID: 002] for specifying a plan  2  including a reply sentence B ( 1501 - 3 ) to be a next-reply candidate sentence to the reply sentence A ( 1501 - 3 ). Similarly, since the reply sentence B ( 1501 - 3 ) is also associated with next-plan designation information  1502 - 3 , another plan  1402 - 3  ([ID: 043]: not shown) including the next-reply candidate sentence will be designated by next-plan designation information  1502 - 3  when the reply sentence B ( 1501 - 3 ) has output. In this manner, plans  1402 - 3  are chained via next-plan designation information  1502 - 3  and plan conversations in which a series of successive contents can be output to a user. 
     In other words, since contents expected to be provided to a user (an explanatory sentence, an announcement sentence, a questionnaire and so on) are separated into plural reply sentences and the reply sentences are prepared as a plan with their order predetermined, it becomes possible to provide a series of the reply sentences to the user in response to the user&#39;s utterances. Note that a reply sentence  1501 - 3  included in a plan  1402 - 3  designated by next-plan designation information  1502 - 3  is not needed to be output to a user immediately after an output of the user&#39;s utterance in response to an output of a previous reply sentence. The reply sentence  1501 - 3  included in the plan  1402 - 3  designated by the next-plan designation information  1502 - 3  may be output after an intervening conversation on a different topic from a topic in the plan between the conversation controller  1000 - 3  and the user. 
     Note that the reply sentence  1501 - 3  shown in  FIG. 177  corresponds to a sentence string of one of the reply sentences  830 - 3  shown in  FIG. 175 . In addition, the next-plan designation information  1502 - 3  shown in  FIG. 177  corresponds to the next-plan designation information  840 - 3  shown in  FIG. 175 . 
     Note that linkages between the plans  1402 - 3  are not limited to form a one-dimensional geometry shown in  FIG. 177 .  FIG. 178  shows an example of plans  1402 - 3  with another linkage geometry. In the example shown in  FIG. 178 , a plan  1  ( 1402 - 3 ) includes two of next-plan designation information  1502 - 3  to designate two reply sentences as next replay candidate sentences, in other words, to designate two plans  1402 - 3 . The two of next-plan designation information  1502 - 3  are prepared in order that the plan  2  ( 1402 - 3 ) including a reply sentence B ( 1501 - 3 ) and the plan  3  ( 1402 - 3 ) including a reply sentence C ( 1501 - 3 ) are to be designated as plans each including a next-reply candidate sentence. Note that the reply sentences are selective and alternative, so that, when one has been output, another is not output and then the plan  1  ( 1501 - 3 ) is terminated. In this manner, the linkages between the plans  1402 - 3  is not limited to forming a one-dimensional geometry and may form a tree-diagram-like geometry or a cancellous geometry. 
     Note that it is not limited that how many next-reply candidate sentences each plan  1402 - 3  includes. In addition, no next-plan designation information  1502 - 3  may be included in a plan  1402 - 3  which terminates a conversation. 
       FIG. 179  shows an example of a certain series of plans  1402 - 3 . As shown in  FIG. 179 , this series of plans  1402   1 - 3  to  1402   4 - 3  are associated with reply sentences  1501   1 - 3  to  1501   4 - 3  which notify crisis management information to a user. The reply sentences  1501   1 - 3  to  1501   4 - 3  constitute one coherent topic as a whole. Each of the plans  1402   1 - 3  to  1402   4 - 3  includes ID data  1702   1 - 3  to  1702   4 - 3  for indicating itself such as “1000-01, 1000-02”, “1000-03” and “1000-04”, respectively. Note that each value after a hyphen in the ID data is information indicating an output order. In addition, each of the plans  1402   1 - 3  to  1402   4 - 3  further includes ID data  1502   1 - 3  to  1502   4 - 3  as the next-plan designation information such as “1000-02, 1000-03”, “1000-04” and “1000-0F”, respectively. Especially, “0F” is information indicating the final plan (the last in the order). 
     In this example, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  starts to execute this series of plans when a user has uttered &#39;s utterance has been “Please tell me a crisis management applied when a large earthquake occurs.” Specifically, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  searches in the plan space  1401 - 3  and checks whether or not a plan  1402 - 3  including a reply sentence  1501   1 - 3  associated with the user&#39;s utterance “Please tell me a crisis management applied when a large earthquake occurs,” when the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  has received the user&#39;s utterance “Please tell me a crisis management applied when a large earthquake occurs.” In this example, a user&#39;s utterance character string  1701   1 - 3  associated with the user&#39;s utterance “Please tell me a crisis management applied when a large earthquake occurs,” is associated with a plan  1402   1 - 3 . 
     The plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  retrieves the reply sentence  1501   1 - 3  included in the plan  1402   1 - 3  on discovering the plan  1402   1 - 3  and outputs the reply sentence  1501   1 - 3  to the user as a reply sentence in response to the user&#39;s utterance. And then, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  specifies the next-reply candidate sentence with reference to the next-plan designation information  1502   1 - 3 . 
     Next, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  executes the plan  1402   2 - 3  on receiving another user&#39;s utterance via the input unit  1100 - 3 , a speech recognition unit  1200 - 3  or the like after an output of the reply sentence  1501   1 - 3 . Specifically, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  judges whether or not to execute the plan  1402   2 - 3  designated by the next-plan designation information  1502   1 - 3 , in other words, whether or not to output the second reply sentence  1501   2 - 3 . More specifically, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  compares a user&#39;s utterance character string (also referred as an illustrative sentence)  1701   2 - 3  associated with the reply sentence  1501   2 - 3  and the received user&#39;s utterance, or compares a topic title  820 - 3  (not shown in  FIG. 179 ) associated with the reply sentence  1501   2 - 3  and the received user&#39;s utterance. And then, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  determines whether or not the two are related to each other. If the two are related to each other, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  outputs the second reply sentence  1501   2 - 3 . In addition, since the plan  1402   2 - 3  including the second reply sentence  1501   2 - 3  also includes the next-plan designation information  1502   2 - 3 , the next-reply candidate sentence is specified. 
     Similarly, according to ongoing user&#39;s utterances, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  transit into the plans  1402   3 - 3  and  1402   4 - 3  in turn and can output the third and fourth reply sentences  1501   3  and  1501   4 . Note that, since the fourth reply sentence  1501   4 - 3  is the final reply sentence, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  terminates plan-executions when the fourth reply sentence  1501   4 - 3  has been output. 
     In this manner, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  can provide previously prepared conversation contents to the user in a predetermined order by sequentially executing the plans  1402   1 - 3  to  1402   4 - 3 . 
     [Discourse Space Conversation Control Process Unit] 
     The configuration example of the conversation control unit  1300 - 3  is further described with referring back to  FIG. 167 . 
     The discourse space conversation control process unit  1330 - 3  includes the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 3 , the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3 , the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 3  and the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3 . The managing unit  1310 - 3  totally controls the conversation control unit  1300 - 3 . 
     A “discourse history” is information for specifying a conversation topic or theme between a user and the conversation controller  1000 - 3  and includes at least one of “focused topic specification information”, a “focused topic title”, “user input sentence topic specification information” and “reply sentence topic specification information”. The “focused topic specification information”, the “focused topic title” and the “reply sentence topic specification information” are not limited to be defined from a conversation done just before but may be defined from the previous “focused topic specification information”, the “focused topic title” and the “reply sentence topic specification information” during a predetermined past period or from an accumulated record thereof. 
     Hereinbelow, each of the units constituting the discourse space conversation control process unit  1330 - 3  will be described. 
     [Topic Specification Information Retrieval Unit] 
     The topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 3  compares the first morpheme information extracted by the morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 3  and the topic specification information, and then retrieves the topic specification information corresponding to a morpheme in the first morpheme information among the topic specification information. Specifically, when the first morpheme information received from the morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 3  is two morphemes “Sato” and “like”, the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 3  compares the received first morpheme information and the topic specification information group. 
     If a focused topic title  820 - 3   focus  (indicated as  820 - 3   focus  to be differentiated from previously retrieved topic titles or other topic titles) includes a morpheme (for example, “Sato”) in the first morpheme information, the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 3  outputs the focused topic title  820 - 3   focus  to the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3 . On the other hand, if no topic title includes the morpheme in the first morpheme information, the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 3  determines user input sentence topic specification information based on the received first morpheme information, and then outputs the first morpheme information and the user input sentence topic specification information to the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3 . Note that the “user input sentence topic specification information” is topic specification information corresponding-to or probably-corresponding-to a morpheme relevant to topic contents talked by a user among morphemes included in the first morpheme information. 
     [Elliptical Sentence Complementation Unit] 
     The elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3  generates various complemented first morpheme information by complementing the first morpheme information with the previously retrieved topic specification information  810 - 3  (hereinafter referred as the “focused topic specification information”) and the topic specification information  810 - 3  included in the final reply sentence (hereinafter referred as the “reply sentence topic specification information”). For example, if a user&#39;s utterance is “like”, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3  generates the complemented first morpheme information “Sato, like” by including the focused topic specification information “Sato” into the first morpheme information “like”. 
     In other words, if it is assumed that the first morpheme information is defined as “W” and a set of the focused topic specification information and the reply sentence topic specification information is defined as “D”, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3  generates the complemented first morpheme information by including an element(s) in the set “D” into the first morpheme information “W”. 
     In this manner, in case where, for example, a sentence constituted with the first morpheme information is an elliptical sentence which is unclear as language, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3  can include, by using the set “D”, an element(s) (for example, “Sato”) in the set “D” into the first morpheme information “W”. As a result, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3  can complement the first morpheme information “like” into the complemented first morpheme information “Sato, like”. Note that the complemented first morpheme information “Sato, like” corresponds to a user&#39;s utterance “I like Sato.” 
     That is, even when user&#39;s utterance contents are provided as an elliptical sentence, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3  can complement the elliptical sentence by using the set “D”. As a result, even when a sentence constituted with the first morpheme information is an elliptical sentence, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3  can complement the sentence into an appropriate sentence as language. 
     In addition, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3  retrieves the topic title  820 - 3  related to the complemented first morpheme information based on the set “D”. If the topic title  820 - 3  related to the complemented first morpheme information has been found, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3  outputs the topic title  820 - 3  to the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3 . The reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3  can output a reply sentence  830 - 3  best-suited for the user&#39;s utterance contents based on the appropriate topic title  820 - 3  found by the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3 . 
     Note that the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3  is not limited to including an element(s) in the set “D” into the first morpheme information. The elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3  may include, based on a focused topic title, a morpheme(s) included in any of the first, second and third specification information in the topic title, into the extracted first morpheme information. 
     [Topic Retrieval Unit] 
     The topic retrieval unit  1370 - 3  compares the first morpheme information and topic titles  820 - 3  associated with the user input sentence topic specification information to retrieve a topic title  820 - 3  best-suited for the first morpheme information among the topic titles  820 - 3  when the topic title  820 - 3  has not been determined by the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3 . 
     Specifically, the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 3 , which has received a retrieval command signal from the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3 , retrieves the topic title  820 - 3  best-suited for the first morpheme information among the topic titles associated with the user input sentence topic specification information based on the user input sentence topic specification information and the first morpheme information which are included in the received retrieval command signal. The topic retrieval unit  1370 - 3  outputs the retrieved topic title  820 - 3  as a retrieval result signal to the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3 . 
     Above-mentioned  FIG. 175  shows the concrete example of the topic titles  820 - 3  and the reply sentences  830 - 3  associated with the topic specification information  810 - 3  (=“Sato”). For example as shown in  FIG. 175 , since topic specification information  810 - 3  (=“Sato”) is included in the received first morpheme information “Sato, like”, the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 3  specifies the topic specification information  810 - 3  (=“Sato”) and then compares the topic titles ( 820 - 3 )  1 - 1 ,  1 - 2 , . . . associated with the topic specification information  810 - 3  (=“Sato”) and the received first morpheme information “Sato, like”. 
     The topic retrieval unit  1370 - 3  retrieves the topic title ( 820 - 3 )  1 - 1  (Sato; *; like) related to the received first morpheme information “Sato, like” among the topic titles ( 820 - 3 )  1 - 1 ,  1 - 2 , based on the comparison result. The topic retrieval unit  1370 - 3  outputs the retrieved topic title ( 820 - 3 )  1 - 1  (Sato; *; like) as a retrieval result signal to the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3 . 
     [Reply Retrieval Unit] 
     The reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3  retrieves, based on the topic title  820 - 3  retrieved by the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3  or the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 3 , a reply sentence associated with the topic title  820 - 3 . In addition, the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3  compares, based on the topic title  820 - 3  retrieved by the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 3 , the response types associated with the topic title  820 - 3  and the utterance type determined by the input type determining unit  1440 - 3 . The reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3 , which has executed the comparison, retrieves one response type related to the determined utterance type among the response types. 
     In the example shown in  FIG. 175 , when the topic title retrieved by the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 3  is the topic title  1 - 1  (Sato; *; like), the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3  specifies the response type (for example, DA) coincident with the “uttered sentence type” (DA) determined by the input type determining unit  1440 - 3  among the reply sentences  1 - 1  (DA, TA and so on) associated with the topic title  1 - 1 . The reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3 , which has specified the response type (DA), retrieves the reply sentence  1 - 1  (“I like Sato, too.”) associated with the response type (DA) based on the specified response type (DA). 
     Here, “A” in above-mentioned “DA”, “TA” and so on means an affirmative form. Therefore, when the utterance types and the response types include “A”, it indicates an affirmation on a certain matter. In addition, the utterance types and the response types can include the types of “DQ”, “TQ” and so on. “Q” in “DQ”, “TQ” and so on means a question about a certain matter. 
     If the response type takes an interrogative form (Q), a reply sentence associated with this response type takes an affirmative form (A). A reply sentence with an affirmative form (A) may be a sentence for replying to a question and so on. For example, when an uttered sentence is “Have you ever operated slot machines?”, the utterance type of the uttered sentence is an interrogative form (Q). A reply sentence associated with this interrogative form (Q) may be “I have operated slot machines before,” (affirmative form (A)), for example. 
     On the other hand, when the response type is an affirmative form (A), a reply sentence associated with this response type takes an interrogative form (Q). A reply sentence in an interrogative form (Q) may be an interrogative sentence for asking back against uttered contents, an interrogative sentence for getting out a certain matter. For example, when the uttered sentence is “Playing slot machines is my hobby,” the utterance type of this uttered sentence takes an affirmative form (A). A reply sentence associated with this affirmative form (A) may be “Playing pachinko is your hobby, isn&#39;t it?” (an interrogative sentence (Q) for getting out a certain matter), for example. 
     The reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3  outputs the retrieved reply sentence  830 - 3  as a reply sentence signal to the managing unit  1310 - 3 . The managing unit  1310 - 3 , which has received the reply sentence signal from the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3 , outputs the received reply sentence signal to the output unit  1600 - 3 . 
     [CA Conversation Process Unit] 
     When a reply sentence in response to a user&#39;s utterance has not been determined by the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  or the discourse space conversation control process unit  1330 - 3 , the CA conversation process unit  1340 - 3  functions to output a reply sentence for continuing a conversation with a user according to contents of the user&#39;s utterance. 
     The configuration example of the conversation controller  1000 - 3  is further described with referring back to  FIG. 163 . 
     [Output Unit] 
     The output unit  1600 - 3  outputs the reply sentence retrieved by the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3 . The output unit  1600 - 3  may be a speaker or a display, for example. Specifically, the output unit  1600 - 3 , which has received the reply sentence from the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3 , outputs voice sounds of the received reply sentence (for example, “I like Sato, too,”) based on the received reply sentence. With that, describing the configuration example of the conversation controller  1000 - 3  has ended. 
     [Conversation Control Method] 
     The conversation controller  100 - 3  with the above-mentioned configuration puts a conversation control method in execution by operating as described hereinbelow. 
     Next, operations of the conversation controller  1000 - 3 , more specifically the conversation control unit  1300 - 3 , according to the present embodiment will be described. 
       FIG. 180  is a flow chart showing an example of a main process executed by conversation control unit  1300 - 3 . This main process is a process executed each time when the conversation control unit  1300 - 3  receives a user&#39;s utterance. A reply sentence in response to the user&#39;s utterance is output due to an execution of this main process, so that a conversation (an interlocution) between a user and the conversation controller  100 - 3  is established. 
     Upon executing the main process, the conversation controller  100 - 3 , more specifically the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  firstly executes a plan conversation control process (S 1801 - 3 ). The plan conversation control process is a process for executing a plan(s). 
       FIGS. 181 and 182  are flow charts showing an example of the plan conversation control process. Hereinbelow, the example of the plan conversation control process will be described with reference to  FIGS. 181 and 182 . 
     Upon executing the plan conversation control process, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  firstly executes a basic control state information check (S 1901 - 3 ). The basic control state information is information on whether or not an execution(s) of a plan(s) has been completed and is stored in a predetermined memory area. 
     The basic control state information serves to indicate a basic control state of a plan. 
       FIG. 183  is a diagram showing four basic control states which are possibly established due to a so-called scenario-type plan. 
     (1) Cohesiveness 
     This basic control state corresponds to a case where a user&#39;s utterance is coincident with the currently executed plan  1402 - 3 , more specifically the topic title  820 - 3  or the example sentence  1701 - 3  associated with the plan  1402 - 3 . In this case, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  terminates the plan  1402 - 3  and then transfers to another plan  1402 - 3  corresponding to the reply sentence  1501 - 3  designated by the next-plan designation information  1502 - 3 . 
     (2) Cancellation 
     This basic control state is a basic control state which is set in a case where it is determined that user&#39;s utterance contents require a completion of a plan  1402 - 3  or that a user&#39;s interest has changed to another matter than the currently executed plan. When the basic control state indicates the cancellation, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  retrieves another plan  1402 - 3  associated with the user&#39;s utterance than the plan  1402 - 3  targeted as the cancellation. If the other plan  1402 - 3  exists, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  start to execute the other plan  1402 - 3 . If the other plan  1402 - 3  does not exist, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  terminates an execution(s) of a plan(s). 
     (3) Maintenance 
     This basic control state is a basic control state which is set in a case where a user&#39;s utterance is not coincident with the topic title  820 - 3  (see  FIG. 175 ) or the example sentence  1701 - 3  (see  FIG. 179 ) associated with the currently executed plan  1402 - 3  and also the user&#39;s utterance does not correspond to the basic control state “cancellation”. 
     In the case of this basic control state, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  firstly determines whether or not to resume a pending or pausing plan  1402 - 3  on receiving the user&#39;s utterance. If the user&#39;s utterance is not adapted for resuming the plan  1402 - 3 , for example, in case where the user&#39;s utterance is not related to a topic title  820 - 3  or an example sentence  1701 - 3  associated with the plan  1402 - 3 , the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  starts to execute another plan  1402 - 3 , an after-mentioned discourse space conversation control process (S 1802 - 3 ) and so on. If the user&#39;s utterance is adapted for resuming the plan  1402 - 3 , the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  outputs a reply sentence  1501 - 3  based on the stored next-plan designation information  1502 - 3 . 
     In case where the basic control state is the “maintenance”, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  retrieves other plans  1402 - 3  in order to enable outputting another reply sentence than the reply sentence  1501 - 3  associated with the currently executed plan  1402 - 3 , or executes the discourse space conversation control process. However, if the user&#39;s utterance is adapted for resuming the plan  1402 - 3 , the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  resumes the plan  1402 - 3 . 
     (4) Continuation 
     This state is a basic control state which is set in a case where a user&#39;s utterance is not related to reply sentences  1501 - 3  included in the currently executed plan  1402 - 3 , contents of the user&#39;s utterance do not correspond to the basic control sate “cancellation” and use&#39;s intention construed from the user&#39;s utterance is not clear. 
     In case where the basic control state is the “continuation”, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  firstly determines whether or not to resume a pending or pausing plan  1402 - 3  on receiving the user&#39;s utterance. If the user&#39;s utterance is not adapted for resuming the plan  1402 - 3 , the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  executes an after-mentioned CA conversation control process in order to enable outputting a reply sentence for getting out a further user&#39;s utterance. 
     The plan conversation control process is further described with referring back to  FIG. 181 . 
     The plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3 , which has referred to the basic control state, determines whether or not the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is the “cohesiveness” (step S 1902 - 3 ). If it has been determined that the basic control state is the “cohesiveness” (YES in step S 1902 - 3 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  determines whether or not the reply sentence  1501 - 3  is the final reply sentence in the currently executed plan  1402 - 3  (step S 1903 - 3 ). 
     If it has been determined that the final reply sentence  1501 - 3  has been output already (YES in step S 1903 - 3 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  retrieves another plan  1402 - 3  related to the use&#39;s utterance in the plan space in order to determine whether or not to execute the other plan  1402 - 3  (step S 1904 - 3 ) because the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  has provided all contents to be replied to the user already. If the other plan  1402 - 3  related to the user&#39;s utterance has not been found due to this retrieval (NO in step S 1905 - 3 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  terminates the plan conversation control process because no plan  1402 - 3  to be provided to the user exists. 
     On the other hand, if the other plan  1402 - 3  related to the user&#39;s utterance has been found due to this retrieval (YES in step S 1905 - 3 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  transfers into the other plan  1402 - 3  (step S 1906 - 3 ). Since the other plan  1402 - 3  to be provided to the user still remains, an execution of the other plan  1402 - 3  (an output of the reply sentence  1501 - 3  included in the other plan  1402 - 3 ) is started. 
     Next, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  outputs the reply sentence  1501 - 3  included in that plan  1402 - 3  (step S 1908 - 3 ). The reply sentence  1501 - 3  is output as a reply to the user&#39;s utterance, so that the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  provides information to be supplied to the user. 
     The plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  terminates the plan conversation control process after the reply sentence output process (step S 1908 - 3 ). 
     On the other hand, if the previously output reply sentence  1501 - 3  is not determined as the final reply sentence in the determination whether or not the previously output reply sentence  1501 - 3  is the final reply sentence (step S 1903 - 3 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  transfers into a plan  1402 - 3  associated with the reply sentence  1501 - 3  following the previously output reply sentence  1501 - 3 , i.e. the specified reply sentence  1501 - 3  by the next-plan designation information  1502 - 3  (step S 1907 - 3 ). 
     Subsequently, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  outputs the reply sentence  1501 - 3  included in that plan  1402 - 3  to provide a reply to the user&#39;s utterance (step  1908 - 3 ). The reply sentence  1501 - 3  is output as the reply to the user&#39;s utterance, so that the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  provides information to be supplied to the user. The plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  terminates the plan conversation control process after the reply sentence output process (step S 1908 - 3 ). 
     Here, if the basic control state is not the “cohesiveness” in the determination process in step S 1902 - 3  (NO in step S 1902 - 3 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  determines whether or not the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is the “cancellation” (step S 1909 - 3 ). If it has been determined that the basic control state is the “cancellation” (YES in step S 1909 - 3 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  retrieves another plan  1402 - 3  related to the use&#39;s utterance in the plan space  1401 - 3  in order to determine whether or not the other plan  1402 - 3  to be started newly exists (step S 1904 - 3 ) because a plan  1402 - 3  to be successively executed does not exist. Subsequently, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  executes the processes of steps S 1905 - 3  to S 1908 - 3  as well as the processes in case of the above-mentioned step S 1903 - 3  (YES). 
     On the other hand, if the basic control state is not the “cancellation” in the determination process in step S 1902 - 3  (NO in step S 1902 - 3 ) in the determination whether or not the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is the “cancellation” (step S 1909 - 3 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  further determines whether or not the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is the “maintenance” (step S 1910 - 3 ). 
     If the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is the “maintenance” (YES in step S 1910 - 3 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  determined whether or not the user presents the interest on the pending or pausing plan  1402 - 3  again and then resumes the pending or pausing plan  1402 - 3  in case where the interest is presented (step S 2001 - 3  in  FIG. 182 ). In other words, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  evaluates the pending or pausing plan  1402 - 3  (step S 2001 - 3  in  FIG. 182 ) and then determines whether or not the user&#39;s utterance is related to the pending or pausing plan  1402 - 3  (step S 2002 - 3 ). 
     If it has been determined that the user&#39;s utterance is related to that plan  1402 - 3  (YES in step S 2002 - 3 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  transfers into the plan  1402 - 3  related to the user&#39;s utterance (step S 2003 - 3 ) and then executes the reply sentence output process (step S 1908 - 3  in  FIG. 181 ) to output the reply sentence  1501 - 3  included in the plan  1402 - 3 . Operating in this manner, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  can resume the pending or pausing plan  1402 - 3  according to the user&#39;s utterance, so that all contents included in the previously prepared plan  1402 - 3  can be provided to the user. 
     On the other hand, if it has been determined that the user&#39;s utterance is not related to that plan  1402 - 3  (NO in step S 2002 - 3 ) in the above-mentioned S 2002  (see  FIG. 182 ), the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  retrieves another plan  1402 - 3  related to the use&#39;s utterance in the plan space  1401 - 3  in order to determine whether or not the other plan  1402 - 3  to be started newly exists (step S 1904 - 3  in  FIG. 181 ). Subsequently, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  executes the processes of steps S 1905 - 3  to S 1908 - 3  as well as the processes in case of the above-mentioned step S 1903 - 3  (YES). 
     If it is determined that the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is not the “maintenance” (NO in step S 1910 - 3 ) in the determination in step S 1910 - 3 , it means that the basic control state indicated by the basic control state information is the “continuation”. In this case, the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  terminates the plan conversation control process without outputting a reply sentence. With that, describing the plan control process has ended. 
     The main process is further described with referring back to  FIG. 180 . The conversation control unit  1300 - 3  executes the discourse space conversation control process (step S 1802 - 3 ) after the plan conversation control process (step S 1801 - 3 ) has been completed. Note that, if the reply sentence has been output in the plan conversation control process (step S 1801 - 3 ), the conversation control unit  1300 - 3  executes a basic control information update process (step S 1804 - 3 ) without executing the discourse space conversation control process (step S 1802 - 3 ) and the after-mentioned CA conversation control process (step S 1803 - 3 ) and then terminates the main process. 
       FIG. 184  is a flow chart showing an example of a discourse space conversation control process according to the present embodiment. The input unit  1100 - 3  firstly executes a step for receiving a user&#39;s utterance (step S 2201 - 3 ). Specifically, the input unit  1100 - 3  receives voice sounds of the user&#39;s utterance. The input unit  1100 - 3  outputs the received voice sounds to the speech recognition unit  1200 - 3  as a voice signal. Note that the input unit  1100 - 3  may receive a character string input by a user (for example, text data input in a text format) instead of the voice sounds. In this case, the input unit  1100 - 3  may be a text input device such as a keyboard or a touchscreen. 
     Next, the speech recognition unit  1200 - 3  executes a step for specifying a character string corresponding to the uttered contents based on the uttered contents retrieved by the input unit  1100 - 3  (step S 2202 - 3 ). Specifically, the speech recognition unit  1200 - 3 , which has received the voice signal from the input unit  1100 - 3 , specifies a word hypothesis (candidate) corresponding to the voice signal based on the received voice signal. The speech recognition unit  1200 - 3  retrieves a character string corresponding to the specified word hypothesis and outputs the retrieved character string to the conversation control unit  1300 - 3 , more specifically the discourse space conversation control process unit  1330 - 3 , as a character string signal. 
     And then, the character string specifying unit  1410 - 3  segments a series of the character strings specified by the speech recognition unit  1200 - 3  into segments (step S 2203 - 3 ). Specifically, if the series of the character strings have a time interval more than a certain interval, the character string specifying unit  1410 - 3 , which has received the character string signal or a morpheme signal from the managing unit  1310 - 3 , segments the character strings there. The character string specifying unit  1410 - 3  outputs the segmented character strings to the morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 3  and the input type determining unit  1440 - 3 . Note that it is preferred that the character string specifying unit  1410 - 3  segments a character string at a punctuation, a space and so on in a case where the character string has been input from a keyboard. 
     Subsequently, the morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 3  executes a step for extracting morphemes constituting minimum units of the character string as first morpheme information based on the character string specified by the character string specifying unit  1410 - 3  (step S 2204 - 3 ). Specifically, the morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 3 , which has received the character strings from the character string specifying unit  1410 - 3 , compares the received character strings and morpheme groups previously stored in the morpheme database  1430 - 3 . Note that, in the present embodiment, each of the morpheme groups is prepared as a morpheme dictionary in which a direction word, a reading, a word class and an inflected forms are described for each morpheme belonging to each word-class classification. 
     The morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 3 , which has executed the comparison, extracts coincident morphemes (m 1 , m 2 , . . . ) with the morphemes included in the previously stored morpheme groups from the received character string. The morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 3  outputs the extracted morphemes to the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 3  as the first morpheme information. 
     Next, the input type determining unit  1440 - 3  executes a step for determining the “uttered sentence type” based on the morphemes which constitute one sentence and are specified by the character string specifying unit  1410 - 3  (step S 2205 - 3 ). Specifically, the input type determining unit  1440 - 3 , which has received the character strings from the character string specifying unit  1410 - 3 , compares the received character strings and the dictionaries stored in the utterance type database  1450 - 3  based on the received character strings and extracts elements relevant to the dictionaries among the character strings. The input type determining unit  1440 - 3 , which has extracted the elements, determines to which “uttered sentence type” the extracted element(s) belongs based on the extracted element(s). The input type determining unit  1440 - 3  outputs the determined “uttered sentence type” (utterance type) to the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3 . 
     And then, the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 3  executes a step for comparing the first morpheme information extracted by the morpheme extracting unit  1420 - 3  and the focused topic title  820 - 3   focus  (step S 2206 - 3 ). 
     If a morpheme in the first morpheme information is related to the focused topic title  820 - 3   focus , the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 3  outputs the focused topic title  820 - 3   focus  to the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3 . On the other hand, if no morpheme in the first morpheme information is related to the focused topic title  820 - 3   focus , the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 3  outputs the received first morpheme information and the user input sentence topic specification information to the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3  as the retrieval command signal. 
     Subsequently, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3  executes a step for including the focused topic specification information and the reply sentence topic specification information into the received first morpheme information based on the first morpheme information received from the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 3  (step S 2207 - 3 ). Specifically, if it is assumed that the first morpheme information is defined as “W” and a set of the focused topic specification information and the reply sentence topic specification information is defined as “D”, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3  generates the complemented first morpheme information by including an element(s) in the set “D” into the first morpheme information “W” and compares the complemented first morpheme information and all the topic titles  820 - 3  to retrieve the topic title  820 - 3  related to the complemented first morpheme information. If the topic title  820 - 3  related to the complemented first morpheme information has been found, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3  outputs the topic title  820 - 3  to the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3 . On the other hand, if no topic title  820 - 3  related to the complemented first morpheme information has been found, the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3  outputs the first morpheme information and the user input sentence topic specification information to the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 3 . 
     Next, the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 3  executes a step for comparing the first morpheme information and the user input sentence topic specification information and retrieves the topic title  820 - 3  best-suited for the first morpheme information among the topic titles  820 - 3  (step S 2208 - 3 ). Specifically, the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 3 , which has received the retrieval command signal from the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3 , retrieves the topic title  820 - 3  best-suited for the first morpheme information among topic titles  820 - 3  associated with the user input sentence topic specification information based on the user input sentence topic specification information and the first morpheme information included in the received retrieval command signal. The topic retrieval unit  1370 - 3  outputs the retrieved topic title  820 - 3  to the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3  as the retrieval result signal. 
     Next, the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3  compares, in order to select the reply sentence  830 - 3 , the user&#39;s utterance type determined by the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 3  and the response type associated with the retrieved topic title  820 - 3  based on the retrieved topic title  820 - 3  by the topic specification information retrieval unit  1350 - 3 , the elliptical sentence complementation unit  1360 - 3  or the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 3  (step S 2209 - 3 ). 
     The reply sentence  830 - 3  is selected in particular as explained hereinbelow. Specifically, based on the “topic title” associated with the received retrieval result signal and the received “uttered sentence type”, the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3 , which has received the retrieval result signal from the topic retrieval unit  1370 - 3  and the “uttered sentence type” from the input type determining unit  1440 - 3 , specifies one response type coincident with the “uttered sentence type” (for example, DA) among the response types associated with the “topic title”. 
     Consequently, the reply retrieval unit  1380 - 3  outputs the reply sentence  830 - 3  retrieved in step S 2209 - 3  to the output unit  1600 - 3  via the managing unit  1310 - 3  (S 2210 - 3 ). The output unit  1600 - 3 , which has received the reply sentence  830 - 3  from the managing unit  1310 - 3 , outputs the received reply sentence  830 - 3 . 
     With that, describing the discourse space conversation control process has ended and the main process is further described with referring back to  FIG. 180 . 
     The conversation control unit  1300 - 3  executes the CA conversation control process (step S 1803 - 3 ) after the discourse space conversation control process has been completed. Note that, if the reply sentence has been output in the plan conversation control process (step S 1801 - 3 ) or the discourse space conversation control (step S 1802 - 3 ), the conversation control unit  1300 - 3  executes the basic control information update process (step S 1804 - 3 ) without executing the CA conversation control process (step S 1803 - 3 ) and then terminates the main process. 
     The CA conversation control process is a process in which it is determined whether a user&#39;s utterance is an utterance for “explaining something”, an utterance for “confirming something”, an utterance for “accusing or rebuking something” or an utterance for “other than these”, and then a reply sentence is output according to the user&#39;s utterance contents and the determination result. By the CA conversation control process, a so-called “bridging” reply sentence for continuing the uninterrupted conversation with the user can be output even if a reply sentence suited for the user&#39;s utterance can not be output by the plan conversation control process nor the discourse space conversation control process. 
     Next, the conversation control unit  1300 - 3  executes the basic control information update process (step S 1804 - 3 ). In this process, the conversation control unit  1300 - 3 , more specifically the managing unit  1310 - 3 , sets the basic control information to the “cohesiveness” when the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  has output a reply sentence, sets the basic control information to the “cancellation” when the plan conversation process unit  1320 - 3  has cancelled an output of a reply sentence, sets the basic control information to the “maintenance” when the discourse space conversation control process unit  1330 - 3  has output a reply sentence, or sets the basic control information to the “continuation” when the CA conversation process unit  1340 - 3  has output a reply sentence. 
     The basic control information set in this basic control information update process is referred in the above-mentioned plan conversation control process (step S 1801 - 3 ) to be employed for continuation or resumption of a plan. 
     As described the above, the conversation controller  1000 - 3  can executes a previously prepared plan(s) or can adequately respond to a topic(s) which is not included in a plan(s) according to a user&#39;s utterance by executing the main process each time when receiving the user&#39;s utterance. 
     In the gaming terminal  4 - 3  of the present embodiment, the input unit  1100 - 3  of the conversation controller  1000 - 3  explained above may be configured by the touchscreen  50 - 3  attached to the display  8 - 3  and the microphone  15 - 3 . In addition, the output unit  1600 - 3  may be configured by the display  8 - 3  and the speaker  10 - 3 . Furthermore, the speech recognition unit  1200 - 3 ; the conversation control unit  1300 - 3 ; and the character string specifying unit  1410 - 3 , the morpheme extraction portion  1420 - 3  and the input type determining portion  1440 - 3  of the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 3  may be configured by the terminal controller  90 - 3 . In addition, the morpheme database  1430 - 3  and the utterance type database  1450 - 3  of the sentence analyzing unit  1400 - 3 , and the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 3  can be configured by the first external storage unit  99 - 3 . Note that, although the conversation database  1500 - 3  can be stored also in the first external storage unit  99 - 3 , it is stored in the HDD  34 - 3  of the above-mentioned server  13 - 3  in the present embodiment (see  FIG. 160 ). And, as explained later, there are methods such as directly accessing the HDD  34 - 3  and downloading the conversation data stored in the HDD  34 - 3  at the time when using the conversation data stored in the conversation database  1500 - 3 . 
     And, in the present embodiment, the language to be used in the roulette game can be determined through a conversation with the player by the conversation engine achieved with the above-mentioned configuration in the gaming terminal  4 - 3  by the conversation controller  1000 - 3 . 
     Here, the speech recognition dictionary memory  1700 - 3  of the conversation controller  1000 - 3  configured by the first external storage unit  99 - 3  has word dictionaries for the plural languages in order to confirm a language type of sound messages input into the microphone  15 - 3  by the player. In addition, the morphological database  1430 - 3  of the conversation controller  1000 - 3  configured by the first external storage unit  99 - 3  has the morpheme groups for the plural languages (morpheme dictionaries). Furthermore, the utterance type database  1450 - 3  of the conversation controller  1000 - 3  configured by the first external storage unit  99 - 3  also has dictionaries of the respective utterance types for the plural languages. 
     In addition, “sentence” data for the plural languages are also stored in the conversation database  1500 - 3  configured by the terminal controller  90 - 3  in order to output sound messages from the speaker  10 - 3  to the player in the language selected by the player or to display the messages on the display  8 - 3 . The “sentences” include a message for requesting an input (by an utterance or an operation on the display  8 - 3 ) of a specific phrase or sentence in the language desired to be used in the roulette game, a message for confirming the player to proceed the roulette game in the language of the input specific phrase or sentence, or the like. 
     The operations of the above-mentioned conversation engine of the gaming terminal  4 - 3  of the present embodiment will be explained later. 
     Next, contents of gaming processing executed in each of the server  13 - 3 , the roulette unit  2 - 3  and the gaming terminals  4 - 3  on the roulette game machine  1 - 3  according to the present embodiment will be explained. 
     To begin with, gaming processing of the server, which is executed by the server CPU  81 - 3  of the server  13 - 3  according to the programs stored in the ROM  82 - 3 , and gaming processing of the roulette unit, which is executed by the CPU  101 - 3  of the roulette unit  2 - 3  according to the programs stored in the ROM  102 - 3 , will explained based on  FIGS. 185 and 186 .  FIGS. 185 and 186  are flow charts of the gaming processings of the server and the roulette unit in the roulette gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 
     First, the gaming processing of the server  13 - 3  will be explained based on  FIGS. 185 and 186 . At first, as shown in  FIG. 185 , the server CPU  81 - 3  starts counting the betting period (step S 101 - 3 ). The betting period is a period during which a player can place a bet(s). A player participating in a game can place a bet on the bet area  72 - 3  (see  FIG. 159 ) which corresponds to the number predicted by the player during the betting period. The server CPU  81 - 3  sends a betting period start signal to the terminal CPU  91 - 3  when the betting period counting has been started (step S 102 - 3 ). 
     Next, the server CPU  81 - 3  determines whether or not the remaining betting period has reached five seconds (step S 103 - 3 ). Note that the remaining betting period is displayed on the bet time counter  69 - 3  on the display  8 - 3  at each of the gaming terminals  4 - 3  (see  FIG. 159 ). If it is determined that it has not reached the last five seconds, the processing will be returned to the step S 103 - 3 . On the other hand, if it is determined that it has reached the last five seconds, the processing will proceed to the step S 104 - 3 . 
     The server CPU  81 - 3  sends a control command to the CPU  101 - 3  of the roulette unit  2 - 3  to start the operation of the roulette unit  2 - 3  (step S 104 - 3 ). Next, the server CPU  81 - 3  determines whether or not the betting period has ended (step S 105 - 3 ). If it is determined that the betting period has not ended (NO in step S 105 - 3 ), the server CPU  81 - 3  suspends the processing until the betting period ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the betting period has ended (YES in step S 105 - 3 ), the server CPU  81 - 3  sends a betting period end signal indicating the expiry of the betting period to the terminal CPU  91 - 3  (step S 106 - 3 ). 
     Next, the server CPU  81 - 3  receives the betting information (the information such as a specified bet area  72 - 3 , a bet amount of chips and a betting type) input at each of the gaming terminals  4 - 3  by players from each of the terminal CPU&#39;s  91 - 3  (step S 107 - 3 ) and stores it into the betting information storing area in the RAM  83 - 3 . 
     Subsequently, the server CPU  81 - 3  executes a JP accumulation processing (step S 108 - 3 ). In this JP accumulation processing, 0.30% of the total credits which have been bet at all the gaming terminals  4 - 3  and received in step S 107 - 3  is accumulatively added to a JP amount stored in a “MINI” JP accumulation storing area in the RAM  83 - 3 . In addition, in the JP accumulation processing, 0.20% of the total credits which have been bet at all the gaming terminals  4 - 3  and received in step S 107 - 3  is accumulatively added to a JP amount stored in A “MAJOR” JP accumulation storing area in the RAM  83 - 3 . Furthermore, in the JP accumulation processing, 0.15% of the total credits which have been bet at all the gaming terminals  4 - 3  and received in step S 107 - 3  is accumulatively added to a JP amount stored in the “MEGA” JP accumulation storing area in the RAM  83 - 3 . In addition, in the JP accumulation processing, displays in a MEGA counter  73 - 3 , a MAJOR counter  74 - 3  and a MINI counter  75 - 3  are updated based on the accumulated JP amounts. 
     Next, as shown in  FIG. 186 , the server CPU  81 - 3  executes a JP bonus game determination processing (step S 109 - 3 ). In this processing, the server CPU  81 - 3  determines whether or not to execute a JP bonus game at each of the gaming terminals  4 - 3  by using random number values sampled by a sampling circuit or the like, which of the gaming terminals  4 - 3  would win the JP (or all the gaming terminals  4 - 3  are to lose) in the case where the JP bonus game is to be executed and which JP (“MEGA”, “MAJOR” or “MINI”) is to be awarded in the case where the JP is to be awarded. 
     Next, the server CPU  81 - 3  sends a JP bonus game determination result to each of the gaming terminals  4 - 3  based on the process of step S 109 - 3  (step S 110 - 3 ). Subsequently, the server CPU  81 - 3  sends a control command to the CPU  101 - 3  of the roulette device  2 - 3  in order for the CPU  101 - 3  to detect the number pocket  23 - 3  into which the ball  27 - 3  has fallen into in the roulette unit  2 - 3  (step S 111 - 3 ). Then, the server CPU  81 - 3  receives a control signal indicating the number pocket  23 - 3  into which the ball  27 - 3  has fallen from the CPU  101 - 3  of the roulette unit  2 - 3  (step S 112 - 3 ). 
     Next, the server CPU  81 - 3  determines whether or not the bet placed at each of the gaming terminals  4 - 3  has won based on the betting information of each the gaming terminals  4 - 3  received in step S 107 - 3  and the control signal indicating the number pocket  23 - 3  into which the ball  27 - 3  has fallen received in step S 112 - 3  (step S 113 - 3 ). 
     Next, the server CPU  81 - 3  executes a payout calculation processing (step S 114 - 3 ). In the payout calculation processing, the server CPU  81 - 3  firstly specifies credits bet on the winning number for each of the gaming terminal  4 - 3  and then calculates the total payout credits to be paid out for each of the gaming terminals  4 - 3  by using odds (a credit amount to be paid out per one chip (one bet)) for each bet area  72 - 3  which is stored in an odds storing area in the ROM  82 - 3 . 
     Next, the server CPU  81 - 3  executes a sending processing of the payout result of credits for a game based on the payout calculation processing of step S 113 - 3  and the JP payout result based on the JP bonus game determination processing of step S 109 - 3  (step S 115 - 3 ). Specifically, the credit data, which corresponds to the payout credits for the game to the terminal CPU  91 - 3  of each of the winning gaming terminals  4 - 3 , is output and the credit data, which corresponds to the currently accumulated JP credits, is output in the case where the JP is to be awarded. Next, the server CPU  81 - 3  sends a request command for collecting the ball  27 - 3  on the roulette wheel  22 - 3  to the CPU  101 - 3  of the roulette unit  2 - 3  (step S 116 - 3 ). After the process of step S 116 - 3 , this subroutine is terminated. 
     Next, the gaming processing of the roulette unit  2 - 3  will be explained based on  FIGS. 185 and 186 . To begin with, as shown in  FIG. 185 , the CPU  101 - 3  receives the control command for staring the operation of the roulette unit  2 - 3  from the server CPU  81 - 3  of the server  13 - 3  (step S 201 - 3 ). 
     Subsequently, the CPU  101 - 3  drives the wheel drive motor  106 - 3  to spin the roulette wheel  22 - 3  (step S 202 - 3 ). 
     Next, after a prescribed time period has elapsed since the roulette wheel  22 - 3  starts spinning (YES in step S 203 - 3 ), the CPU  101 - 3  launches the ball  27 - 3  at the time when a launching delay time has elapsed since it receives a detection signal from the pocket position detecting circuit  107 - 3  (step S 204 - 3 ). 
     Next, as shown in  FIG. 186 , the CPU  101 - 3  receives the control command for detecting the pocket  23 - 3  into which the ball  27 - 3  has fallen from the server CPU  81 - 3  of the server  13 - 3  (step S 205 - 3 ). Next, the CPU  101 - 3  determines which of the number pocket  23 - 3  into which the ball  27 - 3  has fallen by operating the ball sensor  105 - 3  (step S 206 - 3 ). And then, the CPU  101 - 3  sends the detection result indicating the number pocket  23 - 3  into which the ball  27 - 3  has fallen to the server CPU  81 - 3  of the server  13 - 3  (step S 207 - 3 ). 
     Next, the CPU  101 - 3  receives the request command for collecting the ball  27 - 3  from the server CPU  81 - 3  of the server  13 - 3  (step S 208 - 3 ). Next, the CPU  101 - 3  collects the ball  27 - 3  on the roulette wheel  22 - 3  by operating the ball collecting unit  108 - 3  provided beneath the roulette wheel  22 - 3  (step S 209 - 3 ). The collected ball  27 - 3  will be launched onto the roulette wheel  22 - 3  again by the ball launching unit  104 - 3  in the next game. After the process of step S 209 - 3 , this subroutine is terminated. 
     Next, processes executed by the terminal CPU  91 - 3  of the gaming terminal  4 - 3  of the roulette gaming machine  1 - 3  according to the present embodiment in accordance with the programs stored in the ROM  92 - 3  will be explained with reference to  FIGS. 187 to 198 . 
     Here, the flag F in the RAM  93 - 3  is set to a default value “1” which indicates during the betting period. In addition, a default bet screen  61 - 3  shown in  FIG. 159  is displayed on the display  8 - 3  of the gaming terminal  4 - 3 . In this state, as shown in  FIG. 187 , the terminal CPU  91 - 3  first executes language confirmation processing (step S 300 - 3 ), then executes conversation database setting processing (step S 301 - 3 ), then executes translating program setting processing (step S 302 - 3 ), then executes conversation processing (step S 303 - 3 ), then executes betting period confirmation processing (step S 304 - 3 ), and then executes bet acceptance processing (step S 305 - 3 ). 
     Then, in the language confirmation processing of step S 300 - 3 , the terminal CPU  91 - 3  confirms whether or not a new smart card has been inserted into the card reader  16 - 3  as shown in  FIG. 188  (step S 300   a - 3 ). If it is not inserted (NO in step S 300   a - 3 ), the language confirmation processing is terminated. If it is inserted (YES in step S 300   a - 3 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 3  reads, from the inserted smart card, a language type used in a game play by a player who possesses the smart card (step S 300   b - 3 ). 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  outputs a message inquiring whether or not a game is proceeded in the read-out language type (step S 300   c - 3 ). The message may be output as sound from the speaker  10 - 3  via the sound input circuit  98 - 3 , as texts on the display  8 - 3  via the LCD drive circuit  95 - 3  and so on. 
     For example, if the language type read by the card reader  16 - 3  from the smart card is English and a sound message is to be output from the speaker  10 - 3 , the terminal CPU  91 - 3  outputs sound “English will be used. Is it all right?” 
     If the language type read by the card reader  16 - 3  from the smart card is English, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  assumes that a sound input “I want to use English. Is it all right?” have been input into the input unit  1100 - 3  of the conversation controller  1000 - 3  configured by the microphone  15 - 3 , and outputs the above-mentioned sound from the speaker  10 - 3  served as the output unit  1600 - 3  (see  FIG. 163 ) by making the conversation controller  1000 - 3  to execute corresponding processing. 
     In addition, if the language type read by the card reader  16 - 3  from the smart card is English, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  may output sound “English will be used. Is it all right?” from the speaker  10 - 3  according to the programs stored in the ROM  92 - 3  without using the conversation controller  1000 - 3 . 
     Alternatively, if the language type read by the card reader  16 - 3  from the smart card is English and a display message is to be output, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  displays sentences “English will be used. Is it all right?” on the display  8 - 3  together with “YES” and “NO” buttons  64   a - 3  and  64   b - 3  as shown in  FIG. 191 . 
     If the language type read by the card reader  16 - 3  from the smart card is English, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  assumes that character strings “I want to use English. Is it all right?” have been input into the input unit  1100 - 3  of the conversation controller  1000 - 3  configured by the touchscreen  50 - 3  on the display  8 - 3 , and displays the above-mentioned sentences together with “YES” and “NO” buttons  64   a - 3  and  64   b - 3  on the display  8 - 3  served as the output unit  1600 - 3  by making the conversation controller  1000 - 3  to execute corresponding processing. 
     In addition, if the language type read by the card reader  16 - 3  from the smart card is English, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  may display sentences “English will be used. Is it all right?” on the display  8 - 3  together with “YES” and “NO” buttons  64   a - 3  and  64   b - 3  according to the programs stored in the ROM  92 - 3  without using the conversation controller  1000 - 3 . 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  determines whether or not an affirmative message has been input in response to the output message in step S 300   c - 3  (step S 300   d - 3 ). 
     Here, if the message in step S 300   c - 3  has been output as sound, it can be confirmed whether or not the message has been input in response to the output message by confirming whether or not the input unit  1100 - 3  of the conversation controller  1000 - 3  configured by the microphone  15 - 3  receives an input after the message has been output in step S 300   c - 3 . Alternatively, if the message in step S 300   c - 3  has been displayed on the display  8 - 3  in English as shown in  FIG. 191 , it can be confirmed whether or not the message has been input in response to the output message by confirming whether or not a player&#39;s operation on the “YES” and “NO” buttons  64   a - 3  and  64   b - 3  displayed on the display  8 - 3  has been detected via the touchscreen  50 - 3 . 
     In addition, it can be confirmed whether or not the input message in response to the output message in step S 300   c - 3  is an affirmative message by analyzing contents of the sound message input into the microphone  15 - 3  using the conversation controller  1000 - 3 , or detecting which of the “YES” and “NO” buttons  64   a - 3  and  64   b - 3  displayed on the display  8 - 3  as shown in  FIG. 191  has been operated by the player. 
     Then, if an affirmative message has been input (YES in step S 300   d - 3 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 3  displays a bet screen  61 - 3  which is displayed on the display  8 - 3  during the betting period of the roulette game in the language read by the card reader  16 - 3  from the smart card (step S 300   e - 3 ). For example, if the language type read by the card reader  16 - 3  from the smart card is English, a bet screen  61 - 3  presented in English as shown in  FIG. 159  is displayed on the display  8 - 3  during the betting period of the roulette game. Subsequently, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  terminates the language confirmation processing. 
     On the other hand, if an affirmative message has not been input (NO in step S 300   d - 3 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 3  outputs a message for selecting the type of language to be used for proceeding the roulette game (step S 300   f - 3 ). The message may be output as sound from the speaker  10 - 3  via the sound output circuit  96 - 3 , or as texts on the display  8 - 3  via the LCD drive circuit  95 - 3 . 
     For example, when a sound message is to be output, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  outputs sound requesting to select the language to be used in a game from the speaker  10 - 3 . For example, if the language type read by the card reader  16 - 3  from the smart card is English, sound “What language do you want to use?” is output from the speaker  10 - 3 . 
     The requesting sound to select the language to be used in a game is output from the speaker  10 - 3  with the language type had been read by the card reader  16 - 3  from the smart card. If a sound input in the negative has been input to the input unit  1100 - 3  of the conversation controller  1000 - 3  configured by the microphone  15 - 3  in response to the inquiring sound whether or not to proceed the game play in the above-mentioned language, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  makes the conversation controller  1000 - 3  to execute corresponding processing and then outputs a processing result thereof from the speaker  10 - 3  served as the output unit  1600 - 3 . 
     Alternatively, if a display message is to be output, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  displays a sentence and buttons for selecting the language to be used in a game on the display  8 - 3 . For example, if the language type read by the card reader  16 - 3  from the smart card is English, a sentence “What language do you want to use?” is displayed together with language selection buttons  63   a - 3 ,  63   b - 3 ,  63   c - 3 ,  63   d - 3 ,  63   e - 3  and  63   f - 3 , each corresponding to “English”, “Japanese”, “French”, “German”, “Spanish” and “Chinese”, as shown in  FIG. 192 . 
     The sentence or the like for selecting the language to be used in a game are displayed on the display  8 - 3  with the language type read by the card reader  16 - 3  from the smart card. If an operation on a button indicating a player&#39;s rejection (e.g., the “NO” button  64   b  shown in  FIG. 191 ) has been detected via the touchscreen  50 - 3 , the terminal CPU  91 - 3  makes the conversation controller  1000 - 3  to execute corresponding processing and then displays a processing result thereof on the display  8 - 3  served as the output unit  1600 - 3 . 
     Then, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  confirms whether or not a reply message in response to the output message in step S 300   f - 3  has been input (step S 300   g - 3 ). 
     Here, if the message in step S 300   f - 3  has been output as sound, it can be confirmed whether or not the message has been input in response to the output by confirming whether or not the input unit  1100 - 3  of the conversation controller  1000 - 3  configured by the microphone  15 - 3  receives an input after the message has been output in step S 300   e - 3 . Alternatively, if the message in step S 300   f - 3  has been displayed on the display  8 - 3 , it can be confirmed whether or not the message has been input in response to the output message by confirming whether or not a player&#39;s operation on the language selection buttons (e.g., the buttons  63   a - 3 ,  63   b - 3 ,  63   c - 3 ,  63   d - 3 ,  63   e - 3  and  63   f - 3  each corresponding to “English”, “Japanese”, “French”, “German”, “Spanish” and “Chinese” as shown in  FIG. 192 ) displayed on the display  8 - 3  has been detected via the touchscreen  50 - 3 . 
     Then, if a reply message in response to the output message in step S 300   f - 3  has not been input (NO in step S 300   g - 3 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 3  repeats step S 300   g - 3  until a reply is input. On the other hand, if a reply message has been input (YES in step S 300   g - 3 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 3  displays a bet screen  61 - 3  on the display  8 - 3  during the betting period of the roulette game in the language specified by the input message in step S 300   g - 3  (step S 300   h - 3 ). Subsequently, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  terminates the language confirmation processing. 
     Here, if the message has been input as sound in step S 300   g - 3 , the language selected by the input message can be specified by analyzing contents of the sound message input into the microphone  15 - 3  using the conversation controller  1000 - 3 . Alternatively, if the message has been input via a display screen on the display  8 - 3  in step S 300   g - 3 , the language selected by the input message can be specified by detecting contents of a player&#39;s operation onto the language selection buttons displayed on the display  8 - 3  by the terminal CPU  91 - 3  via the touchscreen  50 - 3 . 
     Next, the conversation database setting processing of step S 301 - 3  in  FIG. 187  will be explained with reference to a flow chart shown in  FIG. 194 . 
     The terminal CPU  91 - 3  of the gaming terminal  4 - 3  sends a signal for setting the conversation database corresponding to the player&#39;s language (e.g., Japanese) to the server  13 - 3  via the network based on the player&#39;s language determined in the language confirmation processing (step S 51 - 3 ). 
     The server CPU  81 - 3  (see  FIG. 160 ) of the server  13 - 3  receives the conversation database setting signal transmitted from the gaming terminal  4 - 3  (step S 61 - 3 ) and makes a conversation database corresponding to the specified language activatable among the conversation database corresponding to plural languages in the HDD  34 - 3  (step S 62 - 3 ). 
     Subsequently, the server CPU  81 - 3  sends an activatable signal indicating that the conversation database is being activatable to the gaming terminal  4 - 3  (step S 63 - 3 ). The gaming terminal  4 - 3  receives the activatable signal (step S 52 - 3 ). As a result, the conversation database corresponding to the player&#39;s language is made available in the gaming terminal  4 - 3  and the conversational processing using the conversation engine is made available. 
     Next, the translating program setting processing of step S 302 - 3  in  FIG. 187  will be described with reference to a flow chart shown in  FIG. 195 . 
     The terminal CPU  91 - 3  of the gaming terminal  4 - 3  sends a setting signal of the translating program between the player&#39;s language (e.g., Japanese) and the reference language (e.g., English) to the server  13 - 3  via the network based on the player&#39;s language determined in the language confirmation processing (step S 11 - 3 ). 
     The server CPU  81 - 3  (see  FIG. 160 ) of the server  13 - 3  receives the translating program setting signal transmitted from the gaming terminal  4 - 3  (step S 21 - 3 ) and makes a specified translating program (e.g., a “Japanese-English” translating program) activatable among translating programs corresponding to plural languages in the HDD  34 - 3  (step S 22 - 3 ). 
     Subsequently, the server CPU  81 - 3  sends an activatable signal indicating that the translating program is being activatable to the gaming terminal  4 - 3  (step S 23 - 3 ). The gaming terminal  4 - 3  receives the activatable signal (step S 12 - 3 ). As a result, the translating program for translating the player&#39;s language into the reference language is made available in the gaming terminal  4 - 3 . 
     Then, conversations using the conversation engine corresponding to the player&#39;s language are made available by the above-mentioned conversation database setting processing being executed. Therefore, since conversations using the language of the player playing at each of the gaming terminals  4 - 3  are enabled, games can be processed smoothly. Furthermore, messages for each player can be translated into the player&#39;s language and displayed on the display  8 - 3  by the above-mentioned translating program setting processing being executed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to understand message contents. 
     Next, the conversation processing in  FIG. 187  will be explained with reference to a flow chart shown in  FIG. 196 . 
     First, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  reads out a character image corresponding to the player&#39;s language had set in the language confirmation processing from the image memory  77 - 3  shown in  FIG. 162  and displays it in a display area  61 A- 3  (see  FIG. 193 ) on the display  8 - 3  (step S 150 - 3 ). For example, if the player&#39;s language is Japanese, a character image which looks like a Japanese is selected. If the player&#39;s language is Chinese, a character image which looks like a Chinese is selected. If the player&#39;s language is Arabic, a character image which looks like an Arabic is selected. 
     Subsequently, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  actuates the microphone  15 - 3  to accept a sound input by the player&#39;s utterance (step S 151 - 3 ). 
     If the sound input has been accepted (YES in step S 152 - 3 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 3  recognizes the sound input (step S 153 - 3 ). 
     And then, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  generates a reply to the sound input using the conversation database had been set and the conversation engine (step S 154 - 3 ). 
     For example, in case where the player&#39;s language is Japanese and an utterance “How are you feeling today?” has been made in Japanese, a reply “Terminal No. 3 is getting paid out well, today.” or the like is generated in Japanese to the utterance and then output from the speaker  10 - 3  (step S 155 - 3 ). Furthermore, the character image which looks like a Japanese and a Japanese sentence “Terminal No. 3 is getting paid out well, today.” are displayed in the display area  61 A- 3  on the display  8 - 3  as shown in FIG.  200 . 
     In addition, in case where the player&#39;s language is Chinese and an utterance “How are you feeling today?” has been made in Chinese, a reply “Terminal No. 5 is suffering huge loss, today.” or the like is generated in Chinese to the utterance and then output from the speaker  10 - 3 . Furthermore, the character image which looks like a Chinese and a Chinese sentence “Terminal No. 5 is suffering huge loss, today.” are displayed in the display area  61 A- 3  on the display  8 - 3  as shown in  FIG. 201 . 
     Furthermore, in case where the player&#39;s language is Arabic and an utterance “How are you feeling today?” has been made in Arabic, a reply “You are the today&#39;s first player at this terminal!” or the like is generated in Arabic to the utterance and then output from the speaker  10 - 3 . Furthermore, the character image which looks like an Arabic and an Arabic sentence “You are the today&#39;s first player at this terminal!” are displayed in the display area  61 A on the display  8 - 3  as shown in  FIG. 202 . 
     In addition, in case where the player&#39;s language is English and an utterance “How are you feeling today?” has been made in English, a reply “Payouts have been awarded well at this terminal, today.” or the like is generated in English to the utterance and then output from the speaker  10 - 3 . Furthermore, the character image which looks like an English and an English sentence “Payouts have been awarded well at this terminal, today.” are displayed in the display area  61 A- 3  on the display  8 - 3  as shown in  FIG. 203 . 
     In this manner, a character corresponding to the player&#39;s language and a reply are displayed in the display area  61 A- 3 . Specifically, a message notified to the player is displayed in the display area  61 A- 3  on the display  8 - 3  in a display form of an utterance by the character. Therefore, the player can see as if the character talked to the player. 
     Next, the betting period confirmation processing of step S 304 - 3  in  FIG. 187  will be explained with reference to a flow chart shown in  FIG. 189 . As shown in  FIG. 189 , the terminal CPU  91 - 3  confirms whether or not the betting period start signal has been received from the server CPU  81 - 3  (step S 311 - 3 ). If the betting period start signal has been received (YES in step S 311 - 3 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 3  sets the flag F in the RAM  93 - 3  to “1” which indicates that it is under the betting period (step S 312 - 3 ) and then terminates the betting period confirmation processing. 
     On the other hand, if the betting time start signal has not been received (NO in step S 311 - 3 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 3  confirms whether or not the betting period end signal has been received from the server CPU  81 - 3  (step S 313 - 3 ). If the betting period end signal has been received (YES in step S 313 - 3 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 3  sets the flag F in the RAM  93 - 3  to “0” which indicates that it is not under the betting period (step S 314 - 3 ) and then terminates the betting period confirmation processing. If the betting period end signal has not been received (NO in step S 313 - 3 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 3  terminates the betting period confirmation processing. 
     Next, in the bet accepting processing of step S 305 - 3  in  FIG. 187 , as shown in  FIG. 190 , the terminal CPU  91 - 3  confirms whether or not the flag F in the RAM  93 - 3  is set to “0” (step S 321 - 3 ). If the flag F is set to “0” (YES in step S 321 - 3 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 3  terminates the bet accepting processing. 
     On the other hand, if the flag F is not set to “0” (NO in step S 321 - 3 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 3  accepts a bet by a player. In this case, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  outputs a sound message “Bet acceptance starts.” from the speaker  10 - 3  using the conversation engine and the translating program. Specifically, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  sends a message data “Bet acceptance starts.” in the reference language (e.g., English) to the server  13 - 3  shown in  FIG. 160 . The server CPU  81 - 3  translates the message data into the player&#39;s language (e.g., Japanese) using the translating program (e.g., a “Japanese-English” translating program) stored in the HDD  34 - 3  and sends back the translated data to the gaming terminal  4 - 3 . Then, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  receives the translated data and converts the translated data into sound data using the conversation engine to outputs from the speaker  10 - 3 . Therefore, the message “Bet acceptance starts.” is output from the speaker in the player&#39;s language (e.g., Japanese). 
     In addition, for example, if a player utters “Tell me how to bet!” into the microphone  15 - 3  in Japanese, the conversation engine analyzes this utterance using the Japanese conversation database and outputs a reply “Please insert medals into a medal insertion slot or press bet buttons.” in Japanese from the speaker  10 - 3 . Alternatively, a character which looks like a Japanese and a Japanese sentence “Please insert medals into a medal insertion slot or press bet buttons.” are displayed in the display area  61 A on the display  8 - 3  as shown in  FIG. 204 . 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  confirms whether or not the remaining betting period has reached the last five seconds with the remaining time displayed on the bet time counter  69 - 3  being “5” (step S 322 - 3 ). If the remaining time has reached the last 5 seconds (YES in step S 322 - 3 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 3  displays a message to preannounce the end of the betting period on the bet screen  61 - 3  (step S 323 - 3 ). Simultaneously, a sound message “Five seconds left for bets.” is output from the speaker  10 - 3  in the player&#39;s language. For example, if the player&#39;s language is Japanese, a Japanese sentence “Betting time will expire soon.” shown in  FIG. 205  is displayed together with a character image in the bet screen  61 - 3  on the display  8 - 3 . 
     On the other hand, if the remaining time has not reached the last five seconds (it remains more than five seconds) (NO in step S 322 - 3 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 3  proceeds to the step S 324 - 3 . 
     The terminal CPU  91 - 3  detects a bet placed by a player (step S 324 - 3 ). A chip betting is detected by the player&#39;s touching on the bet area  72 - 3  in the betting board  60 - 3  or on the bet buttons  66 - 3  via the touchscreen  50 - 3 . In addition, a bet can be accepted by way of a player&#39;s utterance into the microphone  15 - 3  and recognition of this utterance by the conversation engine. For example, a player makes an utterance “I will bet fifty credits.” after having selected a desired bet area  72 - 3  on the touchscreen  50 - 3 . As a result, the utterance is detected via the microphone  15 - 3  and its sound data are analyzed by the conversation engine, and thereby a fifty-credit bet is confirmed. Furthermore, a reply “Fifty credits have been bet!” is output from the speaker  10 - 3 . After a bet with a chip(s) has been detected, a chip mark  71 - 3  with an amount of the bet chip(s) is displayed on a specified bet area  72 - 3  on the display  8 - 3 . 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  confirms whether or not the player&#39;s bet has been confirmed (step S 325 - 3 ). The betting confirmation is detected by the player&#39;s touching on the bet confirmation button  65 - 3  on the display  8 - 3  via the touchscreen  50 - 3 . 
     If it is confirmed that the player&#39;s bet has not been confirmed (NO in step S 325 - 3 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 3  confirms whether or not the flag F in the RAM  93 - 3  is set to “0” (step S 326 - 3 ). If the flag F is not set to “0” (NO in step S 326 - 3 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 3  returns the processing to step S 322 - 3 . 
     On the other hand, if the flag F is set to “0” (YES in step S 326 - 3 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 3  fixes the player&#39;s bet forcibly (step S 327 - 3 ) and then sifts the processing to after-mentioned step  329 - 3 . 
     Alternatively, if it is confirmed that the player&#39;s bet has been confirmed (YES in step S 325 - 3 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 3  confirms whether or not the flag F in the RAM  93 - 3  is set to “0” or not (step S 328 - 3 ). If the flag F is not set to “0” (NO in step S 328 - 3 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 3  repeats step S 328 - 3 . On the contrary, if the flag F in the RAM  93 - 3  is set to “0” (YES in step S 328 - 3 ), the terminal CPU  91 - 3  proceeds to step S 329 - 3 . 
     The terminal CPU  91 - 3  closes acceptation of betting operations via the touchscreen  50 - 3  (step S 329 - 3 ). Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  sends the player&#39;s betting information (the specified bet area  72 - 3 , the number of bet chips (bet amount)) of the gaming terminal  4 - 3  to the server CPU  81 - 3  (step S 330 - 3 ). 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  changes the screen image on the display  8 - 3  (step S 331 - 3 ). Specifically, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  firstly switches the screen image on the display  8 - 3  to the bet screen  61 - 3  including an indication of the betting period expiry. 
     Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  receives the result of the JP bonus game determination processing executed by the server CPU  81 - 3  from the server CPU  81 - 3  (step S 332 - 3 ). The result of the JP bonus game determination includes the information which indicates: whether or not to execute the JP bonus game at any of the gaming terminals  4 - 3 ; which of the nine gaming terminals  4 - 3  is to win the JP (or all of the gaming terminals  4 - 3  are to lose) in the case where it is determined to execute the JP bonus game; and which JP (“MEGA”, “MAJOR” or “MINI”) is to be awarded in the case of the JP winning. 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  determines whether or not to execute the JP bonus game based on the result of the JP bonus game determination processing received in step S 332 - 3  (step S 333 - 3 ). In the case where it is determined to execute the JP bonus game in the gaming terminal  4 - 3 , the terminal CPU  91 - 3  executes a prescribed selection-type JP bonus game. And then, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  displays the bonus game result (whether or not the JP has been awarded) in the bet screen  61 - 3  on the display  8 - 3  (step S 334 - 3 ) based on the determination result received in step S 332 - 3 . 
     In the case where it is determined not to execute the JP bonus game in the gaming terminal  4 - 3  in step S 333 - 3 , or after the processing in step S 334 - 3 , the terminal CPU  91 - 3  receives the payout result of credits from the server CPU  81 - 3  (step S 335 - 3 ). Note that the payout result of credits includes the payout result for the game and the JP payout result for the JP bonus game. Here, in case of the payout of five hundred medals to be awarded for example, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  will output a sound message “Five hundred medals is awarded” from the speaker  10 - 3  in the player&#39;s language (for example, in Japanese). 
     Next, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  awards a payout according to the payout result received in step S 335 - 3  (step S 336 - 3 ). Specifically, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  stores, in the RAM  93 - 3 , the credit data corresponding to the payout for the game and the credit data corresponding to the currently accumulated JP credits if the JP is awarded in the gaming terminal  4 - 3 . Then, when the payout button  5 - 3  has been touched, medals corresponding to the credits stored in the RAM  93 - 3  (usually, one medal per one credit) are paid out from the medal payout chute  12 - 3 . Thereafter, the terminal CPU  91 - 3  terminates the bet accepting processing. 
     It is obvious from the above-mentioned description that the controller of the present invention is configured by the terminal CPU  91 - 3  in the roulette gaming machine  1 - 3  of the fifth embodiment. 
     In this manner, a player&#39;s language is confirmed by the conversation engine and a conversation with a player is done in the language in the gaming system according to the fifth embodiment. A character corresponding to the player&#39;s language is displayed and a message(s) provided to the player is also displayed in a display form of an utterance by the character. Therefore, the player can have a sense of affinity. 
     In addition, since the character image is shown on the display  8 - 3 , the player&#39;s language used at the gaming terminal  4 - 3  can be understood intuitively when someone except the player see the display  8 - 3 . 
     Sixth Embodiment 
     Next, the sixth embodiment of the game execution processing will be explained. In the sixth embodiment, conversation data of the conversation database corresponding to the player&#39;s language are transmitted to the gaming terminal  4 - 3  among the conversation database corresponding to plural languages stored in the HDD  34 - 3  of the server  13 - 3 . In addition, the translating program to be used is transmitted to the gaming terminal  4 - 3  among plural translating programs stored in the HDD  34 - 3 . Then, the gaming terminal  4 - 3  downloads the conversation data and the translating program that have been transmitted to the second external storage unit  76 - 3 . The terminal CPU  91 - 3  of the gaming terminal  4 - 3  executes a roulette game with the conversation data and the translating program that have been downloaded. 
     Hereinafter, the game execution processing according to the sixth embodiment will be explained with reference to a flow chart shown in  FIG. 197 . As shown in  FIG. 197 , the terminal CPU  91 - 3  first executes the language identifying processing (step S 300 - 3 ), then executes conversation data download processing (step S 301   a - 3 ), then executes translating program download processing (step S 302   a - 3 ), then executes conversation processing (step S 303 - 3 ), then executes the betting period confirmation processing (step S 304 - 3 ), and then executes the bet acceptance processing (step S 305 - 3 ). 
     Since the language confirmation processing of step S 300 - 3 , the betting period confirmation processing of step S 304 - 3  and the bet acceptance processing of step S 305 - 3  are similar to those of the above-described fifth embodiment, their description is omitted. Hereinafter, the conversation data download processing of step S 301   a - 3  will be explained with reference to a flow chart shown in  FIG. 198 . 
     The terminal CPU  91 - 3  of the gaming terminal  4 - 3  sends a conversation data setting signal corresponding to the player&#39;s language (e.g., Japanese) to the server  13 - 3  via the network based on the player&#39;s language determined in the language confirmation processing (step S 71 - 3 ). 
     The server CPU  81 - 3  (see  FIG. 160 ) of the server  13 - 3  receives the conversation data setting signal transmitted from the gaming terminal  4 - 3  (step S 81 - 3 ) and then acquires the conversation data of the specified conversation database among conversation database corresponding to plural languages in the HDD  34 - 3  to send it to the gaming terminal  4 - 3  via the network (step S 82 - 3 ). 
     The gaming terminal  4 - 3  receives the conversation data (step S 72 - 3 ). Furthermore, the gaming terminal  4 - 3  downloads the received conversation data to the second external storage unit  76 - 3  (step S 73 - 3 ). 
     Next, the translating program download processing of step S 302   a - 3  in  FIG. 197  will be explained with reference to a flow chart shown in  FIG. 199 . 
     The terminal CPU  91 - 3  of the gaming terminal  4 - 3  sends a setting signal of the translating program between the player&#39;s language (e.g., Japanese) and the reference language (e.g., English) to the server  13 - 3  via the network based on the player&#39;s language determined in the language confirmation processing (step S 31 - 3 ). 
     The server CPU  81 - 3  (see  FIG. 160 ) of the server  13 - 3  receives the translating program setting signal transmitted from the gaming terminal  4 - 3  (step S 41 - 3 ) and reads out the specified translating program (e.g., a “Japanese-English” translating program) among plural translating programs in the HDD  34 - 3  to send it to the gaming terminal  4 - 3  via the network (step S 42 - 3 ). 
     The gaming terminal  4 - 3  receives the translating program (step S 32 - 3 ). Furthermore, the gaming terminal  4 - 3  downloads the received translating program to the second external storage unit  76 - 3  (step S 33 - 3 ). 
     In this manner, since the conversation data used in the conversation engine is downloaded to the second external storage unit  76 - 3 , a conversation with the player using this conversation data can be done. Furthermore, since the translating program to be used for notifying a message to a player is similarly downloaded to the second external storage unit  76 - 3 , the message to be notified to the player can be translated into the player&#39;s language to be displayed. 
     As described above, in the gaming system according to the sixth embodiment, the conversation data used in the conversation engine and the translating program used at the gaming terminal  4 - 3  are downloaded in the second external storage unit  76 - 3  and then utilized. According to this configuration, similarly to the above-described fifth embodiment, a player can hear a sound message output in his/her language and can play a game through an utterance(s) in his/her language. Furthermore, since a character image corresponding to the player&#39;s language is shown on the display  8 - 3 , someone except the player can understand the player&#39;s language intuitively. 
     Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described hereinabove, the embodiments are only showing specific examples, and do not particularly limit the present invention. Accordingly, the specific configuration of each means or the like can be modified in design appropriately. In addition, the effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are only listing the most preferable effects that can arise from the present invention. For this reason, the effects produced by the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. 
     For example, some of the foregoing embodiments have been described by taking the roulette game machine as one example. However, the present invention is also applicable to other gaming machines for games such as a bingo game and a slot game, for example. 
     In addition, in the foregoing detail description, the characteristic portions of the present invention have been mainly described in order to make the present invention easily understandable. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above in the foregoing detail description, and can be applied to other embodiments, and its applicable range is wide. Moreover, the terms and the terminology used in the present specification are used for the purpose of precisely explaining the present invention, and not used for the purpose of limiting interpretations of the present invention. Further, it should be easy for those skilled in the art to contemplate other configurations, systems, methods, etc., which are included in the concept of the present invention, from the concept of the present invention described in the present specification. For this reason, the description of the appended claims must be construed as containing equivalent configurations within a range of not departing from a range of the technical ideas of the present invention. Moreover, the abstract aims to allow the Patent Office, general public office, and engineers who are not familiar with a patent, legal terms and technical terms, and who pertain to the technical field of the present invention, to quickly judge the technical content and essence of the present application with a simple study. Accordingly, the abstract is not intended to limit the scope of the invention that should be assessed from the description of the appended claims. Furthermore, it is desirable that the present invention be interpreted by fully taking already-disclosed literatures and the like into consideration in order to fully understand the object of the present invention and unique effects of the present invention. 
     The forgoing detail descriptions include the processing executed by the computer. The above descriptions and expressions are described in order for those skilled in the art to understand the present invention in the most efficiently. In this specification, each step used for deriving one result should be understood as a processing without a self-contradiction. Moreover, in each step, a transmission, reception, storage, etc., of an electric or magnetic signal is performed. A bit, value, symbol, letter, term, number and the like are used to express such signals in the processing in each step, but it should be noted that these are simply used to make the explanation easy. In addition, the processing at each step is sometimes described in an expression in common with human activities, but the processings described in this specification are principally executed by various types of devices. Furthermore, another configuration required for executing each step is obvious from the foregoing descriptions.